R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Generator
User Manual
(;ÜVR2)
User Manual
1178.3834.02 ─ 03
This document describes the R&S®SMA100B, stock no. 1419.8888.02 and its options:
●
R&S®SMAB-B1H
●
R&S®SMAB-B29
●
R&S®SMAB-B32/-B34
●
R&S®SMAB-B80/-B85
●
R&S®SMAB-B81
●
R&S®SMAB-B86
●
R&S®SMAB-B92/-B93
●
R&S®SMAB-B103/-B106/-B112/-B120
●
R&S®SMAB-B710(N)/-B711(N)
●
R&S®SMAB-K22/-K23/-K24/-K27
●
R&S®SMAB-K31/-K33
●
R&S®SMAB-K703
●
R&S®SMAB-K704
●
R&S®SMAB-K720
●
R&S®SMAB-K722
This manual describes firmware version FW 4.15.080.xx and later of the R&S®SMA100B.
© 2017 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstr. 15, 81671 München, Germany
Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0
Fax: +49 89 41 29 12 164
Email: info@rohde-schwarz.com
Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com
Subject to change – Data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of their owners.
Throughout this manual, products from Rohde & Schwarz are indicated without the ® symbol , e.g. R&S®SMA100B is indicated as
R&S SMAB. Linux® is abbreviated as Linux.
Basic Safety Instructions
Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions!
All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety
standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our
products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed, built and tested in accordance with the
safety standards that apply in each case. Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by
our quality assurance system. The product described here has been designed, built and tested in
accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s plant in a condition fully
complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, you must
observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions regarding these
safety instructions, the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is designed
for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or, if expressly permitted, also in the field and must
not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the
product is used for any purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's
instructions. The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation
and within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using
the product requires technical skills and, in some cases, a basic knowledge of English. It is therefore
essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be
allowed to use the product. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this
will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation. Keep the basic safety instructions
and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users.
Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before and when using the product. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety, for example, that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation. In
these safety instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde &
Schwarz group of companies, including instruments, systems and all accessories. For product-specific
information, see the data sheet and the product documentation.
Safety labels on products
The following safety labels are used on products to warn against risks and dangers.
Symbol
Meaning
Notice, general danger location
Symbol
Meaning
ON/OFF Power
Observe product documentation
Caution when handling heavy equipment
Standby indication
Danger of electric shock
Direct current (DC)
1171.0000.42 - 09
Page 1
Basic Safety Instructions
Symbol
Meaning
Symbol
Meaning
Caution ! Hot surface
Alternating current (AC)
Protective conductor terminal
To identify any terminal which is intended for
connection to an external conductor for
protection against electric shock in case of a
fault, or the terminal of a protective earth
Direct/alternating current (DC/AC)
Earth (Ground)
Class II Equipment
to identify equipment meeting the safety
requirements specified for Class II equipment
(device protected by double or reinforced
insulation)
Frame or chassis Ground terminal
EU labeling for batteries and accumulators
For additional information, see section "Waste
disposal/Environmental protection", item 1.
Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive
devices
EU labeling for separate collection of electrical
and electronic devices
For additional information, see section "Waste
disposal/Environmental protection", item 2.
Warning! Laser radiation
For additional information, see section
"Operation", item 7.
Signal words and their meaning
The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks
and dangers.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
Indicates information considered important, but not hazard-related, e.g.
messages relating to property damage.
In the product documentation, the word ATTENTION is used synonymously.
These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European
Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic
areas or military applications. It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here
are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product. The
use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation
and in personal injury or material damage.
1171.0000.42 - 09
Page 2
Basic Safety Instructions
Operating states and operating positions
The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the
manufacturer, without the product's ventilation being obstructed. If the manufacturer's specifications are
not observed, this can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or death. Applicable local
or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work
performed.
1. Unless otherwise specified, the following requirements apply to Rohde & Schwarz products:
predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down, IP protection 2X, use only
indoors, max. operating altitude 2000 m above sea level, max. transport altitude 4500 m above sea
level. A tolerance of ±10 % shall apply to the nominal voltage and ±5 % to the nominal frequency,
overvoltage category 2, pollution degree 2.
2. Do not place the product on surfaces, vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability
are unsuitable for this purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when
installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures (e.g. walls and shelves). An installation
that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or
even death.
3. Do not place the product on heat-generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters. The ambient
temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in
the data sheet. Product overheating can cause electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or
even death.
Electrical safety
If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary, electric shock,
fire and/or serious personal injury or death may occur.
1. Prior to switching on the product, always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product
matches the nominal voltage of the mains-supply network. If a different voltage is to be set, the power
fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly.
2. In the case of products of safety class I with movable power cord and connector, operation is
permitted only on sockets with a protective conductor contact and protective conductor.
3. Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not
permitted. Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product. If extension cords
or connector strips are implemented, they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are
safe to use.
4. If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the mains, or if the power switch is not
suitable for this purpose, use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product from the
mains. In such cases, always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all
times. For example, if the power plug is the disconnecting device, the length of the connecting cable
must not exceed 3 m. Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection
from the AC supply network. If products without power switches are integrated into racks or systems,
the disconnecting device must be provided at the system level.
5. Never use the product if the power cable is damaged. Check the power cables on a regular basis to
ensure that they are in proper operating condition. By taking appropriate safety measures and
carefully laying the power cable, ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be
hurt by, for example, tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock.
1171.0000.42 - 09
Page 3
Basic Safety Instructions
6. The product may be operated only from TN/TT supply networks fuse-protected with max. 16 A (higher
fuse only after consulting with the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies).
7. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the
socket provided for this purpose. Otherwise, sparks that result in fire and/or injuries may occur.
8. Do not overload any sockets, extension cords or connector strips; doing so can cause fire or electric
shocks.
9. For measurements in circuits with voltages Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g. appropriate
measuring equipment, fuse protection, current limiting, electrical separation, insulation) should be
taken to avoid any hazards.
10. Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment, e.g. PCs or other industrial
computers, comply with the IEC 60950-1 / EN 60950-1 or IEC 61010-1 / EN 61010-1 standards that
apply in each case.
11. Unless expressly permitted, never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in
operation. Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries, fire or damage to the
product.
12. If a product is to be permanently installed, the connection between the protective conductor terminal
on site and the product's protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is
made. The product may be installed and connected only by a licensed electrician.
13. For permanently installed equipment without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or similar protective
devices, the supply circuit must be fuse-protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the
product, as well as the product itself, is adequately protected from injury or damage.
14. Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of
lightning) can reach the product. Otherwise, the person operating the product will be exposed to the
danger of an electric shock.
15. Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this
purpose. Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and/or electric shocks, fire or injuries.
16. Unless specified otherwise, products are not liquid-proof (see also section "Operating states and
operating positions", item 1). Therefore, the equipment must be protected against penetration by
liquids. If the necessary precautions are not taken, the user may suffer electric shock or the product
itself may be damaged, which can also lead to personal injury.
17. Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the
product, e.g. if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment. Penetration by water
increases the risk of electric shock.
18. Prior to cleaning the product, disconnect it completely from the power supply (e.g. AC supply network
or battery). Use a soft, non-linting cloth to clean the product. Never use chemical cleaning agents such
as alcohol, acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers.
Operation
1. Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration. Make sure that persons
who use the products are physically, mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so; otherwise, injuries
or material damage may occur. It is the responsibility of the employer/operator to select suitable
personnel for operating the products.
1171.0000.42 - 09
Page 4
Basic Safety Instructions
2. Before you move or transport the product, read and observe the section titled "Transport".
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction
(allergens) such as nickel cannot be generally excluded. If you develop an allergic reaction (such as a
skin rash, frequent sneezing, red eyes or respiratory difficulties) when using a Rohde & Schwarz
product, consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or
stress.
4. Before you start processing the product mechanically and/or thermally, or before you take it apart, be
sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled "Waste disposal/Environmental protection",
item 1.
5. Depending on the function, certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated
level of electromagnetic radiation. Considering that unborn babies require increased protection,
pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures. Persons with pacemakers may also be
exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation. The employer/operator must evaluate workplaces
where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and, if necessary, take measures to avert the
potential danger.
6. Should a fire occur, the product may release hazardous substances (gases, fluids, etc.) that can
cause health problems. Therefore, suitable measures must be taken, e.g. protective masks and
protective clothing must be worn.
7. Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class. Lasers
can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely
concentrated electromagnetic power. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is integrated into a
Rohde & Schwarz product, absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the
product documentation. The objective is to prevent personal injury (e.g. due to laser beams).
8. EMC classes (in line with EN 55011/CISPR 11, and analogously with EN 55022/CISPR 22,
EN 55032/CISPR 32)
 Class A equipment:
Equipment suitable for use in all environments except residential environments and environments
that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings
Note: Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment. This equipment may
cause radio disturbances in residential environments, due to possible conducted as well as
radiated disturbances. In this case, the operator may be required to take appropriate measures to
eliminate these disturbances.
 Class B equipment:
Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments that are directly
connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings
Repair and service
1. The product may be opened only by authorized, specially trained personnel. Before any work is
performed on the product or before the product is opened, it must be disconnected from the AC supply
network. Otherwise, personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock.
1171.0000.42 - 09
Page 5
Basic Safety Instructions
2. Adjustments, replacement of parts, maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical
experts authorized by Rohde & Schwarz. Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant
to safety (e.g. power switches, power transformers, fuses). A safety test must always be performed
after parts relevant to safety have been replaced (visual inspection, protective conductor test,
insulation resistance measurement, leakage current measurement, functional test). This helps ensure
the continued safety of the product.
Batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells
If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells is not observed either at all or to the
extent necessary, product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions, fire and/or serious personal
injury, and, in some cases, death. Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes (e.g.
lithium cells) must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard.
1. Cells must not be taken apart or crushed.
2. Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire. Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided.
Keep cells and batteries clean and dry. Clean soiled connectors using a dry, clean cloth.
3. Cells or batteries must not be short-circuited. Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a
drawer where they can short-circuit each other, or where they can be short-circuited by other
conductive materials. Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they
are ready to be used.
4. Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted.
5. If a cell develops a leak, the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes. If
contact occurs, wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid.
6. Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes (e.g. lithium cells)
can cause explosions. Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see
parts list) in order to ensure the safety of the product.
7. Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste. Rechargeable batteries
and normal batteries that contain lead, mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste. Observe the
national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling.
8. Follow the transport stipulations of the carrier (IATA-DGR, IMDG-Code, ADR, RID) when returning
lithium batteries to Rohde & Schwarz subsidiaries.
Transport
1. The product may be very heavy. Therefore, the product must be handled with care. In some cases,
the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product (e.g. with a lift-truck) to avoid
back or other physical injuries.
2. Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product. It is
therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as
cranes, fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the
means of transport or lifting. Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of
transport or lifting. Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage.
1171.0000.42 - 09
Page 6
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
3. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely
and properly. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions. Never use the
product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle. Adequately secure the
product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident.
Waste disposal/Environmental protection
1. Specially marked equipment has a battery or accumulator that must not be disposed of with unsorted
municipal waste, but must be collected separately. It may only be disposed of at a suitable collection
point or via a Rohde & Schwarz customer service center.
2. Waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste, but
must be collected separately.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG has developed a disposal concept and takes full responsibility for
take-back obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU. Contact your
Rohde & Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product.
3. If products or their components are mechanically and/or thermally processed in a manner that goes
beyond their intended use, hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust such as lead, beryllium, nickel)
may be released. For this reason, the product may only be disassembled by specially trained
personnel. Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health. National waste disposal
regulations must be observed.
4. If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special
way, e.g. coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly, the safety instructions of the
manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal
regulations must be observed. Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product
documentation. The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems
and lead to environmental damage.
For additional information about environmental protection, visit the Rohde & Schwarz website.
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
¡Es imprescindible leer y cumplir las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad!
El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al día
con los estándares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros
productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de
seguridad vigentes. Nuestro sistema de garantía de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas
estas normas. El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado según el certificado de conformidad
de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable según los estándares técnicos de seguridad.
Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros, el usuario deberá
atenerse a todas las indicaciones, informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta. El grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz está siempre a su disposición en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas
informaciones de seguridad.
1171.0000.42 - 09
Page 7
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto
está destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o, si ha sido expresamente
autorizado, para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna
persona/cosa pueda sufrir daño. El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las
instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna
forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto.
Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las
indicaciones de la correspondiente documentación del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento
definido (ver hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso del producto
hace necesarios conocimientos técnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma inglés. Por eso se debe tener
en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en
profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el
uso de productos de Rohde & Schwarz, encontraría la información debida en la documentación del
producto en el capítulo correspondiente. Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales, así
como la documentación del producto, y entréguelas a usuarios posteriores.
Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o daños por
peligros de toda clase. Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las
siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto, y respetarlas durante el uso del
producto. Deberán tenerse en cuenta todas las demás informaciones de seguridad, como p. ej. las
referentes a la protección de personas, que encontrarán en el capítulo correspondiente de la
documentación del producto y que también son de obligado cumplimiento. En las presentes
informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz bajo la denominación de "producto", entre ellos también aparatos, instalaciones así
como toda clase de accesorios. Los datos específicos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la
documentación del producto.
Señalización de seguridad de los productos
Las siguientes señales de seguridad se utilizan en los productos para advertir sobre riesgos y peligros.
Símbolo
Significado
Aviso: punto de peligro general
Observar la documentación del producto
Símbolo
Significado
Tensión de alimentación de PUESTA EN
MARCHA / PARADA
Atención en el manejo de dispositivos de peso
elevado
Indicación de estado de espera (standby)
Peligro de choque eléctrico
Corriente continua (DC)
Advertencia: superficie caliente
Corriente alterna (AC)
Conexión a conductor de protección
Corriente continua / Corriente alterna (DC/AC)
1171.0000.42 - 09
Page 8
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
Símbolo
Significado
Símbolo
Significado
Conexión a tierra
El aparato está protegido en su totalidad por un
aislamiento doble (reforzado)
Conexión a masa
Distintivo de la UE para baterías y
acumuladores
Más información en la sección
"Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente",
punto 1.
Aviso: Cuidado en el manejo de dispositivos
sensibles a la electrostática (ESD)
Distintivo de la UE para la eliminación por
separado de dispositivos eléctricos y
electrónicos
Más información en la sección
"Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente",
punto 2.
Advertencia: rayo láser
Más información en la sección
"Funcionamiento", punto 7.
Palabras de señal y su significado
En la documentación del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de señal con el fin de advertir contra
riesgos y peligros.
Indica una situación de peligro que, si no se evita, causa lesiones
graves o incluso la muerte.
Indica una situación de peligro que, si no se evita, puede causar
lesiones graves o incluso la muerte.
Indica una situación de peligro que, si no se evita, puede causar
lesiones leves o moderadas.
Indica información que se considera importante, pero no en relación
con situaciones de peligro; p. ej., avisos sobre posibles daños
materiales.
En la documentación del producto se emplea de forma sinónima el
término CUIDADO.
Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el área
económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición en otras áreas económicas o
en aplicaciones militares. Por eso se deberá tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas
sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinación con la correspondiente documentación del producto y
solamente en combinación con el producto correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal en
combinación con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones
equivocadas y tener por consecuencia daños en personas u objetos.
1171.0000.42 - 09
Page 9
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento
El producto solamente debe ser utilizado según lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados
operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se siguen las
indicaciones del fabricante, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con
posible consecuencia de muerte. En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en cuenta las normas
nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevención de accidentes.
1. Si no se convino de otra manera, es para los productos Rohde & Schwarz válido lo que sigue:
como posición de funcionamiento se define por principio la posición con el suelo de la caja para
abajo, modo de protección IP 2X, uso solamente en estancias interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m
sobre el nivel del mar, transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar. Se aplicará una tolerancia de
±10 % sobre el voltaje nominal y de ±5 % sobre la frecuencia nominal. Categoría de sobrecarga
eléctrica 2, índice de suciedad 2.
2. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies, vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus características
de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para él. Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalación del
fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras (p. ej. paredes y estantes). Si
se realiza la instalación de modo distinto al indicado en la documentación del producto, se pueden
causar lesiones o, en determinadas circunstancias, incluso la muerte.
3. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor (p. ej. radiadores o calefactores). La
temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura máxima especificada en la documentación del
producto o en la hoja de datos. En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto, pueden producirse
choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte.
Seguridad eléctrica
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad
eléctrica, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia
de muerte.
1. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deberá comprobar siempre que la tensión
preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentación eléctrica. Si es necesario
modificar el ajuste de tensión, también se deberán cambiar en caso dado los fusibles
correspondientes del producto.
2. Los productos de la clase de protección I con alimentación móvil y enchufe individual solamente
podrán enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protección
conectado.
3. Queda prohibida la interrupción intencionada del conductor de protección, tanto en la toma de
corriente como en el mismo producto. La interrupción puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de
que el producto sea fuente de choques eléctricos. Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de
enchufe, deberá garantizarse la realización de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su
estado técnico de seguridad.
4. Si el producto no está equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, o bien si el
interruptor existente no resulta apropiado para la desconexión de la red, el enchufe del cable de
conexión se deberá considerar como un dispositivo de desconexión.
El dispositivo de desconexión se debe poder alcanzar fácilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesible.
Si, p. ej., el enchufe de conexión a la red es el dispositivo de desconexión, la longitud del cable de
conexión no debe superar 3 m).
Los interruptores selectores o electrónicos no son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica. Si se
1171.0000.42 - 09
Page 10
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones, se deberá colocar el interruptor en el
nivel de la instalación.
5. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el cable de conexión a red. Compruebe regularmente el
correcto estado de los cables de conexión a red. Asegúrese, mediante las medidas de protección y
de instalación adecuadas, de que el cable de conexión a red no pueda ser dañado o de que nadie
pueda ser dañado por él, p. ej. al tropezar o por un choque eléctrico.
6. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentación TN/TT aseguradas con fusibles
de 16 A como máximo (utilización de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de
empresas Rohde & Schwarz).
7. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca el enchufe por
completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente. La no observación de estas medidas puede provocar
chispas, fuego y/o lesiones.
8. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto
podría causar fuego o choques eléctricos.
9. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensión U eff > 30 V se deberán tomar las medidas
apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro (p. ej. medios de medición adecuados, seguros, limitación
de tensión, corte protector, aislamiento etc.).
10. Para la conexión con dispositivos informáticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial, debe
comprobarse que éstos cumplan los estándares IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 o IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1
válidos en cada caso.
11. A menos que esté permitido expresamente, no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa
mientras el producto esté en servicio. Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes eléctricos y
puede causar lesiones, fuego o daños en el producto.
12. Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo, se deberá primero conectar el conductor de protección fijo
con el conductor de protección del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y
la conexión deberán ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado.
13. En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no estén provistos de fusibles, interruptor automático ni otros
mecanismos de seguridad similares, el circuito de alimentación debe estar protegido de modo que
todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto, así como el producto mismo, estén a salvo de
posibles daños.
14. Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensión (debida p. ej. a una caída del rayo) mediante
los correspondientes sistemas de protección. Si no, el personal que lo utilice quedará expuesto al
peligro de choque eléctrico.
15. No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ningún objeto que no esté destinado a ello.
Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y/o puede causar choques eléctricos, fuego o
lesiones.
16. Salvo indicación contraria, los productos no están impermeabilizados (ver también el capítulo
"Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento", punto 1). Por eso es necesario tomar las
medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de líquidos. En caso contrario, existe peligro de choque
eléctrico para el usuario o de daños en el producto, que también pueden redundar en peligro para las
personas.
1171.0000.42 - 09
Page 11
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
17. No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido
condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de éste, como p. ej. al desplazarlo de un lugar frío a
otro caliente. La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque eléctrico.
18. Antes de la limpieza, desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentación de tensión (p. ej. red de
alimentación o batería). Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un paño suave, que no se deshilache.
No utilice bajo ningún concepto productos de limpieza químicos como alcohol, acetona o diluyentes
para lacas nitrocelulósicas.
Funcionamiento
1. El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentración durante el manejo.
Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto estén a la altura de los requerimientos
necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se
pueden excluir lesiones o daños de objetos. El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar
el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto.
2. Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto, lea y tenga en cuenta el capítulo "Transporte".
3. Como con todo producto de fabricación industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad
de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados ―los llamados
alérgenos (p. ej. el níquel)―. Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde & Schwarz se producen
reacciones alérgicas, como p. ej. irritaciones cutáneas, estornudos continuos, enrojecimiento de la
conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias, debe avisarse inmediatamente a un médico para investigar las
causas y evitar cualquier molestia o daño a la salud.
4. Antes de la manipulación mecánica y/o térmica o el desmontaje del producto, debe tenerse en cuenta
imprescindiblemente el capítulo "Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente", punto 1.
5. Ciertos productos, como p. ej. las instalaciones de radiocomunicación RF, pueden a causa de su
función natural, emitir una radiación electromagnética aumentada. Deben tomarse todas las medidas
necesarias para la protección de las mujeres embarazadas. También las personas con marcapasos
pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiación electromagnética. El empresario/operador tiene la
obligación de evaluar y señalizar las áreas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de
exposición a radiaciones.
6. Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias tóxicas
(gases, líquidos etc.) que pueden generar daños a la salud. Por eso, en caso de incendio deben
usarse medidas adecuadas, como p. ej. máscaras antigás e indumentaria de protección.
7. Los productos con láser están provistos de indicaciones de advertencia normalizadas en función de la
clase de láser del que se trate. Los rayos láser pueden provocar daños de tipo biológico a causa de
las propiedades de su radiación y debido a su concentración extrema de potencia electromagnética.
En caso de que un producto Rohde & Schwarz contenga un producto láser (p. ej. un lector de
CD/DVD), no debe usarse ninguna otra configuración o función aparte de las descritas en la
documentación del producto, a fin de evitar lesiones (p. ej. debidas a irradiación láser).
8. Clases de compatibilidad electromagnética (conforme a EN 55011 / CISPR 11; y en analogía con EN
55022 / CISPR 22, EN 55032 / CISPR 32)
 Aparato de clase A:
Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los residenciales y en aquellos
conectados directamente a una red de distribución de baja tensión que suministra corriente a
edificios residenciales.
Nota: Los aparatos de clase A están destinados al uso en entornos industriales. Estos aparatos
1171.0000.42 - 09
Page 12
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

pueden causar perturbaciones radioeléctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles
perturbaciones guiadas o radiadas. En este caso, se le podrá solicitar al operador que tome las
medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones.
Aparato de clase B:
Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales, así como en aquellos conectados
directamente a una red de distribución de baja tensión que suministra corriente a edificios
residenciales.
Reparación y mantenimiento
1. El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorización para ello. Antes
de manipular el producto o abrirlo, es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensión de alimentación, para
evitar toda posibilidad de choque eléctrico.
2. El ajuste, el cambio de partes, el mantenimiento y la reparación deberán ser efectuadas solamente
por electricistas autorizados por Rohde & Schwarz. Si se reponen partes con importancia para los
aspectos de seguridad (p. ej. el enchufe, los transformadores o los fusibles), solamente podrán ser
sustituidos por partes originales. Después de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad
deberá realizarse un control de seguridad (control a primera vista, control del conductor de
protección, medición de resistencia de aislamiento, medición de la corriente de fuga, control de
funcionamiento). Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto.
Baterías y acumuladores o celdas
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones en cuanto a las baterías y
acumuladores o celdas, pueden producirse explosiones, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible
consecuencia de muerte. El manejo de baterías y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos (p. ej. celdas de
litio) debe seguir el estándar EN 62133.
1. No deben desmontarse, abrirse ni triturarse las celdas.
2. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a calor ni fuego. Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz
directa del sol. Las celdas y baterías deben mantenerse limpias y secas. Limpiar las conexiones
sucias con un paño seco y limpio.
3. Las celdas o baterías no deben cortocircuitarse. Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o baterías en
estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto recíproco o por contacto con
otros materiales conductores. No deben extraerse las celdas o baterías de sus embalajes originales
hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse.
4. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a impactos mecánicos fuertes indebidos.
5. En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda, el líquido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la
piel ni los ojos. Si se produce contacto, lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un
médico.
6. En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados, las celdas o baterías que contienen electrolitos alcalinos
(p. ej. las celdas de litio) pueden explotar. Para garantizar la seguridad del producto, las celdas o
baterías solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde & Schwarz correspondiente (ver lista de
recambios).
7. Las baterías y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura doméstica. Las baterías o
acumuladores que contienen plomo, mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales.
Respete en esta relación las normas nacionales de eliminación y reciclaje.
1171.0000.42 - 09
Page 13
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
8. En caso de devolver baterías de litio a las filiales de Rohde & Schwarz, debe cumplirse las
normativas sobre los modos de transporte (IATA-DGR, código IMDG, ADR, RID).
Transporte
1. El producto puede tener un peso elevado. Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con
precaución y, si es necesario, usando un sistema de elevación adecuado (p. ej. una carretilla
elevadora), a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros daños personales.
2. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por
personas. Por eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeción en o sobre medios de transporte
como p. ej. grúas, carretillas elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. Es responsabilidad suya fijar los
productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevación. Para evitar daños personales o
daños en el producto, siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o
elevación utilizado.
3. Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un vehículo, recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la
responsabilidad de conducir el vehículo de manera segura y adecuada. El fabricante no asumirá
ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones. No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un
vehículo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor. Asegure el producto dentro del vehículo
debidamente para evitar, en caso de un accidente, lesiones u otra clase de daños.
Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente
1. Los dispositivos marcados contienen una batería o un acumulador que no se debe desechar con los
residuos domésticos sin clasificar, sino que debe ser recogido por separado. La eliminación se debe
efectuar exclusivamente a través de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atención al
cliente de Rohde & Schwarz.
2. Los dispositivos eléctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos domésticos sin clasificar,
sino que deben ser recogidos por separado.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co.KG ha elaborado un concepto de eliminación de residuos y asume
plenamente los deberes de recogida y eliminación para los fabricantes dentro de la UE. Para
desechar el producto de manera respetuosa con el medio ambiente, diríjase a su servicio de atención
al cliente de Rohde & Schwarz.
3. Si se trabaja de manera mecánica y/o térmica cualquier producto o componente más allá del
funcionamiento previsto, pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas (polvos con contenido de metales
pesados como p. ej. plomo, berilio o níquel). Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por
personal especializado con formación adecuada. Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar daños
para la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminación de
residuos.
4. En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que
deban tratarse como residuos especiales (p. ej. refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de
cambio definidos), deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas
sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminación de residuos. Tenga en cuenta también en caso
necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentación del producto. La
eliminación incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar daños a la salud o
daños al medio ambiente.
Se puede encontrar más información sobre la protección del medio ambiente en la página web de
Rohde & Schwarz.
1171.0000.42 - 09
Page 14
Customer Support
Technical support – where and when you need it
For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support
Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a
solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz
equipment.
Up-to-date information and upgrades
To keep your instrument up-to-date and to be informed about new application notes related to your
instrument, please send an e-mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish.
We will take care that you will get the right information.
Europe, Africa, Middle East
Phone +49 89 4129 12345
customersupport@rohde-schwarz.com
North America
Phone 1-888-TEST-RSA (1-888-837-8772)
customer.support@rsa.rohde-schwarz.com
Latin America
Phone +1-410-910-7988
customersupport.la@rohde-schwarz.com
Asia/Pacific
Phone +65 65 13 04 88
customersupport.asia@rohde-schwarz.com
China
Phone +86-800-810-8228 /
+86-400-650-5896
customersupport.china@rohde-schwarz.com
1171.0200.22-06.00
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
Contents
1 Preface.................................................................................................. 15
1.1
Key Features................................................................................................................15
1.2
For Your Safety........................................................................................................... 15
1.3
About this Manual....................................................................................................... 16
1.4
Documentation Overview........................................................................................... 17
1.4.1
Getting Started Manual................................................................................................. 17
1.4.2
User Manuals and Help.................................................................................................17
1.4.3
Service Manual............................................................................................................. 17
1.4.4
Instrument Security Procedures....................................................................................18
1.4.5
Basic Safety Instructions...............................................................................................18
1.4.6
Data Sheets and Brochures.......................................................................................... 18
1.4.7
Release Notes and Open Source Acknowledgment (OSA).......................................... 18
1.4.8
Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, etc..............................................18
2 Getting Started..................................................................................... 19
2.1
Preparing for Use........................................................................................................ 19
2.1.1
Putting into Operation................................................................................................... 19
2.1.1.1
EMI Suppression...........................................................................................................20
2.1.1.2
Unpacking and Checking the Instrument...................................................................... 20
2.1.1.3
Accessory List............................................................................................................... 21
2.1.1.4
Placing or Mounting the Instrument.............................................................................. 21
2.1.1.5
Connecting AC Power...................................................................................................22
2.1.1.6
Turning the Instrument On and Off............................................................................... 23
2.1.1.7
Functional Check.......................................................................................................... 24
2.1.1.8
Checking the Supplied Options and Licenses...............................................................25
2.1.2
Connecting USB Devices..............................................................................................25
2.1.3
Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection.......................................................................26
2.1.3.1
Connecting the Instrument to the Network....................................................................26
2.1.3.2
Using Computer Names (Hostnames).......................................................................... 27
2.1.3.3
Assigning the IP Address.............................................................................................. 28
2.1.4
Configuring the Initial Instrument Settings.................................................................... 29
2.1.4.1
Setting the Date and Time............................................................................................ 30
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
3
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
2.1.4.2
Setting the Keyboard Language....................................................................................31
2.1.4.3
Setting the Screen Saver.............................................................................................. 31
2.2
Instrument Tour...........................................................................................................32
2.2.1
Front Panel Tour........................................................................................................... 32
2.2.1.1
Touchscreen................................................................................................................. 34
2.2.1.2
Utility Keys.................................................................................................................... 34
2.2.1.3
ON/STANDBY...............................................................................................................35
2.2.1.4
Function Keys............................................................................................................... 35
2.2.1.5
Keypad.......................................................................................................................... 35
2.2.1.6
Navigation Controls.......................................................................................................36
Rotary Knob.................................................................................................................. 36
Editing Keys.................................................................................................................. 36
Navigation Keys............................................................................................................ 37
2.2.1.7
Display Keys................................................................................................................. 37
2.2.1.8
USB Connector............................................................................................................. 37
2.2.1.9
SD card slot...................................................................................................................38
2.2.1.10
SENSOR....................................................................................................................... 38
2.2.1.11
RF 50 Ω.........................................................................................................................38
2.2.1.12
Pulse Signal Connectors...............................................................................................39
2.2.1.13
LF Modulation Connectors............................................................................................ 39
2.2.1.14
Clock Synthesizer Connectors...................................................................................... 40
2.2.2
Rear Panel Tour............................................................................................................40
2.2.2.1
Connectors....................................................................................................................41
2.3
Trying Out the Instrument.......................................................................................... 43
2.3.1
Generating an Unmodulated Carrier............................................................................. 44
2.3.2
Generating an RF Frequency Sweep Signal.................................................................46
2.3.3
Saving and Recalling Settings...................................................................................... 48
2.4
Instrument Control......................................................................................................51
2.4.1
Possible Ways to Operate the Instrument.....................................................................52
2.4.2
Means of Manual Interaction.........................................................................................52
2.4.3
Understanding the Display Information......................................................................... 53
2.4.3.1
Status Bar..................................................................................................................... 53
2.4.3.2
Tile Diagram..................................................................................................................53
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
4
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
2.4.3.3
Taskbar......................................................................................................................... 54
2.4.3.4
Additional Display Characteristics.................................................................................55
2.4.4
Accessing the Functionality...........................................................................................56
2.4.5
Entering Data................................................................................................................ 57
2.4.5.1
Entering Numeric Parameters.......................................................................................58
2.4.5.2
Entering Alphanumeric Parameters.............................................................................. 58
2.4.5.3
Undo and Redo Actions................................................................................................ 58
2.4.6
Getting Information and Help........................................................................................ 59
2.4.7
Remote Control............................................................................................................. 60
2.4.8
Remote Operation over VNC........................................................................................ 61
3 RF Signal Configuration...................................................................... 62
3.1
Activating RF Signal Output...................................................................................... 63
3.2
How to Set the Frequency and Level........................................................................ 63
3.3
RF Frequency Settings............................................................................................... 65
3.4
RF Level Settings........................................................................................................ 67
3.5
RF Phase Settings.......................................................................................................72
4 Analog Modulations.............................................................................74
4.1
Required Options........................................................................................................ 74
4.2
Modulation Types and Signal Sources..................................................................... 74
4.3
Activating Analog Modulations................................................................................. 76
4.4
Modulation Settings....................................................................................................76
4.4.1
Pulse Modulation...........................................................................................................77
4.4.2
FM, PhiM and FM Modulation Settings......................................................................... 78
4.4.3
Pulse Generator............................................................................................................ 82
4.4.3.1
Pulse Generator > General Settings............................................................................. 83
4.4.3.2
Pulse Generator > Pulse Train Settings........................................................................87
4.4.3.3
Import/Export List Files................................................................................................. 91
4.4.4
Pulse Graph.................................................................................................................. 94
4.4.5
Pulse External/Trigger Settings.....................................................................................95
4.4.6
FM, AM and PhiM Modulation Sources.........................................................................96
4.4.6.1
Source > LF Generator Settings................................................................................... 96
4.4.6.2
Source > External Settings..........................................................................................100
4.4.6.3
Source > Noise Generator Settings............................................................................ 101
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
5
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
4.4.7
LF Signal Output Settings........................................................................................... 102
4.4.8
Overview..................................................................................................................... 104
4.5
How to Generate an Amplitude Modulated Signal................................................. 105
4.6
How to Generate a Pulse Modulated Signal........................................................... 106
4.7
How to Generate a Pulse Train Modulated Signal................................................. 107
4.8
References.................................................................................................................108
4.8.1
Simultaneous Operation of Several Modulations........................................................ 108
5 Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode................................. 109
5.1
Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes......................... 110
5.2
About Sweep Mode................................................................................................... 118
5.2.1
Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode..................................................................... 118
5.3
About List Mode........................................................................................................ 120
5.4
Significant Parameters and Functions....................................................................121
5.5
Sweep Mode Settings............................................................................................... 123
5.5.1
General Sweep Settings............................................................................................. 123
5.5.2
Frequency Range Settings..........................................................................................128
5.5.3
Level Range Settings.................................................................................................. 130
5.6
List Mode Settings.................................................................................................... 131
5.6.1
General Settings......................................................................................................... 132
5.6.2
List Mode Data Settings.............................................................................................. 134
5.6.3
Import/Export Settings.................................................................................................135
5.7
List Editor.................................................................................................................. 138
5.8
How to Generate a Signal in List or Sweep Mode..................................................140
6 Improving Level Performance...........................................................143
6.1
Attenuator.................................................................................................................. 143
6.1.1
Attenuator Settings......................................................................................................144
6.1.2
Reverse Power Protection.......................................................................................... 145
6.2
ALC - Automatic Level Control................................................................................ 146
6.2.1
ALC Settings............................................................................................................... 147
6.3
User Correction......................................................................................................... 148
6.3.1
User Correction Settings............................................................................................. 149
6.3.2
List Editor.................................................................................................................... 151
6.3.3
Fill with Sensor............................................................................................................154
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
6
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
6.3.4
Import/Export List Files............................................................................................... 155
6.4
Using Power Sensors............................................................................................... 158
6.4.1
Connecting R&S NRP Power Sensors to the R&S SMA100B.................................... 158
6.4.2
NRP Sensor Mapping................................................................................................. 159
6.4.3
NRP Power Viewer..................................................................................................... 161
6.4.3.1
About...........................................................................................................................161
6.4.3.2
NRP Power Viewer Settings....................................................................................... 163
6.4.4
NRP Info Update......................................................................................................... 168
6.4.5
How to Update the Sensor Firmware.......................................................................... 170
6.5
How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP Power Sensor.................... 171
7 Reference Oscillator.......................................................................... 175
7.1
Required Options...................................................................................................... 175
7.2
Using the Reference Frequency for Instruments Synchronization...................... 175
7.3
Reference Frequency Settings................................................................................ 178
7.4
Reference Output Settings.......................................................................................182
7.5
Adjustments Settings............................................................................................... 183
8 Clock Synthesis................................................................................. 184
9 File and Data Management................................................................188
9.1
About the File System.............................................................................................. 188
9.2
Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration................................................. 191
9.2.1
Preset, Set to Default and Factory Preset Settings.....................................................193
9.2.2
How to Identify Parameters Which Are Not in a Preset State..................................... 194
9.2.3
How to Recall User Settings Automatically after Preset............................................. 194
9.2.4
Reference....................................................................................................................195
9.3
Protecting Data..........................................................................................................196
9.4
Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings............................................................. 197
9.4.1
Save/Recall Settings................................................................................................... 197
9.4.2
How to Save and Recall Instrument Settings..............................................................200
9.5
Accessing Files with User Data............................................................................... 201
9.5.1
File Select Settings..................................................................................................... 201
9.6
Exporting Remote Command Lists......................................................................... 203
9.7
Loading, Importing and Exporting Lists................................................................. 204
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
7
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
9.8
Using the File Manager.............................................................................................204
9.8.1
File Manager Settings................................................................................................. 205
9.8.2
How to Display All Saved Files................................................................................... 206
9.9
How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument................................................. 207
9.9.1
Removing File System Protection............................................................................... 207
9.9.2
Accessing the File System of the R&S SMA100B via ftp............................................208
9.9.3
Accessing the R&S SMA100B File System via SMB (Samba)................................... 210
9.9.4
Using a USB Storage Device for File Transfer............................................................211
9.10
Creating Screenshots of Current Settings............................................................. 212
9.10.1
Hard Copy Settings..................................................................................................... 212
9.10.2
How to Store a Hardcopy of the Display..................................................................... 216
10 General Instrument Functions.......................................................... 218
10.1
Customizing the User Interface............................................................................... 218
10.1.1
Display and Keyboard Settings................................................................................... 219
10.1.2
Display Update Settings..............................................................................................220
10.1.3
Defining the RF Signal State On Power On ............................................................... 221
10.2
Organizing Frequently Used Items as Favorites....................................................222
10.2.1
Using the User Menu for Fast Adjustments................................................................ 223
10.2.2
Define User Key Actions Settings............................................................................... 225
10.2.3
Assigning Actions to the User Key.............................................................................. 226
10.3
Managing Licenses and License Keys....................................................................228
10.3.1
Manage License Keys Settings...................................................................................228
10.3.2
How to Move a Portable License................................................................................ 230
10.4
Managing the Security Settings...............................................................................232
10.4.1
Protection Level Settings............................................................................................ 233
10.4.2
Setting Security Parameters....................................................................................... 234
10.4.3
Configuring LAN Services........................................................................................... 238
10.4.4
Password Management.............................................................................................. 239
10.5
Undoing or Restoring Actions................................................................................. 242
10.6
Shutting Down and Rebooting the Instrument.......................................................243
11 Network Operation and Remote Control..........................................244
11.1
Overview of Remote Access Modes........................................................................244
11.2
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols.............................................................. 246
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
8
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
11.2.1
LAN Interface.............................................................................................................. 247
11.2.1.1
VISA Resource Strings............................................................................................... 247
11.2.1.2
HiSLIP Protocol...........................................................................................................249
11.2.1.3
VXI-11 Protocol........................................................................................................... 249
11.2.1.4
Socket Communication............................................................................................... 249
11.2.2
USB Interface..............................................................................................................250
11.2.2.1
USB Resource String.................................................................................................. 250
11.2.3
GPIB Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)....................................................................250
11.2.4
LXI Browser Interface..................................................................................................251
11.3
Remote Control Programs and Libraries................................................................252
11.3.1
VISA Library................................................................................................................ 252
11.3.2
Possible Setups and Access Functions...................................................................... 253
11.4
Remote Access Settings.......................................................................................... 255
11.4.1
Network Settings......................................................................................................... 256
11.4.2
VISA Resource Strings............................................................................................... 259
11.4.3
GPIB Address Settings............................................................................................... 260
11.4.4
RS232 Settings........................................................................................................... 260
11.4.5
Instrument Emulations Settings.................................................................................. 261
11.4.6
Active Connections Settings....................................................................................... 263
11.4.7
QR Code..................................................................................................................... 264
11.5
LXI Settings............................................................................................................... 265
11.5.1
LXI Status Settings......................................................................................................265
11.5.2
LXI Browser Settings...................................................................................................266
11.5.2.1
LAN Configuration.......................................................................................................267
IP Configuration.......................................................................................................... 267
Advanced Config.........................................................................................................268
Ping Client...................................................................................................................269
SCPI Remote Trace.................................................................................................... 270
Data Sheet.................................................................................................................. 271
11.6
How to Find the VISA Resource String................................................................... 272
11.7
How to Change the GPIB Instrument Address.......................................................273
11.8
How to Set Up a Remote Control Connection........................................................ 273
11.8.1
Establishing a Remote Control Connection over the LXI Browser Interface...............274
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
9
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
11.8.2
Establishing a Remote Control Connection over LAN Using VXI-11 Protocol............ 275
11.8.3
Setting Up a Remote Control Connection over LAN Using Socket Communication...280
11.8.4
Setting Up a Remote Control Connection over GPIB................................................. 281
11.8.5
Setting Up a Remote Control Connection over USB...................................................282
11.9
Tracing SCPI Commands and Messages Exchanged via the LXI Web Browser
Interface..................................................................................................................... 283
11.10
How to Return to Manual Operation........................................................................283
11.11
Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts............................................... 284
11.11.1
Show SCPI Command................................................................................................ 287
11.11.2
Displaying an SCPI List...............................................................................................287
11.11.3
SCPI Recording Export Settings................................................................................. 288
11.12
How to Find Out the SCPI Command Corresponding to the Manual Operation via
"Show SCPI Command"........................................................................................... 290
11.13
How to Find Out the SCPI Command Corresponding to the Manual Operation
Using the Online Help...............................................................................................290
11.14
How to Record / Create SCPI Lists..........................................................................291
11.15
How to Convert and Save SCPI Lists...................................................................... 294
11.16
How to Set Up Remote Operation via VNC............................................................. 295
11.16.1
Setting Up a Remote Operation from a Desktop System............................................295
11.16.1.1
Using a Web Browser................................................................................................. 295
11.16.1.2
Using a VNC Client Software...................................................................................... 296
11.16.2
Setting Up a Remote Operation from a Smart Device................................................ 298
11.16.2.1
Using a VNC App........................................................................................................ 299
11.16.2.2
Using a Web Browser with HTML5............................................................................. 299
11.16.2.3
Special Mode QR Code ............................................................................................. 300
11.17
References.................................................................................................................301
11.17.1
LXI Functionality..........................................................................................................301
11.17.2
Code Generator Templates.........................................................................................301
11.17.3
Remote Control States ...............................................................................................303
12 Remote Control Commands..............................................................305
12.1
Conventions used in SCPI Command Descriptions.............................................. 305
12.2
Programming Examples........................................................................................... 306
12.3
Common Commands................................................................................................ 306
12.4
Preset Commands.....................................................................................................311
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
10
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
12.5
MMEMory Subsystem............................................................................................... 312
12.5.1
File Naming Conventions............................................................................................ 313
12.5.2
Accessing Files in the Default or in a Specified Directory...........................................314
12.5.3
Programming Examples..............................................................................................315
12.5.4
Remote Control Commands........................................................................................317
12.6
CALibration Subsystem........................................................................................... 322
12.7
CSYNthesis Subsystem............................................................................................328
12.8
DIAGnostic Subsystem............................................................................................ 333
12.9
DISPlay Subsystem...................................................................................................335
12.10
FORMat Subsystem.................................................................................................. 340
12.11
HCOPy Subsystem....................................................................................................341
12.11.1
Programming Examples..............................................................................................342
12.11.2
Hard Copy Settings..................................................................................................... 343
12.11.3
Automatic Naming.......................................................................................................344
12.12
KBOard Subsystem.................................................................................................. 347
12.13
OUTPut Subsystem...................................................................................................347
12.14
SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems..................................................... 351
12.15
SOURce Subsystem..................................................................................................364
12.15.1
Analog Modulation Subsystems..................................................................................365
12.15.1.1
SOURce:MODulation Subsystem............................................................................... 365
12.15.1.2
SOURce:AM Subsystem.............................................................................................366
12.15.1.3
SOURce:FM Subsystem............................................................................................. 369
12.15.1.4
SOURce:PM Subsystem.............................................................................................373
12.15.1.5
SOURce:PULM Subsystem........................................................................................ 377
Pulse Modulation Settings...........................................................................................377
Pulse Train Settings.................................................................................................... 382
Pulse Train Data Exchange........................................................................................ 385
12.15.2
SOURce:CORRection Subsystem.............................................................................. 388
12.15.2.1
Correction Settings......................................................................................................390
12.15.2.2
Correction Data Exchange.......................................................................................... 393
12.15.3
SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem...............................................................................395
12.15.4
SOURce:INPut Subsystem......................................................................................... 402
12.15.5
SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem................................................................................... 403
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
11
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
12.15.5.1
LF Generator Settings.................................................................................................405
12.15.5.2
LF Sweep Settings...................................................................................................... 413
12.15.6
SOURce:LIST Subsystem...........................................................................................416
12.15.6.1
List Mode Settings.......................................................................................................419
12.15.6.2
List Mode File Operation............................................................................................. 425
12.15.6.3
List Mode Data Exchange........................................................................................... 427
12.15.7
SOURce:NOISe Subsystem....................................................................................... 429
12.15.8
SOURce:PGEN Subsystem........................................................................................ 431
12.15.9
SOURce:PHASe Subsystem...................................................................................... 432
12.15.10
SOURce:POWer Subsystem...................................................................................... 433
12.15.11
SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem............................................................................... 442
12.15.12
SOURce:SWEep Subsystem...................................................................................... 447
12.16
SYSTem Subsystem................................................................................................. 455
12.17
STATus Subsystem.................................................................................................. 478
12.18
TEST Subsystem.......................................................................................................482
12.19
TRIGger Subsystem..................................................................................................483
12.20
UNIT Subsystem........................................................................................................485
13 Maintenance....................................................................................... 487
13.1
Cleaning..................................................................................................................... 487
13.2
Storing and Packing................................................................................................. 488
13.3
Performing Maintenance Tasks............................................................................... 489
13.3.1
Date and Time Settings...............................................................................................490
13.3.2
Check Front Panel...................................................................................................... 491
13.3.2.1
Check Front Panel Settings........................................................................................ 491
13.3.2.2
How to Perform the Front Panel Tests........................................................................492
13.3.3
Internal Adjustment Settings....................................................................................... 494
13.3.4
FPGA/uC Update Settings.......................................................................................... 496
13.3.5
Requesting Instrument Configuration and Specifications........................................... 497
13.3.5.1
Hardware Configuration Settings................................................................................ 497
13.3.5.2
Versions/Options Settings...........................................................................................499
14 Troubleshooting and Error Messages............................................. 501
14.1
Error Messages......................................................................................................... 501
14.1.1
Volatile Messages....................................................................................................... 501
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
12
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
14.1.2
Permanent Messages................................................................................................. 501
14.2
SCPI-Error Messages................................................................................................502
14.3
Device-Specific Error Messages..............................................................................502
14.4
Querying Error Messages & Info Key......................................................................503
14.5
Resolving Network Connection Failures................................................................ 505
14.6
Collecting Information for Technical Support........................................................ 506
Annex.................................................................................................. 508
A Reference Information for Remote Control..................................... 508
A.1
Additional Basics on Remote Control.....................................................................508
A.1.1
Messages....................................................................................................................508
A.1.2
LAN Interface Messages.............................................................................................509
A.1.3
SCPI Command Structure...........................................................................................509
A.1.3.1
Syntax for Common Commands................................................................................. 510
A.1.3.2
Syntax for Device-Specific Commands.......................................................................510
Long and short form.................................................................................................... 511
Numeric Suffixes......................................................................................................... 511
Optional Mnemonics................................................................................................... 511
A.1.3.3
SCPI Parameters........................................................................................................ 512
Numeric Values...........................................................................................................512
Special Numeric Values.............................................................................................. 513
Boolean Parameters................................................................................................... 513
Text Parameters..........................................................................................................514
Character Strings........................................................................................................ 514
Block Data...................................................................................................................514
A.1.3.4
Overview of Syntax Elements..................................................................................... 514
A.1.3.5
Structure of a Command Line..................................................................................... 516
A.1.3.6
Responses to Queries.................................................................................................516
A.1.4
Command Sequence and Synchronization.................................................................517
A.1.4.1
Preventing Overlapping Execution..............................................................................517
A.1.4.2
Examples to Command Sequence and Synchronization............................................ 519
A.1.5
Status Reporting System............................................................................................ 520
A.1.5.1
Hierarchy of the Status Registers............................................................................... 521
A.1.5.2
Structure of a SCPI Status Register............................................................................522
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
13
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
A.1.5.3
Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)................................524
A.1.5.4
Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE)..................... 525
A.1.5.5
Questionable Status Register (STATus:QUEStionable)............................................. 526
A.1.5.6
Operation Status Register (STATus:OPERation)....................................................... 526
A.1.5.7
Application of the Status Reporting System................................................................526
Service Request..........................................................................................................527
Serial Poll.................................................................................................................... 527
Query of an instrument status..................................................................................... 527
Error Queue................................................................................................................ 528
A.1.5.8
Reset Values of the Status Reporting System............................................................ 528
A.1.6
General Programming Recommendations..................................................................529
A.2
Telnet program examples.........................................................................................529
B Hardware Interfaces...........................................................................535
B.1
GPIB-Bus Interface................................................................................................... 535
C Extensions for User Files.................................................................. 537
Glossary: List of the Often Used Terms and Abbreviations.......... 538
List of Commands..............................................................................542
Index....................................................................................................552
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
14
R&S®SMA100B
Preface
For Your Safety
1 Preface
The R&S SMA100B is a new high-performance signal generator developed to meet
demanding customer requirements. Offering excellent signal characteristic and
straightforward and intuitive operation, the signal generator makes signal generation
fast and easy.
1.1 Key Features
Outstanding key features of the R&S SMA100B are:
●
Frequency range from 8 kHz to up to 20 GHz
●
Excellent signal quality
●
Excellent single sideband (SSB) phase noise
●
Nearly no wideband noise
●
Very high output power
●
Low harmonics
●
Unique pulse train generation
●
High-stability reference oscillator
●
Intuitive operation via touchscreen with the tile diagram as key element
For more information, see data sheet.
1.2 For Your Safety
The R&S SMA100B is designated for the development, production and verification of
electronic components and devices in industrial and laboratory environments. Use the
R&S SMA100B only for its designated purpose. Observe the operating conditions and
performance limits stated in the data sheet.
The product documentation helps you to use the R&S SMA100B safely and efficiently.
Keep the product documentation in a safe place and pass it on to the subsequent
users.
Safety information is part of the product documentation. It warns you about the potential dangers and gives instructions how to prevent personal injury or damage caused
by dangerous situations. Safety information is provided as follows:
●
In the "Basic Safety Instructions", safety issues are grouped according to subjects.
For example, one subject is electrical safety. The "Basic Safety Instructions" are
delivered with the R&S SMA100B in different languages in print.
●
Throughout the documentation, safety instructions are provided when you need to
take care during setup or operation. Always read the safety instructions carefully.
Make sure to comply fully with them. Do not take risks and do not underestimate
the potential danger of small details such as a damaged power cable.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
15
R&S®SMA100B
Preface
About this Manual
1.3 About this Manual
This user manual describes general instrument functions, the manual operation of the
instrument and remote control.
The main focus of this manual is on the signal generation capabilities of the instrument
and the tasks required to achieve them. The following topics are included:
●
Welcome to the R&S SMA100B
Introduction to and getting familiar with the instrument, including introduction to the
signal generation principles.
●
Getting Started
Information that you have received as a printed book together with your instrument
●
Configuration of the RF Signal
Descriptions of the individual operation modes, including configuration settings and
task descriptions
●
File and Data Management
Description of general functions to handle data files and work with the file system
of the instrument
●
System and General Instrument Configuration
Description of the general instrument settings and functions
●
Network and Remote Control Operation
Information on setting up the instrument in a network and operating it remotely.
●
Remote Commands
Remote commands required to configure and perform measurements in a remote
environment, sorted by tasks.
Remote commands required to set up the environment and to perform common
tasks on the instrument, sorted by tasks.
Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually
be executed directly for test purposes.
●
Maintenance
Information on tasks required to maintain the operability of the instrument
●
Troubleshooting and Error Messages
Hints and tips on how to handle errors
●
Appendix
Extensive reference information on remote control, hardware interfaces, etc.
●
Glossary
List of often used terms and abbreviations
●
List of Commands
Alphabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual
●
Index
Contents and scope
This help system describes the full functionality of an R&S SMA100B. Depending on
your model and the installed options, some of the functions may not be available on
your instrument.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
16
R&S®SMA100B
Preface
Documentation Overview
Notes on screenshots
When describing the functions of the product, we use sample screenshots. These
screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and
possible interdependencies between parameters. The shown values may not represent
realistic usage scenarios.
The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product, that is: with all options installed. Thus, some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your particular product configuration.
1.4 Documentation Overview
This section provides an overview of the R&S SMA100B user documentation. Unless
specified otherwise, you find the documents on the R&S SMA100B product page at:
www.rohde-schwarz.com/manual/sma100b
1.4.1 Getting Started Manual
Introduces the R&S SMA100B and describes how to set up and start working with the
product. Includes basic operations, typical measurement examples, and general information, e.g. safety instructions, etc. A printed version is delivered with the instrument.
1.4.2 User Manuals and Help
Contains the description of all instrument modes and functions. It also provides an
introduction to remote control, a complete description of the remote control commands
with programming examples, and information on maintenance, instrument interfaces
and error messages. Includes the contents of the getting started manual.
The contents of the user manuals are available as help in the R&S SMA100B. The
help offers quick, context-sensitive access to the complete information.
All user manuals are also available for download or for immediate display on the Internet.
1.4.3 Service Manual
Describes the performance test for checking the rated specifications, module replacement and repair, firmware update, troubleshooting and fault elimination, and contains
mechanical drawings and spare part lists.
The service manual is available for registered users on the global Rohde & Schwarz
information system (GLORIS, https://gloris.rohde-schwarz.com).
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
17
R&S®SMA100B
Preface
Documentation Overview
1.4.4 Instrument Security Procedures
Deals with security issues when working with the R&S SMA100B in secure areas. It is
available for download on the Internet.
1.4.5 Basic Safety Instructions
Contains safety instructions, operating conditions and further important information.
The printed document is delivered with the instrument.
1.4.6 Data Sheets and Brochures
The data sheet contains the technical specifications of the R&S SMA100B. It also lists
the options and their order numbers and optional accessories.
The brochure provides an overview of the instrument and deals with the specific characteristics.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/brochure-datasheet/sma100b
1.4.7 Release Notes and Open Source Acknowledgment (OSA)
The release notes list new features, improvements and known issues of the current
firmware version, and describe the firmware installation.
The open source acknowledgment document provides verbatim license texts of the
used open source software.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/firmware/sma100b
1.4.8 Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, etc.
These documents deal with special applications or background information on particular topics.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/application/sma100b
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
18
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
2 Getting Started
This section contains the information you have received as a printed book together
with your instrument. The information is provided again to enable you to search
throughout the complete description. If you are already familiar with the described topics, consider the provided information as not relevant.
2.1 Preparing for Use
●
●
●
●
Putting into Operation............................................................................................. 19
Connecting USB Devices........................................................................................25
Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection.................................................................26
Configuring the Initial Instrument Settings.............................................................. 29
2.1.1 Putting into Operation
This section describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the R&S SMA100B
for the first time.
Risk of injury due to disregarding safety information
Observe the information on appropriate operating conditions provided in the data sheet
to prevent personal injury or damage to the instrument. Read and observe the basic
safety instructions provided with the instrument, in addition to the safety instructions in
the following sections. In particular:
●
Do not open the instrument casing.
Risk of instrument damage due to inappropriate operating conditions
Specific operating conditions are required to ensure accurate measurements and to
avoid damage to the instrument. Observe the information on appropriate operating
conditions provided in the basic safety instructions and the instrument's data sheet.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
19
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
Instrument damage caused by electrostatic discharge
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage the electronic components of the instrument
and the device under test (DUT). Electrostatic discharge is most likely to occur when
you connect or disconnect a DUT or test fixture to the instrument's test ports. To prevent electrostatic discharge, use a wrist strap and cord and connect yourself to the
ground, or use a conductive floor mat and heel strap combination.
Risk of instrument damage due to inappropriate operating conditions
An unsuitable operating site or test setup can damage the instrument and connected
devices. Before switching on the instrument, observe the information on appropriate
operating conditions provided in the data sheet. In particular, ensure the following:
2.1.1.1
●
All fan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded. The
minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm.
●
The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation.
●
The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections.
●
The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet.
●
Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges.
●
Signal outputs are connected correctly and are not overloaded.
EMI Suppression
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) may affect the measurement results.
To suppress generated Electromagnetic Interference (EMI),
2.1.1.2
●
Use suitable shielded cables of high quality. For example use double-shielded RF
and LAN cables.
Note: USB cables are of varying and often poor quality. Therefore, check the quality of each individual USB cable as described in the service manual.
●
Always terminate open cable ends.
●
Note the EMC classification in the data sheet
Unpacking and Checking the Instrument
Unpack the R&S SMA100B carefully and check the contents of the package.
●
Check if all items listed on the delivery note, including this getting started manual,
are included in the delivery.
●
Check the R&S SMA100B for any damage.
If the contents are damaged, immediately contact the carrier who delivered the
package.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
20
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
Packing material
Retain the original packing material. If the instrument needs to be transported or shipped later, you can use the material to protect the control elements and connectors.
Risk of injury during transportation
The carrying handles at the front and side of the casing are designed to lift or carry the
instrument. Do not apply excessive force to the handles. If a handle is ripped off, the
falling instrument can cause injury.
2.1.1.3
Accessory List
The instrument comes with the following accessories:
2.1.1.4
●
Power cable
●
Getting Started printed manual
Placing or Mounting the Instrument
The R&S SMA100B is designed for use under laboratory conditions, either on a bench
top or in a rack using the standard rackmount kit.
Bench top operation
If the R&S SMA100B is operated on a bench top, the surface must be flat. The instrument can be used in horizontal position, standing on its feet, or with the support feet on
the bottom extended.
Risk of injury if feet are folded out
The feet can fold in if they are not folded out completely or if the instrument is shifted.
Collapsing feet can cause injury or damage the instrument.
●
Fold the feet completely in or out to ensure stability of the instrument. Never shift
the instrument when the feet are folded out.
●
When the feet are folded out, do not work under the instrument or place anything
underneath.
●
The feet can break if they are overloaded. The overall load on the folded-out feet
must not exceed 500 N.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
21
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
Risk of injury when stacking instruments
A stack of instruments can tilt over and cause injury if not stacked correctly. Furthermore, the instruments at the bottom of the stack can be damaged due to the load
imposed by the instruments on top.
Observe the following instructions when stacking instruments:
●
Never stack more than three instruments. If you need to stack more than three
instruments, install them in a rack.
●
The overall load imposed on the lowest instrument must not exceed 500 N.
●
It is best if all instruments have the same dimensions (width and length).
If you need to stack smaller instruments on the top, the overall load imposed on the
lowest instrument must not exceed 250 N.
●
If the instruments have foldable feet, fold them in completely.
Mounting in a rack
The R&S SMA100B can be installed in a rack using a rack adapter kit (Order No. see
data sheet). The installation instructions are part of the adapter kit.
Risk of instrument damage due to insufficient airflow in a rack
If the instrument is run with insufficient airflow for a longer period, the instrument overheats, which can disturb the operation and even cause damage.
Make sure that all fan openings are unobstructed, that the airflow perforations are
unimpeded, and that the minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm.
2.1.1.5
Connecting AC Power
The R&S SMA100B is equipped with an AC power supply connector, that can be operated with different AC power voltages. Once it is connected, the instrument automatically adjusts to the given voltage. Refer to the data sheet for the requirements of volt-
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
22
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
age and frequency. There is no need to set the voltage manually or change fuses. The
AC supply and power switch is at the rear of the unit.
To connect the AC supply
► Connect the R&S SMA100B to the AC power source using the supplied power
cable.
Note: Since the instrument is designed in compliance with standard EN 61010-1
safety class I, it must only be connected to an outlet that has a ground contact.
Characteristics of the AC power supply:
2.1.1.6
●
100 V to 240 V AC
●
50 Hz to 60 Hz; 400 Hz
●
3.5 to 1.6 A, 2HU height unit (R&S SMAB-B92)
●
7.3 to 4.6 A, 3HU height unit (R&S SMAB-B92)
Turning the Instrument On and Off
To turn on the R&S SMA100B
1. Connect the instrument to the AC supply.
2. Turn on the main AC power switch at the rear panel of the R&S SMA100B (position
"I" (on)).
The instrument is supplied with AC power.
Warm-up time for OCXO
When the instrument is switched on, the OCXO requires an extended warm-up time
(see data sheet).
To start the R&S SMA100B
Starting the R&S SMA100B requires that it is connected and turned on.
► At the front panel, press the ON/STANDBY key briefly.
The instrument boots the operating system and starts the instrument firmware.
After booting, the instrument is in the state before the last power off (standby or
ready), indicated by the ON/STANDBY illumination:
● Green: the R&S SMA100B is running and ready for operation.
All modules are power-supplied.
● Orange: the R&S SMA100B is in standby mode (main AC power switch is in
position "I").
The standby power mode keeps the power switch circuits and the oven-controlled crystal oscillator OCXO active. In this state, it is safe to switch off the AC
power and disconnect the instrument from the power supply.
To switch between standby and ready state, briefly press the ON/STANDBY key.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
23
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
If a previous session was terminated regularly, the instrument uses the last setup with
the relevant instrument settings.
► To set up a new configuration, press the PRESET key to return the instrument to
its defined reset/preset state.
To shut down and turn off the R&S SMA100B
Risk of losing data
If you switch off the running instrument using the rear panel switch or by disconnecting
the power cord, the instrument loses its current settings. Furthermore, program data
can be lost.
Press the ON/STANDBY key first to shut down the application properly.
1. Press the ON/STANDBY key.
The current setup is saved, the operating system shuts down and sets the instrument to standby state.
The ON/STANDBY LED must be orange.
2. Turn off the main AC power switch at the rear panel of the R&S SMA100B (position
"0" (off)).
The instrument is no longer supplied with AC power.
Turning off the AC power
You can leave the AC power on permanently. Switching off is required only if the
instrument must be disconnected from all power supplies.
2.1.1.7
Functional Check
When the instrument is switched on, it automatically monitors the main functions.
A detected fault is indicated by an "Error" message displayed in the "Info" line of the
instrument together with a brief error description. For an in-depth identification of the
error, press the "Info" button. In response, a description of the errors is displayed. For
more information, refer to the "Troubleshooting and Error Messages" section in the
user manual.
Apart from the automatic monitoring, the R&S SMA100B provides internal adjustments
to check correct functioning. See the corresponding sections under "Maintenance" in
the user manual.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
24
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
2.1.1.8
Checking the Supplied Options and Licenses
The instrument can be equipped with both, hardware and firmware options. To check
whether the installed options correspond to the options indicated on the delivery note,
proceed as follows:
1. Press the SETUP key.
2. Select "Instrument Assembly > Hardware Config" and "Software / Options".
A list with hardware and firmware information is displayed.
3. Check the availability of the hardware options as indicated in the delivery note.
For an overview of the available options, refer to the data sheet.
See also Chapter 13.3.5, "Requesting Instrument Configuration and Specifications",
on page 497.
2.1.2 Connecting USB Devices
The USB interfaces of the R&S SMA100B allow you to connect USB devices, including
USB hubs directly to the instrument. Due to the large number of available USB devices, there is almost no limit to the expansions that are possible with the
R&S SMA100B.
The following list shows various USB devices that can be useful:
●
Memory stick for easy transfer of data to/from a computer (for example firmware
updates)
●
Keyboard or mouse to simplify the entry of data, comments, filenames, etc.
●
Power sensors of the R&S NRP families
All USB devices can be connected to or disconnected from the instrument during operation.
Connecting a USB storage device
When a USB storage device like a memory stick, a CD-ROM drive, or a hard disk is
connected, it is detected automatically. The device is made available as a new drive (/
usb). The name of the drive is manufacturer-dependent.
Connecting a keyboard
A keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected. The default keyboard layout
is English – US.
Use the "Setup > User Interface > USB Keyboard Settings" dialog to configure the keyboard properties (see Chapter 2.1.4.2, "Setting the Keyboard Language",
on page 31).
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
25
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
Connecting a mouse
A mouse is detected automatically when it is connected.
2.1.3 Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection
The R&S SMA100B is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an
Ethernet LAN (local area network). Provided the appropriate rights have been assigned
by the network administrator, the interface can be used, for example:
●
To transfer data between a controller and the instrument, for example to run a
remote control program.
See Chapter 11, "Network Operation and Remote Control", on page 244.
●
To access or operate the instrument from a remote computer using the Ultr@VNC
program (or a similar tool, like another VNC client or any Web browser supporting
Java).
●
To transfer data from a remote computer and back, for example using network folders.
●
To transfer data between R&S NRP power sensors and the instrument.
This section describes how to configure the LAN interface.
Accessing operating system
No access to the operating system is required for normal operation.
All necessary system settings can be made in the "Setup" dialog.
2.1.3.1
Connecting the Instrument to the Network
There are two methods to establish a LAN connection to the instrument:
●
A non-dedicated network (Ethernet) connection from the instrument to an existing
network
●
A dedicated network connection (Point-to-point connection) between the instrument and a single computer
For addressing, both the instrument and the computer reqiure an IP address. The
address information is usually assigned to the devices automatically, depending on the
network capabilities.
If the IP address is not assigned automatically, see Chapter 2.1.3.3, "Assigning the IP
Address", on page 28 for information on how to assign the address manually.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
26
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
To set up a network (LAN) connection
Risk of network failure
Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks:
●
Connecting the instrument to the network
●
Configuring the network
●
Changing IP addresses
●
Exchanging hardware
Errors can affect the entire network.
► Connect the instrument to the network or to a single PC.
If the instrument is connected to the LAN, the operating system automatically
detects the network connection and activates the required drivers.
By default, the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration and
to obtain the whole address information automatically.
When connected, the R&S SMA100B displays the address information on the
screen.
Risk of network connection failure
Network cables and cable connectors of poor quality, or failures in the autonegotiation
process, can cause network connection failures.
If the network connection to the instrument fails, check the network infrastructure and
contact your network administrator.
For details, see section "Troubleshooting and Error Messages".
2.1.3.2
Using Computer Names (Hostnames)
In a LAN that uses a DNS server, each PC or instrument connected in the LAN can be
accessed via an unambiguous computer name (hostname) instead of the IP address.
The DNS server translates the hostname to the IP address. It is especially useful when
a DHCP server is used, as a new IP address can be assigned each time the instrument is restarted.
Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, that remains permanent as long as it is not explicitly changed.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
27
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
The default computer name follows the syntax <INST>-<Serial Number> (previous
syntax: rs<inst><Serial Number>), where:
●
<INST> is the short name of your instrument, as stated on the front panel.
●
<Serial Number> is the individual serial number of the instrument.
You can find the serial number at the rear panel of instrument. It is the third part of
the device ID printed on the barcode sticker .
Example:
The default hostname of an R&S SMA100B with a serial number 102030 is
SMA100B-102030.
To query and change a computer name
1. Press the SETUP key.
2. Select "Remote Access > Network".
The "Network Settings" dialog opens.
The computer name is displayed under "Hostname".
3. Press the SETUP key.
4. Select "Security > Protection".
5. Enable the "Protection Level 1".
The default password is 123456.
The parameter "Hostname" in the "Network Settings" dialog is now enabled for
configuration.
6. Change the "Hostname".
2.1.3.3
Assigning the IP Address
Depending on the network capacities, the TCP/IP address information for the instrument can be obtained in different ways.
●
If the network supports dynamic TCP/IP configuration using the DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol), the address information is assigned automatically.
●
If the network does not support DHCP, the instrument tries to obtain the IP address
via Zeroconf (APIPA) protocol. If this attempt does not succeed or if the instrument
is set to use alternate TCP/IP configuration, the addresses must be set manually.
Since the dynamic TCP/IP configuration assigns the address information automatically,
it is safe to establish a physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument
configuration.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
28
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
Risk of network failure
Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks:
●
Connecting the instrument to the network
●
Configuring the network
●
Changing IP addresses
●
Exchanging hardware
Errors can affect the entire network.
To assign the IP address manually on the instrument
Use computer names to identify the instrument
In networks using a DHCP server, we recommend that you address the instrument by
its unambiguous computer name, see Chapter 2.1.3.2, "Using Computer Names (Hostnames)", on page 27.
1. Press the SETUP key.
2. Select "Remote Access > Network".
The "Network Settings" dialog opens.
3. Select "Address Mode > Static".
4. Select the "IP Address".
5. Enter the IP address, for example 192.168.0.1.
The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Every block contains 3 numbers in maximum.
6. Select the "Subnet Mask" and enter the subnet mask, for example 255.255.255.0.
The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Every block
contains 3 numbers in maximum.
To assign the IP address manually on the computer
► Obtain the necessary information from your network administrator. If you use more
than one LAN connector, you need separate address information for each connector.
For information on how to perform the configurations, refer to the documentation of
the operating system the computer uses.
2.1.4 Configuring the Initial Instrument Settings
This section describes how to set up the R&S SMA100B initially.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
29
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
2.1.4.1
Setting the Date and Time
The R&S SMA100B uses an internal real-time clock to determine the date and time. By
default, the instrument is set to the UTC timezone, but you can select the timezone
according to your location.
To select the timezone
1. Press the SETUP key.
2. Select "Maintenance > Timezone".
3. Select continent and city of your location.
Tip: By typing the first letter, you can quickly navigate through the lists to find the
desired destination.
4. Close the dialogs.
The instrument adjusts the time according to the selected location.
To set the date and time
1. Press the SETUP key.
2. Select "Security > Protection".
3. Enable the "Protection Level 1".
The default password is 123456.
4. Select "Setup > Maintenance > Date / Time".
5. Adjust the settings.
6. Close the dialogs.
The instrument adopts the new date and time.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
30
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
2.1.4.2
Setting the Keyboard Language
You can select the language of the external keyboard connected to the instrument.
To adjust the keyboard settings
1. Press the SETUP key.
2. Select "User Interface > USB Keyboard".
3. Select the "Layout".
The dialog closes and the changes take effect immediately.
2.1.4.3
Setting the Screen Saver
You can enable a screen saver that automatically turns off the display after a userdefined period of time. The screen saver is activated if no settings are made on the
touch screen, or via keys or the rotary knob during the selected wait time.
To activate the screen saver
1. Press the SETUP key.
2. Select "User Interface > Display"
3. Activate the "Screen Saver".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
31
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
4. Define the "Wait Time" in minutes.
The instrument turns off the display after the defined period of time.
5. To reactivate the display, tap the screen or press any key on the front panel.
To deactivate the screen saver
1. Press the SETUP key.
2. Select "User Interface > Display"
3. Disable the "Screen Saver" state.
2.2 Instrument Tour
The following topics help you to get familiar with the instrument and perform the first
steps:
●
Chapter 2.2.1, "Front Panel Tour", on page 32
●
Chapter 2.2.2, "Rear Panel Tour", on page 40
This section explains the control elements and the connectors of the R&S SMA100B
with the aid of the front and rear views. For specifications of the interfaces, refer to the
data sheet.
2.2.1 Front Panel Tour
This section provides an overview of the control elements at the front panel of the
R&S SMA100B. Most of the connectors are at the rear panel and are described in
Chapter 2.2.2, "Rear Panel Tour", on page 40.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
32
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
Figure 2-1: Front panel view of the R&S SMA100B RF Signal Generator with height unit 2HU (option
R&S SMAB-B92)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Touchscreen
Utility keys
ON/STANDBY
Function keys
Keypad
Navigation controls
Display keys
USB connector
SD card slot
SENSOR connector
RF output connector
Figure 2-2: Front panel view of the R&S SMA100B RF Signal Generator with height unit 3HU (option
R&S SMAB-B93)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Touchscreen
Utility keys
ON/STANDBY
Function keys
Keypad
Navigation controls
Display keys
USB connector
SD card slot
SENSOR connector
RF output connector
EXT1/2 input connectors
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
33
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
13 = LF output connector
14 = Pulse signal input and output connectors
15 = CLK SYN and CLK SYN N output connectors (SMA)
2.2.1.1
Touchscreen
The screen at the front panel is the graphical user interface. It shows the settings dialogs and parameters, and the current configuration at a glance, see Chapter 2.4.3,
"Understanding the Display Information", on page 53.
Figure 2-3: Touchscreen
The touch-sensitive panel provides an alternative means of user interaction for quick
and easy handling of the instrument, see Chapter 2.4.2, "Means of Manual Interaction",
on page 52.
Risk of touchscreen damage
Inappropriate tools or excessive force can damage the touchscreen.
Observe the following instructions when operating the touchscreen:
2.2.1.2
●
Never touch the screen with ball point pens or other sharp objects, use your fingers
instead.
As an alternative, you can use a stylus pen with a smooth soft tip.
●
Never apply excessive force to the screen. Touch it gently.
●
Never scratch the screen surface, for example with a finger nail.
●
Never rub the screen surface strongly, for example with a dust cloth.
For instructions on cleaning the screen, see Chapter 13.1, "Cleaning",
on page 487.
Utility Keys
The utility keys set the R&S SMA100B to a defined state, and provide access to basic
settings and information on assistance.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
34
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
Table 2-1: Utility keys
2.2.1.3
Utility Key
Assigned functions
PRESET
Sets the instrument to a defined state
LOCAL
Switches from remote control to local (manual) control
SETUP
Accesses the general instrument settings
HELP
Displays context-sensitive help text
ON/STANDBY
The ON/STANDBY key starts up and shuts down the instrument, and switches
between the standby and the ready state.
2.2.1.4
●
In the ready state, ON/STANDBY key lights green. The instrument is ready for
operation.
●
In the standby state, the ON/STANDBY key lights orange. The standby power
mode keeps the power switch circuits and the oven-controlled crystal oscillator
OCXO active. In this state, it is safe to switch off the AC power and disconnect the
instrument from the power supply.
Function Keys
Function keys provide access to the most common generator settings and functions.
You can find a detailed description of the corresponding functions in the user manual.
Table 2-2: Function keys
2.2.1.5
Function key
Assigned functions
FREQ
Activates frequency entry.
LEVEL
Activates level entry.
MOD ON/OFF
Switches the modulation on and off.
RF ON/OFF
Switches the RF output on and off.
Keypad
The keypad enables you to enter alphanumeric parameters, including the corresponding units. It contains the following keys:
Table 2-3: Keys on the keypad
Type of key
Description
Alphanumeric keys
Enter numbers and (special) characters in edit dialog boxes.
Decimal point
Inserts a decimal point "." at the cursor position.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
35
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
Type of key
Description
Sign key
Changes the sign of a numeric parameter. In the case of an alphanumeric parameter, inserts a "-" at the cursor position.
Unit keys
These keys add the selected unit to the entered numeric value and complete the entry.
(G/n dBμV, M/μ μV, k/m mV
and x1 dB(m))
2.2.1.6
In the case of level entries (e.g. in dB) or dimensionless values, all units
have the value "1" as multiplying factor. Thus, they have the same function as an ENTER key.
Navigation Controls
The navigation controls include a rotary knob, navigation keys, and the display keys.
They allow you to navigate within the display or within dialog boxes.
Rotary Knob
The rotary knob has several functions:
●
Increments (clockwise direction) or decrements (counterclockwise direction) the
instrument parameter at a defined step width in the case of a numeric entry.
●
Moves the selection, e.g. to a function block in the block diagram
●
Shifts the selection bar within focused areas (e.g. lists).
●
Acts like the ENTER key, when it is pressed.
Editing Keys
Editing keys enable you to confirm an entry, delete individual characters, or exit the
current operation.
Table 2-4: Editing keys
Type of key
Description
ESC key
Closes all kinds of dialog boxes, if the edit mode is not active. Quits the
edit mode, if the edit mode is active. In dialog boxes that contain a "Cancel" button it activates that button.
For "Edit" dialog boxes the following mechanism is used:
●
If data entry has been started, it retains the original value and
closes the dialog box.
●
If data entry has not been started or has been completed, it closes
the dialog box.
ENTER key
Has the same effect as pressing the rotary knob
●
Concludes the entry of dimensionless entries. The new value is
accepted.
●
With other entries, this key can be used instead of the default unit
key.
●
In a dialog box, selects the default or focused element.
●
Calls the next dialog level.
●
Confirms and closes open input windows.
BACKSPACE key
Delets the character to the left of the cursor in editing mode.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
36
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
Navigation Keys
As an alternative to the rotary knob or the touchscreen, you can use the navigation
keys to navigate through dialog boxes, diagrams, or tables.
Table 2-5: Navigation keys
2.2.1.7
Type of key
Description
UP/DOWN Key
The UP and the DOWN key does the following:
●
In a numeric edit dialog box, increase or decrease the instrument
parameter.
●
In a list, scroll forward and backward through the list entries.
●
In a table, move the selection bar vertically.
●
In windows or dialog boxes with vertical scrollbar, move the scrollbar.
LEFT/RIGHT Key
The LEFT and the RIGHT key does the following:
●
In an alphanumeric edit dialog box, move the cursor.
●
In a list, scroll forward and backward through the list entries.
●
In a table, move the selection bar horizontally.
●
In windows or dialog boxes with horizontal scrollbar, move the
scrollbar.
Display Keys
The display keys arrange different windows on the display.
Table 2-6: Display keys
2.2.1.8
Display key
Assigned functions
HOME
Returns to the initial feature screen.
NEXT WINDOW
Toggles between the entry fields in the taskbar.
ON/OFF
●
●
UNDO
Reverts the last operation.
USER
Adds a parameter to the user menu for quick access.
Switches highlighted elements or a function block on and off.
Switches between two or more settings, e.g. items of selection lists.
At the end of a list, the cursor is set on the first entry again.
USB Connector
USB (universal serial bus) interfaces of type A (host USB).
●
Connection of peripherals such as mouse or keyboard
●
Connection of memory stick for file transmission
●
Firmware update
Further USB interface type A (host USB) and a USB interface type B (USB IN) are
available on the rear panel.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
37
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
2.2.1.9
SD card slot
Slot for removable mass storage (option R&S SMAB-B85).
2.2.1.10
SENSOR
Connector for R&S NRP sensors.
The R&S SMA100B supports the use of R&S NRP power sensors in various ways
including the use as a power viewer.
A power sensor is connected to the R&S SMA100B by inserting the male connector.
To disconnect, pull the connector by its sleeve. You cannot disconnect the sensor simply by pulling at the cable or the rear part of the connector.
2.2.1.11
RF 50 Ω
Output of the RF signal.
Maximum input levels
Do not overload the RF output.
The instrument is equipped with a reverse power protection that prevents the RF output against back feed, see Chapter 6.1.2, "Reverse Power Protection", on page 145.
Nevertheless, the maximum permissible reverse power is specified in the data sheet.
The connector type depends on the installed frequency option.
Table 2-7: Overview of RF connector types depending on the frequency range
Required option
Connector type
RF: R&S SMAB-B103
N female
RF: R&S SMAB-B106
N female
RF: R&S SMAB-B112
Test port adapter, PC 3.5 mm female
RF: R&S SMAB-B120
Test port adapter, PC 3.5 mm female
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
38
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
Risk of RF connector and cable damage
If you tighten the connectors too strongly, you can damage the cables and connectors.
If you do not tighten the connectors enough, the measurement results can be inaccurate.
Always use an appropriate torque wrench suitable for this type of connector and apply
the torque specified in the application note 1MA99.
The application notes are available on the Internet and provide additional information
on care and handling of RF connectors.
Rohde & Schwarz offers appropriate torque wrenches for various connectors. For
ordering information, see the R&S SMA100B data sheet or product brochure.
2.2.1.12
Pulse Signal Connectors
Pulse Sync
Output signal for synchronizing the pulse generator signal. The synchronization signal
is generated at the beginning of each pulse. For double-pulse generation, the synchronization signal is generated at the beginning of the first pulse.
PULSE VIDEO
Output of the internal pulse generator signal or the external pulse signal fed in via the
PULSE EXT connector (video signal).
See Chapter 4.4.1, "Pulse Modulation", on page 77.
PULSE EXT
Input for an external pulse modulation signal or an external trigger/gate signal for the
pulse generator.
2.2.1.13
LF Modulation Connectors
LF
Output for internal LF generator signal.
See also data sheet and user manual, section "Analog Modulation".
EXT 1/2
Inputs for external analog modulation signal, and an external detector voltage.
See Chapter 4, "Analog Modulations", on page 74.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
39
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
2.2.1.14
Clock Synthesizer Connectors
CLK SYN/CLK SYN N
Connectors for output of the clock synthesizer signal, or the inverted signal.
2.2.2 Rear Panel Tour
This section provides an overview of the connectors at the rear panel of the instrument.
For technical data of the connectors, refer to the data sheet.
Figure 2-4: Rear panel view of the R&S SMA100B RF Signal Generator with height unit 2HU (option
R&S SMAB-B92)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
IEC 625/IEEE 488 connector
USB IN connector (type micro-B)
LAN connector
USB connector (type A)
V/GHZ X-AXIS and Z-AXIS output connectors (BNC)
STOP input and output connector (BNC)
MARKER USER1 output connector (BNC)
REF IN 1GHz and REF OUT 1GHz connectors (SMA)
REF IN and REF OUT connectors (BNC)
EFC input connector (BNC)
INST TRIG input connector (BNC)
SIGNAL VALID output connector (BNC)
CLK SYN and CLK SYN N output connectors (SMA)
PULSE SYNC, PULSE VIDEO and PULSE EXT connectors (BNC)
LF output connector (BNC)
EXT 1/2 input connectors (BNC)
AC power supply connection and main power switch
RF output connector
Serial number (last six digits in the string 1419.8888.02-<serial number>)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
40
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
Figure 2-5: Rear panel view of the R&S SMA100B RF Signal Generator with height unit 3HU (option
R&S SMAB-B93)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2.2.2.1
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
IEC 625/IEEE 488 connector
USB IN connector (type micro-B)
LAN connector
USB connector (type A)
V/GHZ X-AXIS and Z-AXIS output connectors (BNC)
STOP input and output connector (BNC)
MARKER USER1 output connector (BNC)
REF IN 1GHz and REF OUT 1GHz connectors (SMA)
REF IN and REF OUT connectors (BNC)
EFC input connector (BNC)
INST TRIG input connector (BNC)
SIGNAL VALID output connector (BNC)
CLK SYN and CLK SYN N output connectors (SMA)
PULSE SYNC, PULSE VIDEO and PULSE EXT connectors (BNC)
LF output connector (BNC)
EXT 1/2 input connectors (BNC)
AC power supply connection and main power switch
RF output connector
Serial number (last six digits in the string 1419.8888.02-<serial number>)
Connectors
IEC 625/IEEE 488
Option: R&S SMAB-B86
GPIB-bus interface for remote control of the instrument.
The IEC 625 interface is in compliance with IEEE488 and SCPI. A computer for remote
control can be connected via this interface. To set up the connection, we recommend
that you use a shielded cable.
Note: To avoid electromagnetic interference (EMI) caused by open lines, always terminate any connected IEC-bus cable with an instrument or a controller.
See also Chapter B.1, "GPIB-Bus Interface", on page 535 and Chapter 11, "Network
Operation and Remote Control", on page 244.
USB/USB IN
● Female USB type A connector, to connect devices like a keyboard, a mouse, a
memory stick, or the R&S NRP-Z3/Z4 cable for the R&S NRP sensors
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
41
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
●
Female USB IN connector (USB type B), for example for remote control.
Option: R&S SMAB-B86
See also Chapter 2.1.2, "Connecting USB Devices", on page 25.
LAN
The LAN interface can be used to connect the R&S SMA100B to a local network for
remote control, remote operation, and data transfer.
For details, see Chapter 2.1.3, "Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection", on page 26.
V/GHZ X-AXIS
Output of a voltage ramp:
● "V / GHz": the voltage is proportional to the frequency.
● "X-Axis": output of a voltage ramp for the X deflection of an oscilloscope or an XY
recorder.
Z-AXIS
Output of a voltage pulse, e.g. for the combined blanking and marker generation of network analyzers.
STOP
Input and output for stopping the sweep in all modes.
This connector is bidirectional. Used as:
● "Input": enables you to stop a sweep triggered by an external network analyzer.
● "Output": enables the R&S SMA100B to stop the sweep of an external network
analyzer.
MARKER USER1
Output signal for marker or trigger signal.
SIGNAL VALID
Output signal that marks the valid signal times (valid level and frequency) for all analog
modulations.
INST TRIG
Input for external trigger of sweeps and list mode.
For detailed information on the sweep modes and the triggering, see Chapter 5.1, "Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes", on page 110.
EFC
Input connector for an EFC (external frequency control) signal for electronic tuning of
the internal reference frequency.
See Chapter 7, "Reference Oscillator", on page 175.
REF IN/REF OUT
Input/output for external reference signal.
Incl. dedicated connectors for the 1GHz reference signal.
See Chapter 7, "Reference Oscillator", on page 175.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
42
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Trying Out the Instrument
CLK SYN/CLK SYN N
Connectors for output of the clock synthesizer signal, or the inverted signal.
PULSE EXT
Input for an external pulse modulation signal or an external trigger/gate signal for the
pulse generator.
PULSE VIDEO
Output of the internal pulse generator signal or the external pulse signal fed in via the
PULSE EXT connector (video signal).
See Chapter 4.4.1, "Pulse Modulation", on page 77.
PULSE SYNC
Output signal for synchronizing the pulse generator signal. The synchronization signal
is generated at the beginning of each pulse. For double-pulse generation, the synchronization signal is generated at the beginning of the first pulse.
LF
Output for internal LF generator signal.
See also data sheet and user manual, section "Analog Modulation".
EXT 1/2
Inputs for external analog modulation signal, and an external detector voltage.
See Chapter 4, "Analog Modulations", on page 74.
AC supply and power switch
The AC power supply connector and the main power switch are located in a unit on the
rear panel of the instrument.
Main power switch function:
● Position 1: The instrument is in operation.
● Position 0: The entire instrument is disconnected from the AC power supply.
For details, refer to Chapter 2.1.1.6, "Turning the Instrument On and Off", on page 23.
RF
Rear panel connector for the RF signal. This connector is for use of the instrument in a
19" rack.
2.3 Trying Out the Instrument
This chapter introduces the first steps with the R&S SMA100B. It shows how to operate and configure the instrument using simple examples. The complete description of
the functionality and its usage is given in the R&S SMA100B user manual. Basic instrument operation is described in Chapter 2.4, "Instrument Control", on page 51.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
43
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Trying Out the Instrument
Prerequisites
The instrument is set up, connected to the power supply, and started up as described
in Chapter 2.1, "Preparing for Use", on page 19.
The first signal generation tasks explain how to generate an unmodulated signal, to
configure the RF signal output, and how you can vary the RF frequency and level in
sweep mode.
The instrument is manually operated via the touchscreen. Try out the following:
●
●
●
Generating an Unmodulated Carrier....................................................................... 44
Generating an RF Frequency Sweep Signal...........................................................46
Saving and Recalling Settings................................................................................ 48
2.3.1 Generating an Unmodulated Carrier
We start to generate a simple unmodulated signal. In this example, the R&S SMA100B
can be in its minimal configuration.
1. On the R&S SMA100B front panel, press the PRESET key to set a defined initial
instrument state.
2. Set the frequency:
a) In the "Status Bar", tap the "Frequency" field.
b) On the on-screen keypad, enter "6" and press the "GHz" key.
The on-screen key pad closes and the frequency value is displayed.
3. To set the signal level, tap the "Level" field and enter the level in the same way.
4. To activate RF signal output, select "Level" > "RF On" in the tile diagram.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
44
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Trying Out the Instrument
The blue colored "RF On" icon indicates that the RF output is activated.
The R&S SMA100B provides the 6 GHz signal at the RF A connector at the front
panel.
Figure 2-6: Generating an unmodulated signal
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
45
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Trying Out the Instrument
Alternative ways to access the instrument functions
To fulfill the same task, you can also use the front panel keys or the setting parameters
provided in the frequency and level dialogs.
Try out the settings dialogs
1. In the "Frequency" tile, select "Frequency > RF Frequency".
a) Tap the "Frequency" field.
b) Set the frequency via the on-screen keypad.
2. Access the "RF Level" dialog via the "Level" tile.
a) In the "RF Level" tab, select "Amplitude".
b) Set the amplitude (level) via the on-screen keypad.
3. Select "RF State > On" to activate the RF signal generation.
See Chapter 3, "RF Signal Configuration", on page 62.
Try out the front panel keys
► Use the FREQ, LEVEL, and RF ON/OFF key on the front panel.
Connect RF of the R&S SMA100B to a signal analyzer, for example R&S®FSW, to display the generated signal.
For the required settings of the signal analyzer, refer to its user manual or its online
help.
2.3.2 Generating an RF Frequency Sweep Signal
The "Sweep" operating mode allows you to generate an RF signal with periodically
varying frequencies or amplitudes.
This example deals with an RF signal with varying frequency and constant level. To
configure the sweep, you need to determine a defined start and end frequency with
constant time intervals between the frequency steps.
The sweep function does not require specific options.
1. On the front panel, press the PRESET key to set a defined initial instrument state.
2. In the status bar, set "Frequency > 6 GHz".
3. Set "Level > -25 dBm".
4. In the tile diagram, select "Sweep" > "RF Frequency Sweep".
5. In the "General" tab:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
46
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Trying Out the Instrument
a) Select "Mode > Auto" to run the sweep continuously.
b) Select "Shape > Sawtooth" to set the waveform shape of the sweep signal.
c) Select "Spacing > Linear", to determine the calculation method for the frequency shift of a step.
d) Set "Dwell Time > 15.0 ms", to determine the time interval of the sweep steps.
6. Select the "Frequency Range" tab.
a) Set "Start Freq > 200 MHz" and "Stop Freq > 600 MHz" to determine the frequency sweep range.
b) Set the step width "Step Lin > 10.0 MHz" to determine the width for a frequency
step.
7. In the "General" tab, activate the frequency sweep with "State > On".
8. Close the sweep dialog.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
47
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Trying Out the Instrument
(Alternatively, tap the "Home" button to minimize the dialog. The R&S SMA100B
indicates the "Sweep" dialog as active dialog in the task bar.)
9. To activate the RF signal output, select "Level" > "RF On".
Figure 2-7: Generating a frequency sweep signal
The frequency display indicates the frequencies of the running sweep.
The R&S SMA100B provides the 6 GHz signal at the RF connector at the front
panel.
2.3.3 Saving and Recalling Settings
To restore the results of our measurements later, we save the instrument settings in a
file.
To save the instrument settings in a file
We assume, a test configuration as described in Chapter 2.3.2, "Generating an RF
Frequency Sweep Signal", on page 46.
1. Press the SETUP key on the front panel.
2. In the "Setup" menu, select "Settings > Save/Recall".
3. In the "Save/Recall" dialog, select "Operation Mode > Save".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
48
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Trying Out the Instrument
4. Tap the "Filename", use the on-screen keyboard, and enter MyTestSignal.
5. Tap the "Save" button.
The file MyTestSignal.savrcltxt is stored in the default directory /var/user/.
To load saved instrument settings
You can restore the settings to the instrument at any time using the settings file.
1. Press the PRESET button to restore the default instrument settings so you can
check that the stored user settings are restored afterwards.
2. Press the SETUP key on the front panel.
3. In the "Setup" menu, select "Settings > Save/Recall".
4. In the "Save/Recall" dialog, select "Operation Mode > Recall".
Navigate to the directory the file is saved in and select the MyTestSignal file.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
49
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Trying Out the Instrument
5. Tap the "Recall" button.
All instrument settings are restored and the display resembles Chapter 2.3.2, "Generating an RF Frequency Sweep Signal", on page 46, which shows the instrument
display right before the settings were saved.
How to display all parameters with values different to their preset values
When you load a file to your instrument, you do not have enough information on the
changed settings. In such case, it is useful to visualize all parameters that have been
changed from their default state.
Try out the following:
●
Tap and hold on an empty space on in the tile diagram to access the context-sensitive menu.
●
Select "Mark All Parameters Changed from Preset".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
50
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Control
●
All changed parameters are highlighted.
See also Chapter 9, "File and Data Management", on page 188.
2.4 Instrument Control
This chapter provides an overview on how to work with the R&S SMA100B.
It covers the following topics:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
51
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Control
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Possible Ways to Operate the Instrument...............................................................52
Means of Manual Interaction...................................................................................52
Understanding the Display Information................................................................... 53
Accessing the Functionality.....................................................................................56
Entering Data.......................................................................................................... 57
Getting Information and Help.................................................................................. 59
Remote Control....................................................................................................... 60
Remote Operation over VNC.................................................................................. 61
2.4.1 Possible Ways to Operate the Instrument
There are three ways to operate the R&S SMA100B:
●
Manual operation:
Use the touchscreen, hard keys and rotary knob, or an optional mouse and/or keyboard. The principles of manual operation are explained in Chapter 2.4, "Instrument Control", on page 51.
●
Remote control:
Create programs to automatize repeating settings, tests and measurements. The
instrument is connected to a computer running the program.
This way of operation is described in Chapter 11, "Network Operation and Remote
Control", on page 244.
●
Remote operation from a computer:
Remote monitoring and control of the instrument from a connected computer is
based on the common cross-platform technology VNC (Virtual Network Computing). On the remote computer, any standard web browser (supporting Java) or a
dedicated VNC client (like Ultr@VNC) can be used. See also Chapter 2.4.8,
"Remote Operation over VNC", on page 61.
2.4.2 Means of Manual Interaction
For the manual interaction with the R&S SMA100B, you have several methods that you
can use as an alternative to perform a task:
●
Touchscreen:
Touchscreen operation is the most direct way to interact. Almost all control elements and actions on the screen are based on the standard operating system concept. You can tap any user interface element to set parameters in dialog boxes,
enter data, scroll within a dialog etc., as if you work with a mouse pointer.
Tapping the screen works like clicking mouse buttons:
●
–
Touch quickly = click: Selects a parameter or provokes an action.
–
Touch and hold = right-click: Opens a context-sensitive menu.
–
Touch and swipe = drag: Scrolls through the contents of a display element
larger than the screen, e.g. a list or a table.
Function keys and rotary knob:
The front panel provides nearly all functions and controls to operate the instrument
in the classic way, without touchscreen.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
52
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Control
●
Optional mouse and/or keyboard:
These devices work like known from PCs. The navigation keys on the front panel
correspond to the keys on the keyboard.
This manual describes the manual interaction with the instrument via the touchscreen.
It mentions the alternative methods using the keys on the instrument or the on-screen
keyboard if it deviates from the standard operating procedures. The usage of the
touchscreen and navigation keys is described in Chapter 2.4.4, "Accessing the Functionality", on page 56.
Throughout the manual, the term "select" refers to any of the described methods, i.e.
using a finger on the touchscreen, a mouse pointer in the display, or a key on the
instrument or on a keyboard.
2.4.3 Understanding the Display Information
The home screen of the R&S SMA100B displays all main settings and generator
states, divided into three main operation areas.
1 = Taskbar/softkey bar with "Home" and "System Config" key
2 = Status bar
3 = Tile diagram
●
●
●
●
2.4.3.1
Status Bar............................................................................................................... 53
Tile Diagram............................................................................................................53
Taskbar................................................................................................................... 54
Additional Display Characteristics...........................................................................55
Status Bar
The status bar at the top of the screen indicates the RF frequency and the level of the
output signal provided to the DUT. You can set both parameters directly here.
2.4.3.2
Tile Diagram
The tile diagram is the main entry to the settings of the R&S SMA100B.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
53
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Control
Tile
Access to:
"Modulation"
●
●
Analog and pulse modulation settings1)
Built in LF generator
"System Config"
●
●
●
"Save/Recall": settings for saving and loading instrument configurations
"Remote access": Network and emulation settings.
"Setup": general system configuration
"Sweep"
●
●
Frequency and level sweeps
List mode
"Frequency"
●
●
RF frequency and phase
Reference frequency
"Level"
●
●
●
●
RF level
Attenuator
Automatic level control
User correction
"Clk Syn / Pow Sens"
●
●
Clock synthesis1)
Power sensors
1)
2.4.3.3
requires additional options
Taskbar
The "Taskbar" shows a home and an info button, and assigns a labeled button whenever you open a dialog. If more dialogs are open than the taskbar can display, touch
and swipe the taskbar to scroll up and down.
The buttons shown in the following example represent the variants.
Table 2-8: Example of buttons in the taskbar
"Home" button
Returns to the home screen.
"User Menu"
Lists parameters that can be defined for quick access.
Shows the current remote access connections when the instrument is remotely controlled.
Tip: An indicator in the "System Config" tile shows the current remote control status.
R&S NRP power sensors
Shows a connected external power sensor. The button displays the current readings
when the sensor is active.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
54
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Control
Active dialogs
Indicates the dialog name of each active dialog in a separate button.
"Info" key
Provides access to status and error messages.
Note: The warning symbol signifies a permanent error message.
2.4.3.4
Additional Display Characteristics
The following section provides a short insight on the indication of the screen in general,
and significant elements that you see under specific operating modes, in dialogs or settings.
●
Appearance of active elements
–
Active elements like On/Off switches, state buttons, etc. have a blue background
–
Selected elements are framed or highlighted orange.
–
Inactive elements are gray
●
On-Screen keypads
As additional means of interacting with the instrument without having to connect an
external keyboard, either a numerical or alphanumerical on-screen keypad appears
when you activate an entry field (see Chapter 2.4.5, "Entering Data",
on page 57).
●
Info line
The "Info line" shows brief status information and error messages. It appears when
an event generates a message.
●
Key parameters indicated in tab labels
Most dialogs are divided into tabs with logically grouped parameters. The tab label
expresses the content and can also contain status indicators or the set value of a
key parameter.
●
Scroll bar handle
An arrow icon that appears when you touch a scroll bar helps you to scroll in a dialog or list.
If no scrollbar handle appears, you can touch and swipe an element to scroll up
and down.
●
Context-sensitive menus
Within the entire screen display, including single parameters, you can access context-sensitive menus that provide some additional functions.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
55
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Control
2.4.4 Accessing the Functionality
All functionalities are provided in dialog boxes as known from computer programs. You
can control the instrument intuitively with the touchscreen. This section provides an
overview of the accessing methods.
The instrument's functions and settings can be accessed by selecting one of the following elements:
●
System and function keys on the front panel of the instrument
●
Taskbar/softkeys on the touchscreen
●
Context-sensitive menus for specific elements on the touchscreen
●
Elements on the status bar in the touchscreen
●
Displayed setting on the touchscreen, that means block diagram and all settings
available in dialogs.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
56
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Control
To open a dialog box
► Perform one of the following actions:
●
●
Tap the required tile, and then the menu entry.
Tap the minimized view (button) on the taskbar.
Some of the utility keys access a dedicated dialog, too.
To minimize a dialog box
1. To return to the home screen, tap the "Home" button.
2. To switch to another dialog, press the NEXT WINDOW button.
To close a dialog box
► Tap the "Close" icon in the upper right corner.
Or:
Press the ESC key on the front panel.
To select an option in a dialog box
► Tap the required option.
2.4.5 Entering Data
Some parameters have their own key on the front panel.
For data input in dialog boxes, the instrument provides an on-screen keypad for
numeric values, and an on-screen keyboard for alphanumeric settings. Thus, you can
always set the parameters via the touchscreen, the front panel, or an external keyboard.
Correcting an entry
1. Using the arrow keys, move the cursor to the right of the entry you want to delete.
2. Press the BACKSPACE key.
3. Deletes the entry to the left of the cursor.
4. Enter your correction.
Completing the entry
► Press the ENTER key or the rotary knob.
Aborting the entry
► Press the ESC key.
The dialog box closes without changing the settings.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
57
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Control
2.4.5.1
Entering Numeric Parameters
To enter values with the on-screen keypad
If a field requires numeric input, the keypad provides only numbers. The provided units
correspond to the units of the parameter.
1. Enter the numeric value.
2. Tap the unit button to complete the entry.
The unit is added to the entry.
3. If the parameter does not require a unit, confirm the entered value by pressing
"Enter".
To enter values by using the front panel controls
1. Change the currently used parameter value by using the rotary knob (small steps)
or the UP/DOWN keys (large steps).
2. If the parameter does not require a unit, confirm the entered value by pressing the
ENTER key or any of the unit keys.
The instrument highlights the editing line to confirm the entry.
If you edit numeric data in tables, the entry field must be in edit mode: Press ENTER,
or the rotary knob to activate the edit mode.
2.4.5.2
Entering Alphanumeric Parameters
If a field requires alphanumeric input, you can use the on-screen keyboard to enter
numbers and (special) characters.
The interaction with the on-screen keyboard is as tipping on a connected keyboard.
2.4.5.3
Undo and Redo Actions
Accessed via the context-sensitive menus, "Undo" allows you to restore one or more
actions on the instrument. Depending on the available memory, the "Undo" steps can
restore all actions.
"Redo" restores a previously undone action.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
58
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Control
2.4.6 Getting Information and Help
In some dialog boxes, graphics are included to explain the way a setting works.
For further information, you can use the following sources:
●
Tooltips give the value range of the parameter.
●
The context help provides functional description on a setting.
●
The general help explains a dialog box, provides instructions, and general information.
To display context help
► To access a help topic, perform one of the following:
a) Tap and hold the parameter for which you need information and tap "Help" in
the context menu.
b) Tap the parameter and press the HELP key.
The "Help" dialog opens. You can browse the help for further information.
Contents of the help dialog box
The help dialog box covers two main areas:
●
"Contents" - contains a table of help contents
●
"Topic" - contains a specific help topic
The help system also provides an "Index" and a "Find" area, and "Zoom" functions that
are accessed via the corresponding buttons.
To open general help
► Press the yellow HELP key on the front panel.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
59
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Control
If a dialog box is opened, the help topic for the current tab is shown. Otherwise the
"Contents" page appears.
Navigating in the table of contents and in the help topics
1. To move through the displayed contents entries, tap on an entry and scroll or use a
connected mouse or the UP/DOWN keys.
Entries with a plus sign contain further entries.
2. To display a help topic, tap on the topic name or double click on the topic name or
press the ENTER key.
3. To follow a cross-reference, tap on the link text.
4. To return to the previous page, select "Back".
This function scrolls back all steps you have performed before.
5. Use the "scroll bars" to shift the visible section of content shown.
6. To maximize the "Topics" area, tap the "Hide Contents Tree" button to hide the
contents tree.
Using the index
1. Select the "Index" button.
2. Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in.
The entries starting with these characters are displayed.
3. Tap on the index entry.
The corresponding help topic is displayed.
2.4.7 Remote Control
In addition to working with the R&S SMA100B interactively, located directly at the
instrument, it is also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC.
The R&S SMA100B supports various methods for remote control:
●
Connecting the instrument to a (LAN) network (see Chapter 2.1.3, "Setting Up a
Network (LAN) Connection", on page 26)
●
Using the LXI browser interface in a LAN network
●
Connecting a PC via the IEC-bus (IEEE 488) interface
●
Remote control via the USB interface
For remote control over LAN or USB, you can use the R&S VISA (Virtual Instrument
Software Architecture) library provided for download at the Rohde & Schwarz website
http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/rsvisa.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
60
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started
Instrument Control
How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in Chapter 11, "Network
Operation and Remote Control", on page 244.
2.4.8 Remote Operation over VNC
The VNC is an application which can be used to access and control the instrument
from a remote computer through a LAN connection. While the instrument is in operation, the instrument screen contents are displayed on the remote computer, and VNC
provides access to all applications, files, and network resources of the instrument.
Thus, remote operation of the instrument is possible.
Instrument control from a remote computer
To access the basic utility functions of the R&S SMA100B, perform a right mouse click
on the block diagram and select "Key Emulation".
A key panel to the right of the block diagram gives access to the utility functions provided by the front panel keys.
The VNC is an add-on program, included in operating system Linux/Unix, and available
as a free-of-charge download on the internet.
For more information, refer to Chapter 11.16, "How to Set Up Remote Operation via
VNC", on page 295.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
61
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration
3 RF Signal Configuration
The R&S SMA100B signal generator generates RF signals with outstanding spectral
purity within the frequency range from 8 kHz up to 6 GHz and with adjustable signal
level over a wide range.
In addition to these real-time CW signals, you can also generate RF signals from predefined lists and sweep signals that vary according to the frequency or amplitude
curves.
Moreover, you can apply versatile analog modulation types with definable characteristics.
The variably adjustable output level due to the built-in attenuator, allows you to vary
the RF signal level over the full level range. There are different methods to improve
signal performance and to optimize the signal quality for the particular application, or to
increase the accuracy and reliability of the generated RF signal.
In addition, the R&S SMA100B supports R&S NRP power sensors. Power sensors can
be used to monitor the output level in the generator and to determine the level correction values for user correction lists.
Signal modes and characteristics
The R&S SMA100B generates unmodulated or analog modulated RF signals. You can
output the signal in fixed mode or as a signal having periodically varying frequencies or
amplitudes.
Signal modes for RF signal generation:
●
Unmodulated signal
Generates an unmodulated continuous wave (CW) of constant frequency and
amplitude.
For information on the signal frequency and level settings and example on how to
configure a simple CW signal, see:
●
–
Chapter 3.3, "RF Frequency Settings", on page 65
–
Chapter 3.4, "RF Level Settings", on page 67
–
Chapter 2.3.1, "Generating an Unmodulated Carrier", on page 44
Analog modulated signal
Modulates the signal with an analog signal and generates amplitude, phase, frequency and pulse modulation.
See Chapter 4, "Analog Modulations", on page 74.
RF signal output modes:
●
Fixed
The RF signal as it is, that means modulated or unmodulated.
●
Sweep
An RF or LF frequency and RF level sweep signal, processed continuously, stepby-step or individually and with selectable trigger modes. Different sweeps cannot
run simultaneously.
●
List mode
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
62
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration
How to Set the Frequency and Level
Generates RF signal based on a list of predefined frequency and level values pairs
and step widths.
See Chapter 5, "Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode", on page 109.
3.1 Activating RF Signal Output
Per default, the RF output signal is deactivated.
To activate the RF output
1. Configure the RF signal as required.
Set for example the frequency and level values.
2. Activate the RF output in one of the following ways:
a) Select "Level > RF ON > On"
b) Press the RF ON/OFF key at the front panel.
3. In the "Level" tile, observe the color of the "RF On" icon.
The blue color indicates that the RF output is activated.
RF State/RF ON............................................................................................................63
RF output impedance....................................................................................................63
RF State/RF ON
Activates or deactivates the RF output.
Acts as the RF ON/OFF key.
Remote command:
:OUTPut<hw>[:STATe] on page 348
RF output impedance
You can query the impedance of the RF output.
Remote command:
:OUTPut<hw>:IMPedance? on page 349
3.2 How to Set the Frequency and Level
The simplest form of the RF signal is a continuous wave (CW) of constant frequency
and amplitude. Such an unmodulated signal transmits the information without varying
the carrier signal as with a modulation, for example. The RF signal is defined by its frequency, level and phase.
► Use one of the following:
●
●
"Status Bar > Frequency and Level"
"Frequency panel > Frequency"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
63
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration
How to Set the Frequency and Level
●
●
●
"Level panel > Level"
"Frequency panel > Frequency > Phase"
On the front panel, press the FREQ or the LEVEL key.
Current frequency and level values are indicated on the "Status bar" so that you can
see them at a glance. Values displayed in the status bar and in the "Frequency/Level"
dialogs can deviate form each other.
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 64.
RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument
If your test setup includes a downstream instrument, you can enter the parameter of
the downstream instrument in the frequency or level settings dialog of the
R&S SMA100B. Examples of downstream instruments are mixers, frequency multipliers, amplifiers or attenuators and of their corresponding major parameters offset, multiplier, amplitude.
The R&S SMA100B generates the signal without the downstream parameters, but considers all additional parameters concerning the frequency and level, like frequency offset and multiplication factor, or user correction. Any of these cases is indicated by a
dedicated icon, displayed in the "Frequency" or "Level" tile, depending on the affected
parameter.
Figure 3-1 illustrates the calculation of the "Frequency" and "Level" values displayed in
the status bar.
Figure 3-1: Frequency and Level display vs frequency and level at the RF output
fRF
LevelRF
fRF, LevelRF
fRF Out, LevelRF Out
n*f
Δf
ΔLevel
= n*fRF Out + Δf
= LevelRF Out + ΔLevel
= Frequency and level at the output of the downstream instrument ("Status bar > Frequency and Level")
= Frequency and level at the output connector RF ("Frequency > RF Frequency > Frequency" and "Level > RF Level > Amplitude")
= Multiplication factor ("Frequency > RF Frequency > Multiplier")
= Frequency offset ("Frequency > RF Frequency > Offset")
= Power offset ("Level > RF Level > Offset")
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
64
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration
RF Frequency Settings
3.3 RF Frequency Settings
Access:
1. Select "Frequency" > "Frequency".
2. Observe the information on the home screen, "Frequency" tile.
The "Frequency" tile indicates the reference frequency, current frequency offset
and multiplier values, and phase offset value.
In the "RF Frequency" dialog, you can configure:
● RF frequency, incl. an offset or multiplication factor of a downstream instrument
● The step size for varying the frequency with the rotary knob.
The remote commands required to define the settings are described in Chapter 12.15.3, "SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem", on page 395.
Settings
Frequency..................................................................................................................... 66
Main PLL Bandwidth..................................................................................................... 66
Offset.............................................................................................................................66
Multiplier........................................................................................................................66
User Variation............................................................................................................... 67
└ Variation Active............................................................................................... 67
└ Variation Step................................................................................................. 67
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
65
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration
RF Frequency Settings
Frequency
Sets the RF frequency.
This frequency is output at the RF connector. It does not consider an Offset or multiplication factor (Multiplier).
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 64.
Note: Suppressed values in the status bar
For security concerns or certain operating modes, you can hide the frequency and
level display in the status bar.
●
●
The display has been disabled for security reasons.
See:
– Annotation Frequency
– Annotation Amplitude
The display is disabled when list mode is running, see Chapter 5, "Varying the RF
Signal in List or Sweep Mode", on page 109.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] on page 397
Main PLL Bandwidth
Selects the PLL (Phase Locked Loop) bandwidth of the main synthesizer.
"Normal"
Default main PLL bandwidth.
The instrument provides the maximum modulation bandwidth and
FM/PhiM deviation.
"Narrow"
Sets the narrow PLL bandwidth.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:PLL:MODE on page 402
Offset
Sets the frequency offset.
This value represents the frequency shift of a downstream instrument, like for example
a mixer.
The "Frequency" value displayed in the status bar is the resulting frequency, as it is at
the output of the downstream instrument. The frequency at the R&S SMA100B RF output is not changed.
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 64.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:OFFSet on page 399
Multiplier
Sets the multiplication factor for the RF frequency.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
66
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration
RF Level Settings
This value represents the multiplication factor of a downstream instrument, like for
example a multiplier.
The "Frequency" value displayed in the status bar is the resulting frequency, as it is at
the output of the downstream instrument. The frequency at the R&S SMA100B RF output is not changed.
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 64.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MULTiplier on page 399
User Variation
Defines and activates a user-defined step width for varying the RF frequency or RF
level with the rotary knob.
If disabled, the step width varies in steps of one unit at the cursor position.
Variation Active ← User Variation
Activates the set user-defined step width.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP:MODE on page 401
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP:MODE on page 439
Variation Step ← User Variation
Sets the user-defined step width.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement] on page 402
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] on page 440
3.4 RF Level Settings
Access:
1. Select "Level" > "Level".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
67
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration
RF Level Settings
In the "RF Level" dialog, you can configure the offset-free level, the level limit, and
the step width for varying the level with the rotary knob.
2. Select "User Variation" to set the step width to be used when setting the RF level
using the rotary knob.
3. Observe the information on the home screen, "Level" tile.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
68
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration
RF Level Settings
The "Level" tile indicates the level limit, the user correction status and current correction value, current setting characteristics incl. mode.
The remote commands required to define the settings are described in Chapter 12.15.10, "SOURce:POWer Subsystem", on page 433.
Settings
RF State/RF ON............................................................................................................69
Amplitude...................................................................................................................... 69
Limit ..............................................................................................................................70
Offset ............................................................................................................................70
Setting Characteristics ................................................................................................. 70
Mode ............................................................................................................................ 71
Harmonic Filter .............................................................................................................71
Level Range ................................................................................................................. 71
Readjust........................................................................................................................ 72
User Variation............................................................................................................... 72
└ Variation Active............................................................................................... 72
└ Variation Step................................................................................................. 72
RF State/RF ON
Activates or deactivates the RF output.
Acts as the RF ON/OFF key.
Remote command:
:OUTPut<hw>[:STATe] on page 348
Amplitude
Sets the level of the RF signal.
The value is offset-free and corresponds to the level at the RF connector.
Note: Suppressed values in the status bar
For security concerns or certain operating modes, you can hide the frequency and
level display in the status bar.
●
●
The display has been disabled for security reasons.
See:
– Annotation Frequency
– Annotation Amplitude
The display is disabled when list mode is running, see Chapter 5, "Varying the RF
Signal in List or Sweep Mode", on page 109.
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 64.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
69
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration
RF Level Settings
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:POWer on page 438
Note: The SCPI command [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:
AMPLitude] sets the level of the "Level" display.
This means, the level containing offset.
Limit
Sets an upper limit for the RF output power.
You can use this value to protect your DUT from damage due to high input power. If
you enter an RF level above this value, the instrument limits the output power to this
specified value, and generates the warning message:
"Pep value greater than the defined limit." However, the level indication in the status
bar is not affected.
The value is not affected by an instrument preset (PRESET key or *RST) and the
"Save/Recall" function. It is reset only by factory preset.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LIMit[:AMPLitude] on page 437
Offset
Sets a level offset.
This value represents the level shift of a downstream instrument, like for example a an
attenuator or an amplifier.
The "Level" value displayed in the status bar is the resulting level, as it is at the output
of the downstream instrument. The level at the R&S SMA100B RF output is not
changed.
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 64.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet on page 440
Setting Characteristics
Selects additional quality characteristics to optimize the behavior of the RF signal level
for the corresponding application.
"Auto"
Sets the RF output level automatically according to the selected
mode.
In this mode, the instrument provides the highest dynamic range and
fastest setting times, as specified in the data sheet.
The RF signal is shortly blanked when the step attenuator is switching.
"Uninterrupted Level Settings"
Suppresses blanking at level transitions. Frequency transitions can
lead to an RF level blanking due to hardware specific switching
points.
This mode reduces the dynamic range of the instrument. The step
attenuator is fixed.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
70
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration
RF Level Settings
"Strictly Monotone"
Executes signal level changes monotonically increasing or decreasing.
The setting makes sure that increasing the level value exclusively
results in an increased output level, and vice versa.
All electronic switches, which might affect the monotonicity are fixed.
The operation mode is useful for applications using level searching
algorithms which rely on a strictly monotonous behavior.
"Constant-VSWR"
Suppresses output impedance variations at the RF output connector,
due to changed level settings.
"User"
Indicates that a setting has been modified in the expert mode. The
expert mode is a protected function, that requires protection level 2
password.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LBEHaviour on page 436
Mode
Allows you to optimize the RF output signal for applications, where improved harmonic
distortion or improved wideband noise is required.
"Normal"
Generates an RF output signal with high signal to noise ratio as well
as low distortion, according to the data sheet.
"Low Noise"
Optimizes the signal to noise ratio.
"Low Distortion"
Reduces distortion (harmonics) of the RF signal to a minimum.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LMODe on page 437
Harmonic Filter
Activates low harmonic filter or enables its automatic switching.
"On"
Ensures best low harmonics performance but decreases the level
range.
"Auto"
Applies an automatically selected harmonic filter that fits to the current level setting.
Remote command:
:OUTPut<hw>:FILTer:MODE on page 350
Level Range
Shows the interruption-free range of the level that you can use in the currently selected
mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:LOWer? on page 442
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:UPPer? on page 442
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
71
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration
RF Phase Settings
Readjust
Recalculates and adjusts the internal switch positions of the RF chain according to the
current level.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:SONCe on page 435
User Variation
Defines and activates a user-defined step width for varying the RF frequency or RF
level with the rotary knob.
If disabled, the step width varies in steps of one unit at the cursor position.
Variation Active ← User Variation
Activates the set user-defined step width.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP:MODE on page 401
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP:MODE on page 439
Variation Step ← User Variation
Sets the user-defined step width.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement] on page 402
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] on page 440
3.5 RF Phase Settings
The phase in sinusoidal signals defines the initial angle at its origin.
Access:
1. Select "Frequency" > "Phase".
In the "RF Phase" tab, you can determine the delta phase value and reset the
phase to this reference.
2. Observe the information on the home screen, "Frequency" tile.
The "Frequency" tile indicates used reference frequency, current frequency offset
and multiplier values, and the delta phase value.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
72
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration
RF Phase Settings
The remote commands required to define the settings are described in Chapter 12.15.9, "SOURce:PHASe Subsystem", on page 432.
Settings
Delta Phase...................................................................................................................73
Reset Delta Phase Display........................................................................................... 73
Delta Phase
Sets the phase of the RF signal.
The current phase of the signal is used as the reference.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe on page 433
Reset Delta Phase Display
Adopts the selected "Delta Phase" value as the current value, and resets delta phase
to 0 degrees.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe:REFerence on page 433
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
73
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Types and Signal Sources
4 Analog Modulations
The R&S SMA100B supports AM (amplitude modulation), FM (frequency modulation),
ΦM (phase modulation (PhiM)), and also PULM (pulse modulation). It generates low
frequency signals (LF) as sine, triangle, trapezoidal or square (pulse) waveform, that
can be output and further processed by a downstream instrument.
4.1 Required Options
R&S SMA100B base unit equipped with the following options:
●
Option frequency (R&S SMAB-B10x)
●
Option pulse modulator (R&S SMAB-K22)
●
Option pulse generator (R&S SMAB-K23)
(supports generation of single and double pulse signals)
●
Option multi-function generator (R&S SMAB-K24)
●
Option pulse train generator (R&S SMAB-K27)
(requires R&S SMAB-K23)
●
Option AM/FM/PhiM, up to 6 GHz (R&S SMAB-K720)
For more information, see data sheet.
4.2 Modulation Types and Signal Sources
Radio transmitters do not transmit an audio signal directly. Instead, they modulate the
audio signal onto a continuous wave (CW) carrier with much higher frequency.
A CW carrier has a sinusoidal waveform with constant amplitude and constant frequency. Modulating a signal onto the carrier means varying a property of the carrier
according to the modulating signal. The three basic modulation types FM, AM and
PhiM for example, vary one property of the carrier proportional to the instantaneous
amplitude of the modulating signal.
Signal sources
If fully equipped, the R&S SMA100B modulates signals from the following sources:
●
Internal modulation source
–
Two LF generators
Supplie sinusoidal and square waves in the frequency range 0.1 Hz to 10 MHz
and selectable shapes.
The R&S SMA100B generates any other modulation signal shapes (triangle,
trapezoid and square wave or a pulse signal) by converting the sinusoidal signal
–
Multifunction generator and a noise generator
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
74
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Types and Signal Sources
A further LF generator for use as a second modulation source or to generate a
noise modulation signal
The noise generator supplies white noise with selectable bandwidth and level
distribution.
–
●
High-performance pulse generator
Generates double pulse or pulse train signals.
External modulation source
–
Amplitude, frequency or phase modulation signals are input at the EXT connector
–
Pulse modulation signals, at the PULSE EXT connector.
Signal output
You can perform the AM, FM and PhiM with the signal of any of the provided sources.
Moreover, you can combine two modulation signals and generate a two-tone signal.
Regardless of the signal source, the generated signal, can be output for further processing in a downstream instrument.
Current configuration is indicated in the Chapter 4.4.8, "Overview", on page 104 dialog; the output signal routing can be changed, too.
Input and output connectors
Direction
Modulation
Connector
Required option
Output
Pulse generator
PULSE SYNC
R&S SMAB-K22
Pulse generator
PULSE VIDEO
R&S SMAB-K22
Loop through of pulse signal from PULSE
EXT
LF generator
LF
Pulse modulation form internal signal
PULSE EXT
R&S SMAB-K22/-K23
AM, FM, PhiM
EXT 1/21)
R&S SMAB-K720
Pulse modulation form external source*)
PULSE EXT2)
R&S SMAB-K23/-K24/-K27
External trigger or gate
Input
signal*)
*)
External trigger signal and external signal for the pulse modulation cannot be used
simultaneously, because these signals are expected at the same connector PULSE
EXT. Signal polarity and impedance are the same for both signals.
Signal characteristics:
●
1)
●
2)
The external modulation signal must have a voltage of US = 1 V (UEFF = 0.707
V) to achieve the displayed modulation depth and range.
The input voltage should not exceed 1 V, otherwise modulation distortions can
occur.
The input shows some hysteresis with threshold levels of -0.5 V/5 V
The voltage must not exceed 10 V
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
75
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
Interactions and characteristics
●
Some modulations exclude each other and cannot be performed simultaneously.
See Chapter 4.8.1, "Simultaneous Operation of Several Modulations",
on page 108
●
The settings of the modulation signal affect all analog modulations that use an
internal modulation source.
●
In sweep mode, LF frequency sweep is possible.
4.3 Activating Analog Modulations
► Use one of the following:
●
●
●
Select "Modulation > Amplitude Modulation/Frequency Modualtion/Phase Modualtion > State > On".
Select "Modulation > MOD ON".
Press the MOD ON/OFF key.
MOD ON/OFF
Activate one or more analog modulations and press the MOD ON/OFF key to toggle
the state of all them.
Pressing the key again restores the status that was active before the last switch-off.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:MODulation[:ALL][:STATe] on page 365
4.4 Modulation Settings
Access:
► Select "Modulation" > "Modulation Sources".
The "Modulation" dialog contains all functions and settings to configure the analog
modulations, the LF signal sources for performing a modulation, and the LF signal
output.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in:
● Chapter 12.15.1.2, "SOURce:AM Subsystem", on page 366
● Chapter 12.15.1.3, "SOURce:FM Subsystem", on page 369
● Chapter 12.15.1.4, "SOURce:PM Subsystem", on page 373
● Chapter 12.15.1.5, "SOURce:PULM Subsystem", on page 377
● Chapter 12.15.5, "SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem", on page 403
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
76
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
4.4.1 Pulse Modulation
Option: see Chapter 4.1, "Required Options", on page 74.
Access:
► Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Modualtion".
The "Pulse Modulation" dialog contains all parameters required to configure pulse
modulation and pulse signal generation.
It also displays the pulse signal graphically.
For an overview of the supported signals sources and related connectors, see Chapter 4.2, "Modulation Types and Signal Sources", on page 74.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12.15.1.5, "SOURce:PULM Subsystem", on page 377.
Settings:
State..............................................................................................................................77
Source...........................................................................................................................78
Transition Type............................................................................................................. 78
Video Polarity................................................................................................................ 78
State
Activates pulse modulation and triggers the following automatic settings:
●
●
Pulse generator is activated.
The signal is output at the PULSE VIDEO connector.
To deactivate the signal output, set Pulse Output State > "Off".
ALC is set to "Table & On".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:STATe on page 381
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
77
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
Source
Selects between the internal "Pulse Generator" or an "External" pulse signal for the
modulation.
"Pulse Generator"
Selects the internal generator.
See Pulse Generator.
"External"
Modulation source is fed to the input connector.
See "Signal sources" on page 74.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:SOURce on page 378
Transition Type
Selects between "Fast" or "Smoothed" slew rate (slope).
"Fast"
Enables fast transitions with shortest rise and fall times.
"Smoothed"
Flattens the slew rate, resulting in longer rise / fall times. Use this
mode if you are working with devices that are sensitive to steep
slopes.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TTYPe on page 381
Video Polarity
Sets the polarity of the internally generated pulse video (modulating) signal, related to
the RF (modulated) signal.
This signal synchronizes the pulse generator signal and the RF signal.
"Normal"
The video signal level follows the RF signal, that means it is high and
low simultaneously with the RF signal.
"Inverse"
Inverts the polarity between the video and the RF signal, that means
it is high, when RF is low, and vice versa.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:OUTPut:VIDeo:POLarity on page 381
4.4.2 FM, PhiM and FM Modulation Settings
Option: R&S SMAB-K720
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
78
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
Access:
► Select "Modulation" > "Amplitude Modulation/Frequency Modualtion/Phase Modualtion".
The "FM", "Φ" and "AM" tabs contain the parameters per modulation type.
Source
State..............................................................................................................................79
Source...........................................................................................................................80
FM settings....................................................................................................................80
└ Deviation......................................................................................................... 80
└ Ratio Path2/Path1...........................................................................................80
└ Mode............................................................................................................... 81
PhiM.............................................................................................................................. 81
└ Deviation......................................................................................................... 81
└ Ratio Path2/Path1...........................................................................................81
└ Mode............................................................................................................... 81
AM settings................................................................................................................... 82
└ AM Depth........................................................................................................ 82
└ Ratio Path2/Path1...........................................................................................82
State
Activates a modulation.
Note: Some analog modulations cannot be run simultaneously, see Chapter 4.8.1,
"Simultaneous Operation of Several Modulations", on page 108.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
79
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:STATe on page 368
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>:STATe on page 373
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM<ch>:STATe on page 376
Source
Selects the LF signal source.
You can vary the signal sources for each of the modulations.
"LF Generator1/2"
Selects one of internally generated LF signals.
See Chapter 4.4.6.1, "Source > LF Generator Settings",
on page 96.
"External 1/2"
Selects an externally supplied LF signal.
"Noise Generator"
Selects the internally generated noise signal.
See Chapter 4.4.6.3, "Source > Noise Generator Settings",
on page 101.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:SOURce on page 368
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>:SOURce on page 372
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM<ch>:SOURce on page 375
FM settings
The following settings are dedicated to FM.
Deviation ← FM settings
Sets the frequency modulation deviation in Hz.
The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency and the selected modulation
mode (see data sheet).
Maximal possible deviation is selected automatically, if one of the following applies:
● The selected deviation is too high for the particular frequency
● The selected frequency is outside of the range where deviation is possible.
A warning message indicates this situation, too.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>[:DEViation] on page 371
Ratio Path2/Path1 ← FM settings
Sets the deviation ratio (path2 to path1) in per cent.
Example:
If the deviation in path1 is 10 kHz and the ratio is 50%, the deviation in path 2 is automatically set to 5 kHz.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:RATio on page 372
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
80
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
Mode ← FM settings
Selects the mode of the frequency modulation.
"High Bandwidth"
The maximum range for modulation bandwidth is available.
"Low Noise"
Phase modulation with phase noise and spurious characteristics
close to CW mode. The range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation is reduced (see data sheet).
To reduce the phase noise further, set the Main PLL Bandwidth =
"Narrow"
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:MODE on page 371
PhiM
The following settings are dedicated to PhiM.
Deviation ← PhiM
Sets the phase modulation deviation in radians or degrees.
The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency and the selected modulation
mode (see data sheet).
Maximal possible deviation is selected automatically, if one of the following applies:
● The selected deviation is too high for the particular frequency
● The selected frequency is outside of the range where deviation is possible.
A warning message indicates this situation, too.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:PM<ch>[:DEViation] on page 376
Ratio Path2/Path1 ← PhiM
Sets the deviation ratio (path2 to path1) in per cent.
Example:
If the deviation in path1 is 10 rad and the ratio is 50%, the deviation in path 2 is automatically set to 5 rad.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:RATio on page 375
Mode ← PhiM
Selects the mode of the phase modulation.
"High Bandwidth"
The maximum range for modulation bandwidth and PhiM deviation is
available.
However, phase noise increases at low frequencies, and the range of
PhiM deviation is limited. This mode is suitable if you process high
frequencies.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
81
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
"High Deviation"
The maximum range for PhiM deviation is available.
Phase noise is improved for low frequencies compared to the default
mode. The range for modulation frequency is limited (see data sheet).
This mode is suitable for low modulation frequencies and/or high
PhiM deviation.
"Low Noise"
Frequency modulation with phase noise and spurious characteristics
close to CW mode. The range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation is reduced (see data sheet).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:MODE on page 374
AM settings
The following settings are dedicated to AM.
AM Depth ← AM settings
Determines the depth of the modulation signal in percent.
The depth is limited by the maximum peak envelope power (PEP).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>[:DEPTh] on page 369
Ratio Path2/Path1 ← AM settings
Sets the deviation ratio (path2 to path1) in per cent.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:RATio on page 367
4.4.3 Pulse Generator
Option: see Chapter 4.1, "Required Options", on page 74.
Access:
► Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Modualtion > Pulse Generator".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
82
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
The "Pulse Generator" tab contains the settings for creating the pulse modulation
signal internally.
●
●
●
4.4.3.1
Pulse Generator > General Settings....................................................................... 83
Pulse Generator > Pulse Train Settings..................................................................87
Import/Export List Files........................................................................................... 91
Pulse Generator > General Settings
Access:
► Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Modulation > Pulse Generator".
Settings
Pulse Mode................................................................................................................... 83
Trigger Mode.................................................................................................................84
Pulse Period..................................................................................................................86
Pulse Width................................................................................................................... 86
Double Pulse Width.......................................................................................................87
Pulse Delay................................................................................................................... 87
Double Pulse Delay.......................................................................................................87
Pulse Output State........................................................................................................ 87
Show Connector............................................................................................................87
Pulse Output Polarity.................................................................................................... 87
Pulse Mode
Sets the operating mode of the pulse generator. Depending on the selection, the
instrument displays the associated parameters.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
83
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
"Single"
Generates a single pulse in one pulse period.
"Double"
Generates two pulses in one pulse period.
"Train"
Option: R&S SMAB-K27
Generates a user-defined pulse train.
See Chapter 4.4.3.2, "Pulse Generator > Pulse Train Settings",
on page 87.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:MODE on page 380
Trigger Mode
Selects between continuous triggering or triggering initiated by a trigger event from an
external signal.
For an overview of the used connectors, see "Input and output connectors"
on page 75.
"Auto"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
Generates the modulation signal continuously.
84
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
"Ext Triggered" Generates the signal each time an external trigger event occurs.
Example: Generation of single pulse signal ("Pulse Mode = Single") using "Trigger Mode = Ext Triggered"
1
= External trigger signal input with "Trigger Input Polarity = Normal" (the positive
slope is active)
2
= Sync signal
3
= Pulse signal
Δt
= Typically 50 ns, see data sheet (trigger delay between the trigger and the sync
signal start)
delay = "Pulse Delay = 100 ns"
PW = "Pulse Width = 100 ns"
Example: Generation of double pulse signal ("Pulse Mode = Double") using "Trigger Mode = Ext Triggered"
1
2
3
a
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
= External trigger signal input with "Trigger Input Polarity = Normal" (the positive
slope is active)
= Sync signal
= Pulse signal
= Trigger signal during double pulse generation is without effect
85
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
Δt
= Typically 50 ns, see data sheet (trigger delay between the trigger and the sync
signal start)
delay = "Double Pulse Delay = 200 ns"; the first pulse starts without a delay
PW = "Double Pulse Width = 100 ns"
"Ext Single"
Generates the signal triggered by an external trigger event.
"Ext Gated"
Generates the signal triggered by an external gate signal.
Example: Generation of single pulse signal ("Pulse Mode = Single") using "Trigger Mode = Ext Gated"
1
= External trigger signal input with "Trigger Input Polarity = Normal" (the positive
slope is active)
2
= Sync signal
3
= Pulse signal
Δt
= Typically 50 ns, see data sheet (trigger delay between the trigger and the
sync signal start)
delay = "Pulse Delay = 100 ns"
PW
= "Pulse Width = 100 ns"
period = "Pulse Period = 300 ns" (time between the pulse start of two consecutive pulses)
a
= Gate active duration (pulses are generated during the gate active part)
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRIGger:MODE on page 381
Pulse Period
Sets the repetition rate of the generated pulse signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:PERiod on page 378
Pulse Width
Sets the pulse duration of the generated pulse signal.
Note: The pulse width must be at least 20 ns less than the set pulse period.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:WIDTh on page 382
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
86
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
Double Pulse Width
Sets the width of the second pulse.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:WIDTh on page 379
Pulse Delay
Sets the pulse delay. The pulse delay determines the time that elapses after a trigger
event before pulse modulation starts. The pulse delay is not effective for double pulse
generation.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DELay on page 379
Double Pulse Delay
Sets the delay from the start of the first pulse to the start of the second pulse.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:DELay on page 379
Pulse Output State
Activates the output of the pulse modulation signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:OUTPut[:STATe] on page 432
Show Connector
Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the
front/rear panel of the instrument.
Pulse Output Polarity
Sets the polarity of the pulse output signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:OUTPut:POLarity on page 431
4.4.3.2
Pulse Generator > Pulse Train Settings
Option: see Chapter 4.1, "Required Options", on page 74.
Access:
1. Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Modulation > Pulse Generator" > "Pulse Mode =
Train".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
87
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
2. Select "Pulse Train Data".
3. Select an existing file or select "New" to create one.
4. Define the filename.
Select "Edit Pulse Train Data", if the file is empty or to control and change the values.
5. In the "Edit Pulse Train Data" dialog, enter the pulse on/off times and pulse repetition values.
6. Select "Save".
A pulse train is a sequence of pulses with user-defined repetition, and pulse on and
off times. Once defined, pulse train settings can be saved in a file. The filename is
user-definable; the file extension (*.pulstrn) is assigned automatically.
When a file is selected, the filename is indicated.
Possible ways to configuring a pulse train
You can configure a pulse train in the following ways:
●
●
Internally
–
Use the built-in editor table editor, see in the "Pulse Generator > Pulse Train"
dialog.
Once defined, pulse train settings can be saved in a file. For example, to
exchange configuration between instruments or to modify the file content with
an external program and reload them again.
The filename is user-definable; the file extension is *.pulstrn.
–
Using the corresponding remote-control commands.
Note that you have to create a pulse train file first.
Externally
Create a pulse train sequence as a CSV file with Microsoft Excel, with a Notepad
or a similar tool, save it with the predefined extension. Transfer the file to and load
it into the instrument.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
88
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
Pulse train ASCII file format
Files describing pulse trains are simple files in text or comma-separated value (CSV)
file format. The filename is user-definable; the file extension is *.csv or *.txt.
The file contains a list of pulse definition values, one row per pulse; a new line indicator
separates the pulses. Pulses are defined with their pulse on time, pulse off time given
in us and number of repetitions.
Example: Pulse train file content (*.txt file)
0.0001,0.0005,2
0.00025,0.0005,1
0.0001,0.0003,3
For file handling, use the standard functions in the "File Manager", see Chapter 9.8,
"Using the File Manager", on page 204.
Settings
Pulse Train Data........................................................................................................... 89
Edit Pulse Train Data.................................................................................................... 89
Data handling keys .......................................................................................................90
└ Goto................................................................................................................ 90
└ Edit..................................................................................................................90
└ Fill with Sensor................................................................................................90
└ Save As/Save................................................................................................. 90
Fill Table Automatically ................................................................................................ 90
Pulse Train Data
Accesses the standard "File Select" function of the instrument. The provided navigation
possibilities in the dialog are self-explanatory.
Pulse train files are files with predefined file extension *.pulstrn. When a file is
selected, the dialog indicates the filename.
You can create the file internally in the table editor or externally.
● To select an existing file, select "Select List > navigate to the file *.pulstrn > Select"
● Use the general editor function to create internally new file or to edit an existing
one.
● Use the standard file manager function to load externally created files to the instrument.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:CATalog? on page 384
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:SELect on page 385
Edit Pulse Train Data
Accesses the build-in table editor to define a new pulse train file or edit an existing one.
"On-Time, µs/Off-Time,µs"
Sets the pulse on and pulse off time.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
89
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
"Count"
Sets the number of repetitions of an "On-/ Off-Time" value pair.
Pulses with "Count = 0" are ignored.
Use this method to skip value pairs temporarily, without deleting them
from the table.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime on page 384
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime on page 384
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition on page 385
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DELete on page 384
Data handling keys
Standard functions for file and data handling.
Note: Save a list only after filling both columns (frequency and level), otherwise the
entries are lost.
Goto ← Data handling keys
Selects a row for editing.
Edit ← Data handling keys
Enables you to insert, or delete a row or ranges within a list, and provides access to a
dialog for automatic filling.
Fill with Sensor ← Data handling keys
In "UCOR" mode, opens a dialog to configure the settings for automatic filling of user
correction data with an R&S NRP power sensor
See Chapter 6.3.3, "Fill with Sensor", on page 154
Save As/Save ← Data handling keys
Stores the list in a file with user-defined name and predefined file extension. To save a
copy or create a file, use the "Save as" function.
Fill Table Automatically
Provides parameters for filling a table automatically with user-defined values.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
90
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
The settings are interdependent; the affected parameters change accordingly if you set
a value.
To fill the table, select "Fill".
Note: Save a list only after filling all columns and rows, otherwise the entries are lost.
"From / Range"
Defines the start line and number of the row to be filled.
"Select Column to Fill"
Selects the respective value, including the unit.
"Start / End Value"
Provides the default values corresponding to the selected column.
4.4.3.3
"Increment"
Determines the step size.
"Fill"
Fills the table.
Fill both columns and then save the list. Otherwise the entries are
lost.
Import/Export List Files
Access:
1. Select one of the following:
a) "Sweep" > "List mode".
b) "Level" > "Level > User Correction".
c) "Modulation > Pulse Modulation > Pulse Generator > Pulse Mode = Train".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
91
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
2. Select "Import/Export".
Figure 4-1: Im-/Export dialog (example with UCOR settings)
The "Import/Export" dialog contains all functions and settings to import externally
created list data or to export it accordingly. You can process and store a list in the
formats *.txt (ASCII), or *.csv (plain text with identical sequence of fields). The
table separators and the decimal floating point numbers are customizable.
Settings
Mode ............................................................................................................................ 92
ASCII File Settings........................................................................................................ 92
Select Source/Select Destination..................................................................................93
Select Source / Select ASCII Destination..................................................................... 93
Import / Export...............................................................................................................94
Mode
Selects import or export of a data list file. The provided parameters vary according to
the selected mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE on page 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE on page 395
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE on page 386
ASCII File Settings
Defines the format and the separators of the associated data file.
"Extension"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
Selects *.csv or *.txt format.
92
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
"Decimal
Point"
Sets "Point" (dot) or "Comma" as the decimal separator used in the
ASCII data with floating-point numerals.
"Column Separator"
Sets the separator between the columns in an ASCII table.
Available are: "Tab", "Semicolon", "Comma" or "Space".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 427
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal on page 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn on page 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 394
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal
on page 394
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn
on page 394
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 386
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal
on page 386
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn
on page 387
Select Source/Select Destination
In "Mode > Import", access the file select dialog that provides standard file handling
functions.
Where:
● "Select ASCII Source": defines the file to be loaded (imported)
● "Select ASCII Destination": selects the filename the loaded file is saved as
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 427
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 393
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 394
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 387
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 387
Select Source / Select ASCII Destination
In "Mode > Export", access the file select dialog that provides standard file handling
functions.
Where:
● "Select Source": selects the file to be exported
● "Select ASCII Destination": defines the filename and the file path the exported file
is saved as
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:SELect on page 429
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:SELect on page 395
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:SELect on page 387
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
93
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
Import / Export
Imports or exports the selected data list file, depending on the current mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:EXECute on page 427
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute on page 395
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:EXECute on page 388
4.4.4 Pulse Graph
Option: see Chapter 4.1, "Required Options", on page 74.
Access:
► Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Modualtion > Pulse Graph".
The pulse graph is the graphical representation of the current pulse signal.
The height of the bars corresponds to the selected amplitude of the pulse signal.
Zooming
You can zoom into the diagram to visualize the graph in more detail:
● "Zoom Position": Sets the focus in the time axis where to enlarge the graph.
● "Zoom In": Enlarges the graph at the selected position. You can repeat "Zoom In"
at any depth.
● "Zoom Out" for the reverse operation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
94
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
4.4.5 Pulse External/Trigger Settings
Access:
► Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Modulation > Pulse External /Trigger".
The dialog comprises the characteristics of the PULSE EXT connector.
This connector is common for the pulse generator and the pulse modulator. For an
overview, see "Input and output connectors" on page 75.
Settings
Polarity.......................................................................................................................... 95
Impedance.................................................................................................................... 95
Threshold...................................................................................................................... 95
Show Connector............................................................................................................96
Polarity
Sets the polarity of the active slope of a pulse input signal, that is the external pulse
modulation signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:POLarity on page 379
Impedance
Sets the input impedance.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:IMPedance on page 380
Threshold
Sets the high/low threshold in volts for the signal at the PULSE EXT connector.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:THReshold on page 380
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
95
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
Show Connector
Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the
front/rear panel of the instrument.
4.4.6 FM, AM and PhiM Modulation Sources
Access:
► Select "Modulation > Modulation Sources".
In the "Sources" tab, you can configure an LF modulation signal for performing
analog modulations. It includes the setting parameters of the internal LF-and multifunction generators, the noise generator, and an external signal source.
●
●
●
4.4.6.1
Source > LF Generator Settings............................................................................. 96
Source > External Settings................................................................................... 100
Source > Noise Generator Settings...................................................................... 101
Source > LF Generator Settings
Access:
► Select "Modulation" > "Modulation Sources > LF Generator".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
96
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
The internal LF signal can be used as modulation signal source for any of the analog modulations. The LF signal applies to all modulations which use the internal
modulation signal. Therefore, any modification of the LF signal influences immediately all currently active modulations.
Settings
State (LF frequency sweep).......................................................................................... 97
Shape............................................................................................................................97
Frequency..................................................................................................................... 98
Period............................................................................................................................98
Pulse Width................................................................................................................... 99
Pulse Duty Cycle...........................................................................................................99
Triangle Rise................................................................................................................. 99
Trapezoid Rise / Fall..................................................................................................... 99
Trapezoid High..............................................................................................................99
State (LF frequency sweep)
Activates the generation of an LF frequency sweep signal in the "LF Frequency" dialog.
In the "Sources" tab of the analog modulations, the instrument shows the current state
of the LF frequency sweep.
Note: Active sweep mode deactivates other sweeps or lists and vice versa.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE on page 407
Shape
Selects the waveform shape of the LF signal.
The "Triangle" and "Trapezoid" waveforms require option R&S SMAB-K24.
"Sine"
1 = Period
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
97
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
"Pulse"
1 = Pulse period
2 = Pulse width
"Triangle"
1 = Triangle period
2 = Triangle rise
"Trapezoid"
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
Trapezoid period
Trapezoid rise
Trapezoid fall
Trapezoid high
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe on page 410
Frequency
Sets the frequency of the LF generator for sine signals.
Set the signal shape with the parameter Shape.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:FREQuency on page 406
Period
Sets the repetition rate of the generated LF signal for triangle, trapezoid or pulse
shapes, see Shape.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
98
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
The period of sine signals is calculated from the selected Frequency
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:PERiod on page 412
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRIangle:PERiod on page 412
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:PERiod on page 410
Pulse Width
Sets the pulse duration of the generated pulse signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:WIDTh on page 411
Pulse Duty Cycle
Sets the ratio between the pulse duration and the pulse period in percent.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:DCYCle on page 410
Triangle Rise
Sets the time required for the triangle signal to change from low level to high level.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRIangle:RISE on page 412
Trapezoid Rise / Fall
Sets the time required for the trapezoid signal to change from low level to high level,
and vice versa.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:RISE on page 412
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:FALL on page 411
Trapezoid High
Sets how long the trapezoid signal is at high level.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:HIGH on page 411
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
99
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
4.4.6.2
Source > External Settings
Access:
► Select "Modulation" > "Modulation Sources > External".
The "External" settings section contains all parameters required to configure the
signal of an externally supplied LF signal.
Settings
Coupling (AC/DC)....................................................................................................... 100
Impedance.................................................................................................................. 100
Bandwidth................................................................................................................... 100
Show Connector..........................................................................................................101
Coupling (AC/DC)
Selects the coupling mode (AC or DC) for the external signal.
"AC"
Disconnects the DC voltage component and uses only the AC component of the modulation signal.
"DC"
Uses the modulation signal with both components, AC and DC.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:COUPling on page 402
Impedance
Sets the impedance for the externally supplied signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:IMPedance<ch> on page 403
Bandwidth
Displays the bandwidth of the external LF signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
100
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:BANDwidth? on page 406
Show Connector
Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the
front/rear panel of the instrument.
4.4.6.3
Source > Noise Generator Settings
Access:
► Select "Modulation" > "Modulation Sources > Noise Generator".
The "Noise Generator" settings contain all parameters to configure the signal of the
internal noise generator.
Settings
Distribution.................................................................................................................. 101
Bandwidth................................................................................................................... 101
Distribution
Selects the distribution of the noise power density.
"Gaussian"
Generates the noise power according to a Gaussian distribution.
"Equal"
Generates an even distributed noise.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:DISTribution on page 430
Bandwidth
Sets the noise bandwidth as distinct value.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
101
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
Bandwidth range
Step size
100 kHz to 1 MHz
100 kHz
1 MHz to 5 MHz
1 MHz
5 MHz to 10 MHz
5 MHz
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:BANDwidth|BWIDth on page 429
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:BWIDth:STATe on page 430
4.4.7 LF Signal Output Settings
Access:
► Select "Modulation" > "LF Output".
In the "Output" tab, you can configure the signal at the LF output, determine the
output voltage or add a DC offset.
Settings:
State............................................................................................................................103
Source.........................................................................................................................103
Output Voltage............................................................................................................ 103
DC-Offset.................................................................................................................... 103
Show Connector..........................................................................................................103
Noise Generator..........................................................................................................103
└ Noise Density................................................................................................104
└ Noise Level................................................................................................... 104
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
102
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
State
Activates the output of the LF signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>[:STATe] on page 409
Source
Selects the signal to be output at the LF connector.
Use the "Show Connector" function to find out where this connector is located.
"LF Generator 1/2"
Selects one of internally generated LF signals.
"AM"
Option: R&S SMAB-K720
Selects the AM signal.
"FM/PhiM"
Option: R&S SMAB-K720
Selects the signal also used by the frequency or phase modulations.
"Noise Generator"
Selects the internally generated noise signal.
"External 1/2"
Selects one of the externally supplied LF signals.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:SOURce on page 408
Output Voltage
Sets the voltage (peak) of the LF output.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:VOLTage on page 409
DC-Offset
Adds a DC offset to the LF output signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:OFFSet on page 408
Show Connector
Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the
front/rear panel of the instrument.
Noise Generator
Access:
● Select "Modulation" > "LF Output > Noise Generator".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
103
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
Modulation Settings
Noise Density ← Noise Generator
Indicates the level of the noise signal for a bandwidth of 1 Hz (relative).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:LEVel:RELative? on page 430
Noise Level ← Noise Generator
Indicates the level of the noise signal per Hz within the total bandwidth (absolute).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:LEVel[:ABSolute]? on page 431
4.4.8 Overview
Option: AM and FM/PM require R&S SMAB-K720
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
104
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
How to Generate an Amplitude Modulated Signal
Access:
► Select "Modulation" > "Modulation Sources > Overview".
Blue color
Gray color
Thick line
Dash line
"LF Out"
=
=
=
=
=
Active modulation (AM and FM/PM)
Inactive modulation
Routing of the active modulation (FM/PM)
Inactive modulation
Indicates the signal output: observe both, the source and the thick input line to the block
(in this example, the FM/PMM signal is output)
The "Overview" tab is an interactive diagram that indicates the active modulations
and the signal being output. Here you can:
● Select the output signal ("LF Out"); the setting acts as the parameter "LF Output Source"
● Select the source for each modulation and modulation path; the setting acts as
the parameter "Source"
● Activate modulation in one or two paths; the setting acts as the parameter
"State"
To generate a two-tone signal composed form the two paths of the same modulation type, activate both paths.
4.5 How to Generate an Amplitude Modulated Signal
The following examples use the internal LF generator.
Setting the frequency and level of the RF signal
1. Press PRESET to start from a defined state.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
105
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
How to Generate a Pulse Modulated Signal
2. In the status bar, set "Frequency = 2 GHz".
3. Set "Level = -20 dBm".
Configuring the modulation signal (LF generator)
1. Select "Modulation" > "Modulation Source".
2. In the "Sources" tab, select "Shape > Sine".
3. Set "Frequency = 20 kHz".
The period is calculated automatically and indicates "Period = 50.00 µs".
Configuring the amplitude modulation settings
1. In "Modulation" dialog, select the "AM" tab.
2. Set "Depth = 30%"
3. Set "Source = LF Generator1"
4. Select "AM > State = On" to activate the modulation.
5. Set "Level > RF ON" to enable signal output.
4.6 How to Generate a Pulse Modulated Signal
The following example uses the internal pulse generator.
Setting the frequency and level of the RF signal
1. Press PRESET.
2. In the status bar, set "Frequency = 4 GHz".
3. Set "Level = -25 dBm".
Configuring the pulse generator
1. Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Generator".
2. Select "Pulse Mode = Double".
3. Set "Pulse Period = 10 us".
4. Set "Pulse Width = 2 us".
5. Set "Double Pulse Width = 1.2 us".
6. Set "Double Pulse Delay = 4.5 us".
7. In the "Pulse Generator" dialog, select "Pulse Output State = On".
8. Select "Trigger Settings > Trigger Mode = Auto"
9. Observe the graph on the "Pulse Graph" tab.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
106
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
How to Generate a Pulse Train Modulated Signal
Enabling pulse modulation
1. Select the "Pulse Modulation" tab.
2. Set "State = On".
3. Set "Level > RF ON" to enable signal output.
4.7 How to Generate a Pulse Train Modulated Signal
The following example uses the internal pulse generator.
Setting the frequency and level of the RF signal
1. Press PRESET.
2. In the status bar, set "Frequency = 6 GHz".
3. Set "Level = -25 dBm".
Configuring the pulse generator
1. Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Generator".
2. Select "Pulse Mode = Train".
3. Select "Pulse Train Data".
4. Select an existing file or select "New" to create one.
5. Define the filename.
Select "Edit Pulse Train Data", if the file is empty or to control and change the values.
6. In the "Edit Pulse Train Data" dialog, enter the pulse on/off times and pulse repetition values.
For example:
● "On-Time = 500 us", "OFF-Time = 2 ms", "Count = 2"
● "On-Time = 100 us", "OFF-Time = 2.5 ms", "Count = 1"
● "On-Time = 10 us", "OFF-Time = 50 us", "Count = 10"
7. Select "Save".
Close the dialog.
8. In the "Pulse Generator" dialog, select "Pulse Output State = On".
9. Select "Trigger Settings > Trigger Mode = Auto"
10. Observe the graph on the "Pulse Graph" tab.
Enabling pulse modulation
1. Select the "Pulse Modulation" tab.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
107
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations
References
2. Set "State = On".
3. Set "Level > RF ON" to enable signal output.
4.8 References
4.8.1 Simultaneous Operation of Several Modulations
The table shows the modulations and operating modes that can be activated simultaneously (+) or which deactivate each other (-).
AM
FM
PhiM
Pulse
Amplitude modulation (AM)
/
+
+
-
Frequency modulation (FM)
+
/
-
+
Phase modulation (PhiM)
+
-
/
+
Pulse modulation
-
+
+
/
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
108
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
5 Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep
Mode
The operating modes "List" and "Sweep" allow you to generate an RF signal having
periodically varying frequencies or amplitudes.
A signal generated with varying parameters scans a certain range of varying values of
a parameter, with defined start and end points, and can be arbitrarily repeated.
The R&S SMA100B supports two basic methods:
●
Sweep mode
The instrument generates an RF signal which varies its frequency or level values
cyclically between the start and end values. The values change according to a predefined waveform. Intermediate values are calculated internally by linear or logarithmic interpolation.
Figure 5-1: Schematic representation of a signal generated in sweep mode (RF Freq Sweep)
The main application field of the "Sweep" mode is to determine the frequency
response or level-dependent behavior of the DUT.
●
List mode
The instrument generates the signal step-by-step, based on frequency and amplitude value pairs with individual step sizes. While in sweep mode the frequency or
the level values change, in list mode you can vary both parameters simultaneously . The frequency and level values do not need to have ascending or descending order, they can vary arbitrarily.
You can use a global dwell time, which means that the time interval is constant for
all steps of the list, or vary the dwell time for each value pair.
In this mode, the graph represents the frequency and power value pairs, and the
dwell time of the corresponding index entry of the list mode table.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
109
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
Figure 5-2: Schematic representation of a signal generated in list mode (global dwell time)
This mode is especially useful in high-speed measurements with fast changing frequency and level settings.
Interactions and characteristics
●
Activating the list mode automatically deactivates all RF and LF sweeps and vice
versa.
●
In list processing mode, the frequency and level display in the status bar is disabled.
●
The sweep modes only work with a global dwell time, that means the time intervals
are constant during signal generation.
●
If you want to hold a running sweep at a specific frequency or level value, enter the
value in the status bar. The sweep stops immediately.
●
We recommend that you switch off the display update for optimum sweep performance, especially with short dwell times
See Chapter 10.1.2, "Display Update Settings", on page 220.
5.1 Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and
List Modes
In both operating modes "List" and "Sweep", triggering and signal generation follow the
same principle. The instrument generates the signal continuously (that means triggered automatically) or in individual steps (controlled manually by an internal or external trigger signal).
The instrument expects the trigger signal at the INST TRIG connector.
The figures in this section give an overview on the signal generation in the sweep and
list modes and the appropriate triggering. The figures show the signal state after acti-
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
110
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
vating the mode and the generation of the signal when a trigger event occurs. The relevant parameters and settings are briefly explained to each mode.
Each "Sweep" and "List" mode dialogs provides also a "Reset" function that sets the
signal to the initial situation (that is, the start value or the list begin). Depending on the
selected trigger mode, the signal generation proceeds accordingly.
The naming of the selection parameters in manual control (GUI) sometimes deviates
from the naming in the remote-control commands. In addition, the value names of the
selection parameters used in the signal generator partly differ from the SCPI syntax.
The instrument accepts all value names.
The correlation between the manual control and the corresponding remote control
commands, including the SCPI conform syntax are explained for each mode (see the
cross-reference tables).
See also the following programming examples on the sweep and list modes in remote
control:
●
Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 448
●
Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 403
●
Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 416
Auto mode (Sweep/List)
Figure 5-3: Auto mode (Sweep/List)
●
The instrument generates the signal continuously.
●
Trigger mode "Auto" is prerequisite. It causes the continuous generation of the
sweep signal.
●
Starts signal generation immediately with "State = On".
●
Switches automatically to the next sweep step when the Dwell time has elapsed.
●
Stops signal generation with "State = Off".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
111
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
Table 5-1: Cross-reference between manual and remote control in Auto mode (Sweep/List)
Manual control mode:
Remote commands
"Auto"
Rohde & Schwarz proprietary and [SCPI conform] value name
RF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce AUTO [IMMediate]
:SOURce<hw>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO
RF level sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce AUTO [IMMediate]
:SOURce<hw>:SWEep:POWer:MODE AUTO
LF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce AUTO [IMMediate]
:SOURce<hw>:LFOutput<ch>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:MODE AUTO
List
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce AUTO
Single / Extern Single mode (Sweep/List)
Figure 5-4: Single / Extern Single mode (sweep / list )
In single mode, you can specify, that the signal returns to the start value when a sweep
cycle has been completed.
See "The Retrace function" on page 117 for details.
●
The instrument generates a single sweep cycle.
●
Trigger mode "Manual". A trigger event initiates one sweep from the start value to
the end value.
●
"State = On" sets the signal to the start value: the sweep start frequency, the
sweep start power or the frequency-power value pair of the selected index in the
list.
●
Starts signal generation with a trigger event.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
112
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
●
Switches automatically to the next step when the Dwell time has elapsed.
●
Stops signal generation at the set end value and waits for the subsequent trigger
event.
●
Trigger sources:
●
–
The "Execute Single" function.
–
The corresponding remote control command.
–
An externally applied trigger signal.
"State = Off" stops the signal generation in sweep or list mode.
Table 5-2: Cross-reference between manual and remote control in Single / Extern Single modes
(Sweep/List)
Manual control mode:
Remote commands
"Single / Extern Single"
Rohde & Schwarz proprietary and [SCPI conform] value name
RF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce SINGle [BUS] "Single" or
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce EXTernal [EXTernal] "Extern Single"
:SOURce<hw>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO
RF level sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce SINGle [BUS] for "Single" or
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce EXTernal [EXTernal] for "Extern Single"
:SOURce<hw>:SWEep:POWer:MODE AUTO
LF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce SINGle [BUS] "Single" or
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce EXTernal [EXTernal] "Extern Single"
:SOURce<hw>:LFOutput<ch>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO
List
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce SINGle "Single" or
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal "Extern Single"
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:MODE AUTO
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
113
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
Step / Extern Step mode (Sweep/List)
Figure 5-5: Step / Extern Step mode (sweep / list )
●
The instrument generates the signal step-by-step.
●
Starts signal generation with "State = On".
●
Switches to the next step with a manual action.
If the end value is reached, signal generation starts again from the beginning.
●
Stops signal generation with "State = Off".
●
Trigger sources:
–
The rotary knob at the front panel.
–
The ARROW keys at the front panel.
–
The corresponding remote control commands.
–
An externally applied trigger signal.
To step through the sweep frequencies or levels:
●
●
In manual mode:
–
Set the Current Frequency or Current Level values
–
Use the UP and DOWN keys or the rotary knob
In remote control mode:
–
Use the commands [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual or
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual with the UP or DOWN parameter
Steps that would exceed the sweep range are ignored.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
114
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
Table 5-3: Cross-reference between manual and remote control in Step / Extern Step modes (Sweep/
List)
Manual control mode:
Remote commands
"Step / Extern Step"
Rohde & Schwarz proprietary and [SCPI conform] value name
RF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce SINGle [BUS] "Step" or
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce EXTernal [EXTernal] for "Extern
Step"
:SOURce<hw>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE STEP
RF level sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce SINGle [BUS] "Step" or
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce EXTernal [EXTenal] "Extern Step"
:SOURce<hw>:SWEep:POWer:MODE STEP
LF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce SINGle [BUS] "Step" or
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce EXTernal [EXTenal] "Extern Step"
:SOURce<hw>:LFOutput<ch>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE STEP
List
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce SINGle "Step" or
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal "Extern Step"
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:MODE STEP
Extern Start/Stop mode (sweep)
Figure 5-6: Extern Start/Stop mode (sweep)
●
The instrument generates the signal continuously.
●
Trigger mode "Auto" and "Sweep > State = On" are prerequisite.
●
State "On" sets the signal to the start value, that is one of the following:
●
–
Sweep start frequency
–
Sweep start power
–
Frequency-power value pair of the selected index in the list
Starts signal generation with a trigger event.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
115
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
●
Switches automatically to the next sweep step when the Dwell time has elapsed.
If the end value is reached, signal generation continues with the next sweep cycle.
●
Stops signal generation with the next external trigger event.
●
Starts the signal generation again with the next trigger event, beginning at the start
value.
●
"State = Off" stops the signal generation in sweep or list mode.
●
Trigger source: An externally applied trigger signal.
Table 5-4: Cross-reference between manual and remote control in Extern Start/Stop modes (sweep)
Manual control mode:
"Extern Start/Stop"
Remote commands
RF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce EAUTo [-]
Rohde & Schwarz proprietary and [SCPI conform] value name
:SOURce<hw>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO
RF level sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce EAUTo [-]
:SOURce<hw>:SWEep:POWer:MODE AUTO
LF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce EAUTo [-]
:SOURce<hw>:LFOutput<ch>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO
Manual mode (Sweep/List)
The manual mode only applies to remote control. It is not visible in the graphical user
interface of the instrument and is described here for completeness.
Figure 5-7: Manual mode in remote control (sweep / list )
●
The instrument generates the signal in steps.
●
Starts signal generation with "State = On".
●
Switches to the next step with a user defined setting via remote control.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
116
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
You can arbitrarily select a value within the range of the start and stop values by
setting the frequency, power or index using the corresponding remote control command. There is no ascending or descending order.
●
Stops signal generation with "State = Off".
Table 5-5: Remote control commands in manual mode (Sweep/List)
Remote control mode:
Remote commands
Manual
Rohde & Schwarz proprietary and [SCPI conform] value name
RF frequency sweep
:SOURce<hw>:FREQuency:MANUal <Manual>
RF level sweep
:SOURce<hw>:POWer:MANual <Manual>
LF frequency sweep
:SOURce<hw>:LFOUTput:FREQuency:MANual <Manual>
List
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:INDex <Index>
The Retrace function
Retrace is a function especially designed for "Single" sweep modes, when the sweep
signal follows a sawtooth shape. Working in this mode, the instrument performs a single sweep cycle when a trigger event occurs. The signal generation stops at the set
end point (stop frequency or stop level), and waits for the next trigger event.
In this state, the upper value of the signal remains at the output until the next cycle
starts. In particular, if you generate a level sweep signal, the high amplitude of the signal is output for a certain time. To protect the DUT from overload, the retrace function
immediately resets the signal value to the start value at the end of a sweep cycle. It
shifts down the power, or frequency value during the waiting period.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
117
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
About Sweep Mode
You can use the "Retrace" function if "Sweep > Mode = Single/External Single" and
"Shape = Sawtooth", see:
●
" Shape " on page 126
●
"Mode" on page 125
5.2 About Sweep Mode
In sweep mode, the signal generator scans the sweep range gradually from one point
to another, using a defined step width and following a triangle or sawtooth shape. This
mode also enables you to change direction, that means, it is possible to step backwards.
Configuration and operation of sweep mode signals
●
The R&S SMA100B generates a sweep signal by varying one of the following
parameters: the RF frequency, the LF frequency or the RF level.
●
In all sweep modes, you can perform a complete sweep cycle once, repeat the
cycle continuously or step through it gradually.
●
The instrument generates the sweep signal according to the settings of the associated sweep.
●
The "Reset Sweep" function sets the sweep to the start value.
Impact of changing the sweep mode during performance
If you change the sweep mode during the execution, the signal generator stops the
sweep and starts with the next trigger event at the initial value.
5.2.1 Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode
A sweep signal is a periodic signal that changes its frequency or level from a starting
value to an ending value in a defined time.
The R&S SMA100B provides various possibilities to configure a sweep signal. For
example, you can determine the sweep range by the start and end values, or based on
the start value and span. In any case, related parameters are adjusted accordingly.
The formulas below show how the sweep parameters correlate and the corresponding
calculation basis, by the frequency and offset settings. Apart from "Center Frequency",
"Span" and "Step_lin", the values apply accordingly to the level settings.
Table 5-6: Variables that are used in the following formulas
Variable
Description
Sweep range
Defined frequency or level value range
fCENTer
Defined center frequency
fSPAN
Defined extend of the sweep range
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
118
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
About Sweep Mode
Variable
Description
fOFFSet
Frequency offset
fSTARt
Start frequency of the sweep range
fSTOP
End frequency of the sweep range
f1
Current sweep frequency
f2
Next, subsequent sweep frequency
step_lin
Step width in linear scaling
step_log
Step width in logarithmic scaling
POINts
Number of steps within the sweep range
Sweep range
The sweep range is defined by a start and an end value. How the remaining parameters correlate is shown below.
Offset = 0
Sweep Range = fSTARt to fSTOP
fCENTer = (fSTARt + fSTOP)/2
fSPAN = (fSTOP - fSTARt)
Where:
fSTARt = fCENTer - (fSPAN/2)
fSTOP = fCENTer + (fSPAN/2)
Offset≠0
A defined offset also affects the sweep range and the center frequency. Therefore, the
set frequencies are only absolute values, if the Offset = 0. Offset ≠ 0 shifts the frequencies with the offset value:
Sweep Range = fSTARt + fOFFSet to fSTOP + fOFFSet
fCENTer = fCENTer+ fOFFSet
fSPAN = fSPAN + fOFFSet
The value range of the instrument is calculated as follows:
RFmin + fOFFSet to RFmax + fOFFSet
It is possible to set fSTARt > fSTOP and fSTARt < fSTOP, so that even a negative value is permitted for the "Span".
If you change the start and/or stop frequency, the span and center frequency change
accordingly, and vice versa.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
119
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
About List Mode
Sweep steps
In the following, you see how the sweep steps are calculated depending on the defined
spacing mode. The formulas show a frequency sweep, but apply to the level settings in
the same way.
The step width is added to the current value, to get the subsequent sweep step.
With linear scaling, the next frequency is calculated according to:
f2 = f1 + step_lin
In the logarithmic scaling, the step width is determined in per cent, as a constant fraction of the current frequency.
Successive frequencies are calculated as follows:
●
For fSTARt < fSTOP
f2 = f1*(1 + step_log/100)
If f2 > fSTOP, then f2 = fSTOP
●
For fSTARt > fSTOP
f2 = f1/(1 + step_log/100)
If f2 < fSTOP, then f2 = fSTOP
With "Shape = Triangle", the frequency values on the slope from fSTOP to fSTARt are the
same as on the slope from fSTARt to fSTOP.
If you specify the number of steps within the sweep range, the step width is adjusted
according to the following correlation:
●
For linear sweeps and fSTARt < fSTOP
POINtsfrequency = ((fSTARt - fSTOP)/step_lin) +1 = (fSPAN/step_lin) + 1
●
For logarithmic sweeps and fSTARt < fSTOP
POINtsfrequency = ((log fSTOP - log fSTARt)/log step_log) +1
If step_log changes, the value of POINts is adjusted. The fSTARt and fSTOP values are
retained.
5.3 About List Mode
The list mode is used to generate the RF signal based on a set of predefined frequency and amplitude value pairs, with individual step times. You can define the values arbitrarily, in any order and varying step sizes, within the entire configurable value
range of the instrument.
Configuration and operation of list mode signals
The parameters configuring the RF signal are defined in a list (table) and stored in a
file.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
120
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Significant Parameters and Functions
Creating and handling lists
List files can be created in the following ways:
●
Internally
Use the build-in table editor with columns for the frequency-level values pairs and
the dwell time.
Define the values manually (row by row) or automatically, with linearly interpolated
values, calculated based on value range and step size.
(See Chapter 5.7, "List Editor", on page 138)
Lists are saved as files with user-definable filename and the predefined file extension *.lsw. To load a saved file, use the "File Manager".
(See Chapter 9.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 204)
Lists can be exported, too. For example, to exchange configuration between instruments or to modify the file content with an external program and reload them again.
●
Externally
Create a list file as a CSV file with Microsoft Excel, with a Notepad or a similar tool
and save it with the predefined extension. Transfer the file to and load it into the
instrument.
Dwell time mode
You can choose whether you want to use different dwell times or a fixed value for all
steps in the list mode:
●
"From List"
This mode uses the values from the data table.
●
"Global"
This mode processes the list using a fixed time interval.
With "Global" dwell time you, however, still need to enter the dwell time values in
the data list.
The reason is that the instrument stores only completed rows and ignores incomplete entries. In addition, the data list must be filled completely, in case you want to
change the dwell time mode to "From List".
See Edit List Mode Data
5.4 Significant Parameters and Functions
This section provides some basic parameters, settings and functions that affect the
operating modes CW, list and sweep, that means at all frequency and level transitions
of the RF signal.
Dwell time
Dwell time is the length of time that elapses from the beginning until the end of a step.
It applies to "Auto", "Single" and "Extern Single" modes, that are triggered either continuously or manually.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
121
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Significant Parameters and Functions
Figure 5-8: Dwell Time vs. settling time
1 = "Dwell Time" (as set with the parameter)
2 = Settling time
3 = Dwell time (effective)
The set dwell time defines the duration of a list or sweep step. However, the time the
instrument requires for the signal to settle reduces the effective dwell time.
tdwell(effective) = tdwell - tsetlting
In "Single" mode, the time between two entries determines the duration of a step, and
accordingly, the time between two trigger events in "Extern Step" mode. In these operating modes, the dwell time does not affect signal generation.
Hardware adjustments
The first time a list (new or modified) is processed, the instrument automatically calculates the necessary hardware settings. It can be performed during list processing, but
delays the first cycle, especially with short dwell times.
With long dwell times, you can perform this calculation while the list is being processed; the entered dwell times are observed. With short dwell times, calculation of the
hardware settings increases the dwell time for the initial processing cycle; the entered
value is only observed from the second processing cycle onwards. In this case, a message indicates that there is a deviation between the current and set dwell times. After
the first cycle, you do not need to perform additional calculations. The current dwell
times do not deviate from the set dwell times.
Blanking
The instrument is equipped with a blanking circuit, which temporarily switches off the
RF signal whenever the frequency changes, until the signal has settled to a stable
state.
Live list processing mode
The R&S SMA100B generates the signal directly from the value pairs in the database,
and adjusts the hardware settings accordingly. The current instrument state and thus
any change during the signal generation directly affects the RF signal. The temporary
memory is not used.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
122
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Sweep Mode Settings
You can conveniently modify parameters like modulation settings during run-time.
Learning list mode data is not required. Impacts like temperature drift are also considered immediately.
This mode is optimized for maximum signal quality, and is useful if dwell times higher
than 2 ms are sufficient.
5.5 Sweep Mode Settings
This section lists the settings of all available sweep types.
Access:
1. Select "Sweep" > "RF Frequency Sweep"
2. Select "Sweep" > "RF Level Sweep"
3. Select "Sweep" > "LF Frequency Sweep"
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in:
●
Chapter 12.15.3, "SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem", on page 395
●
Chapter 12.15.12, "SOURce:SWEep Subsystem", on page 447
●
Chapter 12.15.5, "SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem", on page 403
Settings
●
●
●
General Sweep Settings....................................................................................... 123
Frequency Range Settings....................................................................................128
Level Range Settings............................................................................................130
5.5.1 General Sweep Settings
Access:
► Select for example "Sweep" > "RF Frequency Sweep"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
123
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Sweep Mode Settings
Settings
State (RF frequency sweep)....................................................................................... 124
State (RF level sweep)................................................................................................124
State (LF frequency sweep)........................................................................................ 124
Current Frequency...................................................................................................... 125
Current Level...............................................................................................................125
Mode........................................................................................................................... 125
Retrace........................................................................................................................126
Shape .........................................................................................................................126
Spacing....................................................................................................................... 127
Dwell Time ................................................................................................................. 127
Trigger Slope...............................................................................................................127
Reset Sweep ..............................................................................................................128
Execute Single Sweep ............................................................................................... 128
State (RF frequency sweep)
Activates RF frequency sweep signal generation.
Note: Active sweep mode deactivates other sweeps or lists and vice versa.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MODE on page 396
State (RF level sweep)
Activates RF level sweep signal generation.
Note: Active sweep mode deactivates other sweeps or lists and vice versa.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MODE on page 438
State (LF frequency sweep)
Activates the generation of an LF frequency sweep signal in the "LF Frequency" dialog.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
124
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Sweep Mode Settings
In the "Sources" tab of the analog modulations, the instrument shows the current state
of the LF frequency sweep.
Note: Active sweep mode deactivates other sweeps or lists and vice versa.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE on page 407
Current Frequency
In "RF/LF Frequency Sweep" mode, displays the current frequency.
In Mode = "Step", the parameter is editable and you can enter the next frequency step.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual on page 398
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MANual on page 407
Current Level
Applies to "RF Level Sweep" mode.
Displays the current level value.
In Mode = "Step", the parameter is editable and you can enter the next level step.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual on page 437
Mode
Selects the sweep mode.
For detailed information on the sweep modes and the triggering, see Chapter 5.1, "Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes", on page 110.
"Auto"
Generates a continuously repeating sweep signal directly after activating the sweep mode.
The sweep steps are performed automatically, controlled by the dwell
time.
"Single / Extern Single"
Generates a single sweep cycle after a trigger event.
The sweep steps within the cycle are performed automatically, controlled by the dwell time. If one cycle is completed, the instrument
waits for the next trigger event.
"Step / Extern Step"
Generates the sweep signal step-by-step, manually triggered.
"Extern Start/Stop"
Generates a continuously repeating sweep signal that is started,
stopped, and restarted by subsequent external trigger events.
The sweep steps are performed automatically, controlled by the dwell
time.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE on page 452
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:MODE on page 450
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE on page 413
:TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep]:SOURce on page 484
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
125
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Sweep Mode Settings
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce on page 483
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce on page 484
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce on page 483
Retrace
For "Shape = Sawtooth" and "Mode = Single/External Single", activates that the signal
changes to the start value while it is waiting for the next trigger event.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RETRace on page 454
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:RETRace on page 454
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RETRace on page 414
Shape
Selects the waveform shape of the sweep signal.
"Sawtooth"
The sweep runs from start to stop frequency. The subsequent sweep
starts at the start value, i.e. the shape of the sweep sequence resembles a sawtooth.
Figure 5-9: Sweep signal sawtooth shape
1 = Start value
2 = Stop value
3 = Step width
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
126
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Sweep Mode Settings
"Triangle"
The sweep runs from start to stop value and back, i.e. the shape of
the sweep resembles a triangle. Each subsequent sweep starts at the
start frequency.
Figure 5-10: Sweep signal triangle shape
1 = Start value
2 = Stop value
3 = Step width
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe on page 453
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SHAPe on page 453
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe on page 415
Spacing
In "RF and LF Frequency Sweep" modes, selects the mode for the calculation of the
frequency intervals, with which the current frequency at each step is increased or
decreased.
Enter the step size with the parameter Step Linear/Step Logarithmic .
"Linear"
Takes the frequency value entered as absolute value in Hz.
"Logarithmic"
Takes the value entered as a logarithmic value, i.e. as a constant
fraction of the current frequency in %.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing on page 452
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing on page 415
Dwell Time
Defines the duration of the individual sweep steps.
See also Chapter 5.4, "Significant Parameters and Functions", on page 121.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl on page 451
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:DWELl on page 450
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl on page 413
Trigger Slope
Selects the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
127
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Sweep Mode Settings
Trigger signal is expected at the INST TRIG connector.
"Positive"
Activates the rising edge of the trigger signal.
"Negative"
Activates the falling edge of the trigger signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:INPut:TRIGger:SLOPe on page 403
Reset Sweep
Resets a sweep.
With the next trigger event, the sweep starts at the initial value.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:RESet[:ALL] on page 455
Execute Single Sweep
In "Mode = Single", starts a sweep manually.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute on page 453
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:EXECute on page 453
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute on page 413
:TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep][:IMMediate] on page 485
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep[:IMMediate] on page 485
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep[:IMMediate] on page 485
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:IMMediate on page 485
5.5.2 Frequency Range Settings
Access:
1. Select for example "Sweep" > "RF Frequency Sweep"
2. Select "Frequency Range".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
128
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Sweep Mode Settings
Settings
Start Frequency/Stop Frequency ............................................................................... 129
Center Frequency ...................................................................................................... 129
Span............................................................................................................................129
Spacing....................................................................................................................... 129
Step Linear/Step Logarithmic .....................................................................................129
Start Frequency/Stop Frequency
Defines the frequency sweep range by setting the start and end values.
See Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STARt on page 400
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STOP on page 401
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STARt on page 408
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STOP on page 408
Center Frequency
In "RF Frequency Sweep" mode, sets the RF center frequency.
See Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:CENTer on page 400
Span
In "RF Frequency Sweep" mode, sets the extent of the frequency sweep range.
See Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:SPAN on page 400
Spacing
In "RF and LF Frequency Sweep" modes, selects the mode for the calculation of the
frequency intervals, with which the current frequency at each step is increased or
decreased.
Enter the step size with the parameter Step Linear/Step Logarithmic .
"Linear"
Takes the frequency value entered as absolute value in Hz.
"Logarithmic"
Takes the value entered as a logarithmic value, i.e. as a constant
fraction of the current frequency in %.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing on page 452
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing on page 415
Step Linear/Step Logarithmic
In "RF/LF Frequency Sweep" mode, sets the step width for the individual frequency
sweep steps. The value is added at each sweep step to the current frequency.
Depending on the current Spacing, you can enter either an absolute or logarithmic step
width.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
129
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Sweep Mode Settings
See Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118.
"Step Linear"
The step width is a constant value in Hz.
"Step Logarithmic"
The step width is determined logarithmically in %, i.e. as a constant
fraction of the current frequency.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] on page 454
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic on page 454
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] on page 416
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic
on page 415
5.5.3 Level Range Settings
Access:
1. Select "Sweep" > "Level Sweep"
2. Select "Level Range".
Settings
Start Level / Stop Level .............................................................................................. 130
Spacing....................................................................................................................... 130
Step ............................................................................................................................131
Start Level / Stop Level
Defines the level sweep range by setting the start and end values.
See Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STARt on page 439
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STOP on page 439
Spacing
Indicates that the level step intervals are linearly (straight proportional) distributed, i.e.
intervals are of equal size.
Set the step size with the parameter "Step".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
130
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
List Mode Settings
Remote command:
n.a.
Step
Applies to "RF Level Sweep" mode.
Sets the step width for the level sweep steps.
The step width is specified logarithmically in dB, i.e. as constant fraction of the current
level.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:STEP[:LOGarithmic] on page 451
5.6 List Mode Settings
The "List Mode" dialog contains all the functions and settings for creating and handling
lists with RF frequency/level pairs for generating the RF signal based on these values.
Access:
► Select "Sweep" > "List mode".
The dialog contains parameters for configuring the list mode processing, entering
list mode data and transferring data files from or to the instrument.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12.15.6, "SOURce:LIST Subsystem", on page 416.
●
●
●
General Settings................................................................................................... 132
List Mode Data Settings........................................................................................ 134
Import/Export Settings...........................................................................................135
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
131
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
List Mode Settings
5.6.1 General Settings
Access:
► Select "Sweep" > "List mode".
In the "General" tab, you can configure the trigger and dwell time modes for list
processing and activate signal generation.
Settings
State ...........................................................................................................................132
Current Index ............................................................................................................. 132
Mode........................................................................................................................... 133
Dwell Time Mode........................................................................................................ 133
Global Dwell Time....................................................................................................... 133
Run Mode....................................................................................................................133
Trigger Slope...............................................................................................................134
Execute Single............................................................................................................ 134
Reset ..........................................................................................................................134
State
Activates the list mode and processes the currently selected list.
Note: Active sweep mode deactivates other sweeps or lists and vice versa.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MODE on page 396
Current Index
Sets the list index for list processing in "Step" mode. In the other modes, the index indicates the current step.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
132
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
List Mode Settings
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex on page 421
Mode
Selects the mode for list processing.
For detailed information on the sweep modes and the triggering, see Chapter 5.1, "Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes", on page 110.
"Auto"
Generates the signal by processing the frequency/level value pairs of
the list from the beginning to the end.
The list steps are performed automatically, controlled by the dwell
time. If you switch from any mode to "Auto", signal generation always
starts at the top of the list.
"Single / Extern Single"
Generates the signal by processing the frequency/level value pairs of
the list once from the beginning to the end after a trigger event.
The list steps are performed automatically, controlled by the dwell
time. If one cycle is completed, the instrument waits for the next trigger event.
"Step / Extern Step"
Generates the signal by processing the frequency/level value pairs of
the list step-by-step, manually triggered.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce on page 424
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:MODE on page 422
Dwell Time Mode
Selects either variable dwell times or a fixed dwell time to perform signal generation in
list mode.
"Global"
Uses the same dwell time for all lists steps, set with Global Dwell
Time.
"From List"
Uses the dwell times from the list.
You can define the dwell time for each frequency/level value pair individually, see Chapter 5.7, "List Editor", on page 138.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:MODE on page 420
Global Dwell Time
Sets the dwell time for Dwell Time Mode > "Global".
See also "Dwell time" on page 121.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl on page 419
Run Mode
Selects how the instruments process the list data.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
133
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
List Mode Settings
"Live"
Generates the signal directly from the database.
The instrument reads the pairs of values from the list, calculates the
hardware settings and generates the signal immediately.
See "Live list processing mode" on page 122.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RMODe on page 423
Trigger Slope
Selects the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger.
Trigger signal is expected at the INST TRIG connector.
"Positive"
Activates the rising edge of the trigger signal.
"Negative"
Activates the falling edge of the trigger signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:INPut:TRIGger:SLOPe on page 403
Execute Single
Manually starts list processing in "Single" mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:EXECute on page 423
Reset
Resets the list to the starting point.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RESet on page 426
5.6.2 List Mode Data Settings
Access:
1. Select "Sweep" > "List mode".
2. Select "List Mode Data".
This dialog contains the parameters required for creating and editing lists, activating the learning function and selecting the list processing mode.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
134
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
List Mode Settings
Settings
List Mode Data ........................................................................................................... 135
Edit List Mode Data ....................................................................................................135
List Range from/to ......................................................................................................135
List Mode Data
Accesses the standard "Select List" dialog for selecting, creating and editing a list file.
The currently loaded file is indicated.
You can create data lists with the internal editor or import externally created files, see
"Creating and handling lists" on page 121.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:CATalog? on page 425
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:SELect on page 426
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete on page 425
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete:ALL on page 425
Edit List Mode Data
Opens the editor to insert and save data lists with RF frequency, power and dwell time
value pairs, see Chapter 5.7, "List Editor", on page 138.
You find this function also in standard file select dialog, accessed via List Mode Data .
List Range from/to
Defines an index range in the current list by setting the start and stop index. Only the
values in the selected index range are processed in list mode, all other list entries are
ignored.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STARt on page 422
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STOP on page 422
5.6.3 Import/Export Settings
Access:
1. Select "Sweep" > "List Mode".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
135
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
List Mode Settings
2. Select "List Mode Data" > "Im-/Export".
The "Im-/Export" dialog provides the parameters for importing or exporting files with
user data in standard ASCII *.txt or *.csv file format.
The table separators and the decimal floating point numbers are customizable.
Settings
Mode .......................................................................................................................... 136
ASCII File Settings...................................................................................................... 136
Select Source/Select Destination................................................................................137
Select Source / Select ASCII Destination................................................................... 137
Import / Export.............................................................................................................137
Mode
Selects import or export of a data list file. The provided parameters vary according to
the selected mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE on page 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE on page 395
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE on page 386
ASCII File Settings
Defines the format and the separators of the associated data file.
"Extension"
Selects *.csv or *.txt format.
"Decimal
Point"
Sets "Point" (dot) or "Comma" as the decimal separator used in the
ASCII data with floating-point numerals.
"Column Separator"
Sets the separator between the columns in an ASCII table.
Available are: "Tab", "Semicolon", "Comma" or "Space".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
136
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
List Mode Settings
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 427
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal on page 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn on page 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 394
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal
on page 394
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn
on page 394
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 386
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal
on page 386
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn
on page 387
Select Source/Select Destination
In "Mode > Import", access the file select dialog that provides standard file handling
functions.
Where:
● "Select ASCII Source": defines the file to be loaded (imported)
● "Select ASCII Destination": selects the filename the loaded file is saved as
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 427
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 393
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 394
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 387
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 387
Select Source / Select ASCII Destination
In "Mode > Export", access the file select dialog that provides standard file handling
functions.
Where:
● "Select Source": selects the file to be exported
● "Select ASCII Destination": defines the filename and the file path the exported file
is saved as
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:SELect on page 429
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:SELect on page 395
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:SELect on page 387
Import / Export
Imports or exports the selected data list file, depending on the current mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:EXECute on page 427
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute on page 395
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:EXECute on page 388
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
137
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
List Editor
5.7 List Editor
The "User Correction" and "List Mode" dialogs provide a build-in list editor for defining
frequency/level value pairs.
The list editors in these two dialogs are similar. The following description shows the
"List Data Editor".
Access:
1. "Sweep" > "List Mode" > "List Mode Data" > "Edit List Mode Data"
2. "Level" > "User Correction" > "Edit User Cor. Data"
List mode data editor
User correction data editor
The editor is a table with RF frequency and power value pairs and standard navigation functions.
The "Edit List Mode Data" dialog has an extra column for defining variable dwell
times.
All values in one row have to be defined. Rows with missing values are ignored and
not saved. Values of incomplete rows get lost.
If you use global dwell time in list mode, consider also the following:
●
The instrument uses the value set with Global Dwell Time for all list steps.
●
To save the list, however, you must fill in the "Dwell / s " column in each row,
although the values are not used for generating the signal.
Tip: Use the Fill Table Automatically function to fill the dwell time column automatically.
Settings
Edit List Mode Data.....................................................................................................139
Data handling keys .....................................................................................................139
└ Goto.............................................................................................................. 139
└ Edit................................................................................................................139
└ Fill with Sensor..............................................................................................139
└ Save As/Save............................................................................................... 139
Fill Table Automatically .............................................................................................. 139
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
138
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
List Editor
Edit List Mode Data
Table with correction or list values.
"Frequency /Hz"
Sets the frequency values.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency on page 421
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency on page 390
"Power /dBm"
Sets the level values.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer on page 422
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer on page 391
"Dwell /s"
In list mode, sets the dwell time values.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:LIST on page 420
Data handling keys
Standard functions for file and data handling.
Note: Save a list only after filling both columns (frequency and level), otherwise the
entries are lost.
Goto ← Data handling keys
Selects a row for editing.
Edit ← Data handling keys
Enables you to insert, or delete a row or ranges within a list, and provides access to a
dialog for automatic filling.
Fill with Sensor ← Data handling keys
In "UCOR" mode, opens a dialog to configure the settings for automatic filling of user
correction data with an R&S NRP power sensor
See Chapter 6.3.3, "Fill with Sensor", on page 154
Save As/Save ← Data handling keys
Stores the list in a file with user-defined name and predefined file extension. To save a
copy or create a file, use the "Save as" function.
Fill Table Automatically
Provides parameters for filling a table automatically with user-defined values.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
139
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
How to Generate a Signal in List or Sweep Mode
The settings are interdependent; the affected parameters change accordingly if you set
a value.
To fill the table, select "Fill".
Note: Save a list only after filling all columns and rows, otherwise the entries are lost.
"From / Range"
Defines the start line and number of the row to be filled.
"Select Column to Fill"
Selects the respective value, including the unit.
"Start / End Value"
Provides the default values corresponding to the selected column.
"Increment"
Determines the step size.
"Fill"
Fills the table.
Fill both columns and then save the list. Otherwise the entries are
lost.
5.8 How to Generate a Signal in List or Sweep Mode
This section shows you how to configure a varying RF output signal for both, the list
and sweep modes.
To configure the frequency sweep signal
► For a step-by-step description, see Chapter 2.3.2, "Generating an RF Frequency
Sweep Signal", on page 46.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
140
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
How to Generate a Signal in List or Sweep Mode
Example: Fast changing frequency and level settings in list mode
The following example shows you how to generate an amplitude modulated RF signal
based on list mode data.
General workflow
Since any change of the hardware settings or list entries can affect the RF signal characteristics directly, we recommend that you proceed as follows:
1. Configure the modulation settings.
Activate the RF signal.
2. Wait until the hardware settings have settled.
3. Create a list file.
4. Configure the list processing mode.
5. Activate list mode.
To configure amplitude modulation and switch RF on
1. Press PRESET to start from an initial state.
2. Select "Modulation" > "Amplitude Modulation > On".
3. Select "Level" > "RF ON" to activate RF signal generation.
To create list mode data
1. Select "Sweep" > "List Mode".
2. In the "List Mode Data" tab, select "List Mode Data > New"
3. Enter the filename ListMode_Test for the data list and confirm with "Ok".
The instrument creates a file and stores it in the /var/user/ directory.
4. Select "Edit List Mode Data".
5. Enter the first value pairs "Frequency > 2", "Power > 0" and "Dwell > 2".
6. Enter further frequency, power and dwell time values in the same way.
7. Select "Save" and close the dialog.
To configure the list processing mode and start signal generation
1. In the "General" tab, select "List Mode > Auto".
2. Select "Dwell Time Mode > From List".
3. Switch state to "On".
4. Select "General > State > On".
The instrument continuously generates an amplitude-modulated RF signal whose
frequency and level values change according to the dwell times, as defined in the
list.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
141
R&S®SMA100B
Varying the RF Signal in List or Sweep Mode
How to Generate a Signal in List or Sweep Mode
During list processing, the generator displays no frequency and level values in the
status bar, but you can check the following parameters.
● In the list mode dialog, the current index indicates the steps of the signal generation.
● In remote control mode, you can query:
– The current state with [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RUNNing?
– Current parameters with the commands FREQ?, POW? and LIST:DWEL?.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
142
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Attenuator
6 Improving Level Performance
To comply to the measurement requirements, the R&S SMA100B features various
functions to optimize the RF signal level:
●
Attenuator
The large output level range is provided by a fast and wear-free switching electronic step attenuator.
It provides also the generation of a constant VSWR (uninterrupted level) signal,
highest level accuracy, noise suppression or compensation of external losses of
cables.
See "About the attenuator" on page 143.
●
ALC
The automatic level control system stabilizes the RF signal level over temperature
and time.
See "About ALC" on page 146.
●
UCOR
The user correction function allows you to compensate external losses (e.g. of
cables) to achieve an input level of highest accuracy at the DUT.
See "About UCOR" on page 148.
●
Power sensors
The R&S NRP power sensors support RF signal level optimization by determining
the attenuation characteristics of downstream devices or cables, or by monitoring
the RF signal level at the output directly.
You can configure the measurement parameters of a power sensor directly in the
R&S SMA100B and monitor its readings, including calibration and firmware update.
See Chapter 6.4, "Using Power Sensors", on page 158
6.1 Attenuator
The R&S SMA100B is equipped with an electronic step attenuator unit that supports
RF wear-free level setting.
About the attenuator
The attenuator is an electronic component which enables you to vary the amplitude of
the RF signal. Basically, it is characterized by low VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio)
up to 20 GHz over the full level range.
According to the requirements of your application, you can select different attenuator
characteristics.
The following are examples of test requirements and the corresponding configuration:
●
Automatic configuration
Select standard operation mode ("Auto"), in which the generator adjusts the attenuation of the RF output signal automatically
●
Compensation for cable loss
You can compensate the loss of a cable connection by a higher output power
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
143
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Attenuator
●
DUT tests under low signal to noise conditions
Low output power is suitable to test the behavior of a DUT under low signal to
noise conditions.
●
Uninterrupted level settings with constant VSWR
A fix attenuation value is required for obtaining uninterrupted level settings with
constant VSWR.
The configuration "RF Off Mode > Unchanged" ensures that constant VSWR is
maintained if you turn the signal off and on again.
●
Noise sensitive applications
The parameter "RF OFF Mode > Full Attenuation" sets maximum attenuation and
thus suppresses noise when you turn off the RF signal.
6.1.1 Attenuator Settings
Access:
► Select "Level" > "Level > Attenuator".
In the "Attenuator" dialog, you can select the operating mode of the electronic
attenuator, the instrument is equipped with.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12.13, "OUTPut Subsystem", on page 347 and Chapter 12.15.10,
"SOURce:POWer Subsystem", on page 433.
Settings
Mode .......................................................................................................................... 144
Attenuator Level Range ............................................................................................. 145
RF OFF Mode ............................................................................................................ 145
Mode
Determines the operating mode of the attenuator at the RF output.
"Auto"
Adjusts the attenuator settings within the full variation range automatically.
"Fixed"
Fixes the attenuator and amplifier stages at the current position and
provides signal output with constant output VSWR. The resulting variation range is calculated and indicated.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
144
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Attenuator
Remote command:
:OUTPut<hw>:AMODe on page 348
Attenuator Level Range
Shows the interruption-free range of the level that you can use in the currently selected
mode.
Remote command:
:OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:LOWer? on page 349
:OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:UPPer? on page 349
RF OFF Mode
Determines the state of the attenuator, when the RF signal is switched off.
The value is not affected by an instrument preset (PRESET key or *RST) and the
"Save/Recall" function. It is reset only by factory preset.
"Unchanged"
Freezes the setting of the attenuator.
Use this mode if a constant VSWR (Voltage Standing Wave Ratio) is
required.
"Full Attenuation"
Switches to the maximum attenuation.
Use this mode for applications that require a high level of noise suppression.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ATTenuation:RFOFf:MODE on page 436
6.1.2 Reverse Power Protection
The R&S SMA100B is equipped against overloading by an external signal applied to
the RF output.
The reverse power protection is tripped when the power of signals reflected from the
load or external signals applied to the RF output becomes too high. A relay opens and
interrupts the internal connection to the RF output. This condition is indicated in the
status bar by the "Overload" status message.
Overload
If an "Overload" status message is indicated in the status bar, perform the following:
● Remove the cause for the overload
● Press the RF ON/OFF key to reset the overload protection
The RF input is activated when the overload protection is reset.
Remote command:
:OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:TRIPped? on page 350
:OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:CLEar on page 350
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
145
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
ALC - Automatic Level Control
6.2 ALC - Automatic Level Control
The R&S SMA100B is equipped with an automatic level control (ALC) unit to obtain
best RF level accuracy.
About ALC
ALC is an adaptive control system to stabilize the RF output level. It continuously monitors the current level and adjusts it to keep a steady state over temperature and time.
ALC is active in almost all applications by default.
However, if pulse modulation is used, the ALC uses table-based level settings with
table values depending on the pulse timing.
Also note that ALC can detect incorrect values in multi-transmitter test setups. If multiple generators are coupled, reverse power can affect the ALC readings. Based on
incorrect values, ALC would have an impact on the signal to intermodulation ratio.
ALC States and their effects
The following description basically explains the ALC states and their principle of operation:
●
"Auto"
Adjusts the output level to the operating conditions automatically. ALC is active in
almost all operating modes.
●
"On"
Activates the internal level control permanently, regardless of the operating conditions. This setting provides the highest level accuracy.
●
"Off (Table)"
Deactivates internal level control loop. The instrument calculates every level setting
using the attenuation values from the internal (ALC) table. Level attenuation
between two table values is done with linear interpolation. This mode enables you
to perform a strictly monotonic, but not quite as precise level adjustment.
●
"Table & On"
Starts with the associated value of the internal level table and then activates the
automatic level control. This mode achieves maximum level accuracy and fast setting times.
If pulse modulation is applied, this mode ensures fast level setting even with narrow pulses at low repetition rate.
The R&S SMA100B displays the level control setting as a status message in the info
line.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
146
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
ALC - Automatic Level Control
6.2.1 ALC Settings
Access:
► Select "Level" > "Automatic Level Control".
In the "ALC" dialog, you can configure the settings for the automatic level control of
the RF signal to achieve optimal accuracy.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12.15.10, "SOURce:POWer Subsystem", on page 433.
Settings
State............................................................................................................................147
Detector Sensitivity..................................................................................................... 147
State
Selects the internal level control mode.
Find further details about the individual settings in "ALC States and their effects"
on page 146. It covers an overview of the functionality and indicates what is to be considered.
"Auto"
Selects the most appropriate ALC mode automatically.
"On"
Activates ALC permanently.
"Off (Table)"
Controls the level using the attenuation values of the internal ALC
table.
"Table & On"
Starts with the attenuation setting from the table and continues with
automatic level control.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC[:STATe] on page 435
Detector Sensitivity
Determines the path of the internal level detector.
The level detector of the ALC has multiple paths distinguished by their sensitivity.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
147
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
User Correction
"Auto"
Selects the detector sensitivity automatically, according to the given
level.
This mode is the recommended operation mode.
"Fix"
Fixes the last set sensitivity setting.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:DSENsitivity on page 434
6.3 User Correction
The R&S SMA100B supports a correction function to compensate external losses, as
for example caused by the RF cable, to achieve a precise target input level at the DUT.
About UCOR
User correction (UCOR) is a method that determines the external level loss over a frequency range in advance.
The difference between the generator output level and the level at the DUT determines
the correction value at the respective frequency. Alternatively, the attenuation characteristics over a certain frequency range of e.g. an RF cable are also specified in the
association data sheet.
During signal generation, the generator adds the correction value internally and thus
increases the output level by exactly the amount of the loss between its output and the
DUT. With frequencies which are not contained in the list, the level correction is determined by interpolation of the closest correction values.
Possible ways for configuring the user correction values
You can configure correction values in the following ways:
●
●
Internally
–
Use the built-in table editor in the "UCOR > Edit User Correction Data" dialog.
Once defined, user correction values can be saved in a file.
Files with correction data can be exported for example, to exchange configuration between instruments or to modify the file content with an external program
and reload them again.
–
Using the corresponding remote-control commands.
Note that you have to create a user correction file first.
Externally
Create a file with correction values as a CSV file with Microsoft Excel, with a Notepad or a similar tool and save it with the predefined extension. Transfer the file to
and load it into the instrument.
UCOR file format
Files containing correction data are simple files in text or comma-separated value
(CSV) file format. The filename is user-definable; the file extension is *.ucor.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
148
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
User Correction
The file contains a list of correction values, one row per frequency and level pair; a new
line indicator separates the correction values.
For file handling, use the standard functions in the "File Manager", see Chapter 9.8,
"Using the File Manager", on page 204.
Collecting correction data
To fill the frequency and power values in the correction table, use one of the following
options:
●
Manually, row by row.
●
Fill the table automatically with linearly interpolated values, calculated based on
value range and step size.
●
Acquire the real frequency response characteristics of the used component by
R&S NRP power sensor.
Using power sensor for collecting correction data
Consider the following when using R&S NRP power sensors to collect correction values:
●
Correction values can be acquired at any time, irrespective of the modulation settings of the generator.
●
Measure the level directly at the input of the DUT.
●
Use the internal correction functions of an R&S NRP power sensor to increase the
accuracy and optimize the RF level.
●
Use S-Parameter to consider the impact of any two-port device like an adapter
between the signal generator and the sensor input.
Interactions and characteristics
Active "User Correction" is effective in all operating modes.
The RF output level (LevelRF) is the sum of the level value and the correction for the
particular frequency:
LevelRF = "Status bar > Level" + "UCOR"
You recognize that user correction is enabled by the status indication "Lev Ucor" in the
"Level" panel.
6.3.1 User Correction Settings
Access:
1. Select "Level" > "User Correction".
2. Select "User Cor. Data > navigate to the file *.ucor > Select".
3. Select "RF Level > RF State > On".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
149
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
User Correction
4. Select "State > On".
The "UCOR" dialog contains all settings for creating and handling files with userdefined level correction values.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12.15.2, "SOURce:CORRection Subsystem", on page 388.
Settings
State............................................................................................................................150
User Correction........................................................................................................... 150
UCOR Data................................................................................................................. 150
Edit UCOR Data..........................................................................................................151
State
Activates user correction.
You recognize that user correction is enabled by the status indication "Lev Ucor" in the
"Level" panel.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection[:STATe] on page 393
User Correction
Indicates the current value for level correction.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:VALue? on page 392
UCOR Data
Accesses the standard "File Select" function of the instrument. The provided navigation
possibilities in the dialog are self-explanatory.
Files with user correction values are files with predefined file extension *.ucor. When
a file is selected, the dialog indicates the filename.
You can create the file internally in the table editor or externally.
● To select an existing file, select "Select List > navigate to the file *.ucor > Select"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
150
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
User Correction
●
●
Use the general editor function to create internally new file or to edit an existing
one.
Use the standard file manager function to load externally created files to the instrument.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog? on page 393
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET[:SELect] on page 391
[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DELete on page 393
Edit UCOR Data
Opens the build-it table editor to define a new correction table or edit an existing one.
See also:
● Chapter 5.7, "List Editor", on page 138
● " Fill Table Automatically " on page 90
● Chapter 6.3.3, "Fill with Sensor", on page 154
6.3.2 List Editor
The "User Correction" and "List Mode" dialogs provide a build-in list editor for defining
frequency/level value pairs.
The list editors in these two dialogs are similar. The following description shows the
"List Data Editor".
Access:
1. "Sweep" > "List Mode" > "List Mode Data" > "Edit List Mode Data"
2. "Level" > "User Correction" > "Edit User Cor. Data"
List mode data editor
User correction data editor
The editor is a table with RF frequency and power value pairs and standard navigation functions.
The "Edit List Mode Data" dialog has an extra column for defining variable dwell
times.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
151
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
User Correction
All values in one row have to be defined. Rows with missing values are ignored and
not saved. Values of incomplete rows get lost.
If you use global dwell time in list mode, consider also the following:
●
The instrument uses the value set with Global Dwell Time for all list steps.
●
To save the list, however, you must fill in the "Dwell / s " column in each row,
although the values are not used for generating the signal.
Tip: Use the Fill Table Automatically function to fill the dwell time column automatically.
Settings
Edit List Mode Data.....................................................................................................152
Data handling keys .....................................................................................................152
└ Goto.............................................................................................................. 152
└ Edit................................................................................................................152
└ Fill with Sensor..............................................................................................153
└ Save As/Save............................................................................................... 153
Fill Table Automatically .............................................................................................. 153
Edit List Mode Data
Table with correction or list values.
"Frequency /Hz"
Sets the frequency values.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency on page 421
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency on page 390
"Power /dBm"
Sets the level values.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer on page 422
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer on page 391
"Dwell /s"
In list mode, sets the dwell time values.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:LIST on page 420
Data handling keys
Standard functions for file and data handling.
Note: Save a list only after filling both columns (frequency and level), otherwise the
entries are lost.
Goto ← Data handling keys
Selects a row for editing.
Edit ← Data handling keys
Enables you to insert, or delete a row or ranges within a list, and provides access to a
dialog for automatic filling.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
152
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
User Correction
Fill with Sensor ← Data handling keys
In "UCOR" mode, opens a dialog to configure the settings for automatic filling of user
correction data with an R&S NRP power sensor
See Chapter 6.3.3, "Fill with Sensor", on page 154
Save As/Save ← Data handling keys
Stores the list in a file with user-defined name and predefined file extension. To save a
copy or create a file, use the "Save as" function.
Fill Table Automatically
Provides parameters for filling a table automatically with user-defined values.
The settings are interdependent; the affected parameters change accordingly if you set
a value.
To fill the table, select "Fill".
Note: Save a list only after filling all columns and rows, otherwise the entries are lost.
"From / Range"
Defines the start line and number of the row to be filled.
"Select Column to Fill"
Selects the respective value, including the unit.
"Start / End Value"
Provides the default values corresponding to the selected column.
"Increment"
Determines the step size.
"Fill"
Fills the table.
Fill both columns and then save the list. Otherwise the entries are
lost.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
153
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
User Correction
6.3.3 Fill with Sensor
Access:
1. Select "Level" > "User Correction".
2. Select "User Cor. Data > navigate to the file *.ucor > Select".
3. Select "Edit Cor. Data > Edit > Fill With Sensor".
This dialog contains parameters for filling a table automatically with sensor readings.
Settings are interdependent, the affected parameters change accordingly if you set a
value.
To fill the table, select "Execute".
For information on power sensors an how to use them, see Chapter 6.5, "How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP Power Sensor", on page 171.
Settings
Fill User Correction Data with Sensor......................................................................... 154
Used SMAB Settings For Measurement..................................................................... 155
Fill User Correction Data with Sensor
● "Sensor"
Displays connected sensors for selection.
● "List To Fill"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
154
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
User Correction
●
●
Indicates the used list.
"Include Zeroing"
Performs a zeroing procedure before acquiring the user correction data to improve
precision.
No signal may be applied to the sensor during zeroing. RF output is temporarily
switched off during that time.
When unchecked, the zeroing procedure is skipped. However, the RF signal level
might be blanked shortly. This setting is useful if blanking of RF is undesirable or
the absence of power at the sensor cannot be guaranteed.
"Execute"
The "Execute" button is only enabled if a sensor is detected and the user correction list
contains at least one frequency value.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:ZERoing:STATe on page 392
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA[:SENSor<ch>][:POWer]:SONCe
on page 391
Used SMAB Settings For Measurement
Displays the settings relevant for the measurement.
"RF Source"
Shows the path for which the correction menu settings are made.
"Modulation"
Indicates the modulation state
"Amplitude"
Shows the currently set level.
"Use SParameter"
Indicates whether SParameter correction is used.
"Attenuator Mode Path 1"
Displays the selected mode of the attenuator.
"Level range"
Shows the level range.
Remote command:
n.a.
6.3.4 Import/Export List Files
Access:
1. Select one of the following:
a) "Sweep" > "List mode".
b) "Level" > "Level > User Correction".
c) "Modulation > Pulse Modulation > Pulse Generator > Pulse Mode = Train".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
155
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
User Correction
2. Select "Import/Export".
Figure 6-1: Im-/Export dialog (example with UCOR settings)
The "Import/Export" dialog contains all functions and settings to import externally
created list data or to export it accordingly. You can process and store a list in the
formats *.txt (ASCII), or *.csv (plain text with identical sequence of fields). The
table separators and the decimal floating point numbers are customizable.
Settings
Mode .......................................................................................................................... 156
ASCII File Settings...................................................................................................... 156
Select Source/Select Destination................................................................................157
Select Source / Select ASCII Destination................................................................... 157
Import / Export.............................................................................................................158
Mode
Selects import or export of a data list file. The provided parameters vary according to
the selected mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE on page 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE on page 395
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE on page 386
ASCII File Settings
Defines the format and the separators of the associated data file.
"Extension"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
Selects *.csv or *.txt format.
156
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
User Correction
"Decimal
Point"
Sets "Point" (dot) or "Comma" as the decimal separator used in the
ASCII data with floating-point numerals.
"Column Separator"
Sets the separator between the columns in an ASCII table.
Available are: "Tab", "Semicolon", "Comma" or "Space".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 427
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal on page 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn on page 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 394
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal
on page 394
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn
on page 394
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 386
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal
on page 386
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn
on page 387
Select Source/Select Destination
In "Mode > Import", access the file select dialog that provides standard file handling
functions.
Where:
● "Select ASCII Source": defines the file to be loaded (imported)
● "Select ASCII Destination": selects the filename the loaded file is saved as
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 427
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 393
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 394
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 387
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 387
Select Source / Select ASCII Destination
In "Mode > Export", access the file select dialog that provides standard file handling
functions.
Where:
● "Select Source": selects the file to be exported
● "Select ASCII Destination": defines the filename and the file path the exported file
is saved as
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:SELect on page 429
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:SELect on page 395
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:SELect on page 387
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
157
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Using Power Sensors
Import / Export
Imports or exports the selected data list file, depending on the current mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:EXECute on page 427
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute on page 395
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:EXECute on page 388
6.4 Using Power Sensors
The R&S SMA100B works with R&S NRP power sensors and thus supports various
application tasks for improving the RF signal level. Using power sensors, you can for
example determine attenuation characteristics of downstream equipment or cables.
You can use the measured values to compensate the losses with internal control functions or with an external control circuit in real time.
R&S NRP sensors are highly accurate standalone measuring devices, suitable for a
wide range of applications. The devices communicate directly with the signal generator, calculate the average or peak power internally, include S-parameter correction and
return the results to the generator.
The R&S SMA100B works with any sensor of the R&S NRP series and can perform up
to four power measurements simultaneously.
Check the firmware version of the R&S NRP sensors regularly. Update the firmware, if
necessary.
See Chapter 6.4.5, "How to Update the Sensor Firmware", on page 170.
●
●
●
●
●
Connecting R&S NRP Power Sensors to the R&S SMA100B.............................. 158
NRP Sensor Mapping........................................................................................... 159
NRP Power Viewer............................................................................................... 161
NRP Info Update................................................................................................... 168
How to Update the Sensor Firmware.................................................................... 170
6.4.1 Connecting R&S NRP Power Sensors to the R&S SMA100B
R&S NRP sensors are connected to the R&S SMA100B in the following ways:
●
●
Connection to the SENSOR connector
–
R&S NRP-ZK6 (six-pole interface cable) for R&S NRPxx power sensors
–
No additional cable for R&S NRP-Zxx power sensors (cable is fixed on the sensor)
Connection to the USB connector
Requires the following cables, depending on the used sensor type:
–
R&S NRP-ZKU (USB interface cable) for R&S NRPxx power sensors
–
R&S NRP-Z3 or R&S NRP-Z4 (USB adapter cables) for sensors of the R&S
NRP-Zxx family
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
158
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Using Power Sensors
●
Connection via R&S NRP-Z5 sensor hub
The R&S NRP-Z5 USB sensor hub (high-speed USB 2.0) can host up to 4 R&S
NRP sensors. It provides simultaneous internal and external triggering of all connected sensors.
Requires additional cables, depending on the used output connector of the hub.
Choose one of the following:
●
–
Short extension cable R&S NRP-Z2 for connection to the sensor connector.
This six-pole connection provides the external trigger capability.
–
Standard USB cable (USB type A to USB type B) to any USB type A connector
of the R&S SMA100B. This connection does not support external triggering.
Connection via USB hub with external power supply unit
Requires the following cables, depending on the used sensor type:
●
–
R&S NRP-ZKU (USB interface cable) for R&S NRPxx power sensors
–
R&S NRP-Z3 or R&S NRP-Z4 (USB adapter cables) for sensors of the R&S
NRP-Zxx family
Connection via LAN for R&S NRPxxxSN power sensors
Using the Ethernet interface requires PoE (Power over Ethernet) to provide the
electrical power.
To establish the connection, you can use:
–
A PoE Ethernet switch, e.g. R&S NRP-ZAP1 and an RJ-45 Ethernet cable.
–
A PoE injector and an RJ-45 Ethernet cable.
For details, see the description R&S®NRP®Series Power Sensors Getting Started.
Detection and mapping
The R&S SMA100B automatically detects a connected R&S NRP power sensor and
indicates it in the "NRP Power Viewer" and "NRP Sensor Mapping" dialogs.
By default, detected sensors are indicated as follows:
●
A sensor connected at the SENSOR socket is assigned as "Sensor 1".
If no sensor is connected to this socket, channel 1 remains unassigned.
●
Sensors 2 to 4 are assigned to the sensors at the USB connectors, according to
their sequence of connection.
You can change the default mapping in the NRP Sensor Mapping dialog.
On connection, the R&S SMA100B immediately starts the measurement of a detected
R&S NRP power sensor. If you perform an instrument preset (PRESET key or *RST),
the R&S SMA100B stops the measurements. The connection and the mapping of the
power sensors remain, the measurements must be restarted.
6.4.2 NRP Sensor Mapping
The "NRP Sensor Mapping" lists all R&S NRP sensors detected by the instrument.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
159
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Using Power Sensors
Any R&S NRP sensor that supports the USB legacy protocol and is connected to one
of the USB interfaces, is detected automatically and added to the list. Vice versa, the
R&S SMA100B removes a sensor from the list, when it is disconnected.
R&S NRP sensors that are connected via LAN or use the USBTMC protocol are not
automatically detected. They are detected by the scan search function.
Access:
► Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Sensor Mapping".
The dialog lists all detected R&S NRP sensors for selection and mapping. You can
also browse the network for sensors.
The detected sensors are characterized by the used protocol and the corresponding icon. In the "Mapping" column, you can assign the sensor to one of the available sensor channels. The list can contain several entries but the R&S SMA100B
can only use up to four sensors simultaneously.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12.14, "SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems", on page 351.
Settings
Sensor Mapping List .................................................................................................. 160
Scan ........................................................................................................................... 161
Sensor Mapping List
Displays a list of all sensor entries with information on the sensor name, the used protocol, the connector and the assigned mapping.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
160
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Using Power Sensors
If a sensor is connected via LAN or uses the USBTMC protocol, its protocol is indicated as "Visa".
Remote command:
:SLISt[:LIST]? on page 354
:SLISt:ELEMent<ch>:MAPPing on page 354
:SLISt:SENSor:MAP on page 355
Scan
Scans the network and the USB connections for sensors connected via the VISA communication protocol, i.e. sensors that are addressed via LAN or USBTMC.
Sensors communicating via the USB legacy protocol are detected automatically.
Remote command:
:SLISt:SCAN[:STATe] on page 354
6.4.3 NRP Power Viewer
The R&S SMA100B features the power viewer function for measuring or monitoring
signals with R&S NRP power sensors.
6.4.3.1
About
The R&S SMA100B can perform up to four power measurements simultaneously. The
measured signals can be the RF output power or other selected signal sources.
About the measuring principle, averaging filter, filter length, and achieving stable results
A sensor measures the average signal power of the selected source continuously. The
measurement results are displayed the "NRP Power Viewer" dialog.
The power viewer function uses averaging filters to reduce the fluctuations of the
measurement result to the desired extent. Common sources of fluctuations are inherent noise of the measuring instrument, modulation of the measurement signal or influences from the superposition of adjacent carriers. Common method for achieving more
stable display is the use of longer measurements. The term longer measurements do
not mean that it takes longer to display a new result. The term refers to the time it
takes for the result to settle when the power varies.
Measurements are continuously repeated in a predefined time window. The measurement result is obtained by averaging the measured values for the last 2N time windows. This approach is referred as a two-step averaging process.
The factor of 2 in the formula arises because the output signals from the microwave
detector are chopped at the same rate as the time windows to suppress low-frequency
noise. An independent measured value can only be obtained from two consecutive values.
The variable N in the formula indicates the filter length. The filter length then directly
influences the measurement time. The filter length can be selected automatically or it
can be manually set to a fixed value.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
161
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Using Power Sensors
Depending on the R&S NRP power sensor type, the manual setting of the filter length
varies in resolution:
●
Resolution = 1 for the R&S NRPxx family
●
Resolution = 2n for R&S NRP-Zxx power sensors, with n = 1 to 16
Follow the following general recommendation to find out the optimum filter length:
●
Always start a measurement in auto mode ("Filter > Auto").
Check if the measurement results are sufficient.
●
If the power is not constant, select the filter length manually ("Filter > User").
Trigger the "Auto Once" function to search for the optimum filter length for the current measurement conditions.
The estimated value is indicated as filter length.
●
If the target measurement accuracy value is known, select "Filter > Fixed Noise".
The averaging factor is selected automatically and so that the sensor's intrinsic
noise (two standard deviations) does not exceed the specified noise content.
●
Different sensor types achieve the same filtering result with different filter and time
window lengths.
The time window length depends on the sensor type:
–
For most sensors, it is fixed to 20 ms.
–
For the R&S NRP-Z81 sensor, it is 10 μs.
The R&S NRP-Z81 uses filter length that is 1000 times larger than the filter
length for other sensors.
About zeroing
Activates the auto zero function.
Zeroing calibrates the external power sensor by adjusting its reading at zero signal
power. For this purpose, the RF power source must be switched off or disconnected
from the sensor. If a Rohde & Schwarz power sensor receives an input power during
the zeroing process, it aborts zeroing and generates an error message. Zeroing takes
a few seconds, depending on the sensor model. Refer to the documentation of your
power sensor for more information.
Tips for zeroing
When to perform zeroing:
●
During warm up after switching on or connecting the instrument
●
After a substantial change of the ambient temperature
●
After fastening the power sensor module to an RF connector at high temperature
●
After several hours of operation
●
When low-power signals are to be measured, e.g. less than 10 dB above the lower
measurement limit.
●
Switch off the RF power source for zeroing, but do not disconnect it from the power
sensor. This proceeding keeps the thermal equilibrium, and the zeroing process
also compensates the noise that superimposes the measured signal (e.g. from a
broadband amplifier).
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
162
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Using Power Sensors
Related settings and functions
●
Measurements-related settings, like results, filter, filter length:
Chapter 6.4.3.2, "NRP Power Viewer Settings", on page 163
●
Sensor-specific information and sensor software update:
Chapter 6.4.4, "NRP Info Update", on page 168
●
Software version of the connected power sensor:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE? on page 363
●
Acquisition of level correction data:
Chapter 6.3, "User Correction", on page 148
Additional information
See Rohde & Schwarz website http://www.rohde-schwarz.com in section "Power
Meters & Voltmeters" for:
6.4.3.2
●
R&S NRP power sensor manual
●
Information on the R&S NRP-Z5 sensor hub and the available accessories.
NRP Power Viewer Settings
Access:
► Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Power Viewer".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
163
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Using Power Sensors
The "Overview" tab shows the list of detected sensors, and provides a separate tab
per sensor.
A sensor tab contains all parameters for configuring the sensor settings, like average or peak display, reference source, filter and level offset.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12.14, "SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems", on page 351, including the triggering of the measurement and the retrieval of measurement results.
See also Chapter 6.5, "How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP Power
Sensor", on page 171.
Settings
Sensor type and serial number................................................................................... 165
Level (Peak) / Level (Average) ...................................................................................165
Sensor Mapping.......................................................................................................... 165
Sensor settings........................................................................................................... 165
└ State .............................................................................................................165
└ Zero ..............................................................................................................165
└ Display.......................................................................................................... 165
└ Permanent ......................................................................................... 165
└ Display ............................................................................................... 166
└ Use Frequency Of.........................................................................................166
└ Frequency .................................................................................................... 166
└ Level Offset State,Level Offset..................................................................... 166
└ Filter.............................................................................................................. 166
└ Filter Length.................................................................................................. 167
└ Noise/Signal Ratio........................................................................................ 167
└ Auto Once..................................................................................................... 167
└ Timeout......................................................................................................... 167
└ Default Aperture Time...................................................................................167
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
164
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Using Power Sensors
└ Aperture Time............................................................................................... 168
└ S-Parameter .................................................................................................168
└ Enable Logging............................................................................................. 168
Sensor type and serial number
Indicates the type and the serial number of a selected R&S NRP power sensor, and
the channel the sensor is assigned to.
The displayed Level (Peak) / Level (Average) values correspond to the particular sensor.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE? on page 363
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SNUMber? on page 362
Level (Peak) / Level (Average)
Indicates the measured peak or average level value.
You can also change the unit for the results display: Watt, dBm or dBμV.
Note: Peak level measurements are provided if the power sensor supports this feature.
Remote command:
:READ<ch>[:POWer]? on page 356
:SENSe<ch>:UNIT[:POWer] on page 356
Sensor Mapping
Accesses the NRP Sensor Mapping dialog.
Sensor settings
One tab per sensor provides the corresponding settings.
State ← Sensor settings
Activates level measurement.
Remote command:
:INITiate<hw>[:POWer]:CONTinuous on page 355
To query the availability of a sensor at a given connector, use the command :
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:STATus[:DEVice]? on page 363.
Zero ← Sensor settings
Activates the auto zero function.
For details, see "About zeroing" on page 162.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:ZERO on page 364
Display ← Sensor settings
Sets the display mode for power readings.
Permanent ← Display ← Sensor settings
Activates the permanent indication of the power measurement result in the home
screen.
You can activate the permanent display for several sensors.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
165
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Using Power Sensors
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:STATe on page 358
Display ← Display ← Sensor settings
Sets the display of results on mean or peak power.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:PRIority on page 358
Use Frequency Of ← Sensor settings
Selects the source for measurement.
"RF"
The sensor measures the power of the RF signal at the current frequency. It considers the correction factor and uses the level setting of
the instrument as reference level. Frequency variations are automatically routed to the sensor.
"User"
Selects any freely selectable signal source, for example to measure
the amplifier gain with 2 sensors.
Set the parameter Frequency to the measurement's frequency.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SOURce on page 363
Frequency ← Sensor settings
Defines the frequency value if "Source > User" is used.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FREQuency on page 361
Level Offset State,Level Offset ← Sensor settings
Activates and defines a level offset which is added to the measured value. The level
offset value is always expressed in dB, irrespective of the selected unit for result display.
This function allows you to consider, for example, an attenuator in the signal path.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet on page 362
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe on page 362
Filter ← Sensor settings
Selects the way the length of the used filter is defined.
See also "About the measuring principle, averaging filter, filter length, and achieving
stable results" on page 161.
"Auto"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
The filter length is selected automatically and adjusted to the measured value. The value is indicated with the parameter Filter Length
With high signals, the filter length and therefore the measurement
time can be short.
With low signal levels, the filter length and therefore the measurement time is increased to reduce noise.
166
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Using Power Sensors
"User"
The filter length is defined manually, with the parameter Filter Length.
As the filter length works as a multiplier for the time window, constant
filter length results in a constant measurement time.
Values 1 and 2N are allowed.
"Fixed Noise"
The averaging factor is selected so that the sensor's intrinsic noise (2
standard deviations) does not exceed the specified noise content.
Set the noise content value with the parameter Noise/Signal Ratio.
To avoid long settling times when the power is low, limit the averaging factor with the parameter Timeout.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE on page 360
Filter Length ← Sensor settings
Sets or indicates the filter length, depending on the selected filter mode.
● "Filter > Auto" indicates the used filter length.
● "Filter > User" enables you to adjust a manual optimal filter length.
● "Filter > Fixed Noise" the filter length is blanked.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth:AUTO? on page 358
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth[:USER] on page 359
Noise/Signal Ratio ← Sensor settings
For "Filter > Fixed Noise", sets the noise content.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio on page 359
Auto Once ← Sensor settings
Searches the optimum filter length for the current measurement conditions. The result
is indicated with the parameter Filter Length.
See also "About the measuring principle, averaging filter, filter length, and achieving
stable results" on page 161.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:SONCe on page 360
Timeout ← Sensor settings
For "Filter > Fixed Noise", sets a time limit for the averaging process.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe on page 360
Default Aperture Time ← Sensor settings
The sensor default setting is sufficient. Disable this parameter to specify a user-defined
aperture time per sensor, if, for example, the readings vary.
To obtain stable readings, set the Aperture Time exactly to one modulation period.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:DEFault:STATe on page 357
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
167
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Using Power Sensors
Aperture Time ← Sensor settings
If "Use Default Aperture Time > Off", defines the acquisition time per sensor.
For example, to obtain a sufficient low average value, set the aperture time exactly to
one modulation period.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:TIMe on page 357
S-Parameter ← Sensor settings
Lists the S-Parameter correction data files retrieved for the connected power sensor.
To activate the correction data, select the corresponding file.
S-Parameter correction compensates for the losses and reflections introduced by a
component – such as an attenuator, directional coupler, or matching pad – that is
attached to a power sensor. Using S-Parameters instead of a fixed offset increases
measurement accuracy by accounting for the interaction between the sensor and the
component. S-Parameter correction shifts the sensor's reference plane from the sensor's RF connector to the input of the device that is being applied externally.
The S-Parameter table can be changed with the S-Parameters tool, provided as part of
the free R&S NRP Toolkit software. For more information, refer to the manual of the
connected R&S NRP power sensor.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:STATe on page 357
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:LIST? on page 358
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:SELect on page 357
Enable Logging ← Sensor settings
Activates recording of R&S NRP power sensor readings in a log file.
There is 1 log file per sensor. The log files are created automatically and filled in continuously. They are text files with predefined filename SensLog<n>.txt, where <n>
indicates the connected sensor. Log files are stored on the hard disk, in the directory /var/user/temp/SensorLogging.
Each log file contains the measured value (2 readings when you work with peak sensors), the sensor type, and the measurement time (timestamp). Logged data is not
overwritten. When a new measurement is started, the collected logging data is appended in the log file.
Check the used disc space regularly and remove log files to maintain storage capacity.
Note: The logging function is intended for measurements with long time intervals. It is
suitable source for data reconstructions if the connection to the sensor was interrupted.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:LOGGing:STATe on page 361
6.4.4 NRP Info Update
The "NRP Info/Update" dialog covers information on connected power sensors, like
serial number, revision state and features of the particular sensor. You can directly
update the sensor firmware.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
168
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Using Power Sensors
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > NRP Info/Update".
The "NRP Info/Update" dialog indicates the connected R&S NRP sensors with specific information and contains the functions to update the firmware of a connected
sensor.
The remote commands required to configure the display and keyboard are described in Chapter 12.14, "SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems",
on page 351.
Settings
Current Sensors.......................................................................................................... 169
Update.........................................................................................................................169
Current Sensors
Shows the sensors that are connected to the R&S SMA100B with information on serial
number, the revision state, and some characteristic features.
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE? on page 363
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SVERsion? on page 363
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SNUMber? on page 362
Update
Provides all functions needed to run the sensor update.
Note: Download the required update file before you start the update.
Follow the instructions in Chapter 6.4.5, "How to Update the Sensor Firmware",
on page 170.
●
Selection field
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
169
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
Using Power Sensors
●
●
●
Selects the sensor to be updated.
"Select NRP File"
Provides access to the file system to select the update file. The selected file is indicated to the left of the button.
"Run Update"
Starts the update.
"Rescue"
Appears if the update process is interrupted.
Note: Interrupted update. If the sensor is accidentally removed during the update process or if the update is interrupted, restart the update as described in Chapter 6.4.5,
"How to Update the Sensor Firmware", on page 170.
6.4.5 How to Update the Sensor Firmware
To update the sensor firmware
1. Open the Rohde & Schwarz website http://www.rohde-schwarz.com in section
"Power Meters & Voltmeters".
2. Select the sensor type, e.g. the R&S NRP33SN-V.
3. Select "Downloads > Firmware" and the firmware provided for your sensor.
4. Save the firmware in the /var/user/temp/ directory.
5. Connect the sensor to the R&S SMA100B.
6. Select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > NRP Info/Update".
7. Select the sensor in the left sensor selection field.
8. Select the update file with "Select NRP File".
9. Activate "Run Update".
The update starts and a progress bar indicates the state.
To restart an interrupted update
If an update has been interrupted, proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect all other sensors form the instrument.
2. Do not reconnect the sensor, but keep it ready for connection.
3. In the "NRP Info/Update" dialog, select "Rescue".
4. Activate "Run Update".
5. Confirm the query in message box.
6. Connect the sensor within 4 seconds
The update starts and a progress bar indicates the state.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
170
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP Power Sensor
6.5 How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP
Power Sensor
Using a R&S NRP and the user correction function of the instrument, you can achieve
a stable output level of high accuracy over a specified frequency range. The
R&S SMA100B utilizes the readings of the power sensor and creates a correction
value table for controlling the output level during operation.
To connect the R&S NRP to the R&S SMA100B
1. Connect the power sensor.
See Chapter 6.4.1, "Connecting R&S NRP Power Sensors to the R&S SMA100B",
on page 158.
2. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Sensor Mapping".
3. If the sensor is not detected automatically, select "Scan > Start".
The instrument scans the network and the USB connections for connected sensors
and lists all detected R&S NRP sensors in the mapping table.
4. In the "Mapping" column, assign the sensor to a sensor channel (see Chapter 6.4.2, "NRP Sensor Mapping", on page 159
5. Close the dialog.
To configure and calibrate the R&S NRP in the R&S SMA100B
Provided the power sensor is connected to the R&S SMA100B and is assigned to a
sensor channel, we recommend that you calibrate and configure the power sensor in
the "NRP Power Viewer" dialog.
1. Select "Level" > "RF ON > Off"
2. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Power Viewer".
3. If the R&S SMA100B has detected several connected power sensors, select the
tab of the sensor you want to use.
4. Select "Zero" to start the automatic calibration function.
Note: Always turn the RF power off or disconnected from the sensor before zeroing, since the function calibrates the power sensor at zero signal power.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
171
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP Power Sensor
The zeroing process takes a few seconds, depending on the power sensor type.
5. Configure additional parameters for the selected sensor as required.
6. Select "State > On".
7. Close the dialog.
To create user correction data with an R&S NRP and the R&S SMA100B
We assume, that the power sensor is connected, assigned and ready for operation.
1. Select "Level" > "User Correction".
2. Select "UCOR Data > User Cor. Data".
3. Create a file: "New > Filename" and confirm with "OK".
4. Select the new file with "Select".
5. Select "Edit User Cor. Data".
6. Select "Edit > Fill".
The "Fill Table" dialog enables you to fill in the values of the columns automatically.
7. To fill in the frequency column:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Select "Select Column To Fill > Frequency / Hz"
Select "Range > e.g. 15" to determine the number of values.
Select "Start Value > e.g. 1.56 GHz".
Select "Increment Value > e.g. 1 MHz", to determine the frequency steps.
Select "Fill", to insert the values
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
172
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP Power Sensor
The table with user correction values contains the automatically calculated frequency values.
The function also fills the column of the "Power / dB" values with a predefined
value, since empty cells lead to the data loss of the entire line.
8. Select "Fill with Sensor".
The "Fill User Correction Data With Sensor" dialog provides an overview of the
sensor configuration.
9. Select "Execute".
The R&S SMA100B successively sets each frequency point, reads the measured
power of the sensor and fills in the value in the correction table.
10. Select "Save" to save the data in the file.
11. Close the dialog.
To perform power leveling calibration with user correction data
We assume that a user correction file is available in the user directory of the
R&S SMA100B or on a memory stick or in a shared directory.
If you have created and saved the file immediately before this step, the file is loaded in
the "User Correction" dialog automatically. Otherwise you can load a previously saved
file.
1. Select "Level" > "User Correction".
2. Select "UCOR Data > User Cor. Data", if there is no file loaded already.
3. Select the directory and file you want to use.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
173
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance
How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP Power Sensor
4. Load the file with "Select".
5. To view the file content, select "Edit User Cor. Data".
6. Select "UCOR Data > State > On" to apply the user correction values.
When you activate the RF signal, you get a constant signal level within the frequency range that is covered in the user correction file.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
174
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator
Using the Reference Frequency for Instruments Synchronization
7 Reference Oscillator
The R&S SMA100B is equipped with an internal reference oscillator that generates a
reference frequency of 1 GHz. It is used as internal reference source for the synthesizer. Alternatively, you can apply an external reference signal. The R&S SMA100B
can process external reference frequency in the range 1 MHz to 100 MHz and the
1 GHz reference frequency.
Regardless of the used reference source (internal or external), the R&S SMA100B
always outputs the reference frequency at the output connector. You can use it, for
example to synchronize further connected instruments. For an overview of typical test
situations, see Chapter 7.2, "Using the Reference Frequency for Instruments Synchronization", on page 175.
The reference oscillator settings are not affected by an instrument preset (PRESET
key or *RST) and the "Save/Recall" function. They are reset only by factory preset.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12.15.11, "SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem", on page 442.
7.1 Required Options
R&S SMA100B base unit equipped with the following options:
●
Reference frequencies 1 MHz to 100 MHz (R&S SMAB-K704)
●
Ultra low noise 1 GHz (R&S SMAB-K703)
For more information, see data sheet.
7.2 Using the Reference Frequency for Instruments Synchronization
Test setups with two or more instruments often require that the instruments use a common reference frequency. Depending on the availability of external reference frequency source and its quality, the instruments are connected and configured in different ways.
This section gives an overview of the possible test setups and the related settings. The
following situations are considered:
●
External reference source is not available or the built-in reference oscillator is of
better quality than the external source
(see "Distributing the internal 10 MHz reference signal to further instruments"
on page 176)
●
Clean external reference source with quality exceeding the quality of the built-in
reference oscillator
(see "Using external reference source" on page 177)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
175
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator
Using the Reference Frequency for Instruments Synchronization
●
Interfered or noisy external reference signal
(see "Deriving 10 MHz form the external reference frequency" on page 178)
●
1 GHz reference coupling for phase coherence of the RF signals with reasonable
long-term phase stability
(see "Sharing the 1 GHz reference frequency to obtain phase-coherent signals"
on page 177)
Connectors overview
Use the "Show Connector" function to indicate the connector on the front/real panel:
●
REF IN/REF OUT
●
REF IN/REF OUTRef In/Out 1GHz
●
"EFC" on page 42
Distributing the internal 10 MHz reference signal to further instruments
The internal reference oscillator provides the reference frequency:
●
Internal fref = 10 MHz (10 MHz at connector REF OUT)
●
Source = "Internal"
●
Reference Output/1GHz Reference Output = "10 MHz"
●
Optional:
–
External Tuning Active = "On"
–
External Tuning Slope = "Low"
Figure 7-1: Synchronizing instruments using the internal 10 MHz reference signal of the
R&S SMA100B
EFC
= External frequency control
EFC,REF IN,REF OUT = Connectors
In phase noise measurement systems, for example, you can additionally use the EFC
(external frequency control) function and shift the frequency.
EFC is a function that transforms an external tuning voltage into frequency shift, where
the value range of the resulting frequency is a technical characteristic listed in the data
sheet. See the data sheet also for information on the sensitivity, input voltage range,
impedance and maximum bandwidth for external tuning signal.
Consider the following interdependency:
●
EFC in combination with an external PLL
If the EFC is applied in combination with an external PLL (phase locked loop), the
PLL bandwidth must be smaller than the bandwidth of the external tuning signal.
●
FM-DC mode
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
176
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator
Using the Reference Frequency for Instruments Synchronization
If the measurement requires higher PLL bandwidth, we recommend that you use
the external FM modulation (DC coupling) in low noise mode.
The FM-DC mode yields a fixed tuning sensitivity that is independent of the RF output frequency and corresponds to the selected FM deviation.
Sharing the 1 GHz reference frequency to obtain phase-coherent signals
Compared to 10 MHz, a 1 GHz reference signal significantly improves the achievable
phase stability between two signal sources. Because the synchronization increases by
a factor of 100, the relative phase fluctuations between the sources can be reduced.
1 GHz at connector REF IN 1GHZ and 1 GHz at REF OUT 1GHZ
●
External fRef = 1 GHz
●
Source = "External"
●
External Reference Frequency = "1 GHz"
●
1GHz Reference Output = "1 GHz"
Using external reference source
If you have a clean external reference signal with 10 MHz or 100 MHz frequency for
example, you can directly pass it to the output. The signal quality remains the same.
10 MHz/100 MHz at connector REF OUT and REF IN
●
External fRef = 10 MHz or 100 MHz
●
Source = "External"
●
Reference Output = "10 MHz/100 MHz" or "Input Signal (loop through)"
●
Set the synchronization bandwidth according to the requirements of the application.
Figure 7-2: Synchronizing instruments with a 10 MHz external reference signal
Ref. Frequency Source = e.g. Rohde & Schwarz signal analyzer
fRef
= 10 MHz/100 MHz/1 to 100 MHz external reference frequency
REF IN,REF OUT
= Connectors
You can forward any external reference frequency between 1 MHz and 100 MHz
directly to the output in the same way:
●
External fRef = 1 MHz to 100 MHz
(1 MHz to 100 MHz at connector REF IN and REF OUT)
●
Source = "External"
●
Variable Reference Frequency = "Variable"
●
External Reference Frequency = current external frequency
●
Reference Output = "Input Signal (loop through)" or specify the reference frequency the synchronized instrument supports
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
177
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator
Reference Frequency Settings
●
Set the synchronization bandwidth according to the requirements of the application.
Deriving 10 MHz form the external reference frequency
10 MHz reference frequency can be derived from the following external reference signals:
●
100 MHz and 1 GHz external reference signals
●
External reference signal between 1 MHz and 100 MHz
●
If the external reference signal is interfered (noisy)
Figure 7-3: Synchronizing instruments with 10 MHz (derived from an external reference frequency)
Ref. Frequency Source
fRef
*
REF IN,REF OUT
=
=
=
=
e.g., Rohde & Schwarz signal analyzer
10 MHz/100 MHz/1 to 100 MHz/1GHz* external reference frequency
1 GHz uses REF IN 1 GHZ connector
Connectors
1 GHz/1 to 100 MHz at connector REF IN 1 GHZ/REF IN and 10 MHz at REF OUT
●
E.g., External Ref. fref = 100 MHz
●
Source = "External"
●
External Reference Frequency = "100 MHz"
●
Reference Output/1GHz Reference Output = "10 MHz"
●
Synchronization Bandwidth = "Narrow"
7.3 Reference Frequency Settings
Access:
1. Select one of the following:
● "Frequency" > "Reference Freq"
● "System Config" > "Setup" > "Reference Freq"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
178
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator
Reference Frequency Settings
In the "Reference Frequency" tab, you can select the signal source of the reference
frequency and define the frequency of an external reference signal.
2. Observe the information on the home screen, "Frequency" tile.
The "Frequency" tile indicates the current reference oscillator configuration, incl.
the reference oscillator source, external reference frequency (rounded value) and
output connector.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12.15.11, "SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem", on page 442.
Settings:
Set to Default.............................................................................................................. 180
Source.........................................................................................................................180
Show Connector..........................................................................................................180
Deactivate RF Output (if external reference is missing)..............................................180
External Reference Frequency................................................................................... 180
Variable Reference Frequency................................................................................... 181
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
179
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator
Reference Frequency Settings
Synchronization Bandwidth.........................................................................................181
Nominal Synchronization Bandwidth...........................................................................181
Minimum Locking Range.............................................................................................181
External Tuning Active................................................................................................ 181
External Tuning Slope.................................................................................................181
Set to Default
Calls the default settings.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:PRESet on page 443
Source
Selects the reference frequency source.
"Internal"
Uses the internal reference oscillator, either with calibrated or a userdefined adjustment value.
"External"
Uses an external reference signal.
The frequency of the external reference signal must be set with the
parameter "External Reference Frequency".
See "External Reference Frequency" on page 180.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:SOURce on page 443
Show Connector
Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the
front/rear panel of the instrument.
Deactivate RF Output (if external reference is missing)
Turns off the RF output when the external reference signal is selected, but no signal is
supplied.
This function prevents that no improper RF signal due to the missing external reference signal is used for measurements. A message indicates that the RF output is
deactivated.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:RFOFf[:STATe] on page 444
External Reference Frequency
Sets the frequency of the external reference signal.
"Variable"
Option: R&S SMAB-K704
The external reference signal has an arbitrary frequency, within the
permissible range from 1 MHz to 100 MHz.
Set the output frequency with the paramaters in the Reference Output
dialog.
"10 MHz, 100 MHz, 1GHz"
Selects the external reference frequency.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency on page 444
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
180
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator
Reference Frequency Settings
Variable Reference Frequency
Requires R&S SMAB-K704
Sets the variably settable external reference frequency.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency:VARiable on page 445
Synchronization Bandwidth
Selects the synchronization bandwidth for an external reference signal.
The resulting bandwidth is indicated with the parameter Nominal Synchronization
Bandwidth.
"Narrow"
The internal reference oscillator is synchronized to the external signal
with small bandwidth (< 1 Hz). This setting is recommended if the
phase noise of the external signal is worse than the phase noise of
the internal OCXO.
"Wide"
This mode is the recommended standard mode and for precise reference sources of high spectral purity.
Note: If the frequency of the external reference signal is outside the
locking range of the internal reference oscillator, spurs due to the difference of the internal and external reference frequency are generated in the reference PLL.
An error message is displayed.
For more information, see data sheet.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:SBANdwidth on page 445
Nominal Synchronization Bandwidth
Indicates the nominal synchronization bandwidth for the selected external reference
frequency and synchronization bandwidth.
Minimum Locking Range
Indicates the minimum locking range, depending on the selected external reference
frequency and synchronization bandwidth.
External Tuning Active
For "Source > Internal", activates the EFC (external frequency control).
EFC is a function that transforms an external tuning voltage into frequency shift, where
the value range of the resulting frequency is a technical characteristic listed in the data
sheet.
See the data sheet also for information on the sensitivity, input voltage range, impedance and maximum bandwidth for external tuning signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing[:STATe] on page 444
External Tuning Slope
Sets the sensitivity of the external tuning volatge.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
181
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator
Reference Output Settings
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing:SLOPe on page 444
7.4 Reference Output Settings
Access:
1. Select "Frequency" > "Reference Freq"
2. Select "Reference Output".
In the "Reference Output" tab, you can set the reference frequency value at the
output connectors.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12.15.11, "SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem", on page 442.
Settings:
Reference Output/1GHz Reference Output................................................................ 182
Show Connector..........................................................................................................183
Reference Output/1GHz Reference Output
Selects the signal that is to be output as frequency reference for downstream instruments.
"Off"
Disables the reference signal output.
"10 MHz/100 MHz"
Derives a signal with 10 MHz or 100 MHz frequency from the internal
reference oscillator and forwards this signal to the output.
"1GHz"
Outputs a 1 GHz signal.
"Input Signal (loop through)"
Forwards the supplied reference frequency to the output directly.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:OUTPut:FREQuency:MODE on page 445
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:OUTPut:ALTernate:FREQuency:MODE on page 446
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
182
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator
Adjustments Settings
Show Connector
Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the
front/rear panel of the instrument.
7.5 Adjustments Settings
Access:
1. Select "Frequency" > "Reference Freq"
2. Select "Adjustment".
Settings:
Adjustment Active....................................................................................................... 183
Adjustment DAC Value............................................................................................... 183
Adjustment Active
Selects the adjustment mode.
"OFF"
Uses the calibrated internal reference frequency.
"ON"
Allows you to apply a deviation to the internal reference frequency,
according to your requirements.
Enter the value in the Adjustment DAC Value field.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[:STATe] on page 447
Adjustment DAC Value
Sets a user-defined adjustment value for the internal reference frequency. This value
takes effect when it is activated with Adjustment Active.
●
●
"0" represents the calibrated state.
The setting range depends on the reference oscillator type and its factory calibration value.
Note:
The value is not affected by an instrument preset (PRESET key or *RST) and the
"Save/Recall" function. It is reset only by factory preset.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust:VALue on page 446
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
183
R&S®SMA100B
Clock Synthesis
8 Clock Synthesis
The clock synthesis provides a separate system clock with a freely selectable frequency for test setups that require an additional clock reference. For example, in a test
setup that uses an A/D converter, the required system clock for data sampling can be
provided without the need of additional signal generator.
Output connectors
The generated clock reference is synchronized to the selected reference clock of the
signal generator (internal or external). The differential signal is output at the CLK SYN
and CLK SYN N connectors.
Required options
●
Option frequency R&S SMAB-B10x
●
Option differential clock synthesis up to 3 GHz R&S SMAB-B29
●
Option clock synthesis extension 6 GHz R&S SMAB-K722
(requires at least R&S SMAB-B106)
For more information, see data sheet.
Settings
Access:
1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens > Clock Synthesis".
2. Select "User Variation" to set the step width to be used when setting the clock frequency using the rotary knob.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
184
R&S®SMA100B
Clock Synthesis
3. Observe the information on the home screen, "Clk Syn/Power Sens" tile.
The "Clk Syn/Power Sens" tile indicates that clock synthesis is activated and gives
an overview of the key parameters.
Settings
State ...........................................................................................................................185
Output Type................................................................................................................ 185
Frequency .................................................................................................................. 186
Level ...........................................................................................................................186
DC Offset State .......................................................................................................... 186
DC Offset ................................................................................................................... 187
Voltage........................................................................................................................ 187
Delta Phase.................................................................................................................187
Reset Delta Phase Display......................................................................................... 187
User Variation............................................................................................................. 187
└ Variation Active............................................................................................. 187
└ Variation Step............................................................................................... 187
State
Activates/deactivates generation of a system clock.
The signal is output at the CLK SYN connector.
Remote command:
:CSYNthesis:STATe on page 329
Output Type
Defines the shape of the generated clock signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
185
R&S®SMA100B
Clock Synthesis
"Single-Ended/Differential Sine"
Sine signals with user-definable amplitude.
"Differential Square"
Squared signal with fixed amplitude.
"CMOS"
CMOS-like signal with user-definable amplitude and limited frequency
range.
Remote command:
:CSYNthesis:OTYPe on page 329
Frequency
Sets the frequency of the generated clock signal.
Output Type
Min. frequency
Max. frequency
Single-ended sinus
100 kHz
6 GHz
Differential square
10 MHz
6 GHz
CMOS
100 kHz
200 MHz
Differential sinus
Remote command:
:CSYNthesis:FREQuency on page 329
Level
For Output Type = "Single-Ended/Differential Sine", sets the amplitude of the generated clock signal.
Remote command:
:CSYNthesis:POWer on page 330
DC Offset State
Activates a DC offset for both clock synthesis signal outputs.
The DC offset can be used e.g. to shift the clock synthesis output signal into the trigger
threshold of some logic elements.
Figure 8-1: Example: DC offset = 1.65V and Output Type = Differential Square
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
186
R&S®SMA100B
Clock Synthesis
Remote command:
:CSYNthesis:OFFSet:STATe on page 330
DC Offset
Sets the value of the DC offset for both clock synthesis signal outputs.
Remote command:
:CSYNthesis:OFFSet on page 330
Voltage
For Output Type = "CMOS", sets the high-level of the output signal.
Remote command:
:CSYNthesis:VOLTage on page 331
Delta Phase
Shifts the phase of the generated clock signal.
Remote command:
:CSYNthesis:PHASe on page 331
Reset Delta Phase Display
Resets the parameter Delta Phase.
User Variation
Defines and activates a user-defined step width for varying the frequency or level with
the rotary knob.
If disabled, the step width varies in steps of one unit at the cursor position.
Variation Active ← User Variation
Activates the set user-defined step width.
Remote command:
:CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP:MODE on page 332
:CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP:MODE on page 332
Variation Step ← User Variation
Sets the user-defined step width.
Remote command:
:CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP on page 332
:CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] on page 332
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
187
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
About the File System
9 File and Data Management
The R&S SMA100B uses files to save all instrument data. The instrument allows you to
store and to load instrument settings, and to import and to export user data for processing in another instrument or later. Finally, you can create a screenshot of the current settings displayed on the screen and save it as a file.
This section focuses on the functions provided for managing of user data files and covers the topics listed below.
For information on the related remote control commands, refer to Chapter 12.5, "MMEMory Subsystem", on page 312.
For information on how to save the displayed setting in a file, refer to Chapter 9.10,
"Creating Screenshots of Current Settings", on page 212.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
About the File System........................................................................................... 188
Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration..................................................191
Protecting Data..................................................................................................... 196
Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings............................................................ 197
Accessing Files with User Data.............................................................................201
Exporting Remote Command Lists....................................................................... 203
Loading, Importing and Exporting Lists.................................................................204
Using the File Manager......................................................................................... 204
How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument.................................................207
Creating Screenshots of Current Settings.............................................................212
9.1 About the File System
Depending on the contained information, two file groups can be distinguished: system
and user files.
Due to security reasons, system files and the system directory are protected and therefore not accessible.
The scope of this section is only the files with user data.
This section is an overview of the R&S SMA100B file system and covers the following
topics:
●
"Types of user data" on page 189
●
"File storage location" on page 189
●
"File handling" on page 190
●
"File naming conventions" on page 190
●
"File extensions" on page 190
●
"File contents" on page 191
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
188
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
About the File System
Types of user data
Depending on the content, the user data can be roughly divided into the following
data types:
●
Settings, e.g. the current instrument settings, can be stored and loaded later or
used in other instrument of the same kind.
See Chapter 9.4, "Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings", on page 197
●
SCPI scripts, a series of commands that can be run to perform a task.
See Chapter 9.6, "Exporting Remote Command Lists", on page 203
●
Externally or internally generated lists, e.g. user correction lists, or data lists can be
loaded in the instrument.
See Chapter 9.7, "Loading, Importing and Exporting Lists", on page 204 and
Chapter 9.5, "Accessing Files with User Data", on page 201
Depending on the data storage method, user data can be:
●
Persistent, i.e. user files that are recorded on the data storage.
Data is preserved when instrument is powered off and can be accessed and modified subsequently.
●
Temporary, i.e. volatile data that the instrument retains while it is powered on.
Volatile data is immediately lost when the R&S SMA100B is switched off.
File storage location
Without any additional measures, the R&S SMA100B stores user files on the internal
memory, or if selected, on a memory stick.
Both, the user directory /var/user on the internal memory or the /var/usb directory, can be used to preserve user-defined data. Any directory structure can be created.
The /var/volatile directory serves as a RAM drive and can be used to protect
sensitive information. The data is available temporarily.
If option R&S SMAB-B85 is installed, the R&S SMA100B maps the user directory to
the removable memory. If a memory is mounted, user data is saved there. Otherwise
user data is redirected to the volatile memory.
Default storage location
The R&S SMA100B stores user data in the user directory.
Depending on the installed options, the user directory is physically located on the internal memory or on the Removable memory.
In the file system, user directory is always indicated as /var/user.
In manual control, you access this directory via the "File Manager", see Chapter 9.8,
"Using the File Manager", on page 204. In remote control, you can query it with the
command :SYSTem:MMEMory:PATH:USER?.
To query and change the default directory used for mass storage, use the command :
MMEMory:CDIRectory.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
189
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
About the File System
File handling
To access files and the file system of the instrument or to use the general file management functions such as copying and moving data, use the standard "File Manager" dialog.
See Chapter 9.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 204.
To transfer files from and to the instruments or to exchange files, use one of the following alternatives:
●
Connect a memory stick to one of the USB interfaces.
The instrument recognizes automatically a connected memory stick and assigns
the /usb/ drive to it.
●
Connect the instrument to a LAN.
An instrument connected to a LAN supports two standard file transfer methods
from a remote client:
–
FTP (file transfer protocol)
–
File sharing according to the SAMBA/SMB (server message block) protocol.
Both file transfer methods access the folder /var/user/share.
For step-by-step description, see Chapter 9.9, "How to Transfer Files from and to
the Instrument", on page 207.
File naming conventions
To enable files to be used in different file systems, consider the following file naming
conventions:
●
The filename can be of any length and is case-sensitive, i.e it is distinguished
between uppercase and lowercase letters.
●
All letters and numbers are permitted (numbers are, however, not permitted at the
beginning of the filename).
●
Avoid using special characters.
●
Do not use slashes "\" and "/". These symbols are used in file paths.
●
Avoid using the following filenames: CLOCK$, CON, COM1 to COM4,
LPT1 to LPT3, NUL or PRN
They are reserved by the operating system.
File extensions
The R&S SMA100B distinguishes the files according to their extensions; each type of
file is assigned a specific file content and also a specific file extension. The extension
is usually of no consequence to you since access to the files occurs in the individual
dialogs where only the relevant type of file is available. For example, files with user
correction data can only be saved and loaded in the "UCOR" dialog.
See Chapter C, "Extensions for User Files", on page 537 for an overview of the supported file extensions.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
190
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration
File contents
To maintain the file size and to accelerate the loading and processing times, not all
instrument settings but rather the settings in state different than the preset one are
stored. Considered is also configuration data for the operating elements and lists with
user data, e.g. dialog positions and a list of user correction data. However, if a list data
is part of the instrument settings, a reference to this list is stored, not the list itself.
This approach ensures that the created files contain only relevant information and
allows you to transfer instrument settings even between different equipped signal generators. During the recall process, the instrument interprets only the relevant settings;
all non-referenced parameters are set to their preset values. Error messages indicate
the settings which cannot be implemented, like referencing non-existing lists or the
attempt to activate settings which are not supported by the instrument.
Network settings and remote settings cannot be saved and restored.
9.2 Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration
The R&S SMA100B has various options to set default settings, see Figure 9-1. You
can preset the R&S SMA100B to an initial state at any time as a known starting point
for configurations. It is often useful as a first step in troubleshooting when unusual
results arise.
The graph on Figure 9-1 shows the impact of the particular reset functions.
Figure 9-1: Parameter and operating modes, reset by the respective preset functions
Overview of the characteristics of the preset functions
Select the preset option that most fits to your particular application:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
191
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration
●
PRESET
It is the most frequently used function.
A Preset executes a defined instrument setup to provide an initial instrument state
as a basis for a new configuration. It resets all parameters and switching states,
including also the states of inactive operating modes.
Network, remote access or system settings are retained.
► To execute a preset, press the PRESET key at the front panel.
●
"Set to Default"
Set To Default relates to individual dialogs or tabs and resets the associated settings of the corresponding dialog. All other settings are retained.
► To reset the grouped settings, click "Set To Default".
●
"Preset this parameter"
Sets a single parameter to its default value.
► To reset an individual parameter: Open its context-sensitive menu and select "Preset this parameter...".
●
"Factory Preset"
A factory preset is the most profound preset function that resets almost all instrument settings, including reference oscillator, network and remote access settings.
Retained are the following settings:
–
Security, password, and settings protected by these passwords
–
User-defined data, like setups or data lists
–
Settings that relate to an integration of the instrument in a measurement setup.
► To restore the factory defaults, select System Config > Setup > Settings > Factory
Preset.
Note: Perform a "Factory Preset" only if it is necessary. After a "Factory Preset",
the network connection to the instrument no longer exists.
Presetting the instrument to a user-defined instrument state
The reset functions set the parameters and operating modes to default values predefined by the factory. Alternatively to these default settings, you can:
●
Define user-specific recall settings to be restored after a preset
(see Chapter 9.2.3, "How to Recall User Settings Automatically after Preset",
on page 194)
●
Store and reload user-defined instrument states
(see Chapter 9.4.2, "How to Save and Recall Instrument Settings", on page 200)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
192
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration
Mark / Do not mark parameters changed from preset
To survey the current state of the settings concerning default values, the
R&S SMA100B offers a feature that visually identifies deviations from the default values.
For more information, see Chapter 9.2.2, "How to Identify Parameters Which Are Not in
a Preset State", on page 194.
9.2.1 Preset, Set to Default and Factory Preset Settings
Preset..........................................................................................................................193
Set To Default............................................................................................................. 193
Preset this Parameter................................................................................................. 193
Execute Factory Preset...............................................................................................193
Preset
Resets all parameters and switching states, and closes all opened dialogs.
Consider also the following possibilities:
● You can define the settings that are restored when you preset the instrument
(see Chapter 9.2.3, "How to Recall User Settings Automatically after Preset",
on page 194)
● You can reset the instrument to the factory state
(see "Execute Factory Preset" on page 193)
See also Table 9-1 that contains the key parameters that are reset by the corresponding preset functions.
Remote command:
*RST on page 309
Set To Default
Resets the associated settings of the corresponding dialog or tab.
Preset this Parameter
Restores the default value of a single parameter.
Execute Factory Preset
Resets the instrument to its factory settings.
Note: "Factory Preset" retains all security settings and does not delete any user files
like setups or user data.
See also Table 9-1 that contains the key parameters that are reset by the corresponding preset functions.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:FPReset on page 312
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
193
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration
9.2.2 How to Identify Parameters Which Are Not in a Preset State
To recognize the current state of the settings related to their default values at the first
glance, enable a function that visually identifies parameters in states different than preset.
To activate this display:
1. Open the context-sensitive menu (touch and hold the screen anywhere in the GUI
of the R&S SMA100B).
2. Select "Mark all parameters changed from preset".
If enabled, the corresponding settings are marked.
Example:
Figure 9-2: Labeled parameters show that the value deviates from its default
Frequency
Offset
Multiplier
Variation active
Variation step
=
=
=
=
=
changed (default = 1 GHz)
changed (default = 0 kHz)
unchanged
changed (default = enabled)
unchanged
9.2.3 How to Recall User Settings Automatically after Preset
You can define the settings that are restored when you preset the instrument.
1. Configure the settings as required. Save them as described in Chapter 9.4.2, "How
to Save and Recall Instrument Settings", on page 200.
2. Save the settings as a file with the predefined filename UserPreset.savrcltxt.
Save this file in the directory /var/user/.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
194
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration
The filename UserPreset.savrcltxt and the directory /var/user/ are mandatory.
Now when you press the PRESET key or send the *RST command to the instrument, the defined settings are restored.
An "Info" message confirms, that a file with user-defined preset setting is loaded.
9.2.4 Reference
See Table 9-1 for an overview of the main generator settings that are affected by the
corresponding preset functions. While the regular PRESET key primarily resets the signal relevant parameters of the instrument, the "Factory Preset" affects almost all instrument settings.
For information on the default values of further parameters, refer to the description of
the corresponding remote commands.
Table 9-1: Key parameters affected by preset and factory preset
Parameter
Preset value
Preset
Factory
Preset
RF frequency
1 GHz
x
x
RF level (RF output)
off
x
x
RF OFF mode
-
-
x
Offsets
0
x
x
Modulation state
off
x
x
Uninterrupted level settings
off
x
x
Level attenuator mode
auto
x
x
Level ALC (internal level control)
auto
x
x
Level UCOR (user correction)
off
x
x
LF output state
off
x
x
Sweep state
off
x
x
List mode state
off
x
x
Reference frequency settings (reference oscillator)
-
-
x
Power on settings (Level/EMF)
-
-
x
Network settings
-
-
x
Hostname
-
-
x
GPIB address
-
-
x
Start/Stop display update
-
-
x
Display and keyboard settings
-
-
x
Password and settings protected by passwords (e.g. disabled LAN or USB)
-
-
-
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
195
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Protecting Data
Parameter
Preset value
Security settings
User files (setups2), data lists, etc.)
●
Preset
Factory
Preset
-
-
-
-
-
-
2)
UserPreset.savrcltxt is renamed as UserPresetInactive.savrcltxt;
an existing file with the same name is overwritten.
If the default values in the "Remote Access" dialog had been changed, a factory preset
via remote control (:SYSTem:FPReset) terminates the connection to the instrument.
Security settings are never reset.
Resets all parameters and switching states, and closes all opened dialogs.
9.3 Protecting Data
During operation, the R&S SMA100B saves user data permanently in the user directory, see "File storage location" on page 189.
To protect any classified data and to avoid saving any sensitive data on the
R&S SMA100B permanently, you can:
●
Install the option removable memory R&S SMAB-B85
This option ensures that user data is never saved on the internal memory.
–
Per default, if removable memory is mounted, user data is saved permanently and only on this storage medium.
You can access data saved on the removable memory just as data stored in
the /var/user/.
–
If volatile mode is activated or there is no memory mounted or it is removed
during operation, user data is stored temporarily in the volatile memory of
the instrument.
This data is lost once the instrument is switched off.
●
Store user files temporarily in the /var/volatile directory, which remains
available only until the instrument is switched off.
You can access data saved in volatile memory just as data stored permanently in
the /var/user/.
See also Chapter 9.8.2, "How to Display All Saved Files", on page 206.
●
Activate the volatile mode so that no user data can be written to the internal memory permanently.
The removable memory is protected, too.
Instead, you can only save user data:
–
Temporary in the volatile memory
–
On a connected external storage device, such as a memory stick
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
196
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings
See also:
–
"Default storage location" on page 189
–
"Volatile Mode" on page 235
–
Chapter 9.9.4, "Using a USB Storage Device for File Transfer", on page 211
9.4 Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings
Possibly you would like to restore or repeat a signal generation you performed under
specific conditions on the instrument. Or, in a test setup with more than one signal generators, you want to transfer the used settings to another R&S SMA100B. Some test
setups also require similar settings in all instrument paths. In these cases, you can
save and recall instrument and user settings, and possibly other related data.
In each of these cases, you can create a file with the complete instrument settings or
you can choose to save only the settings belonging to a particular digital standard. The
instrument uses a similar save/recall principle; both ways are scope of this section.
Save/Recall the complete instrument settings
Two different methods are available for managing complete instrument settings:
●
Immediate (quick) Save/Recall
A defined set of instrument settings are saved or recalled quickly in just one step,
without defining a filename or storage location. This function enables a fast switching between different instrument settings.
●
Save/Recall in files with user-defined names
The defined set of instrument settings are stored to a definable storage location.
The file extension is *.savrcltxt.
Settings files created in this way are visible in the file system and accessible with
the supported methods for file handling.
In the general case, a recall process replaces the instruments settings with the saved
values. An exception is the frequency and level settings. During recall of the instrument
settings, it is possible to retain the current settings or to overwrite them with the stored
values.
Accessing and recalling instrument setups
For quick access to a stored instrument setup file, assign the appropriate action to the
USER key.
See Chapter 10.2.3, "Assigning Actions to the User Key", on page 226.
9.4.1 Save/Recall Settings
To access the dialog for storing and loading the complete instrument settings
1. Select "System Config > Save/Recall".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
197
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings
2. Select "Operation Mode > Save or Recall" to access the corresponding settings.
The provided settings for both operations are similar and closely related.
Settings:
Operation Mode.......................................................................................................... 198
Directory, File List and Filename.................................................................................198
Recent files................................................................................................................. 199
Save............................................................................................................................ 199
Save Immediate x....................................................................................................... 199
Exclude Frequency..................................................................................................... 199
Exclude Level..............................................................................................................199
Recall.......................................................................................................................... 199
Recall Immediate x......................................................................................................200
File Manager............................................................................................................... 200
Operation Mode
Accesses the settings for storing ("Save") and loading ("Recall") of the instrument settings, or for exporting created SCPI files ("SCPI-Export").
See Chapter 9.6, "Exporting Remote Command Lists", on page 203.
Directory, File List and Filename
Note:
You access this generic standard function each time you perform one of the following:
● Save or load (settings) files
● Define a folder in that these files are saved
● Navigate through the file system.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
198
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings
The dialog name changes depending on the context. The provided functions are selfexplanatory and similar.
Use the settings for example as follows:
● To navigate through the file system, use the directory tree.
● To create a file, load and save files, use the dedicated functions "New", "Select",
Save, and Recent files.
● To access the general data list editor, use the "Edit button
(see also Chapter 5.7, "List Editor", on page 138).
● To perform standard file management functions, like create directories, move,
copy, delete files and/or directories, use the standard "File Manager" function (see
Chapter 9.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 204).
Remote command:
To list all files in a directory:
:MMEMory:CDIRectory on page 318
:MMEMory:CATalog? on page 317
[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog? on page 393
Recent files
Displays the files last used.
Save
Saves the current instrument settings or the settings belonging to a digital standard
under the defined filename.
Remote command:
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe on page 321
Save Immediate x
Stores the current instrument setting in one of the intermediate memories.
These instrument settings are retained until a different instrument setting is stored in
the intermediate memory. When the instrument is switched off, the contents of the
intermediate memories are retained.
Remote command:
*SAV on page 309
Exclude Frequency
The current frequency is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]:RCL on page 398
Exclude Level
The current level is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:RCL on page 441
Recall
Restores the selected configuration.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
199
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings
During recall, the instrument considers all related settings, for example sweeps in
active state or lists. An error message indicates the settings which cannot be implemented.
Remote command:
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 320
Recall Immediate x
Loads the selected configuration from one of the intermediate memories. A message
appears if no instrument configuration is stored in this memory.
Remote command:
*RCL on page 309
File Manager
Accesses the "File Manager" dialog, see Chapter 9.8, "Using the File Manager",
on page 204.
9.4.2 How to Save and Recall Instrument Settings
Instrument settings can be saved to a file and loaded again later, so that you can
repeat the tests with the same settings.
Accessing and recalling instrument setups
For quick access to a stored instrument setup, assign the appropriate action to the
USER key.
See Chapter 10.2.3, "Assigning Actions to the User Key", on page 226.
To save and recall instrument settings quickly
1. Select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "Operation Mode > Save".
2. Select "Save Immediate 1".
The instrument saves its settings in the intermediate memory 1. The filename and
the storage location cannot be changed.
3. Adapt the instrument settings as required. Select "Save Immediate 2"
4. To restore the settings, select the "Operation Mode > Recall"
5. Select "Recall Immediate 1"
The instrument is restored to the previous state.
6. Select "Recall Immediate 2" to switch to the settings stored in the second file.
To save complete instrument settings
1. Select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "Operation Mode > Save".
2. Navigate in the file selection dialog and select a filename and storage location for
the settings file.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
200
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Accessing Files with User Data
3. Select "Save".
A file with the defined name and path and the extension *.savrcltxt is created.
To restore instrument's configuration
Save the configuration as described in "To save complete instrument settings"
on page 200.
1. To restore settings, select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "Operation Mode >
Recall".
2. To retain the current frequency and level settings, enable "Save/Recall > Exclude
Frequency/Level"
3. Navigate in the file selection dialog and select the filename and storage location of
the settings file.
The settings are restored, but the frequency and level settings are retained; you
can repeat the signal generation with the same settings.
See also Chapter 9.2.3, "How to Recall User Settings Automatically after Preset",
on page 194.
9.5 Accessing Files with User Data
Signal generation in list mode, the generation of pulse train signals or applying user
correction values use data from list files. Whenever a list file is required as a data
source, the instrument provides direct access to the standard "File Select" function.
This function enables you to select, create and edit the list files.
9.5.1 File Select Settings
The "File Select" dialog opens automatically each time the signal generation requires
list file as data source.
To access a loadable data list file
1. Select ""Sweep" > List Mode Data > List Mode Data".
A "File Select" dialog for loading, creating and modifying a file is displayed.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
201
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Accessing Files with User Data
Tip: The name of the dialog is context-sensitive and differs depending on the particular function this dialog is from. However, the provided functions are similar.
2. To load an existing file:
Navigate through the file system.
Select the file and confirm with "Select".
3. To create a file, for example if there is no data list file specified:
Navigate through the file system.
Select "New" and specify the filename.
A new empty file is created and saved in the selected folder.
4. To edit an existing or newly created file:
Navigate through the file system.
Select the file and select "Edit".
The standard "Data List Editor" dialog opens
5. Edit the file content.
Confirm with "Save".
Settings:
Directory, File List and Filename.................................................................................202
Functions for handling of data lists..............................................................................203
Recent files................................................................................................................. 203
File Manager............................................................................................................... 203
Directory, File List and Filename
Note:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
202
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Exporting Remote Command Lists
You access this generic standard function each time you perform one of the following:
● Save or load (settings) files
● Define a folder in that these files are saved
● Navigate through the file system.
The dialog name changes depending on the context. The provided functions are selfexplanatory and similar.
Use the settings for example as follows:
● To navigate through the file system, use the directory tree.
● To create a file, load and save files, use the dedicated functions "New", "Select",
Save, and Recent files.
● To access the general data list editor, use the "Edit button
(see also Chapter 5.7, "List Editor", on page 138).
● To perform standard file management functions, like create directories, move,
copy, delete files and/or directories, use the standard "File Manager" function (see
Chapter 9.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 204).
Remote command:
To list all files in a directory:
:MMEMory:CDIRectory on page 318
:MMEMory:CATalog? on page 317
[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog? on page 393
Functions for handling of data lists
Provided are the following standard functions for file handling:
"Select"
Select and load the file.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:SELect on page 426
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:SELect on page 385
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET[:SELect] on page 391
"New"
Creates file with the specified "Filename".
To confirm, select "OK"; use "Cancel" to undo the operation.
To edit the file content, select "File Select > Edit".
"Edit"
Accesses the "Data List Editor" and loads the selected file for editing
Recent files
Displays the files last used.
File Manager
Accesses the "File Manager" dialog, see Chapter 9.8, "Using the File Manager",
on page 204.
9.6 Exporting Remote Command Lists
To set specific instrument settings or perform tasks automatically, you can create
scripts that contain the settings in the form of remote control command sequences.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
203
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Using the File Manager
You can record or manually create SCPI lists, or generate a list of the current instrument state in one step, see Chapter 11.14, "How to Record / Create SCPI Lists",
on page 291.
Completed scripts are stored in files and possibly converted to different formats,
depending on the used language of the source code.
The R&S SMA100B supports the following commonly used languages:
●
Plain SCPI: *.txt
●
MATLAB: *.m
●
NICVI: *.c
It is also possible to convert the SCPI command list to a user-specific language, see
Chapter 11.15, "How to Convert and Save SCPI Lists", on page 294.
9.7 Loading, Importing and Exporting Lists
The R&S SMA100B provides built-in editors for creating list files, for example for the
list mode or lists with user correction data. You can also create or evaluate them with
an external application. The instrument provides interfaces with the following functionality:
●
Import and export list files in a standard ASCII format file
Lists are saved and loaded in the corresponding dialogs. For example, the user correction data list is created and stored in the "User Correction" dialog.
9.8 Using the File Manager
The "File Manager" is a tool similar to a standard Windows Explorer. It helps you manage mass storage media and files stored on the R&S SMA100B.
You can perform the following tasks:
●
Copying multiple files from disk to other media
See Chapter 9.9, "How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument", on page 207
●
Copying files into another directory
See Cut, Copy&Paste and Delete
●
Renaming and deleting files
●
Creating directories
See Create New Directory
●
Displaying saved files
See Chapter 9.8.2, "How to Display All Saved Files", on page 206
Access:
► Select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "File Manager".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
204
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Using the File Manager
Tip: Each "Save/Recall" dialog and each "File Select" dialog provides a quick
access to the "File Manger", i.e. whenever you select data lists or files with user
data.
The "File Manager" dialog provides all standard functions required for file management. It displays the contents of the selected folder on the R&S SMA100B and provides functions to rename, delete, copy, or move individual files.
9.8.1 File Manager Settings
Access:
► Select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "File Manager".
Settings:
File Type..................................................................................................................... 205
Directory and Filename............................................................................................... 206
Cut, Copy&Paste and Delete...................................................................................... 206
Rename ......................................................................................................................206
Create New Directory..................................................................................................206
File Type
Selects the file type to be listed. If a file type with a specific file extension is selected,
only files with this extension are listed.
See Chapter C, "Extensions for User Files", on page 537 for an overview of the supported file extensions.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
205
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Using the File Manager
Directory and Filename
Selects the directory in which the file to be deleted or copied is located. The dialog lists
all files in this directory. Selected files are highlighted. The path is indicated above the
directory tree.
Unlike the "Save/Recall" and "File Select" dialogs, the "File Manager" displays the full
filenames including extensions.
Remote command:
:MMEMory:CDIRectory on page 318
Cut, Copy&Paste and Delete
Standard file management functions.
Before a file is deleted, you have to confirm the delete operation.
Remote command:
:MMEMory:DELete on page 320
:MMEMory:COPY on page 318
Rename
Renames the selected file or directory.
Remote command:
:MMEMory:MOVE on page 321
Create New Directory
Creates a folder and opens an edit dialog box to enter name and path (absolute or relative to the current directory) of the new folder.
Remote command:
:MMEMory:MDIRectory on page 320
9.8.2 How to Display All Saved Files
To display all files on the internal memory
1. Select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "File Manager".
2. Navigate to /var/user/.
To display all files on a connected USB flash drive
1. Select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "File Manager".
2. Navigate to /var/usb/.
To display all files in the volatile memory
1. Select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "File Manager".
2. Navigate to /var/volatile/.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
206
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument
9.9 How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument
As explained in "File handling" on page 190, you access the file system of the
R&S SMA100B via one of the following ways:
●
Via the built-in "File Manager"
See Chapter 9.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 204.
●
On an instrument connected to a LAN:
–
●
Via one of the standard functions ftp or SMB (samba)
See Chapter 9.9.2, "Accessing the File System of the R&S SMA100B via ftp",
on page 208 and
Chapter 9.9.3, "Accessing the R&S SMA100B File System via SMB (Samba)",
on page 210
Via a connected USB storage device
See Chapter 9.9.4, "Using a USB Storage Device for File Transfer", on page 211
Mainly because of security reasons, the access to the file system of your
R&S SMA100B can be denied, because one or all these access methods are deliberately disabled. Access to the file system via LAN and/or USB requires that the corresponding service is enabled and a write access to the file system is enabled. Refer to
Chapter 9.9.1, "Removing File System Protection", on page 207 for description of the
required steps.
This section provides an introduction to the topic. For comprehensive information, refer
to the application note 1GP72: Connectivity of Rohde&Schwarz Signal Generators.
●
●
●
●
Removing File System Protection......................................................................... 207
Accessing the File System of the R&S SMA100B via ftp......................................208
Accessing the R&S SMA100B File System via SMB (Samba)............................. 210
Using a USB Storage Device for File Transfer......................................................211
9.9.1 Removing File System Protection
Before you try to access the file system via ftp, SMB (samba) or USB, fulfill the following:
●
Disable write protection on the file system
●
Enable the corresponding service or interface
To enable write permission on the file system
1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > General"
2. Enable "Write Nonvolatile Memory"
3. Enter the "Security Password".
The default password is 123456. For more information, see Chapter 10.4, "Managing the Security Settings", on page 232.
4. Select "System Config > Setup > Maintenance > Shut Down"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
207
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument
5. Select "Reboot".
The system reboots. The enabled settings are active.
To enable file transfer via ftp
1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > LAN Services".
2. Enable "LAN Interface"
3. Enable "FTP"
4. Enter the "Security Password".
The default password is 123456. For more information, refer to Chapter 10.4,
"Managing the Security Settings", on page 232.
5. Select "Accept".
To enable file transfer via SMB (samba)
1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > LAN Services"
2. Enable "LAN Interface"
3. Enable "SMB (Samba)"
4. Enter the "Security Password".
The default password is 123456. For more information, refer to Chapter 10.4,
"Managing the Security Settings", on page 232.
5. Select "Accept".
To enable file transfer via USB
1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > General"
2. Enable "USB Storage"
3. Enter the "Security Password".
The default password is 123456. For more information, refer to Chapter 10.4,
"Managing the Security Settings", on page 232.
4. Select "Accept".
9.9.2 Accessing the File System of the R&S SMA100B via ftp
If the R&S SMA100B is connected to a LAN, you can use file transfer protocol (ftp) to
access the file system and to transfer files from and to the instrument.
For information on how to set up a LAN connection, refer to:
●
Chapter 2.1.3, "Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection", on page 26
●
Chapter 11, "Network Operation and Remote Control", on page 244
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
208
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument
To access the file system via ftp
We assume that the instrument and the remote PC are connected to a LAN.
1. Enable file transfer via ftp
2. Enable write permission on the file system
3. On the remote PC, start the Windows Explorer.
4. In the address field, enter ftp://<"IP Address" of the Instrument>, e.g.
ftp://10.113.10.91.
Tip: The R&S SMA100B indicates IP address on the screen.
A log-on dialog opens and requests a password.
The default user name and password is instrument.
Tip:
Default password
The FTP and SAMBA file access use the user "instrument" with default password
"instrument".
We recommend that you change this password in the "Setup > Security > Password Management > Change User Password" dialog before connecting the instrument to the network.
See Chapter 10.4.4, "Password Management", on page 239.
5. Enter the password to access the /var/user/share directory.
You can access the files in the /var/user directory, perform standard function
like creating directory, or storing files.
6. Open the /var/user/share directory and create a directory, e.g. test ftp.
7. Select ""System Config > Save/Recall"".
Open the /var/user directory.
The dialog displays the /var/user/test ftp directory.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
209
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument
9.9.3 Accessing the R&S SMA100B File System via SMB (Samba)
The SMB (Samba) protocol is an alternative way to access the file system of the instrument from a remote PC. This protocol works if both the instrument and the PC are connected to a LAN.
For information on how to set up a LAN connection, refer to:
●
Chapter 2.1.3, "Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection", on page 26
●
Chapter 11, "Network Operation and Remote Control", on page 244
To map the R&S SMA100B as a network drive to the remote PC
We assume that the instrument and the remote PC are connected to a LAN.
1. Enable file transfer via SMB (Samba)
2. Enable write permission on the file system
3. On the remote PC, start the Windows Explorer.
Open the "Map Network Drive" dialog.
a) Select a valid "Drive", e.g. W.
b) In the "Folder" field, enter //<"IP Address" of the Instrument>/
share or //<"Hostname" of the Instrument>/share
For example: 10.113.10.91/share or //SMA100B-102030/share (previous syntax: //rssmw200a102030/share).
Tip: The R&S SMA100B indicates IP address on the screen.
c) Select "Finish".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
210
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument
A log-on dialog opens and requests a user name and a password.
The default user name and password is instrument.
Tip:
Default password
The FTP and SAMBA file access use the user "instrument" with default password
"instrument".
We recommend that you change this password in the "Setup > Security > Password Management > Change User Password" dialog before connecting the instrument to the network.
See Chapter 10.4.4, "Password Management", on page 239.
4. Enter the user name and the password of your instrument.
The /var/user/share directory of the instrument is mapped to and displayed as
a network drive of the remote PC.
You can access the files in the /var/user directory, perform standard function
like creating directory, or storing files.
9.9.4 Using a USB Storage Device for File Transfer
Alternatively to the file transfer possibility via LAN, you can use a USB storage device
for direct file transfer from and to the instrument.
We recommend that you transfer files with user data (like lists or instrument setup files)
to the instrument, rather than load and play them from a connected USB storage
device.
To transfer a file with user data to the instrument
1. Connect a USB storage device, for example a USB memory stick to one of the
USB interfaces of the instrument.
The R&S SMA100B recognizes the connected USB storage device automatically.
2. Enable file transfer via USB
3. Enable write permission on the file system
4. Select "System Config > Save/Recall".
The dialog displays the /var/user directory and the /usb drive.
5. In the "Save/Recall" dialog, select "File Manager".
6. In the directory tree, navigate to the /usb drive.
Select the required file with user data.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
211
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Creating Screenshots of Current Settings
7. Select "Copy".
8. In the directory tree, navigate to the /var/user directory.
Select "Paste".
The file with user data is transferred to the instrument.
9.10 Creating Screenshots of Current Settings
The save/recall function enables you to store current settings in a file. To document the
most important settings for a performed signal generation, you can also store a hardcopy of the current display.
●
●
Hard Copy Settings............................................................................................... 212
How to Store a Hardcopy of the Display............................................................... 216
9.10.1 Hard Copy Settings
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > User Interface > Hardcopy".
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12.11, "HCOPy Subsystem", on page 341.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
212
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Creating Screenshots of Current Settings
Settings:
Format.........................................................................................................................213
Options........................................................................................................................213
File.............................................................................................................................. 213
Save............................................................................................................................ 213
Hard Copy Options......................................................................................................213
└ Automatic Naming.........................................................................................214
└ Image Settings.............................................................................................. 214
└ Format................................................................................................ 214
└ Region................................................................................................ 214
└ Automatic Naming.........................................................................................215
└ Automatic Naming.............................................................................. 215
└ Path.................................................................................................... 215
└ Clear Path...........................................................................................215
└ Prefix, Year, Month, Day.....................................................................215
└ Current Auto Number..........................................................................216
Format
Selects the output file format, for example *.bmp, *.jpg*.xpm and *.png.
Remote command:
:HCOPy:IMAGe:FORMat on page 343
:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage on page 343
Options...
Accesses Hard Copy Options dialog.
File...
In "Automatic Naming > Off" mode, accesses the standard file select dialog for selecting the filename and folder the hardcopy is stored in.
If you have enabled "Automatic Naming", the instrument displays the automatically
generated filename.
Remote command:
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME] on page 344
Save
Saves a hardcopy of the current display as a file.
Remote command:
:HCOPy[:EXECute] on page 344
Hard Copy Options
Access: select "Hard Copy > Options...".
With the provided settings, you can customize the file format and the syntax of the
automatically assigned filename.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
213
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Creating Screenshots of Current Settings
Automatic Naming ← Hard Copy Options
If enabled, creates the output filenames automatically according to the rules set with
the Automatic Naming settings.
Remote command:
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe on page 345
Image Settings ← Hard Copy Options
Provided are the following settings:
Format ← Image Settings ← Hard Copy Options
Selects the output file format, for example *.bmp, *.jpg*.xpm and *.png.
Remote command:
:HCOPy:IMAGe:FORMat on page 343
:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage on page 343
Region ← Image Settings ← Hard Copy Options
Displays the snapshot area.
Remote command:
:HCOPy:REGion on page 343
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
214
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Creating Screenshots of Current Settings
Automatic Naming ← Hard Copy Options
Provided are the following settings:
Automatic Naming ← Automatic Naming ← Hard Copy Options
If enabled, creates the output filenames automatically according to the rules set with
the Automatic Naming settings.
Remote command:
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe on page 345
Path... ← Automatic Naming ← Hard Copy Options
Selects the directory.
Note: To select the destination path, specify also a filename. Otherwise an error message is displayed and selection is canceled.
Remote command:
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory on page 345
Clear Path ← Automatic Naming ← Hard Copy Options
Deletes all image files with extensions *.bmp, *.jpg, *.png and *.xmp in the directory set for automatic naming.
Before the command is executed, a warning message prompts you to confirm the deletion of the files.
Remote command:
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory:CLEar on page 345
Prefix, Year, Month, Day ← Automatic Naming ← Hard Copy Options
Determines the rules for "Automatic Naming".
Per default, the automatically generated filename is composed of:
<Path>/<Prefix><YYYY><MM><DD><Number>.<Format>, where Y, M and D mean
year, month, Day; Number is the Current Auto Number.
You can activate or deactivate each component separately.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
215
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Creating Screenshots of Current Settings
The "Resulting filename" indicates the current filename syntax.
Remote command:
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix on page 346
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix:STATe on page 346
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR:STATe on page 346
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe on page 346
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY:STATe on page 346
Current Auto Number ← Automatic Naming ← Hard Copy Options
Indicates the number which is used in the automatically generated filename.
Note: When initially switching on the instrument, the number is reset to the lowest possible value. Starting with number 0 the output directory is scanned for existing files. As
long as files with the same name are existing, the number is increased by 1. The number is automatically set so that the resulting filename is unique within the selected path.
The current number is not in the save/recall file but is temporarily stored within the
database. At the following save operation, the number is increased.
Remote command:
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:NUMBer? on page 346
9.10.2 How to Store a Hardcopy of the Display
1. Select "System Config > Setup > User Interface > Hardcopy".
2. To define the output format, select "Format > JPG".
3. To enable the instrument to create output filenames, select "Automatic Naming >
On".
4. Select "Options...".
5. In the "Hard Copy Options" dialog:
a) To change the default directory the file is saved in, select "Automatic Naming
Settings > Path" and define a path and a filename. For example, select the
default directory /var/user.
b) If necessary, disable or change some of the parameters in the "Automatic
Naming Settings".
c) Close the "Hard Copy Options" dialog.
6. In the "Hard Copy" dialog, select "Save".
The instrument saves a hardcopy of the current instrument display as a *.jpg file.
The filename is automatically created.
7. To print the hardcopy, connect the instrument to a LAN and:
a) Transfer the file to a remote computer as described in Chapter 9.9, "How to
Transfer Files from and to the Instrument", on page 207.
b) On the remote computer, navigate through the file system.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
216
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management
Creating Screenshots of Current Settings
c) Print the selected file.
For more information, refer to the online help of the operating system.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
217
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Customizing the User Interface
10 General Instrument Functions
The general instrument functions include basic instrument settings, regardless of the
selected operating mode and measurement. Some of these settings like screen display
and peripherals are initially configured at the setup of the instrument, according to personal preferences and requirements. However, you can individually adjust the settings
at any time, for example, if necessary for specific applications.
The following special functions help you in service and basic system configuration:
●
Chapter 10.1, "Customizing the User Interface", on page 218
Allows you to adjust the display and keyboard language settings.
●
Chapter 10.3, "Managing Licenses and License Keys", on page 228
If you have purchased an additional option for the R&S SMA100B, you can enable
it using a license key.
●
Chapter 9.2, "Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration", on page 191
At any time, you can restore a default configuration to start a measurement at a
defined instrument state, or set the instrument to factory preset.
●
Chapter 13.3, "Performing Maintenance Tasks", on page 489
Special functions like calibration routines and self-tests put your instrument to an
initial state.
●
Chapter 10.4, "Managing the Security Settings", on page 232
Special security and protection functions protect your instrument from unauthorized
use or activate specific test routines.
10.1 Customizing the User Interface
The R&S SMA100B provides basic alignments of instrument settings regarding the
user interface, that means the touch panel (screen), the appearance of the displayed
dialogs and graphics, and an external keyboard.
Start / stop display update
The operating system of the R&S SMA100B refreshes the displayed settings by default
in almost real-time, to keep the display updated with the internally used values. However, you can turn off this function to reduce settling times when the instrument is
remote controlled.
We recommend that you switch off the display update for optimum sweep performance
with short dwell times and for fast settling times.
Consider that in this case the displayed values can differ from the operated values.
In detail described in the following paragraphs, you can:
●
Set display and keyboard language, see Chapter 10.1.1, "Display and Keyboard
Settings", on page 219
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
218
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Customizing the User Interface
●
Set date and time for the system clock, see Chapter 13.3.1, "Date and Time Settings", on page 490
●
Configure and activate aScreen Saver
●
Deactivate display update to improve performance, see Chapter 10.1.2, "Display
Update Settings", on page 220
●
Determine the state of the RF signal, and the level display in the status bar when
you turn on the R&S SMA100B, see Chapter 10.1.3, "Defining the RF Signal State
On Power On ", on page 221.
10.1.1 Display and Keyboard Settings
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > User Interface > Display or Keyboard".
In the "Display/Keyboard" dialog, you can change regional and language options
for the GUI and an external keyboard, and define the screen saver settings.
The remote commands required to configure the display and keyboard are described in
Chapter 12.9, "DISPlay Subsystem", on page 335 and Chapter 12.12, "KBOard Subsystem", on page 347.
Screen Saver
Activates the screensaver.
If activated, the display including backlight is switched off after the selected Wait Time
elapses and if no entries via touch panel, front panel, external mouse, or external keyboard are made
Remote command:
:DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] on page 336
Wait Time
Enters the idle time that must elapse before the display lamp is shut off when no
entries are made.
Remote command:
:DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff on page 336
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
219
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Customizing the User Interface
Display
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
Increase the value to turn up the display brightness.
Remote command:
:DISPlay:BRIGhtness on page 337
RF Hardkey
Adjusts the brightness of the RF ON/OFF key.
Increase the value to change the contrast between the key and the front panel background color.
Remote command:
:DISPlay:BUTTon:BRIGhtness on page 337
USB Keyboard > Layout
Selects the language of an externally connected keyboard via USB. The function
assigns the corresponding keys automatically.
Remote command:
:KBOard:LAYout on page 347
10.1.2 Display Update Settings
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > User Interface > Start/Stop Display Update".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
220
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Customizing the User Interface
This dialog enables you, to deactivate updating the display.
The remote command to switch off the ddiplay update is described in Chapter 12.9,
"DISPlay Subsystem", on page 335.
Display Update is
Disables the automatic refreshing of the displayed values.
Remote command:
:DISPlay:UPDate on page 337
10.1.3 Defining the RF Signal State On Power On
As additional functions for the level settings, you can determine the state of the RF signal, and the level display in the status bar when you turn on the R&S SMA100B.
Power-On/EMF settings
Access:
► Select "Level" > "Power-On / EMF".
The "Power-On/EMF" dialog contains all settings for configuring the power-on
behavior and the level display.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
221
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Organizing Frequently Used Items as Favorites
Settings:
Power-On State ..........................................................................................................222
Display Level as Voltage of EMF ............................................................................... 222
Power-On State
Determines the RF signal output state when the instrument is switched on.
You can disable the RF output signal in general, or start it in the same state as it had
been when it was switched off.
Remote command:
:OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]:PON on page 348
Display Level as Voltage of EMF
Activates display of the signal level as voltage of the EMF (no-load voltage).
If disabled, the level is displayed as a voltage over a 50 Ohm load.
Note:
The value is not affected by an instrument preset (PRESET key or *RST) and the
"Save/Recall" function. It is reset only by factory preset.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:EMF:STATe on page 436
10.2 Organizing Frequently Used Items as Favorites
The USER key is a key with customizable function. Per default, pressing the key opens
the "User Menu" but you can add or remove actions, too. You can add actions to be
executed or function to be accessed upon pressing this key.
User Menu and User Key
These two functions work similar to the favorites function of browser or other programs.
They allow you to create a list of frequently used actions or to group frequently used
settings in one single dialog.
Possible applications
The USER key is useful in the following situations:
●
There are functions or tasks you have to perform in a defined order but they are
distributed among several dialogs
●
There are functions or tasks you have to perform more frequently than other but
they are not accessible via a front panel key.
●
The required functions are grouped in a dialog that is not directly accessible from
the blocks on the home screen.
●
Your task involves the frequently loading and executing of certain SCPI scripts.
Refer to Chapter 11.14, "How to Record / Create SCPI Lists", on page 291 for
information on how to create an SCPI script.
●
A quick access to saved setups is required.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
222
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Organizing Frequently Used Items as Favorites
Dialog identification
To identify each dialog, the instrument uses a dedicated dialog ID. The dialog ID contains the dialog position on the display and the current active tab. The action that triggers the instrument to open a dialog uses this identification.
Save/Recall vs. recall setup
Sometimes, you would like to restore a signal generation you performed under specific
conditions on the instrument and perform further configuration based on this particular
instrument state. The R&S SMA100B provides two ways to achieve this, by the "Save/
Recall" function and by the "Recall Setup" function.
●
"Save/Recall"
For a detailed description, refer to Chapter 9.4, "Saving and Recalling Instrument
Settings", on page 197.
●
"Recall Setup"
If the "Recall Setup" is the only one user action assigned to the USER key, pressing this key triggers the R&S SMA100B to load immediately the user-defined preset file.
10.2.1 Using the User Menu for Fast Adjustments
By default, there is one predefined action assigned to the USER key.
1. Press the USER key.
The "User Menu" dialog opens.
If you execute this action for the first time, the dialog is empty.
2. Follow the instructions displayed in the "User Menu" dialog to build your own dialog
with settings.
3. Alternatively, proceed a follows:
a) Open a dialog with settings you frequently use.
b) Select a parameter.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
223
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Organizing Frequently Used Items as Favorites
c) Open the context menu and select "Add to User Menu".
A favorites icon indicates that the parameter is used in the "User Menu".
The "User Menu" in the task bar indicates that menu with favorites is created.
d) Press the USER key.
The "User Menu" dialog shows all parameters that you have added to the list.
4. To remove entry, select it, open the context menu and select "Remove from User
Menu".
This function works in the same way in the "User Menu" and in the particular dialog
the entry originally appears.
5. In the "User Menu", select "Clear User Menu" to remove all entries at once.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
224
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Organizing Frequently Used Items as Favorites
Settings
Clear User Menu
Removes all entries from the "User Menu" at once.
10.2.2 Define User Key Actions Settings
Access:
► Select "System Configuration > Setup > User Interface > Define User Key".
The dialog displays a list of the currently enabled actions and provides functions to
define new, edit or remove existing actions. If no actions have been defined, the list
is empty.
For an example, see Chapter 10.2.3, "Assigning Actions to the User Key",
on page 226.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12.9,
"DISPlay Subsystem", on page 335.
Name
Enters a user-defined name for the action.
Wizard
Defines the action to be executed.
"Load SCPI
Script"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
Upon the selecting the action, the SCPI script is loaded and executed.
225
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Organizing Frequently Used Items as Favorites
"Recall Setup"
Load a setup for quick access to the user-defined settings
"Open Dialog, with Position and Size/append to SCPI"
Quick access to the selected dialog.
Use the "Open Dialog, append to SCPI" function to define a
sequence of several dialogs to be opened simultaneously or one after
the other.
Tip: Use the command :SYSTem:WAIT to add a delay between the
subsequent commands.
Select
Depending on the selected "Wizard", provides access to:
● The standard "File Select" function for loading of an SCPI script or setup file
● A list of the dialog IDs of all currently opened dialogs. The dialog ID is used for dialog identification in the remote control.
See SCPI.
SCPI
For the currently selected action, displays the corresponding SCPI command with the
associated parameter for dialog identification (dialog ID). The automatically displayed
SCPIs are enabled for subsequent modification.
Remote command:
:DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN on page 339
See also :DISPlay:DIALog:ID? on page 338
Add, Change, Remove
Standard functions for managing of the actions.
Select Action to Execute > Define Action
Accesses the "Define User Key Actions" dialog.
10.2.3 Assigning Actions to the User Key
1. Open the dialog for that you are creating a quick access.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
226
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Organizing Frequently Used Items as Favorites
For example, select "Level > UCOR > Import/Export"
2. Select "System Configuration > Setup > User Interface > Define User Key".
3. To create an action:
a) Specify the "Name".
b) Select "Wizard > Open Dialog"
c) Select "Select" and select the dialog ID from the list
The corresponding SCPI command is automatically displayed and can be later
modified.
4. Select "Add" to store the new action in the list of user key actions.
5. To execute the created action, press USER.
In the list of actions ("Select Action to Execute" dialog), navigate to the required
action.
In this example, this is "OpenUCORImportExportList".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
227
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Managing Licenses and License Keys
The action is executed. The dialog opens.
10.3 Managing Licenses and License Keys
An option is ready to operate after it is enabled with a license key code supplied with
the option. The license key is delivered as a file or on paper. Unregistered licenses
must be registered for a particular instrument before the corresponding option can be
enabled for operation.
For reliable operation, a software option usually requires the latest firmware version.
The required version is specified in the delivery. If your instrument works with a former
firmware version, update the firmware before enabling the software option.
The firmware update is described in the R&S SMA100B service manual.
10.3.1 Manage License Keys Settings
This dialog is the central dialog for licenses registration and performing the required
instrument-related steps during the process of unregistration.
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Manage License Keys".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
228
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Managing Licenses and License Keys
In this dialog, you can activate licenses for newly purchased and/or newly registered options, perform the necessary steps to cancel a registration and/or to move
licenses.
Settings
Device ID.....................................................................................................................229
Enter License Key....................................................................................................... 229
Import License Key from File...................................................................................... 229
Export Deactivation Response to File......................................................................... 230
Info Line...................................................................................................................... 230
Installed License Keys................................................................................................ 230
└ Show Inactive................................................................................................230
└ Show Deactivated......................................................................................... 230
└ Installed License Keys Table........................................................................ 230
Device ID
Displays the instrument-specific identification number. The device ID is a unique string
with the following structure:
<stock number>-<serial number>-<checksum>
Enter License Key
Type here the license key provided with the option.
For license keys delivered as a file, use Import License Key from File....
Import License Key from File...
Opens a dialog for selecting the file with the license key.
Use this function also to import the deactivation key file generated by the R&S License
Manager online tool (see How to Move a Portable License).
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
229
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Managing Licenses and License Keys
Export Deactivation Response to File...
Exports the generated deactivation response key to a file and opens a file management dialog to save the file. This key is required during the unregistration process.
If you have a portable unregistered option, you can register it later on another instrument (see How to Move a Portable License).
Info Line
Indicates status information on the performed actions.
Installed License Keys
Comprises information on the installed options.
Show Inactive ← Installed License Keys
Enables/disables the display of the inactive (expired) licenses in the 230.
Show Deactivated ← Installed License Keys
Enables/disables the display of the deactivated licenses in the Installed License Keys
Table.
See How to Move a Portable License for information on how to activate deactivated
licenses.
Installed License Keys Table ← Installed License Keys
Shows information on the currently installed options.
"Export License Key to File"
Opens a dialog to save the generated license key file. This file is
required during the unregistration process.
If you have a portable unregistered option, you can register it later on
another instrument (see How to Move a Portable License).
"Option"
Displays the option short designation.
Tip: Open the Hardware Options/Software Options dialog to retrieve
more information about the installed options.
"License Count"
Displays the number of the licenses for the selected option key.
"License Type" Displays the type of license.
A license type is a joint qualification applicability duration and the
portability of a license. The following license types are provided: evaluation, permanent, portable, quantified, timed with duration of 1, 3, 6
or 12 months. A license can also be in the states deactivated and
expired.
For time limited licenses, the left time of applicability is displayed too.
"Registration"
(reserved for future use)
10.3.2 How to Move a Portable License
This example is intended to explain how to perform the required steps at the instrument.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
230
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Managing Licenses and License Keys
Use a USB stick to transfer the license key files between the instruments and the
browser.
We assume knowledge about the handling of the R&S License Manager online tool
and the description of the whole process.
1. Open your browser. Enter https://extranet.rohde-schwarz.com/service.
Select "Manage Licenses > Move Portable License".
The first step requires the Device IDs of the source and target instruments.
2. To find out the Device IDs, proceed as follows:
a) On the source instrument, select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Manage License Keys > Device ID".
b) On the target instrument, select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Manage License Keys > Device ID".
c) In the browser, select "Manage Licenses > Move Portable License > Select
Devices" and enter the Device IDs.
3. On the source instrument, select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly >
Manage License Keys > Installed License Keys Table".
Navigate to the portable license you want to move.
Select the "Export License to File" column.
A standard file manager dialog opens.
4. Enter a filename and save the exported license key, e.g.
k123_portable_key_to_move.xml.
5. In the browser, select "Manage Licenses > Move Portable License > Select
License (from file)" and select the exported license key.
Check the selection, create the deactivation key, and save it to file.
6. On the source instrument, select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly >
Manage License Keys > Import License Keys from File".
Select the transferred deactivation key.
7. On the source instrument, select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly >
Manage License Keys > Export Deactivation Response to File".
8. In the browser, go to "Manage Licenses > Move Portable License > Install Deactivation Key (from file)".
Enter the deactivation response of the instrument.
The license is deactivated for the source instrument.
9. In the "Manage Licenses > Move Portable License", go to step "Create License" to
generate a license key for this portable option and the selected target instrument.
Download the license key as a file and transfer it to the target instrument.
10. In the target instrument, select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly >
Manage License Keys > Import License Keys from File".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
231
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Managing the Security Settings
Select the created license key file.
The portable option is installed on the target instrument.
10.4 Managing the Security Settings
The protection function of the R&S SMA100B offers several levels to activate particular
functions like self-test or tests for service purposes specifically.
Protection
The five protection levels are automatically active on startup, the protection levels, that
means all protected functions are locked.
To unlock a protection level:
► In the "System Config > Setup > Security > Protection", enter the correct password.
To lock a protection level:
► Clear the corresponding checkbox.
Protection levels
The following functions are protected in the respective levels:
●
Protection level 1
Protects against accidental changes, like for example the clock and date, several
internal adjustments functions and the self-test, as well as network settings or the
instrument hostname.
You can access this level with the password 123456.
●
Protection level 2
Unlocks protected service functions. It is accessible to authorized personnel of
Rohde & Schwarz service department only.
●
Protection level 3 to 5
Are reserved for factory internal use.
Security
The security concept of the R&S SMA100B helps you to protect your instrument
against uncontrolled access and changes. All provided security services require that
you enter the security password.
Provided security services are:
●
General security parameters, such as:
–
USB storage that secures controlled access to the mass memory of the instrument
–
Volatile mode that prevents information to be written to the hard disk memory
permanently.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
232
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Managing the Security Settings
–
Sanitizing that prevents the instrument from leaving a secure environment with
stored user information.
–
Annotation frequency and amplitude prevent reading the display.
To access the settings of these topics, see Chapter 10.4.2, "Setting Security
Parameters", on page 234.
●
Password management secures controlled user access to the instrument
With the two-step password concept, you can assign a user-defined password for
the operating system, and a security password for accessing the mass storage of
the instrument.
See also Chapter 10.4.2, "Setting Security Parameters", on page 234.
●
LAN services secure controlled network access
You can individually lock and unlock the supported LAN interface services, see
Chapter 10.4.3, "Configuring LAN Services", on page 238.
Remote control via LAN interface requires that the interface is activated, but you
can enable the required services specifically.
●
User interface prevents front panel operation and/or reading the display.
For more information, see the document R&S SMA100B Instrument Security Procedures.
10.4.1 Protection Level Settings
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Protection".
The "Protection" dialog provides access to the unlocking of different protection levels.
Several functions in the instrument are password-protected to prevent for example
accidental changes, "Protection" on page 232.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
233
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Managing the Security Settings
The remote commands required to unlock a protected stage are described in Chapter 12.16, "SYSTem Subsystem", on page 455.
Protection Level/Password
Unlocks the selected level of protection, if you enter the correct password.
The default protection level 1 password is 123456.
To lock the protection level again, clear the checkbox.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe] on page 462
10.4.2 Setting Security Parameters
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > Security > General".
In the "Security" dialog, you can configure the mass storage security settings.
The settings in this dialog are not applied until you enter the Security Password and
confirm with Accept.
The remote commands available to control security settings are described in Chapter 12.9, "DISPlay Subsystem", on page 335.
USB Storage
Activates the access to external USB storage media.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
234
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Managing the Security Settings
To apply the change: enter the security password and confirm with "Accept". Otherwise
the change has no effect.
See also Chapter 9.9.4, "Using a USB Storage Device for File Transfer", on page 211.
Volatile Mode
Activates volatile mode, so that no user data can be written on the internal memory
permanently.
In volatile mode:
● Data that the instrument normally stores on the internal memory is redirected to
volatile memory.
● The user directory is mapped to the volatile memory. You access the temporary
data just as data stored in the /var/user/, see Chapter 9.3, "Protecting Data",
on page 196.
● Data on the internal memory cannot be changed. It is protected against modification or erasure.
● You can only save data:
– Temporarily in the volatile memory
– On a connected external storage device, such as a memory stick
To activate volatile mode: enter the security password, confirm with "Accept" and
reboot the instrument. Otherwise the change has no effect.
Activated volatile mode is indicated by an icon.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:SECurity:VOLMode[:STATe] on page 463
Annotation Frequency
Enables the display of the currently used frequency in the status bar.
To apply the change: enter the security password and confirm with "Accept". Otherwise
the change has no effect.
Remote command:
:DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency on page 338
Annotation Amplitude
Enables the display of the currently selected level in the status bar.
To apply the change: enter the security password and confirm with "Accept". Otherwise
the change has no effect.
Remote command:
:DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude on page 337
Sanitize
Executes the erase procedure that sanitizes the internal memory.
If the instrument is subject to high security, and you have not enabled the volatile
mode, the internal flash memory holds user-data, i.e. id poses a security risk. The sanitizing function makes sure that no user information is stored on the instrument when it
leaves the secure environment.
To apply the change: enter the security password and confirm with "Accept". Otherwise
the change has no effect.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
235
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Managing the Security Settings
See also Chapter 10.4, "Managing the Security Settings", on page 232 for more information on the security concept.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:SECurity:SANitize[:STATe] on page 470
User Interface
Allows you to lock the controls for manual operation and the display individually.
To apply the change: enter the security password and confirm with "Accept". Otherwise
the change has no effect.
See also Chapter 10.4, "Managing the Security Settings", on page 232 for more information on the security concept.
"Enabled"
Enables the display and all controls for the manual operation of the
instrument.
"Touchscreen Off"
Locks the touch sensitivity of the screen.
This security feature protects the instrument against unintentional
change of settings by accidentally touching of the screen.
Still available controls for manual operation are:
● The keys at the front panel, including the rotary knob
● The external mouse and keyboard
● Remote operation over VNC
The instrument indicates the locked touchscreen by an icon .
Unlocking is possible via VNC, external controls or remote control.
"VNC Only"
Locks the keys at the front panel, the touchscreen and externally connected keyboard and mouse.
The display on the screen remains and shows the current settings
and changes.
The instrument indicates the activated "VNC only" feature by the icon
.
Unlocking is possible via VNC or turning off and on again.
"Display Only"
Locks the manual operation of the instrument. The display on the
screen remains and shows the current settings and changes.
This security feature protects the instrument against unauthorized
access, but still shows the current settings and processes, for example when you operate the instrument via remote control.
The function disables:
● The touchscreen functionality of the display
● The keys at the front panel of the instrument
● The external mouse and keyboard
The instrument indicates the locked controls by a padlock softkey.
Unlocking is possible by entering the security password, see Enabling
a locked user interface for manual operation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
236
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Managing the Security Settings
"Disabled"
Locks the display and all controls for the manual operation of the
instrument.
This security feature protects the instrument against unauthorized
reading and access, for example when you operate the instrument via
remote control.
The function disables:
● The display
● The touchscreen
● The keys at the front panel of the instrument
● The external mouse and keyboard
The screen shuts off and displays a padlock symbol instead.
Unlocking is possible by entering the security password, see also
Enabling a locked user interface for manual operation.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:ULOCk on page 461
:SYSTem:DLOCk on page 462
:SYSTem:KLOCk on page 462
Enabling a locked user interface for manual operation
To unlock the user interface for manual operation, use one of the following:
● On the instrument's keypad or external keyboard, press any key.
The instrument prompts you to enter the security password for unlocking.
●
Note: The character of the first key you pressed is immediately added in the input
field. Delete the entry before inserting the password.
Enter the security password 123456.
In remote control mode, send the command SYST:ULOC ENABled to release all
locks at once.
Alternatively:
– Send the command SYST:KLOC OFF to unlock the keyboard and touchscreen
– Send the command SYST:DLOC OFF to release all locks.
Via remote control, there is no password required.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:ULOCk on page 461
:SYSTem:DLOCk on page 462
:SYSTem:KLOCk on page 462
Security Password
Enters the password that is required to enable or to disable the settings protected by a
security password. Default is 123456.
Note:
● We recommend that you change the default security password before connecting
the instrument to the network.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
237
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Managing the Security Settings
●
The security settings are not assigned until you select the "Accept" button.
Accept
Applies the modified settings, provided the security password is entered and correct.
10.4.3 Configuring LAN Services
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > LAN Services".
In the "LAN Services" dialog, you can individually enable or disable the supported
LAN interface services.
The activated LAN services are not activated until you enter the "Security Password"
on page 237 and confirm with Accept.
LAN Interface
Enables the LAN interface in general, and thus provides remote access via all
unlocked services.
Enable LAN Services individually
Enables or disables the following interface services individually.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
238
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Managing the Security Settings
"SCPI over LAN"
Activates access over LAN to control the instrument remotely, by
using SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)
commands.
See also "Starting a remote control session over LAN with R&S VISA"
on page 278.
"VNC"
Activates access via VNC (Virtual Network Computing) interface, a
graphical desktop sharing system that uses RFB protocol to control
the instrument remotely.
See also Chapter 11.16, "How to Set Up Remote Operation via VNC",
on page 295.
"SSH"
Activates access via SSH (Secure Shell), a network protocol for
secure data communication.
"HTTP"
Activates access via HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol), the application protocol for hypermedia information systems.
"FTP"
Activates access via FTP (File Transfer Protocol), used to transfer
files from a host to the instrument and vice versa.
See also Chapter 9.9.2, "Accessing the File System of the
R&S SMA100B via ftp", on page 208.
"SMB (Samba)"
Activates access to SMB (Server Message Block), used for providing
shared access to files, printers and serial ports of a network.
See also Chapter 9.9.3, "Accessing the R&S SMA100B File System
via SMB (Samba)", on page 210.
"Avahi (Zeroconf)"
Activates Avahi, a service for automatic configuration of the instrument in a network environment.
"Software Update"
Allows updating the software.
Security Password
Enters the password that is required to enable or to disable the settings protected by a
security password. Default is 123456.
Note:
● We recommend that you change the default security password before connecting
the instrument to the network.
● The security settings are not assigned until you select the "Accept" button.
Accept
Applies the modified settings, provided the security password is entered and correct.
10.4.4 Password Management
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > Password Management".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
239
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Managing the Security Settings
In this tab, you can assign the security and a user-defined password and the bluetooth pin.
A new password does not take effect until you confirm it with the corresponding
"Change Password" button.
To confirm the new password, always press:
●
"User Password" > Change Password
Or
●
"Security Password" > Change Password
User Name
Indicates the user name used for access to the Linux operating system and valid for
VNC, FTP and SMB (Samba) access.
User Password
Access: "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > Password Management >
User Password"
Allows you to change and confirm the user password.
Old Password ← User Password
Enters the current user password. The default password is "instrument".
Note: We recommend that you change the default password before connecting the
instrument to a network.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
240
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Managing the Security Settings
New Password ← User Password
Enters the new user password.
The security password can contain decimal characters only.
Confirm Password ← User Password
Confirms the new user password by repeating.
Note: The new password is not assigned until you select the Change Password button.
Change Password ← User Password
Changes the user password accordingly.
Security Password
Access: "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > Password Management >
Security Password"
Enables you to change and confirm the security password.
Old Password ← Security Password
Enters the currently used security password. The default password is '123456'.
Note: We recommend that you change the default password before connecting the
instrument to a network.
The security password is required when changing the status of the USB and LAN interface.
New Password ← Security Password
Enters the new security password.
The security password can contain decimal characters only.
Confirm Password ← Security Password
Confirms the new security password by repeating.
Note: The new password is not assigned until you select Change Password button.
Change Password ← Security Password
Changes the password accordingly.
Bluetooth Pin
Access: "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > Password Management >
Bluetooth"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
241
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Undoing or Restoring Actions
Defines the pin of an external bluetooth device. This pin is required to enable remote
control via bluetooth.
10.5 Undoing or Restoring Actions
"Undo" is a function that removes the effect of the last action on the instrument and
reverts it to an older state. Conversely, "Redo" restores a previously undone action.
You can "Undo/Redo" actions according to two criteria:
●
Step by step
Gradually undo/redo the actions in reverse order as previously performed.
Depending on the available memory the "Undo/Redo" steps may restore all
actions.
●
Multiple steps at once
Select any specific action in the history list to "Undo/Redo" multiple actions in a single step.
Note: This mode requires a system restoration file on the instrument.
Access:
► Select "Setup > Settings > Undo/Redo".
The dialog contains all functions for enabling the "Undo/Redo" functionality.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
242
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions
Shutting Down and Rebooting the Instrument
Settings:
State............................................................................................................................243
History List.................................................................................................................. 243
Clear History............................................................................................................... 243
Apply........................................................................................................................... 243
State
Enables the recording of the performed actions.
History List
Lists the performed actions, provided "Undo/Redo" state is "On".
Clear History
Deletes the recorded list of the performed steps.
Apply
Performs the "Undo/Redo".
If you select a previously performed action of the list, all subsequent actions are
undone. The list entries remain.
If you select a subsequently executed action, you can restore all the actions undone up
to this state.
10.6 Shutting Down and Rebooting the Instrument
The POWER ON/STANDBY front panel key switches the instrument from the standby
to the ready state or vice versa. In remote operation form a remote computer or in
manual control, there is another possibility to shut down the instrument or to reboot the
system.
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > Maintenance > Shut Down".
Remote command:
●
:SYSTem:REBoot on page 477
●
:SYSTem:SHUTdown on page 478
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
243
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Overview of Remote Access Modes
11 Network Operation and Remote Control
The description in this section requires basic knowledge of the remote control operation. Definitions specified in the SCPI standard are not provided.
You find some basic information to the SCPI syntax, command lists, and general programming recommendations in Chapter A.1, "Additional Basics on Remote Control",
on page 508. See also Chapter A.1.5, "Status Reporting System", on page 520 for
information on the status reporting system of the instrument.
As an alternative to the interactive operation directly at the instrument, you can operate
the R&S SMA100B also from a remote location.
The Figure 11-1 shows the possibilities of the physical connection (interfaces) for the
remote access.
Figure 11-1: Supported remote connections
For information on how to configure a network, see the Chapter 2.1.3, "Setting Up a
Network (LAN) Connection", on page 26.
The various interfaces provide flexible access to the instrument, such as remote control, remote operation or remote file access. These remote access modes are fundamentally different, although they are often considered interchangeable. Refer to Overview of Remote Access Modes for details on these modes.
For comprehensive information on these topics, refer to the application note 1GP72:
Connectivity of Rohde&Schwarz Signal Generators.
11.1 Overview of Remote Access Modes
This section outlines the possible access modes and their major characteristics.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
244
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Overview of Remote Access Modes
Remote control (SCPI)
●
A remote PC controls the instrument, usually via VISA (Virtual Instrument Software
Architecture) interfaces.
●
Remote control disables the manual operation of the instrument; you can set different lock states.
●
The GUI is not visible.
●
Remote control commands (SCPI) perform the settings, either individually or in
sequences (SCPI programs).
●
Using SCPI programs is faster than the manual operation, since they automate
repeating applications.
Remote operation (VNC)
Risk of unauthorized access
If the VNC service is enabled on the instrument, any user in the network who knows
the computer name and password can access it.
Disable the VNC service on the instrument to prevent unauthorized access.
●
A remote device accesses the instrument via the common platform technology
VNC (Virtual Network Computing).
●
The protocol allows simultaneous operation from several remote devices and the
instrument nevertheless remains locally operable.
●
The GUI is visible.
●
To perform the settings, you can operate the instrument as with the manual control.
●
Clients supporting remote operation depend on the used remote device, see
Table 11-1.
Table 11-1: Supported VNC operation modes
Remote device
VNC client
Requirements
Characteristics
Desktop
●
●
Ultr@VNC
Other dedicated client software
Ultr@VNC or Client Software
must be installed.
Fast, supports several options like
full screen mode or auto-login.
●
Any web browser
Java Runtime must be installed
and activated in the browser settings.
Fast and convenient - only the
instrument address required.
Web sockets must be supported.
Slower than the other modes.
(Windows, Linux,
MacTMOS)
●
Web browser with HTML5
Java runtime is sometimes considered as security concern.
No additional installation or activation required.
No security concern.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
245
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
Remote device
VNC client
Requirements
Characteristics
Smart device
●
Dedicated client App
App must be installed.
Fast, supports several options like
full screen mode or auto-login.
●
Web browser with HTML5
Web sockets must be supported.
Support of QR code scanning
(Tablet/ smartphone)
Slower than a dedicated App.
Remote file access (FTP, SAMBA/SMB)
●
A remote client accesses the instrument's file system, using the protocols FTP (file
transfer protocol) and SAMBA/SMB (server message block).
●
The protocols enable you to transfer files from or to the instrument and to get direct
access to its file sharing directory /var/user/share.
For more information, refer to Chapter 9.9, "How to Transfer Files from and to the
Instrument", on page 207.
11.2 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
The instrument supports various interfaces for remote control. The table gives an overview on the connectivity:
Table 11-2: Remote control interfaces and protocols
Interface
Protocols, VISA*) address string and library
Remarks
Local area network
(LAN)
●
The LAN connector is on the rear panel of the
instrument.
●
●
USB
GPIB (IEC/IEEE Bus
Interface)
●
●
HiSLIP High-Speed LAN Instrument Protocol
(IVI-6.1)
TCPIP::host address::hislip0[::INSTR]
VISA
VXI-11
TCPIP::host address[::
LAN device name][::INSTR]
VISA
Socket communication (Raw Ethernet, simple
Telnet)
TCPIP::host address[::
LAN device name]::<port>::SOCKET
VISA or socket controller
USBTMC
USB::<vendor ID>::<product ID>::
<serial number>[::INSTR]
VISA
–
GPIB::<address>[::INSTR] (no secondary
address)
VISA
The interface is based on TCP/IP and supports
various protocols.
For a description of the protocols, refer to:
●
Chapter 11.2.1.2, "HiSLIP Protocol",
on page 249
●
Chapter 11.2.1.3, "VXI-11 Protocol",
on page 249
●
Chapter 11.2.1.4, "Socket Communication", on page 249
USB connectors are located on the front or the
rear panel of the instrument, or both.
For a description of the interface, refer to Chapter 11.2.2, "USB Interface", on page 250
Optional GPIB bus interfaces according to standard IEC 625.1/IEEE 488.1 are located on the
rear panel of the instrument.
For a description of the interface, refer to Chapter 11.2.3, "GPIB Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)", on page 250.
*) VISA (Virtual Instrument Software Architecture) is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to
communicate with instruments. A VISA installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control over LAN (when using
VXI-11 or HiSLIP protocol), USB and serial interface. For remote control via socket communication VISA installation is optional. For
more information, see Chapter 11.3.1, "VISA Library", on page 252.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
246
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
Rohde & Schwarz provides the standardized I/O software library R&S VISA for communication with the instruments via TCP/IP (LAN: HiSLIP, VXI-11 and raw socket) or
USB (USBTMC) interfaces.
R&S VISA is available for download at the Rohde & Schwarz website http://
www.rohde-schwarz.com/rsvisa.
How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in Chapter 11.8, "How to
Set Up a Remote Control Connection", on page 273.
SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)
SCPI commands - messages - are used for remote control. Commands that are not
taken from the SCPI standard follow the SCPI syntax rules. The instrument supports
the SCPI version 1999. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims
at the standardization of device-specific commands, error handling and the status registers. The tutorial "Automatic Measurement Control - A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE
488.2" from John M. Pieper (Rohde & Schwarz order number 0002.3536.00) offers
detailed information on concepts and definitions of SCPI.
Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers. The tables
are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers.
For more information, see also Chapter A.1, "Additional Basics on Remote Control",
on page 508.
11.2.1 LAN Interface
To be integrated in a LAN, the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface, consisting
of a connector, a network interface card and protocols.
For remote control via a network, the PC and the instrument must be connected via the
LAN interface to a common network with TCP/IP network protocol. The TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured on the instrument. Software for instrument control and (for specified protocols only) the VISA program library must be installed on the controller.
Identifying instruments in a network
If several instruments are connected to the network, each instrument has its own IP
address and associated resource string. The controller identifies these instruments by
the resource string.
11.2.1.1
VISA Resource Strings
The VISA resource string is required to establish a communication session between
the controller and the instrument in a LAN. The resource string is a unique identifier,
composed of the specific IP address of the instrument and some network and VISAspecific keywords.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
247
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
TCPIP
host address
[::LAN device name]
[::INSTR]
=
=
=
=
designates the network protocol
designates the IP address or hostname of the instrument
defines the protocol and the instance number of a subinstrument
indicates the instrument resource class (optional)
The IP address (host address/computer name) is used by the programs to identify and
control the instrument. It is automatically assigned by the DHCP server the first time
the device is registered on the network. Alternatively, you can also assign its LAN
device name.
If assigned, the IP address is displayed on home screen. You can adjust it manually
with the parameter the "System Config > Remote Access > Network" > IP AddressEnabling a locked user interface for manual operation.
The following section lists the characteristics of the VISA resource strings for the corresponding interface protocols. The highlighted characters are crucial.
HiSLIP
hislip0 = HiSLIP device name, designates that the interface protocol HiSLIP is used (mandatory)
hislip0 is composed of [::HiSLIP device name[,HiSLIP port]] and must be
assigned.
For details of the HiSLIP protocol, refer to Chapter 11.2.1.2, "HiSLIP Protocol",
on page 249.
VXI-11
[::inst0] = LAN device name, indicates that the VXI-11 protocol is used (optional)
inst0 currently selects the VXI-11 protocol by default and can be omitted.
For details of the VXI-11 protocol, refer to Chapter 11.2.1.2, "HiSLIP Protocol",
on page 249.
Socket communication
= determines the used port number
port
SOCKET = indicates the raw network socket resource class
Socket communication requires the specification of the port (commonly referred to as
port number) and of "SOCKET" to complete the VISA resource string with the associated protocol used.
The registered port for socket communication is port 5025.
See also Chapter 11.2.1.4, "Socket Communication", on page 249.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
248
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
11.2.1.2
HiSLIP Protocol
The HiSLIP (High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol) is the successor protocol for
VXI-11 for TCP-based instruments specified by the IVI foundation. The protocol uses
two TCP sockets for a single connection - one for fast data transfer, the other for nonsequential control commands (e.g. Device Clear or SRQ).
HiSLIP has the following characteristics:
●
High performance as with raw socket network connections
●
Compatible IEEE 488.2 support for Message Exchange Protocol, Device Clear,
Serial Poll, Remote/Local, Trigger, and Service Request
●
Uses a single IANA registered port (4880), which simplifies the configuration of firewalls
●
Supports simultaneous access of multiple users by providing versatile locking
mechanisms
●
Usable for IPv6 or IPv4 networks
Using VXI-11, each operation is blocked until a VXI-11 device handshake returns.
However, using HiSLIP, data is sent to the device using the "fire and forget" method
with immediate return. Thus, a successful return of a VISA operation such as
viWrite() does not guarantee that the instrument has finished or started the requested command, but is delivered to the TCP/IP buffers.
For more information see also the application note:
1MA208: Fast Remote Instrument Control with HiSLIP
11.2.1.3
VXI-11 Protocol
The VXI-11 standard is based on the ONC RPC (Open Network Computing Remote
Procedure Call) protocol which in turn relies on TCP/IP as the network/transport layer.
The TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured.
TCP/IP ensures connection-oriented communication, where the order of the
exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified. With this protocol, messages cannot be lost.
11.2.1.4
Socket Communication
An alternative way for remote control of the software is to establish a simple network
communication using sockets. The socket communication, also referred to as "Raw
Ethernet communication", does not necessarily require a VISA installation on the
remote controller side. It is available by default on all operating systems.
The simplest way to establish socket communication is to use the built-in telnet program. The telnet program is part of every operating system and supports a communication with the software on a command-by-command basis. For more convenience and
to enable automation by means of programs, user-defined sockets can be programmed.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
249
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
Socket connections are established on a specially defined port. The socket address is
a combination of the IP address or the host name of the instrument and the number of
the port configured for remote-control. All R&S SMA100B use port number 5025 for
this purpose. The port is configured for communication on a command-to-command
basis and for remote control from a program.
11.2.2 USB Interface
Option: R&S SMAB-B86
For remote control via the USB connection, the PC and the instrument must be connected via the USB type B interface. A USB connection requires the VISA library to be
installed. VISA detects and configures the R&S instrument automatically when the
USB connection is established. You do not have to install a separate driver.
USBTMC (USB Test & Measurement Cass Specification) is a protocol that is built on
top of USB for communication with USB devices, like GPIB. It defines class code information of the instrument, that identifies its functionality to load the respective device
driver. Using VISA library, it supports service request, triggers, and other specific operations, similar to GPIB.
11.2.2.1
USB Resource String
The resource string represents an addressing scheme that is used to establish a communication session with the instrument. It is based on the instrument address and
some instrument- and vendor-specific information.
The USB resource string syntax is as follows:
USB
<vendor ID>
<product ID>
<serial number>
[::INSTR]
=
=
=
=
=
denotes the used interface
is the manufacturer ID for Rohde & Schwarz
is the product identification of the instrument
is the individual serial number on the rear of the instrument
indicates the instrument resource class (optional)
To set the USB resource string, see Remote Access Settings.
Example:
USB::0x0AAD::0x01DD::100001
0x0AAD is the vendor ID for Rohde&Schwarz
0x01DD is the product ID for the R&S SMA100B
100001 is the serial number of the particular instrument
11.2.3 GPIB Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)
Option: R&S SMAB-B86
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
250
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
To be able to control the instrument via the GPIB bus, the instrument and the controller
must be linked by a GPIB bus cable. A GPIB bus card, the card drivers and the program libraries for the programming language used must be provided in the controller.
GPIB address
The controller must address the instrument with the GPIB bus channel (see Chapter 11.4.3, "GPIB Address Settings", on page 260). GPIB provides channel addresses
from 0 to 30.
The GPIB resource string syntax is as follows:
GPIB
= denotes the used interface
<channel address> = the used channel
[::INSTR]
= indicates the instrument resource class (optional)
Note: If the VISA implementation supports the GPIB interface, you can optionally
define the VISA Instrument Control Resource (INSTR). It is used to define the basic
operations and attributes for a device, such as reading, writing, or triggering.
Notes and characteristics
In connection with the GPIB interface, note the following:
●
Up to 15 instruments can be connected.
●
The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m, or 2 m times the number
of devices, whichever is less. The cable length between two instruments should not
exceed 2 m.
●
A wired "OR"-connection is used if several instruments are connected in parallel,
since the slowest instrument determines the speed.
Any connected IEC bus cable must be terminated by an instrument or controller.
11.2.4 LXI Browser Interface
The LXI browser interface allows easy configuration of the LAN and remote control of
the R&S SMA100B without additional installation requirements. The instrument's LXI
browser interface works correctly with all W3C compliant browsers.
See Chapter 11.17.1, "LXI Functionality", on page 301 for more about LXI.
The LAN settings are configured using the instrument's LXI browser interface described in Chapter 11.5.2.1, "LAN Configuration", on page 267. The LXI status settings in
the R&S SMA100B are described in Chapter 11.5.1, "LXI Status Settings",
on page 265.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
251
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Control Programs and Libraries
11.3 Remote Control Programs and Libraries
This section shows how the remote-control programs access the instrument, and the
libraries they require for the appropriate interface protocols.
Figure 11-2: Overview of remote control interfaces, protocols and libraries
11.3.1 VISA Library
VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to
communicate with instruments. Thus, you can configure the interface without having to
adjust the application program to the used interface. The I/O channel (LAN or TCP/IP,
USB, GPIB,...) is selected at initialization time with the channel–specific address string
("VISA resource string"), or by an appropriately defined VISA alias (short name). See
also Table 11-2 for an overview.
Instrument access via VXI-11 or HiSLIP protocols is achieved from high level programming platforms using VISA as an intermediate abstraction layer. VISA encapsulates
the low-level VXI or GPIB function calls and thus makes the transport interface transparent for the user.
A VISA installation is a prerequisite for remote control using the following interfaces:
●
LAN interface using HiSLIP Protocol
●
LAN interface using VXI-11 Protocol
●
USB Interface
Instrument access via the LAN socket protocol or GPIB connections can be operated
both, with or without the VISA library. See also Chapter 11.2.1.4, "Socket Communication", on page 249 and Chapter 11.2.3, "GPIB Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)",
on page 250.
For more information about VISA library, refer to the user documentation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
252
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Control Programs and Libraries
11.3.2 Possible Setups and Access Functions
The following examples give an overview of dependencies between the available libraries, the possible interfaces and protocols, and whether an instrument driver is provided. The involved parts are highlighted. For more information, see the application
note 1GP72: Connectivity of Rohde&Schwarz Signal Generators.
●
Remote control (application) program using VISA
Figure 11-3: Application program using VISA
Protocol
Remote control program
Socket
viOpen (..., "TCPIP:SMA100B-102030::5025::SOCKET", ...)
viPrintf (..., "SOUR:FREQ 2GHz\n")
VXI-11
viOpen (..., "TCPIP:SMA100B-102030::inst0::INSTR", ...)
viPrintf (..., "SOUR:FREQ 2GHz\n")
HiSLIP
viOpen (..., "TCPIP:SMA100B-102030::hislip0::INSTR", ...)
viPrintf (..., "SOUR:FREQ 2GHz\n")
USBTMC
viOpen (..., "USB::0x0AAD::0x01DD::100001::INSTR", ...)
viPrintf (..., "SOUR:FREQ 2GHz\n")
GPIB
viOpen (..., "GPIB::28::INSTR", ...)
viPrintf (..., "SOUR:FREQ 2GHz\n")
●
Remote control program using instrument driver (VISA available)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
253
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Control Programs and Libraries
Figure 11-4: Application using instrument driver (VISA available)
Protocol
Remote control program
Socket
rssmw_init ("TCPIP:SMA100B-102030::5025::SOCKET", ...)
rssmw_SetFrequency (..., 2e9)
VXI-11
rssmw_init ("TCPIP:SMA100B-102030::inst0::INSTR", ...)
rssmw_SetFrequency (..., 2e9)
HiSLIP
rssmw_init ("TCPIP:SMA100B-102030::hislip0::INSTR", ...)
rssmw_SetFrequency (..., 2e9)
USBTMC
rssmw_init ("USB::0x0AAD::0x01DD::100001::INSTR", ...)
rssmw_SetFrequency (..., 2e9)
GPIB
rssmw_init ("GPIB::28::INSTR", ...)
rssmw_SetFrequency (..., 2e9)
●
Remote control program using instrument driver (VISA not available)
Figure 11-5: Remote control program using instrument driver (VISA not available)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
254
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Access Settings
Protocol
Remote control program
Socket
rssmw_init ("TCPIP:SMA100B-102030::5025::SOCKET", ...)
rssmw_SetFrequency (..., 2e9)
GPIB
rssmw_init ("GPIB::28::INSTR", ...)
rssmw_SetFrequency (..., 2e9)
11.4 Remote Access Settings
Network
Risk of network failure
Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks:
●
Connecting the instrument to the network
●
Configuring the network
●
Changing IP addresses
●
Exchanging hardware
Errors can affect the entire network.
Default gateway
This address identifies the router on the same network as the instrument that is used to
forward traffic to destinations beyond the local network.
Instrument emulations
You can also remotely control the R&S SMA100B via the command set of another signal generator, as, for example, of an HP generator. With this function you can, for
example, replace a signal generator with an R&S SMA100B in an automated test
setup, without adjusting the command scripts used.
The R&S SMA100B also covers command sets of Rohde & Schwarz signal generators, e.g. the R&S SMA100A, the R&S SMF100A, etc. To achieve optimal compatibility
when replacing an instrument, we recommend that you select the emulation command
set for the corresponding generator.
The selected instrument also defines the identification string that is retrieved with query
*IDN?. If necessary, use the parameter Mode and IDN String to change this string.
As any other parameter, the remote control command set can also be changed
remotely by the command :SYSTem:LANGuage.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
255
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Access Settings
While working in an emulation mode, the R&S SMA100B specific command set is disabled and the SCPI command :SYSTem:LANGuage is discarded.
To return to the SCPI command set of the R&S SMA100B, use the appropriate command of the selected command set. If for example an HP generator is emulated, the
HP command EX returns to the instrument-specific GPIB command set.
11.4.1 Network Settings
Risk of network failure
Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks:
●
Connecting the instrument to the network
●
Configuring the network
●
Changing IP addresses
●
Exchanging hardware
Errors can affect the entire network.
Access:
► Select "System Config > Remote Access > Network".
In the "Network" dialog, you can configure the settings of the general network environment and specific identification parameters of the instrument in the network.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
256
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Access Settings
The remote commands required to configure the network remotely are described in
Chapter 12.16, "SYSTem Subsystem", on page 455.
How to connect the signal generator to the network is described in the Chapter 2.1.3,
"Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection", on page 26.
Network Status
Indicates that the instrument is connected to the network.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:STATus? on page 466
Hostname
Displays the hostname.
Each instrument is delivered with an assigned hostname, a logical name which can be
used instead of the IP address. With the default network settings, the IP address is
allocated by the DHCP server. This address can change each time the instrument is
reconnected. Unlike the IP address, the hostname name does not change.
Note:
This function is password-protected. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it, see
"Protection Level/Password" on page 234.
●
We recommend that you do not change the default network settings or the hostname to avoid problems with the network connection.
If you change the hostname, be sure to use a unique name.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:HOSTname on page 466
Workgroup
Sets the individual windows workgroup name of the R&S SMA100B. This parameter is
required in case the instrument is integrated in a windows network.
This function is password-protected. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it, see
"Protection Level/Password" on page 234.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:WORKgroup on page 467
MAC Address
Indicates the MAC (Media Access Control) address, a unique identifier of the network
adapter in the R&S SMA100B.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:MACaddress on page 465
Address Mode
Selects the mode for assigning the IP address.
NOTICE! Risk of network failure.
Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks:
● Connecting the instrument to the network
● Configuring the network
● Changing IP addresses
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
257
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Access Settings
●
Exchanging hardware
Errors can affect the entire network.
"Auto (DCHP)"
Assigns the IP address automatically, provided the network supports
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
"Static"
Enables you to assign the IP address manually.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:MODE on page 465
IP Address
Displays the IP address of the instrument in the network.
By default, the R&S SMA100B is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration and
to obtain the whole address information automatically.
If the network does not support DHCP or the attempt does not succeed, the instrument
tries to obtain the IP address via Zeroconf (APIPA) protocol. IP addresses assigned via
Zeroconf start with the number blocks 169.254.*.*.
Note: An IP address that is assigned via the Zeroconf protocol although the network
requires an IP address assigned via the DHCP server can cause network connection
failures.
See Chapter 14.5, "Resolving Network Connection Failures", on page 505.
To assign the IP address manually, select Address Mode > "Static".
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress on page 465
Subnet Mask
Displays the bit group of the subnet in the host identifier.
To assign the subnet mask manually, select Address Mode > "Static".
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:SUBNet:MASK on page 467
Default Gateway
Displays the gateway address.
This address identifies the router on the same network as the instrument that is used to
forward traffic to destinations beyond the local network.
To assign the gateway address manually, select Address Mode > "Static".
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:GATeway on page 467
DNS Suffix
Displays the primary DNS (Domain Name System) suffix, that means the DNS name
without the hostname part.
The DNS system uses the suffix for registration and name resolution for unique identification of the instrument in the entire network.
To assign the DNS suffix manually, select Address Mode > "Static".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
258
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Access Settings
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:DOMain on page 466
DNS Server
Determines the preferred server for name resolution. The DNS server contains the
underlying numerical values that are required for name resolution of the hostname as
part of the IP address.
To select the DNS server manually, select Address Mode > "Static".
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:DNS on page 467
Restart Network
Terminates the network connection of the instrument and subsequently sets it up
again. You can use this function to fix network problems.
Note: This function restarts only the connection of the instrument to the network. It
does not impact the network itself.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESTart on page 466
11.4.2 VISA Resource Strings
Access:
► Select "System Config > Remote Access > VISA Resource Strings".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
259
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Access Settings
The "VISA Resource String" dialog displays the VISA resource strings provided for
remote control via the different interfaces.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:HISLip:RESource? on page 464
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESource? on page 465
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:RESource? on page 469
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RESource? on page 464
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:RESource? on page 469
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:RESource? on page 468
11.4.3 GPIB Address Settings
Access:
1. Select "System Config > Remote Access > GPIB Address".
2. Set the GPIB channel address of the connected instrument.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess on page 464
11.4.4 RS232 Settings
Remote control via a serial interface is possible via a USB. The controller and the
instrument must be connected with the external USB/serial-adapter R&S TS1-USB
(see recommended extras in the data sheet) and a serial crossover (null modem)
cable. A USB connection requires the VISA library to be installed on the controller.
VISA detects and configures the R&S SMA100B automatically when the USB connection is established.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
260
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Access Settings
Access:
► Select "System Config > Remote Access > RS232".
In the "RS232" dialog, you can configure the settings of the serial interface.
The remote commands required to configure the settings remotely are described in
Chapter 12.16, "SYSTem Subsystem", on page 455.
Baud Rate
Sets the baudrate for the serial remote control interface.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BAUD on page 468
Parity
Sets the parity for the serial remote control interface.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PARity on page 468
Stop Bits
Sets the number of stop bits for the serial remote control interface.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:SBITs on page 468
11.4.5 Instrument Emulations Settings
Access:
► Select "System Config > Remote Access > Instrument Emulations".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
261
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Access Settings
The "Instrument Emulations" dialog enables you to emulate a remote control command set of another signal generator.
The remote commands required to configure the emulation settings remotely are
described in Chapter 12.16, "SYSTem Subsystem", on page 455.
Language
Selects the instrument whose remote command set is emulated by the R&S SMA100B.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:LANGuage on page 470
Mode
Selects the way the instrument identification is performed.
"Automatic"
Sets the "IDN String" and the "OPT String" automatically for the
instrument selected with the parameter Language.
"User Defined"
Enables you to define the "IDN String" and the "OPT String".
Remote command:
:SYSTem:IDENtification on page 469
Set to Default
In "Mode > User Defined", resets the *IDN and *OPT strings.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:IDENtification:PRESet on page 470
IDN String
Indicates the identification string of the instrument when queried with the common
command *IDN?.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
262
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Access Settings
In addition to the preset values, you can define your own identification string so that
each generator uses an individual identification, like My_SigGen for instance.
Remote command:
*IDN? on page 307
OPT String
Indicates the option string of the instrument as queried with common command *OPT?.
In "Mode > User Defined", you can define your own option string, additionally to the
automatically created one.
Remote command:
*OPT? on page 308
11.4.6 Active Connections Settings
Access:
► Select "System Config > Remote Access > Active Connections".
The "Active Connections" dialog indicates all active SCPI and TCP/IP connections.
Show Remote Connections in Taskbar
Displays the currently active connections in the taskbar.
SCPI Connections
Shows the active VISA resource string of the interface via which the instrument is
remotely controlled.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
263
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Remote Access Settings
Remote command:
n.a.
TCP/IP Connections
Shows the type and client address of the LAN interface connection.
Remote command:
n.a.
11.4.7 QR Code
Access:
► Select "System Config > Remote Access > QR Code".
The "QR Code" dialog shows the current instrument address (IP address) in quick
response (QR) format.
This functionality provides fast access to the instrument via VNC with, for example, a
smart phone or a tablet.
See Chapter 11.16.2, "Setting Up a Remote Operation from a Smart Device",
on page 298.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
264
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
LXI Settings
11.5 LXI Settings
On the R&S SMA100B the LXI functionality is already installed and enabled, see LXI
Status Settings. Thus, the instrument can be accessed via any web browser (like the
Microsoft Internet Explorer) to perform the following tasks:
●
Modifying network configurations
●
Remote control the instrument
●
Performing SCPI remote diagnostics
The LAN settings are configured using the instrument's LXI browser interface described in Chapter 11.5.2.1, "LAN Configuration", on page 267.
11.5.1 LXI Status Settings
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > Remote Access > LXI Status...".
The "LXI - Status" dialog shows the parameters of the LAN connection.
Alternatively, you can change the LAN settings using the LXI web browser interface,
see Chapter 11.5.2.1, "LAN Configuration", on page 267.
LAN Status
The LED indicates the LXI status.
"green"
Normal operation
"green (flashing)"
Device identification
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
265
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
LXI Settings
"red"
LAN fault
Hostname / MAC Address / IP Address
See "Hostname" on page 257.
LAN Reset
Initiates the network configuration reset mechanism for the instrument and resets the
hostname, MAC address, and IP address.
According to the LXI standard, a LAN reset must place the following network settings
to a default state:
Parameter
Value
TCP/IP mode
DHCP + Auto IP address
Dynamic DNS
Enabled
ICMP ping
Enabled
Password for LAN configuration
LxiWebIfc
The LAN reset also resets the following parameters for the Signal Generator:
Parameter
Hostname
Instrument-specific hostname
Description
Vector signal generator
Negotiation
Auto detect
VXI-11 discovery
Enabled
11.5.2 LXI Browser Settings
To access the instrument via the web browser:
► In the address field of the browser on your PC, type the instrument's host name or
IP address, for example http://10.113.1.151.
Note: Do not add the missing zeros in the IP address, while opening the instrument home page.
The instrument home page (welcome page) opens.
The navigation pane of the browser interface contains the following elements:
● "LXI"
– "Home" opens the instrument home page.
The home page displays the device information required by the LXI standard, including the VISA resource string in read-only format.
– "Device Indicator" activates or deactivates the LXI status indication.
When activated, the LXI LEDs flash, both in the browser dialog and in the
LXI dialog of the connected instrument, see LAN Status. A green LXI status
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
266
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
LXI Settings
●
●
●
●
11.5.2.1
symbol indicates that a LAN connection has been established; a red symbol indicates that no LAN cable is connected.
– "Lan Configuration" allows you to configure LAN parameters and to initiate
a ping, see "Ping Client" on page 269.
– "Status" displays information about the LXI status of the instrument.
– "Utilities" provides access to the LXI event log functionality required by the
LXI standard.
"Instrument Control"
– "Web Control" provides remote access to the instrument, see "Starting a
remote control via the LXI web browser" on page 274.
"Diagnostics"
– "SCPI Remote Trace" records messages exchanged via the remote control
interface, see "SCPI Remote Trace" on page 270.
"Help"
– "Glossary" explains terms related to the LXI standard.
– www.rohde-schwarz.com opens the Rohde & Schwarz home page.
"Data Sheet"
Provides the data sheet with the specification data of the instrument at the time
of delivery, see "Data Sheet" on page 271.
LAN Configuration
The "LAN Configuration" web page displays all mandatory LAN parameters and allows
their modification.
It comprises the following navigation entries.
●
●
●
●
●
IP Configuration.................................................................................................... 267
Advanced Config...................................................................................................268
Ping Client.............................................................................................................269
SCPI Remote Trace.............................................................................................. 270
Data Sheet............................................................................................................ 271
IP Configuration
The "IP configuration" web page displays all mandatory LAN parameters and allows
their modification.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
267
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
LXI Settings
The "IP Address Mode" selects a configuration mode for the IP address of the instrument. With static configuration, the entered IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway are used. With dynamic configuration, DHCP or dynamic link local addressing
(automatic IP) are used to obtain the instrument IP address.
Changing the LAN configuration
This function is password-protected. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it, see
"Protection Level/Password" on page 234.
Note: We recommend that you change the default password before connecting the
instrument to a network.
See Chapter 10.4.4, "Password Management", on page 239.
Advanced Config
The "Advanced Config" web page provides LAN settings that are not declared mandatory by the LXI standard.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
268
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
LXI Settings
The following advanced parameters are available:
●
"mDNS and DNS-SD": The additional protocols "multicast DNS" and "DNS service
discovery" are used for device communication in zero configuration networks,
working without DNS and DHCP.
●
"ICMP Ping": Must be enabled to use the ping utility.
If you disable this setting, the instrument does not answer ping requests. The setting does not affect the LXI ping client. You can ping other hosts from the instrument, even if the setting is disabled.
●
"VXI-11 Discovery": Must be enabled to detect the instrument in the LAN.
If you disable this setting, the instrument cannot be detected by the VXI-11 discovery protocol mechanism. The setting does not affect other detection mechanisms.
Setting up a VXI-11 connection via the IP address or the host name is independent
of this setting.
Changing the LAN configuration
This function is password-protected. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it, see
"Protection Level/Password" on page 234.
Note: We recommend that you change the default password before connecting the
instrument to a network.
See Chapter 10.4.4, "Password Management", on page 239.
Ping Client
The "Ping Client" page provides the ping utility to verify the connection between the
LXI-compliant instrument and another device.
The ping is initiated from the instrument. Using the ICMP echo request and echo reply
packets, this function checks whether the communication with a device via LAN is
working. Ping is useful for the diagnosis of IP network or router failures.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
269
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
LXI Settings
To initiate a ping at the instrument:
1. On the "Ping Client" page, enter the IP address of the host in the "Destination
Address" field (for example 10.113.1.151).
2. Select "Submit".
SCPI Remote Trace
The remote trace functionality allows you to trace input and output strings at the
remote control interface of the R&S SMA100B, see Chapter 11.9, "Tracing SCPI Commands and Messages Exchanged via the LXI Web Browser Interface", on page 283.
A recorded trace (message log) can be evaluated directly in the dialog. Use the highlighting and navigation functions provided by the lower toolbar to locate error messages and messages containing arbitrary search strings. You can also export the message log to a *.csv file and evaluate the file using a suitable program.
To trace and display messages, switch on "logging" and "live mode" in the toolbar.
Toolbars
The toolbar at the top of the dialog provides basic settings and functions.
●
"Live mode" / "logging": If logging is switched on, messages are traced. They are
stored in an internal database and can be displayed upon request, using the
refresh button (live mode off) or they can be displayed automatically (live mode
on).
●
"Filter": applies a filter to columns and/or rows when working (live mode off)
●
"Refresh": reads the message log from the internal database and displays it
●
"Download": stores the SCPI trace log to a *.csv file
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
270
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
LXI Settings
●
"Clear": deletes all message log entries in the database and at the screen
●
"Details": displays details of the selected message, for example an SCPI command
in hex format (also possible by double\-clicking a message)
Columns
The following columns are available if no column filter is applied:
●
"Rec": record number of the message within the message log
●
I: number of the subinstrument
●
"MT": indicates the type of the message. Possible values and related message
contents are:
●
–
> = incoming command
–
< = outgoing response to a query
–
E = error message, highlighted by red color
–
T = execution time, i.e. time required by the instrument to process the command internally.
"message": indicates the type of the message. Possible values and related message contents are:
–
> = incoming command
–
< = outgoing response to a query
–
E = error message, denoted in red
–
T = execution time, i.e. time required by the instrument to process the command internally
Data Sheet
The data sheet functionality allows you to retrieve the specification data of the instrument at the time of delivery.
The document contains all specified value ranges and information of the data sheet, for
example important as reference values for recalibration.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
271
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Find the VISA Resource String
11.6 How to Find the VISA Resource String
► Select "System Config > Remote Access > VISA Resource Strings".
The dialog shows all specified resource strings of the supported remote control
interfaces.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
272
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up a Remote Control Connection
●
For information on how to assign the IP address manually, see Chapter 2.1.3.3,
"Assigning the IP Address", on page 28.
●
Also note that using the RS232 serial interface via USB requires the USB serial
adapter R&S TS-USB1.
11.7 How to Change the GPIB Instrument Address
Option: R&S SMAB-B86
To control the instrument remotely via the GPIB bus, it must be addressed using the
GPIB address. The remote control address is factory-set to 28, but it can be changed if
it does not fit in the network environment. For remote control, addresses 0 through 30
are allowed. The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings.
To set the GPIB address:
1. Select "System Config > Remote Access > GPIB Address".
2. Select "GPIB Channel Address" and enter a value between 0 and 30.
Risk of losing remote connection
Since a Factory Preset resets the remote access and network settings to the default
values, executing factory preset via remote control terminates the connection to the
instrument, if these settings had been configured to values different to the default ones!
11.8 How to Set Up a Remote Control Connection
This section guides you through the steps required to set up remote control connections of the available interfaces.
●
Chapter 11.8.1, "Establishing a Remote Control Connection over the LXI Browser
Interface", on page 274
●
Establishing a Remote Control Connection over LAN Using VXI-11 Protocol
●
Setting Up a Remote Control Connection over LAN Using Socket Communication
●
Setting Up a Remote Control Connection over GPIB
●
Setting Up a Remote Control Connection over USB
The instrument and the controller have to be connected with the suitable cable and
switched on.
A remote control program must open a connection to the instrument, before it can send
commands to and receive device responses from the instrument.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
273
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up a Remote Control Connection
Instrument address
To operate the instrument via remote control, it must be addressed using the defined
interface address.
See:
●
Chapter 11.2.1, "LAN Interface", on page 247
●
Chapter 11.2.2, "USB Interface", on page 250
●
Chapter 11.2.3, "GPIB Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)", on page 250
You find the VISA resource strings in the "System Config > Remote Access > VISA
Resource Strings" dialog.
Securing the display
To prevent unauthorized personnel from reading the display, you can disable the frequency and level display explicitly. This is useful when you remotely control the instrument from a different location.
For more information, see:
●
"Annotation Frequency" on page 235
●
"Annotation Amplitude" on page 235
11.8.1 Establishing a Remote Control Connection over the LXI Browser
Interface
Via the LXI browser interface to the R&S SMA100B one or more users can control the
instrument remotely from another PC without additional installation. Most instrument
controls are available via the front panel simulation. File upload and download between
the instrument and the remote PC is also available.
Starting a remote control via the LXI web browser
This section assumes that the instrument and the controller PC are connected in the
LAN.
1. Start a web browser that supports html5 (W3C compliant).
2. Enter the IP address of the R&S SMA100B in the browser's address bar.
The R&S SMA100B's welcome page is displayed.
3. In the navigation pane, select "Instrument Control" > "Web Control".
Remote access to the instrument requires the password. The default password is
instrument.
4. Enter the password and confirm with the ENTER key.
After the connection is established, the current screen of the R&S SMA100B is displayed in the browser window.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
274
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up a Remote Control Connection
5. Use the mouse cursor and keyboard to access the functionality of the instrument
as you would directly perform on the instruments touchscreen and front panel.
11.8.2 Establishing a Remote Control Connection over LAN Using VXI-11
Protocol
In this example, the I/O software library R&S VISA from Rohde & Schwarz is used to
set up a LAN remote control link and remotely control the R&S SMA100B. R&S VISA is
running on a controller PC with Windows operating system. When the connection is set
up you can send commands to the instrument and receive the responses.
The remote control connection requires a VISA installation but no additional hardware
on the controller PC. The LAN I/O channel is selected at initialization time using the
VISA resource string (also referred to as "address string"). A VISA alias (short name) is
used to replace the complete resource string. The host address is the R&S SMA100B's
hostname or its IP address.
See also Chapter 11.2.1, "LAN Interface", on page 247.
In this following, we assume that:
●
A LAN remote control link between the controller and the R&S SMA100B is set up.
●
The R&S VISA program is installed on the remote PC
See http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/rsvisa > "RS VISA Release Notes".
Setting up the controller with R&S VISA
To remote control the R&S SMA100B, we use the R&S VISA Tester application. The
application communicates via TCP/IP protocol.
The instrument is preconfigured for networks using DHCP (dynamic host configuration
protocol). If this configuration is used, enter the computer name in the position of the IP
address.
1. Connect the controller and the instrument in the same network (network cable) and
switch them on.
2. On the controller, start "R&S VISA > Tester 32bit" or "R&S VISA > Tester 64bit".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
275
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up a Remote Control Connection
3. In the menu bar, select "Choose VISA Implementation > Rohde & Schwarz Visa"
and confirm with "OK".
4. In the menu bar, select "Find Resource" to search for the instrument in the LAN.
5. Select "VXI-11" and "Find Resources".
R&S VISA scans the network for connected instruments and lists all detected
instruments in the "Resource" list.
Note: The search may take some time, particularly in large networks.
6. Select the required instrument and confirm with "Select".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
276
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up a Remote Control Connection
The "Find and select resource" dialog closes and R&S VISA indicates the IP
address in the "Resource" field of the main application window.
7. As an alternative to the IP address, you can assign an alias name to the
R&S SMA100B:
a) In the menu bar, select "RsVisaConfig".
b) In the toolbar, select "+" to access the "VISA Resource String Composer".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
277
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up a Remote Control Connection
c) Fill in the "Alias" name, the "VISA Resource String" and the "Device IP Address
or host name" as shown in the figure, and confirm with "OK".
The "Alias" name is assigned.
d) Close the dialog.
The R&S SMA100B is registered in the program. It can be addressed via the
resource string or alias name.
8. In the main window, select "Connect".
R&S VISA establishes the connection to the R&S SMA100B.
You can send settings to configure the instrument and receive its responses.
Note: If the connection cannot be set up, R&S VISA displays an error in the log
view.
For information on how to proceed when network failures occur, see Chapter 14.5,
"Resolving Network Connection Failures", on page 505.
For further information on the functions to read and write to an open session, as
well as the utility applications the software provides, see the R&S VISA user manual.
Starting a remote control session over LAN with R&S VISA
To set the instrument to remote control, you can use the addressed command &GTR or
send any command from the controller.
1. Start the R&S VISA Tester. Establish the connection to the R&S SMA100B.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
278
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up a Remote Control Connection
See "Setting up the controller with R&S VISA" on page 275.
2. In the R&S VISA "Basics" tab, enter an SCPI command, e.g. "*IDN?". Confirm with
"Query".
The instrument is switched to remote control when it receives a command from the
controller.
3. Select "Read" to obtain the instrument response.
Tip: If the "Show Log" checkbox is checked R&S VISA displays each VISA function
call in the log-view on the left. If you check the "Write Log" checkbox the log-view
entry is written to the log file as well. You can operate the log-view in two modes:
the "Live Mode" shows only the most recent messages whereas the "View Mode"
allows you to scroll the history.
4. To set, e.g. the frequency, enter SOUR1:FREQ 4 GHz and select "Write".
To check the performed setting, SOUR1:FREQ? and select "Query".
The instrument response is 4000000000. The value corresponds to the frequency
in Hz.
While remote control is active, the "Remote" icon in the status bar indicates that the
instrument is in remote control mode. Currently ongoing communication (data
transfer) is indicated by green colored arrows in the icon.
Additionally, the "Connections" softkey in the taskbar shows the currently established remote connections. The operation via the front and touch panel or via
mouse and keyboard are locked, allowing a remote control program to be performed without interruption.
On the display, keys and entry fields are grayed out and cannot be activated or
modified, but you can still open dialogs, for example to verify settings.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
279
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up a Remote Control Connection
5. To disable the access to the dialogs, use the command SYST:KLOC ON.
6. To prevent unintentional return to manual operation, use the command &LLO.
See also Chapter A.1.2, "LAN Interface Messages", on page 509.
The instrument switches to "Remote LLO" state. The SETUP key is disabled.
7. To enable the SETUP key, use the command &GTR.
8. To return to manual operation, see Chapter 11.10, "How to Return to Manual Operation", on page 283.
Tip: Switching from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not
affect the other instrument settings.
11.8.3 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection over LAN Using Socket
Communication
This section provides an example on how to establish a remote control connection over
Telnet client and a simple sockets-based program example that can be further developed (see also Chapter A.2, "Telnet program examples", on page 529).
The telnet client transmits information unencrypted. Therefore, for sensitive information
we recommend that you use a client which supports secure protocols, as e.g. SSH.
In the following example, we assume basic knowledge of programming and operation
of the controller. You can find information on the interface commands in the corresponding manuals.
Setting up a Telnet connection
To control the software, only a Telnet program is required. The Telnet program is part
of every operating system.
1. To establish a Telnet connection with the R&S SMA100B, start the Telnet program
and enter the socket address.
The socket address is a combination of the IP address or the hostname of the
R&S SMA100B and the number of the port configured for remote-control via Telnet.
Tip: The R&S SMA100B uses the port number 5025 for remote connection via Telnet.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
280
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up a Remote Control Connection
The connection to the instrument is set up and you can send remote-control commands.
2. Note that Telnet does not reflect your first entry. Insert a command, e.g. *IDN and
confirm with "Enter".
3. Observe the screen.
A response on the query confirms that the connection is working. The client displays all subsequent inputs and responses.
4. Even if the cursor is not visible on the screen, enter blind a remote-control command and confirm with Enter.
11.8.4 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection over GPIB
The program example in this section is written in VISUAL BASIC. A condition for programming in VISUAL BASIC is that the modules NIGLOBAL (Niglobal.bas) and
VBIB32 (Vbib_32.bas) are added to the projects.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
281
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up a Remote Control Connection
Drivers for instrument, for example IVI-COM and LabVIEW drivers, are available for
download area on the product page at:
https://www.rohde-schwarz.com/driver/sma100b/
Starting a remote control session over GPIB
As a prerequisite, the GPIB address of the instrument, which is factory-set to 28, must
not have been changed.
1. Connect instrument and controller using GPIB cable and switch them on.
2. Execute the following commands on the controller:
a) Open the port to the instrument.
CALL IBFIND("DEV1", generator%)
b) Inform the controller about instrument address.
CALL IBPAD(generator%, 28)
c) Reset the instrument.
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "*RST;*CLS")
d) Set the instrument to new address.
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18")
e) Inform the controller about new address.
CALL IBPAD(generator%, 18)
The GPIB address of the instrument is changed.
3. To return to manual operation, press the LOCAL key at the front panel.
Risk of losing network connection
Since a factory preset resets the remote access and network settings to the default values, executing factory preset via remote control terminates the connection to the
instrument, if these settings had been configured to values different to the default ones!
11.8.5 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection over USB
For remote control via the USB connection, the PC and the instrument must be connected via the USB type B interface. A USB connection requires the VISA library to be
installed. VISA detects and configures the R&S instrument automatically when the
USB connection is established. You do not have to enter an address string or install a
separate driver.
Starting a remote control session over USB
1. Connect instrument and controller using USB cable and switch them on.
2. Execute the following commands on the controller:
a) Open the port to the instrument
viOpen (..., "USB::0x0AAD::0x01DD::100001::INSTR", ...)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
282
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Return to Manual Operation
b) Reset the instrument
viRST (generator%, "*RST;*CLS")
c) Set 2 GHz frequency
viPrintf (..., "SOUR:FREQ 2GHz\n")
d) Set 20 dBm output level
viPrintf (..., "SOUR:POW -20dBm\n")
The RF frequency and signal level of the instrument are changed.
3. To return to manual operation, press the LOCAL key.
11.9 Tracing SCPI Commands and Messages Exchanged
via the LXI Web Browser Interface
The remote trace functionality allows you to trace commands and messages
exchanged via a remote control interface of the R&S SMA100B.
To activate the SCPI remote trace:
1. Start a web browser that supports html5 (W3C compliant).
2. Enter the IP address of the R&S SMA100B in the browser's address bar.
The R&S SMA100B's welcome page is displayed.
3. In the navigation pane, select "Diagnostics > SCPI Remote Trace".
4. In the toolbar bar of the "SCPI Remote Trace" page, select "live mode > on" and
"logging > on".
"live mode > on" displays all commands and responses, and "logging > on" also
traces messages.
If you now control the R&S SMA100B with SCPI commands, using an appropriate
tool, the LXI function records the information sent and received.
The function records all sent commands, received responses and messages, and
saves them in an internal database. If "live mode" is disabled, you can display the
recent traces upon request, using the "refresh" button. You can also save the log in
a file.
Note: The diagnostics functionality will be extended in later releases, e.g. to download or upload SCPI command files from / to the instrument.
11.10 How to Return to Manual Operation
Before returning to manual control, command processing must be completed. Otherwise, the instrument switches back to remote control immediately.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
283
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
1. To return from "Remote" state to manual state, perform one of the following:
●
●
●
●
On the controller, use the command &GTL
Note: If &NREN has been set before &GTL is locked. Use &GTR instead.
In the status bar, select the "Remote" icon.
On the front panel, press the LOCAL key.
In the block diagram, select "Context sensitive menu > Key Emulation > Local"
2. To return from "Remote LLO" state to manual or to "Remote" state, perform one of
the following:
Note: In the local lockout state, the command &GTL and the LOCAL key are
locked. You can unlock this state only via remote control.
● On the controller, use the command &LOCS.
This command switches directly to manual operation.
● Send the command &REMS.
This command changes the remote control state from "Remote LLO" to
"Remote".
● Use the Visual Basic command CALL IBLOC (generator%).
The command switches directly to manual operation.
● VISA function viGpibControlREN()
This function switches directly to manual operation.
11.11 Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
To achieve fast configuration, make complex test setups or repeating measurements
reproducible, you can automate the required settings with scripts. A script contains a
series of SCPI commands corresponding to the settings. When completed, it is converted to an executable format, saved in a file and can be run whenever needed.
If you frequently need to load and run a script, assign the script to the USER, and you
can quickly and easily perform the task.
See Chapter 10.2.3, "Assigning Actions to the User Key", on page 226.
Note: In contrast to "Recall Setup" via the USER key, an assigned script execution
does not close active dialogs and windows. On the contrary, even active window control (open / close) is possible.
Figure 11-6: Steps for performing SCPI Scripts
In the graph, you can see the main steps required to work with an SCPI script.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
284
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
Creating an SCPI list
With the SCPI record functions, you can create an SCPI command list directly in the
instrument and then export the list to the controller. If you want to edit or write a script
manually, use a suitable editor on the controller. Even for manually creating, the instrument supports you by showing the corresponding command syntax and the current
settings value.
Directly in the instrument, you can create an SCPI list at any time of operation, in the
following ways:
●
Recording steps
Both, automatic and manual SCPI recording of settings is possible. You can start,
stop and resume automatic recording, and also record individual commands manually.
–
Manually record the steps selectively
In manual recording mode, you can deliberately record a SCPI command with
the "Add to Script" function, see How to record SCPI lists manually.
–
Automatically record all performed steps
The instrument records the SCPI command and settings value of each step
you perform, as if you run a series of commands, and then writes the commands to the file system, see How to record SCPI lists automatically.
You can also add a SCPI command manually to the recording list during automatic SCPI recording, or after it has been stopped.
●
Generating all settings at once
Generates the SCPI commands of the current instrument settings in one step, and
writes the command list in a temporary list, see How to create a SCPI list with the
current instrument settings in one step.
Note: This function lists all commands in alphabetical order, in contrast to the
recording or manual creation, which consider the order the settings are configured.
This can slow down the run time or cause errors during execution. Therefore,
always check and revise a script if necessary, see "How to check an SCPI list"
on page 293.
●
Manually create a command script with "Copy" and paste
Enables you to copy the SCPI command and the current setting, see Chapter 11.11.1, "Show SCPI Command", on page 287.
Some parameters cannot be set by a SCPI command.
If so, no SCPI command found is entered instead of a command when you record or
generate all settings at once.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
285
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
The difference between "Show SCPI Command" and the provided cross-reference
If you want to enter your settings in a script, or use a remote control program, you must
know the corresponding SCPI command and the exact syntax.
If you need to look up the SCPI command, the instrument offers two ways to figure it
out quickly.
●
"Show SCPI command" (context-sensitive menu)
Displays the SCPI command syntax of a selected parameter including the current
setting value, see Chapter 11.12, "How to Find Out the SCPI Command Corresponding to the Manual Operation via "Show SCPI Command"", on page 290. The
"Copy" function enables you to write a SCPI script conveniently by hand.
●
Instrument help (F1 key)
Opens a help topic that describes the selected parameter or instrument function,
including a cross-reference to the corresponding SCPI command. The reference
leads you to the description of the SCPI command comprising the complete SCPI
syntax, all available setting values, value ranges, etc., see Chapter 11.13, "How to
Find Out the SCPI Command Corresponding to the Manual Operation Using the
Online Help", on page 290.
Creating and exporting a script file
When the script list is completed, a code generator translates the SCPI commands into
the source code of a proprietary programming language, using a code template. Therefore, each language requires an appropriate code template. When converted, you can
save the script in a file with an extension corresponding to the programming language.
The R&S SMA100B provides the following predefined code templates by default:
●
Plain SCPI
Represents SCPI base format, that is ASCII format, saved as text file (*.txt).
●
MATLAB
A programming environment, frequently used in signal processing and test and
measurement applications (*.m).
You can directly use this format with MATLAB(c) Toolkit. For comprehensive information on this topic, refer to the application note 1GP60: MATLAB Toolkit for R&S
Signal Generators.
●
NICVI
An ANSI C programming environment designed for measurements and tests (*.c).
You can directly use this format with National Instruments LabWindows CVI.
You can also convert a script to a user-specific format. In this case, you need a code
template with the extension *.expcodetmpl.
For information on how to select the code template and save the script in a file, see
Chapter 11.11.3, "SCPI Recording Export Settings", on page 288.
Executing an SCPI script
An SCPI script primarily runs on the controller PC. In addition, you can execute a script
directly on the instrument, by assigning the script to the USER key.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
286
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
See Chapter 10.2.3, "Assigning Actions to the User Key", on page 226.
11.11.1 Show SCPI Command
Access:
1. Select the parameter.
2. Open the context-sensitive menu (tap and hold).
3. Select "Show SCPI Command".
This function provides the syntax of the remote command with the current setting.
Copy
Copies the command and the current setting.
Close
Exits the "SCPI Command" dialog.
11.11.2 Displaying an SCPI List
The instrument displays a recorded SCPI list and thus provides viewing the recorded
results before exporting.
► Depending on the starting point, you can access the "SCPI Recording List" dialog
as follows:
●
●
●
●
During recording
Select "Show SCPI Recording List" in the context-sensitive menu.
At any time outside recording
Select "Show SCPI Recording List" in the context-sensitive menu.
This function assumes that at least one recording has been executed after
power-on.
At the end of the recording
Select "Stop automatic SCPI recording". The dialog opens automatically.
After you have exported the script to a file
Select "SCPI Recording Export > Show file content"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
287
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
See Chapter 11.11.3, "SCPI Recording Export Settings", on page 288.
The "SCPI Recording List" shows the last recorded and exported commands.
Export
Opens the SCPI Recording Export dialog for configuring the file parameters for export.
Remove All, Remove First, Remove Last
Deletes the either first, the last or all recorded SCPI commands.
To remove several recorded commands, repeat the removing.
For post processing, export the SCPI command list in a file, see Chapter 11.15, "How
to Convert and Save SCPI Lists", on page 294.
11.11.3 SCPI Recording Export Settings
Scripts are configured and saved in the "SCPI Recording Export" dialog.
This dialog opens automatically, when you stop recording.
1. To access this dialog, select "Show SCPI Recording List" in the context-sensitive
menu.
The "SCPI Recording List" dialog opens.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
288
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
2. Select "Export".
The "SCPI Recording Export" dialog contains all functions required for export of
command lists to a file. It enables you to select the source code format, assign an
individual filename and display the file content.
Format
Selects the source code format for the command list.
"Plain SCPI"
Uses SCPI syntax.
"Predefined Code Generator"
Accesses the predefined templates for common source code generators that convert the recorded settings in the programming languages
MATLAB or NICVI.
"User Code Generator"
Provides the ability to convert a script by a user-specific code generator.
Select Code Template
Opens the standard "File Select" dialog and lists the predefined or user-defined code
templates.
See Chapter 9.5.1, "File Select Settings", on page 201.
File
Opens the standard file select dialog "Select Output File", see Chapter 9.5.1, "File
Select Settings", on page 201.
Export
Executes data export.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
289
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Find Out the SCPI Command Corresponding to the Manual Operation Using the Online Help
Reload
Loads the SCPI list.
File content
Displays the content of the script in the selected format and code template.
11.12 How to Find Out the SCPI Command Corresponding
to the Manual Operation via "Show SCPI Command"
1. To find out the SCPI command of a parameter in manual operation, select the
respective parameter.
2. Open the context-sensitive menu and select "Show SCPI command"
You get the detailed command syntax, including the currently set value.
With the "Copy" function, you can conveniently paste the command including the
current setting e.g. in a command script.
11.13 How to Find Out the SCPI Command Corresponding
to the Manual Operation Using the Online Help
If you are looking for the remote command to a function in manual operation, you find it
in the description of the online help.
1. To find out the SCPI command of a parameter in manual operation, select the
respective parameter.
2. To open the corresponding help topic, select one of the following:
●
In the display, select "context-sensitive menu > Help".
●
On the front panel, press the HELP key.
The help topic opens. Apart from the function description, it contains the SCPI
command in detailed syntax.
How to find the corresponding GUI function to a command
Conversely, if you are looking for a function in the GUI, which belongs to a SCPI, you
find it via a cross-reference in the online help and in the user manual.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
290
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Record / Create SCPI Lists
11.14 How to Record / Create SCPI Lists
How to record SCPI lists automatically
The following example briefly explains how to proceed when you want to record SCPI
lists.
For comprehensive information on this topic, refer to the application note 1GP98: SCPI
Recorder Test Automation on a Fingertip.
1. On the screen, open the context-sensitive menu (touch and hold, or right mouse
click) and select "Start SCPI recording".
Starting from now, all steps you perform are recorded.
2. To stop SCPI recording, select "context-sensitive menu > Stop SCPI recording".
The "SCPI Recording List" dialog opens automatically.
3. Proceed with How to check an SCPI list.
How to record SCPI lists manually
We recommend that you activate the "Mark All Parameters Changed from Preset".
This function facilitates to track the changes.
1. To retrace your settings, open the context-sensitive menu and select "Mark all
Parameters Changed from Preset".
This function identifies all settings you have changed, both in the block diagram,
and in the dialogs.
Changed value are highlighted.
2. To selectively record your steps:
a) Set the parameter.
b) Open the context-sensitive menu.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
291
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Record / Create SCPI Lists
c) Select "Add SCPI Command to Recording List"
Tip: You cannot see "Add SCPI ..." in the menu?
This may happen if you open it outside of a dialog or input field, for example in
block diagram. Open the context-sensitive menu within the corresponding dialog or input field, and the feature is available.
d) Continue with the next setting, and repeat steps a to b whenever needed.
Each time you select "Add SCPI ...", the SCPI command is appended to a temporary list.
3. To check the progress of the recording, select "Context-Sensitive > Show SCPI
Recording List".
The "SCPI Recording List" dialog opens, displaying all recorded settings so far.
4. Proceed with How to check an SCPI list.
How to create a SCPI list with the current instrument settings in one step
You can also generate the appropriate SCPI list to a manually created instrument state
at any time, in only one step.
To generate a SCPI list with commands for all settings performed:
1. Select "Save/Recall > SCPI Export".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
292
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Record / Create SCPI Lists
The instrument opens the standard file select dialog, see Chapter 9.4.1, "Save/
Recall Settings", on page 197.
2. In the "Format" entry field, select the source code.
3. Depending on the selected format, convert the script as described in Chapter 11.15, "How to Convert and Save SCPI Lists", on page 294
4. Enter a filename.
5. Select "Export".
The instrument writes all SCPI commands of the key parameters and the modified
settings in the file. The file extension is automatically assigned according to the
source code format.
6. To preview the content of the SCPI list, select "System Config > Save/Recall":
a) "Operation Mode > SCPI-Export"
b) In the /var/user/ directory, select a previously saved file.
c) Select "Show SCPI List".
The list of all SCPI commands is displayed for example for a final check.
Exporting the SCPI list of the instrument state in one step is a fast and convenient
method. Nevertheless, it usually requires postprocessing on an external PC.
How to check an SCPI list
The easiest way to check a list is to execute it. The generator returns a warning if a
setting could not be performed.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
293
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Convert and Save SCPI Lists
However, we recommend that you check the list and possibly rework. It can be that ...
●
A parameter has not assigned an SCPI command or an element of the user interface has not an assigned parameter. In these cases, :SYST:INF:SCPI 'SCPI
command not available' is entered in the list instead.
Such entries are also detected during execution. The instrument recognizes these
incomplete commands and displays an error message.
●
A preset has been executed, but several standards subsequently perform some
internal settings that are also assigned to the list with "SCPI Export".
●
After a preset still some settings are defined, which are then written to the list generated with "SCPI Export."
Some suggestions on how you can check and revise a list:
1. Search and remove missing command entries.
2. Remove unnecessary content that has been written after a preset.
3. Rearrange the commands to a reasonable order. If you for example set a STATe
command to the last position of a list, you can avoid intermediate calculations of
the signal.
4. Preview the list for completeness by comparing it with the modified settings in the
manual mode.
a) To retrace your settings in manual operation, open the context-sensitive menu
and select "Mark all parameters changed from preset".
The function identifies all settings you have changed, both in the block diagram, and in the dialogs. They appear orange.
b) Check whether there is a command in the list for all modified settings.
5. To perform modifications, export the list to a PC, using for example a USB stick.
11.15 How to Convert and Save SCPI Lists
After completing the recording, the "SCPI Recording Export" dialog opens.
1. Select the "Format" for the command syntax in which you want to save the list.
2. "Select Code Template"
Depending on the selected format, proceed accordingly:
Note: The code template must be selected before exporting.
a) Plain SCPI
Continue with the next step.
b) Predefined code generator
The "SCPI Recording Export - Select Predefined Code Template" dialog
opens.
Select one of the predefined code templates.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
294
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up Remote Operation via VNC
c) User code generator
A file system ("SCPI Recording Export - Select User Code Template") dialog
opens.
Select your user-defined code template. The code template must have file
extension *.expcodetmpl.
3. Select "File..."
The "SCPI Recording Export - Select Output File" dialog opens.
4. Select "New" and assign a filename for saving the recorded list.
5. In the "SCPI Recording Export" dialog, select "Export".
Saves the recorded data either in ASCII format (plain SCPI), or in the corresponding format of the used code template, and shows the SCPI list in the "File Content"
section.
11.16 How to Set Up Remote Operation via VNC
This section shows you some examples of the various possibilities to set up remote
operation.
●
●
Using a desktop system
–
Chapter 11.16.1.1, "Using a Web Browser", on page 295
–
Chapter 11.16.1.2, "Using a VNC Client Software", on page 296
Using a smart device
–
Chapter 11.16.2.1, "Using a VNC App", on page 299
–
Chapter 11.16.2.2, "Using a Web Browser with HTML5", on page 299
–
Chapter 11.16.2.3, "Special Mode QR Code ", on page 300
Enabled direct control
The direct control of the instrument is not disabled and the instrument can be controlled from the front panel and via the remote computer alternately.
11.16.1 Setting Up a Remote Operation from a Desktop System
11.16.1.1
Using a Web Browser
The R&S SMA100B supports remote operation via VNC with any web browser, like
Windows Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox for instance, or alternatively, an HTML5
web browser.
To operate the instrument via a web browser remotely:
1. Install the JRE (Java Runtime Environment) on the remote computer.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
295
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up Remote Operation via VNC
Note: Skip this step if you are working with an HTML5 web browser.
2. Type the instruments' IP address in the address field of the web browser on your
PC, e.g. http://10.113.1.151
The VNC authentication screen appears.
3. Enter the password and confirm with "OK".
The default password is Instrument.
After the connection is established, the current screen of the signal generator is
displayed and the instrument can be remotely operated from the remote computer.
11.16.1.2
Using a VNC Client Software
A VNC client software is an application which can be used to access and control the
instrument from a remote computer through a LAN connection.
The VNC client software for setting up the connection is included in the operating system Linux/Unix per default. For Windows operating systems, a VNC client software
must be installed manually.
Various free-of charge programs such as Ultr@VNC or similar VNC client programs
are available for download on the Internet.
Setting up the VNC connection on a Linux/Unix desktop client
1. Start a web browser on the remote computer and enter the IP address of the
instrument.
2. Enter the following address:
vnc://<IP-address of the instrument>, for example vnc://10.113.1.151.
A dialog opens requesting the password for the remote VNC connection.
3. Enter the password and confirm with "OK".
The default password is Instrument.
After the connection is established, the current screen of the signal generator is
displayed and the instrument can be remotely operated from the remote computer.
Setting up the VNC connection on a Windows desktop client
1. Install the VNC viewer program component on the remote computer.
a) On the Internet, select a VNC client program and download it onto your PC.
For example the free of charge software Ultr@VNC (vncviewer.exe is available, see http://www.uvnc.com/download/index.html.
b) Execute the VNC client installation.
c) Select the VNC viewer program component and follow the installation instructions.
2. Start VNC viewer program component on the PC.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
296
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up Remote Operation via VNC
3. Select "VNC Server" and enter the IP address of the instrument.
4. To initialize the connection, select "Connect".
A dialog opens requesting the password.
5. Enter the password and confirm with "OK".
The default password is Instrument.
After the connection is established, the current screen of the signal generator is
displayed and the instrument can be remotely operated from the remote computer.
Terminating VNC connection
► Perform one of the following:
a) On an external Unix/Linux PC, close the Internet browser or close the signal
generator window.
b) On an external Windows PC, close the VNC viewer program.
The connection is terminated but not disabled. It can be established again any
time.
In the "Active Connections" tab, the displayed TCP/IP connection disappears.
Consider, however, the note concerning unauthorized access due to VNC connection ("Risk of unauthorized access" on page 245).
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
297
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up Remote Operation via VNC
11.16.2 Setting Up a Remote Operation from a Smart Device
The R&S SMA100B supports remote operation via VNC from a smart device (remote
client), like a tablet (tablet computer) or a smartphone. The smart device accesses the
instrument via WLAN, either by a suitable App, or an HTML5 web browser, that means
with embedded javascript.
There are several possibilities to establish a WLAN connection between the smart
device and the R&S SMA100B, which are, however, not all described here. This section gives an example of how a network environment can be built up, and some essential configuration steps.
For comprehensive information on this topic refer to the application notes:
●
1MA216: Remote Operation of Windows Based Instruments with Apple iPad
●
7BM82: Apple iPad Remote Control of Broadcasting T&M Instruments
Example:
Figure 11-7: Example of a network configuration for remote operation with a smart device
As shown in the figure, the R&S SMA100B and the WLAN router are connected to the
LAN router. The smart device accesses the Rohde & Schwarz instrument via the
WLAN router.
Prerequisites
For this network configuration, the following prerequisites must be met:
●
●
The required equipment is:
–
A LAN router
–
A WLAN router (hot spot)
Required for accessing the R&S SMA100B
The smart device must be known and accepted in the network of the
R&S SMA100B.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
298
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up Remote Operation via VNC
●
The App or web browser implements the VNC functionality on the smart device for
remote operation.
It is recommended that all components in the network use DHCP, which automatically
assigns the relevant address information.
With the configuration in the example, you can reach the instrument from a great distance, since the WLAN router acts as an additional access point.
11.16.2.1
Using a VNC App
Using a VNC App enables the smart device to access the R&S SMA100B via WLAN.
The VNC Apps are available from various manufacturers of the smart devices. The list
of supported devices is different according to the smart device. Refer to the manufacturer's website to find out whether a VNC App is available for your device, and how it is
installed.
1. In the network, establish the connection of the WLAN router to the LAN router.
We assume that the LAN router and the R&S SMA100B are connected and configured in the LAN.
2. Configure the WLAN router according to the manufacturer's instructions.
3. Install the required VNC App on your smart device.
4. On the smart device, start the VNC App.
5. In the address field, enter the IP address of the instrument.
Tip: The R&S SMA100B indicates IP address on the screen.
A log-on dialog opens and requests the password for the VNC connection.
The default user name and password is instrument.
Tip: Default password. Remote access via VNC uses the user name "instrument"
with default user password "instrument".
Note: We recommend that you change the default password before connecting the
instrument to a network.
See Chapter 10.4.4, "Password Management", on page 239.
6. Enter the password to establish the remote access.
After the connection is established, the current screen of the signal generator is
displayed and the instrument can be remotely operated.
11.16.2.2
Using a Web Browser with HTML5
The R&S SMA100B supports remote operation from a smart device via VNC with any
HTML5 compliant web browser, like Internet Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome, or
Safari for instance.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
299
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
How to Set Up Remote Operation via VNC
To operate the instrument remotely via a web browser, proceed as follows:
1. In the web browser enter the IP address of the instrument, e.g. http://10.113.1.151.
2. Type the instrument IP address in the address field of the web browser on your
PC, e.g. http://10.113.1.151
Tip: The R&S SMA100B indicates IP address on the screen.
The VNC authentication screen appears.
3. Enter the password and confirm with "OK".
The default password is instrument.
After the connection is established, the current screen of the signal generator is
displayed and the instrument can be remotely operated.
11.16.2.3
Special Mode QR Code
If your smart device is equipped with a camera and a QR code reader, you can scan
the instrument's IP address or access the instrument with the Safari web browser.
QR code readers are available from various manufacturers of the smart devices. The
list of supported devices is different according to the smart device. Refer to the manufacturer's website to find out whether a reader is available for your device, and how it is
installed.
1. Install the required QR code reader software on your device.
2. Start the reader.
3. On the R&S SMA100B, select "System Config > Remote Access".
4. In the "Remote Access" dialog, select the "QR-Code" tab.
5. Scan the QR code of the instrument with your smart device.
6. On the device, decode the scanned QR code and pass it to the web browser.
A dialog opens requesting the password for the VNC connection.
7. Enter the password and confirm with "OK".
The default password is instrument.
After the connection is established, the current screen of the signal generator is
displayed and the instrument can be remotely operated.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
300
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
References
11.17 References
11.17.1 LXI Functionality
LAN Extensions for Instrumentation (LXI) is an instrumentation platform for measuring
instruments and test systems that is based on standard Ethernet technology. LXI is
intended to be the LAN-based successor to GPIB, combining the advantages of Ethernet with the simplicity and familiarity of GPIB.
Like GPIB, LXI determines and standardizes the way the instrument behaves in a LAN.
The LXI implementation in the R&S SMA100B allows you to change certain LAN settings, to reset the LAN connection, and to identify the instrument.
For information about the LXI standard, refer to the LXI website at http://www.lxistandard.org.
See also "News from Rohde & Schwarz, article 2006/II - 190".
The LXI functionality in the R&S SMA100B is characterized by a common LAN implementation, including an ICMP ping responder for diagnostics. The instrument can be
configured via a web browser. A LAN Configuration Initialize (LCI) mechanism resets
the LAN configuration. The instrument also supports automatic detection in a LAN via
the VXI-11 discovery protocol and programming by means of IVI drivers.
In addition the R&S SMA100B provides the following LXI-related functionality:
●
Integrated "LXI Status" dialog for LXI status indication and reset of the LAN configuration, seeChapter 11.5.1, "LXI Status Settings", on page 265.
●
"LXI Browser Interface", as described in Chapter 11.5.2.1, "LAN Configuration",
on page 267.
●
"SCPI Remote Trace" utility, see "SCPI Remote Trace" on page 270.
Firmware update
To enable the full LXI functionality after a firmware update, shut down and restart the
instrument.
11.17.2 Code Generator Templates
This section describes the main structure of the code generator templates, and shows
the method by means of the NICVI template.
The code generation is controlled by templates with the following blocks:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
301
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
References
Command
Function
#EXTENSION_START
Defines the output file extension.
#EXTENSION_END
#INIT_CODE_START
#INIT_CODE_END
Contains initial entries, such as included files and
libraries, buffer size, commands for synchronization,
or creating a VISA session.
All entries between start and end are written once at
the beginning of the output file.
#COMMAND_CODE_START
#COMMAND_CODE_END
#NO_COMMAND_CODE_START
Frame for an SCPI command. A command is
accessed with %COMMAND.
#NO_COMMAND_CODE_END
Frame for a parameter with no SCPI command
available. A parameter is accessed with
%PARAMETER.
#EXIT_CODE_START
Closes the visa session.
#EXIT_CODE_END
All entries between start and end are written once at
the end of the output file.
Templates are created in ASCII format with file extension *.expcodetempl.
Example:
Example to the code generator template NICVI.expcodetmpl:
#EXTENSION_START
.c
#EXTENSION_END
#INIT_CODE_START
#include <ansi_c.h>
#include <visa.h>
#include <cvirte.h>
#define MAX_BUFFER_SIZE 200
static ViStatus status;
static ViSession defaultRM, handle;
static void write_command(char *command)
{
char writeBuffer[MAX_BUFFER_SIZE];
char readBuffer[MAX_BUFFER_SIZE];
int length;
int readCount;
strcpy(writeBuffer, command);
//append "*OPC?" to sync
strcat(writeBuffer, ";*OPC?");
length = strlen (writeBuffer);
writeBuffer[length]='\n';
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
302
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
References
length = length+1;
viWrite (handle, writeBuffer, length, VI_NULL);
//read result
viRead(handle, readBuffer, 100, &readCount);
}
int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
if (InitCVIRTE (0, argv, 0) == 0)
return -1;
/* out of memory */
//create a VISA session and return a handle to it
viOpenDefaultRM (&defaultRM);
//create a VISA session to the serial port and return a handle to it
viOpen (defaultRM, (ViRsrc)"TCPIP::localhost::INSTR", VI_NULL, VI_NULL,
&handle);
#INIT_CODE_END
#COMMAND_CODE_START
write_command("%COMMAND");
#COMMAND_CODE_END
#NO_COMMAND_CODE_START
//no SCPI command available for parameter %PARAMETER !
#NO_COMMAND_CODE_END
#EXIT_CODE_START
viClose (handle);
viClose (defaultRM);
return 0;
}
#EXIT_CODE_END
11.17.3 Remote Control States
How to I recognize if there is an active remote connection to the instrument?
► Observe the indication on the taskbar.
A softkey in the taskbar indicates if and what kind of remote connections are currently set up.
See also Chapter 11.4.6, "Active Connections Settings", on page 263.
The following table shows the different remote control states and the associated commands or actions to return to manual control.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
303
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control
References
Table 11-3: Remote control status icons
GUI symbol
Transition to remote control state...
Transition to manual operation...(local state)
&GTR (controller)
●
●
●
Remote control, but usable front panel keys.
The parameters are in read-only mode.
&GTL (controller)
Tap the "Remote" icon (display)
LOCAL (front panel or key emulation)
A currently performed setting is indicated by the green
arrows.
The setting must be completed (white arrows), otherwise the instrument remains in remote state.
&LLO (controller)
Remote control with locked front panel keys to
prevent user interaction.
●
●
&LOCS (controller)
CALL IBLOC (generator%) (controller)
Note: The command &REMS returns to "Remote" state.
The parameters are in read-only mode.
You can unlock LLO, and thus return to manual
operation only via remote control.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
304
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
Conventions used in SCPI Command Descriptions
12 Remote Control Commands
In the following, all remote-control commands are presented in detail with their parameters and the ranges of numerical values.
For an introduction to remote control and the status registers, refer to:
●
Chapter 11, "Network Operation and Remote Control", on page 244
●
Chapter A.1, "Additional Basics on Remote Control", on page 508
12.1 Conventions used in SCPI Command Descriptions
Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions:
●
Command usage
If not specified otherwise, commands can be used both for setting and for querying
parameters.
If a command can be used for setting or querying only, or if it initiates an event, the
usage is stated explicitly.
●
Parameter usage
If not specified otherwise, a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the
result of a query.
Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters.
Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters.
Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return
values.
●
Conformity
Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI confirmed. All commands used by the R&S SMA100B follow the SCPI syntax rules.
●
Asynchronous commands
A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing (overlapping command) is indicated as an Asynchronous
command.
●
Reset values (*RST)
Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument (*RST
command) are indicated as *RST values, if available.
●
Factory preset values
Default parameter values that are reset only by factory preset.
●
Default unit
This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parameter.
●
Manual operation
If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation, a link
to the description is inserted.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
305
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
Common Commands
12.2 Programming Examples
The corresponding sections of the same title provide simple programming examples for
the R&S SMA100B. The purpose of the examples is to present all commands for a
given task. In real applications, one would rather reduce the examples to an appropriate subset of commands.
The programming examples have been tested with a software tool which provides an
environment for the development and execution of remote tests. To keep the examples
as simple as possible, only the "clean" SCPI syntax elements are reported. Non-executable command lines (for example comments) start with two // characters.
At the beginning of the most remote control program, an instrument (p)reset is recommended to set the R&S SMA100B to a definite state. The commands *RST and
SYSTem:PRESet are equivalent for this purpose. *CLS also resets the status registers
and clears the output buffer.
In all the examples we assume that:
●
A remote PC is connected to the instrument
●
The remote PC and the instrument are switched on
●
A connection between them is established
●
The security setting "System Config > Setup > Security > SCPI over LAN" is
enabled.
12.3 Common Commands
Common commands are described in the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. These
commands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devices. The headers of these commands consist of "*" followed by three letters. Many
common commands are related to the Status Reporting System.
Available common commands:
*CLS.............................................................................................................................307
*ESE.............................................................................................................................307
*ESR?...........................................................................................................................307
*IDN?............................................................................................................................307
*IST?............................................................................................................................ 308
*OPC............................................................................................................................ 308
*OPT?...........................................................................................................................308
*PRE............................................................................................................................ 308
*PSC............................................................................................................................ 308
*RCL.............................................................................................................................309
*RST.............................................................................................................................309
*SAV.............................................................................................................................309
*SRE............................................................................................................................ 310
*STB?...........................................................................................................................310
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
306
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
Common Commands
*TRG............................................................................................................................ 310
*TST?........................................................................................................................... 310
*WAI.............................................................................................................................310
*CLS
Clear status
Sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt part of
the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero. The command does not
alter the mask and transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer.
Usage:
Setting only
*ESE <Value>
Event status enable
Sets the event status enable register to the specified value. The query returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form.
Parameters:
<Value>
Range:
0 to 255
*ESR?
Event status read
Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and subsequently
sets the register to zero.
Return values:
<Contents>
Range:
Usage:
Query only
0 to 255
*IDN?
Identification
Returns the instrument identification.
Return values:
<ID>
"Rohde&Schwarz,<device type>,<part number>/<serial number>,<firmware version>"
Example:
Rohde&Schwarz,SMA100B,1419.8888K02/0,4.00.033
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "IDN String" on page 262
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
307
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
Common Commands
*IST?
Individual status query
Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form. The IST flag is the status bit
which is sent during a parallel poll.
Return values:
<ISTflag>
0|1
Usage:
Query only
*OPC
Operation complete
Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been executed. This bit can be used to initiate a service request. The query form writes a "1" into
the output buffer as soon as all preceding commands have been executed. This is
used for command synchronization.
*OPT?
Option identification query
Queries the options included in the instrument. For a list of all available options and
their description refer to the data sheet.
Return values:
<Options>
The query returns a list of options. The options are returned at
fixed positions in a comma-separated string. A zero is returned
for options that are not installed.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "OPT String" on page 263
*PRE <Value>
Parallel poll register enable
Sets parallel poll enable register to the indicated value. The query returns the contents
of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form.
Parameters:
<Value>
Range:
0 to 255
*PSC <Action>
Power on status clear
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
308
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
Common Commands
Determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers are preserved or reset when
the instrument is switched on. Thus a service request can be triggered when the instrument is switched on, if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured. The
query reads out the contents of the "power-on-status-clear" flag.
Parameters:
<Action>
0|1
0
The contents of the status registers are preserved.
1
Resets the status registers.
*RCL <Number>
Recall
Loads the instrument settings from an intermediate memory identified by the specified
number. The instrument settings can be stored to this memory using the command
*SAV with the associated number.
It also activates the instrument settings which are stored in a file and loaded using the
MMEMory:LOAD <number>, <file_name.extension> command.
Manual operation:
See "Recall Immediate x" on page 200
*RST
Reset
Sets the instrument to a defined default status. The default settings are indicated in the
description of commands.
The command is equivalent to SYSTem:PRESet.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "Preset" on page 193
*SAV <Number>
Save
Stores the current instrument settings under the specified number in an intermediate
memory. The settings can be recalled using the command *RCL with the associated
number.
To transfer the stored instrument settings in a file, use the command :MMEMory:
STORe:STATe.
Manual operation:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
See "Save Immediate x" on page 199
309
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
Common Commands
*SRE <Contents>
Service request enable
Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value. This command determines under which conditions a service request is triggered.
Parameters:
<Contents>
Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form.
Bit 6 (MSS mask bit) is always 0.
Range:
0 to 255
*STB?
Status byte query
Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form.
Usage:
Query only
*TRG
Trigger
Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event. In particular, *TRG generates a manual
trigger signal. This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger
subsystem.
Usage:
Event
*TST?
Self-test query
Initiates self-tests of the instrument and returns an error code
Return values:
<ErrorCode>
integer > 0 (in decimal format)
An error occurred.
(For details see the Service Manual supplied with the instrument).
0
No errors occurred.
Usage:
Query only
*WAI
Wait to continue
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
310
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
Preset Commands
Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have
been executed and all signals have settled (see also command synchronization and
*OPC).
Usage:
Event
12.4 Preset Commands
The preset commands are not bundled in one subsystem. Therefore, they are listed
separately in this section. In addition, a specific preset command is provided for each
digital standard and for the fader. These specific commands are described in the associated subsystems.
Four presetting actions are available:
●
Activating the default state of all internal instrument functions (*RST on page 309).
Functions that concern the integration of the instrument into a measurement setup
are not changed, e.g. GPIB address or reference oscillator source settings.
●
Activating the preset state of the parameters related to the selected signal path (:
SOURce<hw>:PRESet on page 311)
●
Activating the preset state of all parameters that are not related to the signal path
(:DEVice:PRESet on page 311)
●
Activating the original state of delivery (factory reset, :SYSTem:FPReset
on page 312). Only functions that are protected by a password remain unchanged
as well as the passwords themselves.
:DEVice:PRESet............................................................................................................ 311
:SOURce<hw>:PRESet.................................................................................................. 311
:SYSTem:PRESet.......................................................................................................... 312
:SYSTem:FPReset.........................................................................................................312
:DEVice:PRESet
Presets all parameters which are not related to the signal path, including the LF generator.
Example:
DEV:PRES
Presets all instruments settings that are not related to the signal
path.
Usage:
Event
:SOURce<hw>:PRESet
Presets all parameters which are related to the selected signal path.
Example:
SOUR:PRES
Presets all settings that are related to signal path
Usage:
Event
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
311
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
:SYSTem:PRESet
Triggers an instrument reset. It has the same effect as:
●
The PRESET key
●
The *RST command
For an overview of the settings affected by the preset function, see Table 9-1
Example:
SYST:PRES
All instrument settings (also the settings that are not currently
active) are reset to their default values.
Usage:
Setting only
:SYSTem:FPReset
Triggers an instrument reset to the original state of delivery.
Example:
SYST:FPR
All instrument settings (also the settings that are not currently
active) are reset to the factory values.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Execute Factory Preset" on page 193
12.5 MMEMory Subsystem
The MMEMory subsystem (Mass MEMory) contains the commands for managing files
and directories as well as for loading and storing complete instrument settings in files.
Mass storage location
Without any additional measures, the R&S SMA100B stores user files on the internal
memory, or if selected, on a memory stick.
Both, the user directory /var/user on the internal memory or the /var/usb directory, can be used to preserve user-defined data. Any directory structure can be created.
The /var/volatile directory serves as a RAM drive and can be used to protect
sensitive information. The data is available temporarily.
If option R&S SMAB-B85 is installed, the R&S SMA100B maps the user directory to
the removable memory. If a memory is mounted, user data is saved there. Otherwise
user data is redirected to the volatile memory.
Default storage location
The R&S SMA100B stores user data in the user directory.
Depending on the installed options, the user directory is physically located on the internal memory or on the Removable memory.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
312
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
In the file system, user directory is always indicated as /var/user.
In manual control, you access this directory via the "File Manager", see Chapter 9.8,
"Using the File Manager", on page 204. In remote control, you can query it with the
command :SYSTem:MMEMory:PATH:USER?.
To query and change the default directory used for mass storage, use the command :
MMEMory:CDIRectory.
12.5.1 File Naming Conventions
To enable files to be used in different file systems, consider the following file naming
conventions:
●
The filename can be of any length and is case-sensitive, i.e it is distinguished
between uppercase and lowercase letters.
●
All letters and numbers are permitted (numbers are, however, not permitted at the
beginning of the filename).
●
Avoid using special characters.
●
Do not use slashes "\" and "/". These symbols are used in file paths.
●
Avoid using the following filenames: CLOCK$, CON, COM1 to COM4,
LPT1 to LPT3, NUL or PRN
They are reserved by the operating system.
File extension
The file and the optional file extension are separated by a period sign. The
R&S SMA100B distinguishes the files according to their extensions; each type of file is
assigned a specific file content and hence a specific file extension. Refer to Chapter C,
"Extensions for User Files", on page 537 for an overview of the supported file extensions.
Wildcards
The two characters "*" and "?" function as "wildcards", i.e. they are used for selecting
several files. The "?" character represents exactly one character, while the "*" character represents all characters up to the end of the filename. "*.*" therefore represents all
files in a directory.
Filename and file path
When used in remote control commands, the parameter <filename> is specified as a
string parameter with quotation marks. It can contain either the complete path including
the root user directory /var/user and filename, or only the filename. The filename
must include the file extension. The same applies for the directory /var/volatile
and for the parameters <directory_name> and <path>.
Depending on how much information is provided, the values specified in the parameter
or with the command MMEM:CDIR are used for the path and drive setting in the commands.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
313
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
12.5.2 Accessing Files in the Default or in a Specified Directory
For better overview and easy file handling, you may not save all user files in the user
directory /var/user but rater organize them into subdirectories.
The command syntax defines two general ways to access files with user data in a specific directory:
●
Change the current default directory for mass memory storage and then directly
access the files in this default directory, like stored list files, files with user data or
save/recall files.
The subsequent commands for file handling (select, delete, read out files in the
directory, etc.) require only specification of the filename. File extension can be
omitted; after syntax evaluation of the used command, the R&S SMA100B filters
out the relevant files.
●
Define the absolute file path, including the user directory /var/user, created
subdirectories and filename (see Example "Load file with user data from a specific
directory" on page 314).
As a rule, whenever an absolute file path is determined, it overwrites a previously
specified default directory.
The following example explains this rule as a principle. Exceptions of this general rule
are stated in the description of the corresponding command. The Chapter 12.5.3, "Programming Examples", on page 315 explains the general working principle with the
commands for mass memory storage.
The same rule applies to the /var/volatile directory, see Example "Working with
files in the volatile memory" on page 316.
Example: Load file with user data from a specific directory
This example shows the principle of file handling in remote environment by using list
commands. Working with the files of other subsystems is analogical. We assume that
the directory /var/user/my_files is existing and contains the files
list_test.lsw and list_2.lsw.
//Query files in the user diectory
SOURce1:LIST:CATalog?
// // no files
// Set the default directory
MMEMory:CDIRectory "/var/user/my_files"
SOURce1:LIST:CATalog?
// "list_test","list_2"
// Specify the complete path to select a list file (*.lsw)
// in the specific directory
SOURce1:LIST:SELect "/var/user/my_files/list_test"
SOURce1:LIST:DELete "/var/user/my_files/list_2"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
314
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
12.5.3 Programming Examples
Example: Storing and loading current settings
This example shows two ways of how to store the current instrument setting in the file
settings.savrcltxt in the directory /var/user/savrcl.
Before the instrument settings can be stored in a file, they have to be stored in an intermediate memory using common command *SAV <number>. The specified number is
then used in the :MMEMory:STORe:STATe command.
Also, after loading a file with instrument settings with command :MMEMory:LOAD:
STATe, these settings have to be activated with the common command *RCL
<number>.
// Store the current settings in an intermediate memory with number 4
*SAV 4
// store the settings in a file in a specific directory;
// the complete path has to be specyfied
MMEMory:STORe:STATe 4,"/var/user/savrcl/settings.savrcltxt"
// store the settings in a file in the default directory;
// set the default directory; specify only the file name
MMEMory:CDIRectory
"/var/user/savrcl"
*SAV 4
MMEMory:STORe:STATe 4,"settings.savrcltxt"
// Load the stored settings in the intermediate memory 4 and activate them
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 4,"/var/user/settings.savrcltxt"
*RCL 4
Example: Working with files and directories
This example shows how to list files in a directory, list the subdirectories, query the
number of files in a directory, create directory, rename and delete files.
// Query the current default directory for mass storage,
// change the directory to the default user directory "/var/user"
// and read out the files in it
MMEMory:CDIRectory?
// "/var/user/temp"
MMEMory:CDIRectory
MMEMory:CDIRectory?
// "/var/user/"
MMEMory:CATalog?
// 1282630,8102817792,".,DIR,4096","..,DIR,4096","Log,DIR,4096",
// "settings.savrcltxt,BIN,16949","temp,DIR,4096","test,DIR,4096",
// "list.lsw,BIN,1245201"
// the directory "/var/user" contains the predefined directory "Log",
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
315
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
// the subdirectories "test" and "temp"
// as well as the files "settings.savrcltxt" and "list.lsw"
// query only the subdirectories of the current or specified directory
MMEMory:DCATalog? "/var/user"
// ".","..","Log","temp","test"
// query only number of subdirectories in the current or specified directory
MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth? "/var/user"
// 5
// query number of files in the current or specified directory
MMEMory:CATalog:LENGth? "/var/user"
// 7
// Create a new directory for mass memory storage in the specified directory
MMEMory:MDIRectory "/var/user/new"
// Copy the file "settings.savrcltxt" into the new directory
MMEMory:COPY "/var/user/settings.savrcltxt","/var/user/new/settings.savrcltxt"
// Rename the file "settings.savrcltxt" into the new directory
// and read out the files in this specific directory
MMEMory:CDIRectory
"/var/user/new"
MMEMory:MOVE "settings.savrcltxt","settings_new.savrcltxt"
MMEMory:CATalog? "/var/user/new"
// 25141,8102789120,".,DIR,4096","..,DIR,4096","settings_new.savrcltxt,BIN,16949"
// Delete the "test" directory
MMEMory:RDIRectory "/var/user/test"
Example: Working with files in the volatile memory
This example shows how to work with files in the /var/volatile directory.
// Change the default directory for mass storage,
// read out the files, load and play a file with the ARB
MMEMory:CDIRectory "/var/volatile"
MMEMory:CDIRectory?
// "/var/volatile"
MMEMory:CATalog?
//13928,525352960,".,DIR,60","..,DIR,4096","list.lst,BIN,9772"
:SOURce1:LIST:SELect "/var/volatile/list"
:SOURce1:FREQuency:MODE LIST
:OUTPut1:STATe 1
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
316
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
12.5.4 Remote Control Commands
:MMEMory:CATalog?..................................................................................................... 317
:MMEMory:CATalog:LENGth?.........................................................................................317
:MMEMory:CDIRectory................................................................................................... 318
:MMEMory:COPY...........................................................................................................318
:MMEMory:DATA........................................................................................................... 319
:MMEMory:DCATalog?................................................................................................... 319
:MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth?.......................................................................................320
:MMEMory:DELete.........................................................................................................320
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe................................................................................................320
:MMEMory:MDIRectory...................................................................................................320
:MMEMory:MOVE.......................................................................................................... 321
:MMEMory:MSIS............................................................................................................321
:MMEMory:RDIRectory................................................................................................... 321
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe..............................................................................................321
:MEMory:HFRee?.......................................................................................................... 322
:MMEMory:CATalog? <path>
Returns the content of a particular directory.
Query parameters:
<path>
string
String parameter to specify the directory.
If you leave out the path, the command returns the contents of
the directory selected with :MMEMory:CDIRectory.
The path may be relative or absolute.
Return values:
<UsedDiskSpace>
Byte size of all files in the directory.
<FreeDiskSpace>
Remaining disk space in bytes.
<FileInfo>
<NameFileN>,<SuffixFileN>,<SizeFileN>
List of files, separated by commas
<NameFileN>
Name of the file.
<SuffixFileN>
Type of the file. Possible suffixes are: ASCii, BINary, DIRectory
<SizeFileN>
Size of the file in bytes.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Directory, File List and Filename" on page 198
:MMEMory:CATalog:LENGth? <Path>
Returns the number of files in the current or in the specified directory.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
317
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
Query parameters:
<Path>
string
String parameter to specify the directory. If the directory is omitted, the command queries the content of the current directory,
queried with :MMEMory:CDIRectory command.
Return values:
<FileCount>
integer
Number of files.
Usage:
Query only
:MMEMory:CDIRectory <Directory>
Changes the default directory for mass memory storage. The directory is used for all
subsequent MMEM commands if no path is specified with them.
Parameters:
<Directory>
<directory_name>
String containing the path to another directory. The path can be
relative or absolute.
To change to a higher directory, use two dots '..' .
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation:
See "Directory, File List and Filename" on page 198
:MMEMory:COPY <SourceFile>[,<DestinationFile>]
Copies an existing file to a new file. Instead of just a file, this command can also be
used to copy a complete directory together with all its files.
Setting parameters:
<SourceFile>
string
String containing the path and file name of the source file
<DestinationFile>
string
String containing the path and name of the target file. The path
can be relative or absolute.
If <DestinationFile> is not specified, the <SourceFile> is
copied to the current directory, queried with the :MMEMory:
CDIRectory command.
Note: Existing files with the same name in the destination directory are overwritten without an error message.
Usage:
Setting only
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation:
See "Cut, Copy&Paste and Delete" on page 206
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
318
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
:MMEMory:DATA <Filename>, <BinaryBlock>
:MMEMory:DATA? <Filename>
The setting command writes the block data <BinaryBlock> to the file identified by
<Filename>.
Tip: Use this command to read/transfer stored instrument settings or waveforms
directly from/to the instrument.
Parameters:
<BinaryBlock>
#<number><length_entry><data>
#: Hash sign; always comes first in the binary block
<number>: the first digit indicates how many digits the subsequent length entry has
<length_entry>: indicates the number of subsequent bytes
<data>: binary block data for the specified length.
For files with a size with more than nine digits (gigabytes), the
instrument allows the syntax #(<Length>), where <Length>
is the file size in decimal format.
Parameters for setting and query:
<Filename>
string
String parameter to specify the name of the file.
Example:
MMEMory:DATA '/var/user/test.txt',#15hallo
Writes the block data to the file test.txt.
The digit 1 indicates a length entry of one digit; the digit 5 indicate a length of the binary data (hallo) in bytes.
MMEMory:DATA? '/var/user/test.txt'
Sends the data of the file test.txt from the instrument to the
controller in the form of a binary block.
Response: #15hallo
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
:MMEMory:DCATalog? <path>
Returns the subdirectories of a particular directory.
Query parameters:
<path>
Return values:
<Catalog>
String parameter to specify the directory. If the directory is omitted, the command queries the content of the current directory,
queried with :MMEMory:CDIRectory command.
<file_entry>
Names of the subdirectories separated by colons. The first two
strings are related to the parent directory.
Usage:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
Query only
319
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
:MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth? [<Path>]
Returns the number of subdirectories in the current or specified directory.
Query parameters:
<Path>
Return values:
<DirectoryCount>
String parameter to specify the directory. If the directory is omitted, the command queries the contents of the current directory,
to be queried with :MMEMory:CDIRectory command.
integer
Number of parent and subdirectories.
Usage:
Query only
:MMEMory:DELete <Filename>
Removes a file from the specified directory.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
String parameter to specify the name and directory of the file to
be removed.
Usage:
Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation:
See "Cut, Copy&Paste and Delete" on page 206
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe <SavRclStateNumb>, <file_name>
Loads the specified file stored under the specified name in an internal memory.
After the file has been loaded, the instrument setting must be activated using an *RCL
command.
Setting parameters:
<SavRclStateNumb> Determines to the specific <number> to be used with the *RCL
command, e.g. *RCL 4.
<file_name>
String parameter to specify the file name with extension
*.savrcltxt.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "Recall" on page 199
:MMEMory:MDIRectory <Directory>
Creates a subdirectory for mass memory storage in the specified directory. If no directory is specified, a subdirectory is created in the default directory. This command can
also be used to create a directory tree.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
320
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
Setting parameters:
<Directory>
string
String parameter to specify the new directory.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Create New Directory" on page 206
:MMEMory:MOVE <SourceFile>, <DestinationFile>
Moves an existing file to a new location or, if no path is specified, renames an existing
file.
Setting parameters:
<SourceFile>
string
String parameter to specify the name of the file to be moved.
<DestinationFile>
string
String parameters to specify the name of the new file.
Usage:
Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation:
See "Rename " on page 206
:MMEMory:MSIS <Msis>
Defines the drive or network resource (in the case of networks) for instruments with
windows operating system, using msis (MSIS = Mass Storage Identification String).
Note: Instruments with Linux operating system ignore this command, since Linux does
not use drive letter assignment.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
:MMEMory:RDIRectory <Directory>
Removes an existing directory from the mass memory storage system. If no directory
is specified, the subdirectory with the specified name is deleted in the default directory.
Setting parameters:
<Directory>
string
String parameter to specify the directory to be deleted.
Usage:
Event
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe <savrcl_state_nr>, <file_name>
Stores the current instrument setting in the specified file.
The instrument setting must first be stored in an internal memory with the same number using the common command *SAV.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
321
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
CALibration Subsystem
Setting parameters:
<savrcl_state_nr>
Corresponds to the specific <number> defined with the *SAV
command, e.g. *SAV 4.
<file_name>
String parameter to specify the file name with extension
*.savrcltxt.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Save" on page 199
:MEMory:HFRee?
Returns the used and available memory in Kb.
Return values:
<TotalPhysMemKb> integer
Total physical memory.
<ApplicMemKb>
integer
Application memory.
<HeapUsedKb>
integer
Used heap memory.
<HeapAvailableKb>
integer
Available heap memory.
Usage:
Query only
12.6 CALibration Subsystem
The CALibration subsystem contains the commands needed for performing internal
adjustments. This procedure is triggered by the query commands.
Suffix <hw>
Suffix
Value range
Description
CALibration<hw>
[1]
Optional suffix
Understanding the query response
●
0: error-free execution of the adjustments
●
1: indicates that an error occurred; the process has been canceled
:CALibration:ALL[:MEASure]?......................................................................................... 323
:CALibration:DATA:FACTory:DATE?................................................................................323
:CALibration:ROSCillator[:DATA]..................................................................................... 324
:CALibration<hw>:CONTinueonerror................................................................................324
:CALibration:CSYNthesis[:MEASure]?..............................................................................324
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
322
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
CALibration Subsystem
:CALibration:LEVel:BWIDth.............................................................................................324
:CALibration:LFOutput[:MEASure]?..................................................................................325
:CALibration<hw>:ALL:DATE?........................................................................................ 325
:CALibration<hw>:ALL:TEMP?........................................................................................ 325
:CALibration<hw>:DEBug............................................................................................... 325
:CALibration<hw>:FMOFfset[:MEASure]?.........................................................................326
:CALibration<hw>:FREQuency[:MEASure]?......................................................................326
:CALibration<hw>:LEVel:EXTern:DATA............................................................................326
:CALibration<hw>:LEVel:EXTern:EXEC........................................................................... 327
:CALibration<hw>:LEVel:STATe...................................................................................... 327
:CALibration<hw>:LEVel[:MEASure]?...............................................................................327
:CALibration:ALL[:MEASure]? [<Force>]
Starts all internal adjustments that do not need external measuring equipment.
NOTICE: Risk of DUT damage
During level adjustments, the instrument temporarily applies high power at the RF output. This high power can destroy a connected DUT.
Do not start level adjustments if DUT is connected. Disconnect the DUT and replace it
by a terminating resistor with adequate power rating. We recommend that you use a
50 Ohm, 10 W or larger terminating resistor.
Query parameters:
<Force>
string
Return values:
<Measure>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example:
CAL:ALL:MEAS?
//"0"
// Executes the adjustments of all instrument functions.
// When completed, it indicates that the adjustment
// has been performed successfully.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Adjust All" on page 495
:CALibration:DATA:FACTory:DATE?
Queries the date of the last factory calibration.
Return values:
<Date>
string
Example:
CAL:DATA:FACT:DATE?
// "2016-01-01"
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Last Factory Calibration" on page 499
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
323
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
CALibration Subsystem
:CALibration:ROSCillator[:DATA] <Data>
Sets a user-defined calibration value for the internal reference frequency.
Parameters:
<Data>
integer
Range:
*RST:
Example:
0 to INT_MAX
0
See [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[:
STATe] on page 447.
:CALibration<hw>:CONTinueonerror <State>
Continues the calibration even though an error was detected. By default adjustments
are aborted on error.
Suffix:
<hw>
Parameters:
<State>
.
[1]
Optional suffix
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
CAL:CONT ON
// Continues calibration after an error
Manual operation:
See "Continue Adjustment on Error" on page 496
:CALibration:CSYNthesis[:MEASure]?
Starts all adjustments which affect the clock synthesis.
Return values:
<Measure>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example:
CALibration:CSYNthesis:MEASure?
// starts adjustment
// 0
// Adjustment successful
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S SMAB-B29
:CALibration:LEVel:BWIDth <Bandwidth>
Parameters:
<Bandwidth>
LOW | HIGH | AUTO
*RST:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
AUTO
324
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
CALibration Subsystem
:CALibration:LFOutput[:MEASure]?
Performs all adjustments which affect the internal modulation generator.
Return values:
<Measure>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example:
CAL:LFO?
// 0
// the adjustments have been performed successfully
Usage:
Query only
:CALibration<hw>:ALL:DATE?
Queries the date of the most recently executed full adjustment.
Suffix:
<hw>
.
[1]
Optional suffix
Return values:
<Date>
string
Example:
CAL:ALL:DATE?
// "2016-01-01"
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Last Full Adjustment" on page 496
:CALibration<hw>:ALL:TEMP?
Queries the temperature deviation compared to the calibration temperature.
Suffix:
<hw>
.
[1]
Optional suffix
Return values:
<Temperature>
string
Example:
CALibration:ALL:TEMP?
// "+39.00 K"
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Temperature Offset To Last Full Adjustment" on page 496
:CALibration<hw>:DEBug <State>
Activates logging of the internal adjustments.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
325
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
CALibration Subsystem
Suffix:
<hw>
.
[1]
Optional suffix
Setting parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
CALibration:DEBug 1
Usage:
Setting only
:CALibration<hw>:FMOFfset[:MEASure]?
Starts adjustment of the FM/PhiM modulator.
Suffix:
<hw>
.
[1]
Optional suffix
Return values:
<Measure>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example:
CALibration:FMOFfset:MEASure?
// starts adjustment
// 0
// Adjustment successful
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S SMAB-K720
:CALibration<hw>:FREQuency[:MEASure]?
Performs all adjustments which affect the frequency.
Suffix:
<hw>
.
[1]
Optional suffix
Return values:
<Measure>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example:
// Start adjustments for maximum frequency accuracy
CALibration:FREQuency:MEASure?
// 0
// Adjustments are performed successfully
Usage:
Query only
:CALibration<hw>:LEVel:EXTern:DATA <Data>
Queries what data has been used for the level calibration.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
326
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
CALibration Subsystem
By default, the instrument uses correction data obtained in the factory before delivery
but customer data can also be used.
You can obtain data for external level correction by using a R&S NRP power sensor.
External level correction is a protected function.
For more information, see R&S SMA100B Service Manual.
Suffix:
<hw>
Parameters:
<Data>
.
[1]
Optional suffix
FACTory | CUSTomer
*RST:
Example:
FACTory
CALibration:LEVel:EXTern:DATA FACT
// level calibration with data aquired at the factory
CALibration:LEVel:EXTern:EXEC
:CALibration<hw>:LEVel:EXTern:EXEC
Starts level calibaration from the data selected with the command :
CALibration<hw>:LEVel:EXTern:DATA.
Suffix:
<hw>
.
[1]
Optional suffix
Example:
See :CALibration<hw>:LEVel:EXTern:DATA on page 326.
Usage:
Event
:CALibration<hw>:LEVel:STATe <State>
Activates internal level correction.
Suffix:
<hw>
Parameters:
<State>
.
[1]
Optional suffix
OFF | ON | 0 | 1
*RST:
Example:
ON
CALibration:LEVel:STATe 1
:CALibration<hw>:LEVel[:MEASure]? [<Force>]
Starts level adjustment in the mixer range. The acquired correction values are only
used with FM/Phim or pulse modulation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
327
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
CSYNthesis Subsystem
Suffix:
<hw>
Query parameters:
<Force>
.
[1]
Optional suffix
"force"
*RST:
force
Return values:
<Measure>
0|1
Example:
// Start adjustments for maximum level accuracy
CALibration:LEVel:MEASure?"force"
// 0
// Adjustments are performed successfully
Usage:
Query only
12.7 CSYNthesis Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands used to define the frequency settings for the
separate clock source (clock synthesis).
Option: see "Required options" on page 184.
Example:
CSYNthesis:OTYPe DSIN
CSYNthesis:FREQuency 10000000
CSYNthesis:POWer -15
CSYNthesis:OFFSet:STATe 1
CSYNthesis:OFFSet 0.1
CSYNthesis:PHASe 180
CSYNthesis:PHASe:REFerence
CSYNthesis:PHASe?
// 0
CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP:MODE DEC
CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP:MODE DEC
// CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP:MODE USER
// CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP 1000
// CSYNthesis:FREQuency UP
// 10001000
// CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP:MODE USER
// CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP:INCRement 0.5
CSYNthesis:STATe 1
:CSYNthesis:STATe.......................................................................................................329
:CSYNthesis:OTYPe...................................................................................................... 329
:CSYNthesis:FREQuency............................................................................................... 329
:CSYNthesis:POWer...................................................................................................... 330
:CSYNthesis:OFFSet:STATe...........................................................................................330
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
328
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
CSYNthesis Subsystem
:CSYNthesis:OFFSet......................................................................................................330
:CSYNthesis:VOLTage................................................................................................... 331
:CSYNthesis:PHASe...................................................................................................... 331
:CSYNthesis:PHASe:REFerence..................................................................................... 331
:CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP:MODE.................................................................................. 332
:CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP:MODE........................................................................... 332
:CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP[:INCRement]......................................................................... 332
:CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP...................................................................................... 332
:CSYNthesis:STATe <State>
Activates the clock synthesis.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Chapter 12.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 328.
Manual operation:
See " State " on page 185
:CSYNthesis:OTYPe <Mode>
Defines the shape of the generated clock signal.
Parameters:
<Mode>
SESine | DSQuare | CMOS | DSINe
SESine = single-ended sine
DSINe = differential sine
DSQuare = differential square
CMOS = CMOS
*RST:
SESine
Example:
See Chapter 12.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 328.
Manual operation:
See "Output Type" on page 185
:CSYNthesis:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the frequency of the generated clock signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
329
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
CSYNthesis Subsystem
Parameters:
<Frequency>
float
Numerical value
Sets the frequency
UP|DOWN
Varies the frequency step by step.
The frequency is increased or decreased by the value set with
the command :CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP.
Range:
100E3 to 1.5E9
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
10E6
Example:
See Chapter 12.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 328.
Manual operation:
See " Frequency " on page 186
:CSYNthesis:POWer <Power>
Sets the power level of the generated clock signal.
Parameters:
<Power>
float
Numerical value
Sets the level
UP|DOWN
Varies the level step by step.
The level is increased or decreased by the value set with the
command :CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP[:INCRement].
Range:
-24 to 10
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
-20
Example:
See Chapter 12.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 328.
Manual operation:
See " Level " on page 186
:CSYNthesis:OFFSet:STATe <State>
Activates a DC offset.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Chapter 12.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 328.
Manual operation:
See " DC Offset State " on page 186
:CSYNthesis:OFFSet <Offset>
Sets the value of the DC offset.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
330
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
CSYNthesis Subsystem
Parameters:
<Offset>
float
Range:
-5 to 5
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
0
Example:
See Chapter 12.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 328.
Manual operation:
See " DC Offset " on page 187
:CSYNthesis:VOLTage <Voltage>
Sets the voltage for the CMOS signal.
Parameters:
<Voltage>
float
Range:
0.8 to 2.7
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
1.8
Example:
CSYNthesis:OTYPe CMOS
CSYNthesis:VOLTage 1.8
CSYNthesis:FREQuency 100000000
CSYNthesis:STATe 1
Manual operation:
See "Voltage" on page 187
:CSYNthesis:PHASe <Phase>
Shifts the phase of the generated clock signal.
Parameters:
<Phase>
float
Range:
-36000 to 36000
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
0
Example:
See Chapter 12.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 328.
Manual operation:
See "Delta Phase" on page 187
:CSYNthesis:PHASe:REFerence
Resets the delta phase value.
Example:
See Chapter 12.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 328.
Usage:
Event
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
331
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
CSYNthesis Subsystem
:CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP:MODE <Mode>
:CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP:MODE <Mode>
Defines the type of step size to vary the frequency and level at discrete steps.
Parameters:
<Mode>
DECimal | USER
DECimal
Increases or decreases the level in steps of 10.
USER
Increases or decreases the value in increments, set with the
command:
:CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP
:CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP[:INCRement]
*RST:
DECimal
Example:
See Chapter 12.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 328.
Manual operation:
See "Variation Active" on page 187
:CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] <Increment>
Sets the step width of the rotary knob and, in user-defined step mode, increases or
decreases the level.
Parameters:
<Increment>
float
Range:
0 to 35
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
1
Example:
See Chapter 12.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 328.
Manual operation:
See "Variation Step" on page 187
:CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP <Step>
Sets the step width of the rotary knob and, in user-defined step mode, increases or
decreases the frequency.
Parameters:
<Step>
float
Range:
0 to 14999E5
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
1E6
Example:
See Chapter 12.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 328.
Manual operation:
See "Variation Step" on page 187
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
332
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
DIAGnostic Subsystem
12.8 DIAGnostic Subsystem
The DIAGnostic subsystem contains the commands used for instrument diagnosis
and servicing. SCPI does not define any DIAGnostic commands; the commands listed here are all device-specific. All DIAGnostic commands are query commands
which are not affected by *RST.
The test functions are intended for services purposes.
They are thus password-protected functions. Unlock the corresponding protection level
to access them, see :SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe]
For more information, see R&S SMA100B Service Manual.
Common suffixes
The following common suffixes are used in remote commands:
Suffix
Value range
Description
DIAGnostic<hw>
[1]
Optional suffix
Example: Programming example
The example lists the commands required to query assemblies and test points for diagnosis purposes.
// Query the modules available in the instrument
// and variant and revision state of a certain assembly
DIAGnostic1:BGINfo:CATalog?
// FRONT_AF,PSU300,IFB.BV,MB2_AF,...
DIAGnostic1:BGINfo? "PSU300"
// PSU300 2118.2067.02 01.00 100000
// Query the test points available in the instrument
// and trigger the measurement in a selected test point
DIAGnostic1:POINt:CATalog?
// ATT6HP_AF_DET_N,ATT6HP_AF_DET_P,ATT6HP_AF_DET_TEMP...
DIAGnostic1:MEASure:POINt? "ATT6HP_AF_DET_N"
//
0.000000V
:DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo:CATalog?................................................................................ 333
:DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo?..............................................................................................334
:DIAGnostic<hw>:POINt:CATalog?.................................................................................. 334
:DIAGnostic<hw>[:MEASure]:POINt?............................................................................... 335
:DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo:CATalog?
Queries the names of the assemblies available in the instrument.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
333
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
DIAGnostic Subsystem
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
List of all assemblies; the values are separated by commas
The length of the list is variable and depends on the instrument
equipment configuration.
Example:
See Example "Programming example" on page 333.
Usage:
Query only
:DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo? [<Board>]
Queries information on the modules available in the instrument, using the variant and
revision state.
Query parameters:
<Board>
string
Module name, as queried with the command :
DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo:CATalog?.
To retrieve a complete list of all modules, omit the parameter.
The length of the list is variable and depends on the instrument
equipment configuration.
Return values:
<BgInfo>
<Module name> <Module stock number incl. variant> <Module
revision> <Module serial number>
List of comma-separated entries, one entry per module.
Each entry for one module consists of four parts that are separated by space characters.
Example:
See Example "Programming example" on page 333.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Assembly" on page 498
:DIAGnostic<hw>:POINt:CATalog?
Queries the test points available in the instrument.
For more information, see R&S SMA100B Service Manual.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
List of comma-separated values, each representing a test point
Example:
See Example "Programming example" on page 333.
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
334
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
DISPlay Subsystem
:DIAGnostic<hw>[:MEASure]:POINt? <Name>
Triggers the voltage measurement at the specified test point and returns the measured
voltage.
For more information, see R&S SMA100B Service Manual.
Query parameters:
<Name>
<test point identifier>
Test point name, as queried with the command :
DIAGnostic<hw>:POINt:CATalog?
Return values:
<Value>
<value><unit>
Example:
See Example "Programming example" on page 333.
Usage:
Query only
12.9 DISPlay Subsystem
The DISPlay system contains the commands to set the power-save mode of the
instrument.
Programming Examples
Example: Activating screen saver mode and display update
Use the following commands to switch on the screen saver of your instrument or to
automatic display. These settings are particularly useful when you control the instrument remotely.
// Set the wait time interval and activate the screen saver
:DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff 10
:DISPlay:PSAVe:STATe ON
// Disable the display of the current frequency and level values in remote control
:DISPlay:ANNotation:ALL ON
// :DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON
// :DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude ON
// Enable automatic update of the display at defined time intervals
:DISPlay:UPDate ON
Example: Querying the dialog IDs, opening and closing dialogs
Use the following commands to query the dialog IDs of all currently open dialogs. The
dialog ID is a prerequisite for opening and closing dialogs via the remote control.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
335
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
DISPlay Subsystem
The dialog ID is also required to define user key actions.
See Chapter 10.2.3, "Assigning Actions to the User Key", on page 226.
// Query the dialog IDs of all open dialogs
:DISPlay:DIALog:ID?
// CEUtraDLGenSetDlg,_,$A DlgKeyRf_Rosc
// Open and close dialogs via remote control
:DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN "CEUtraDLGenSetDlg,_,$A"
:DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN "DlgKeyRf_Rosc"
:DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe "DlgKeyRf_Rosc"
:DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe:ALL
:DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff...............................................................................................336
:DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe]................................................................................................336
:DISPlay:BRIGhtness..................................................................................................... 337
:DISPlay:BUTTon:BRIGhtness........................................................................................ 337
:DISPlay:UPDate........................................................................................................... 337
:DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude..................................................................................... 337
:DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency....................................................................................338
:DISPlay:ANNotation[:ALL]..............................................................................................338
:DISPlay:DIALog:ID?...................................................................................................... 338
:DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN..................................................................................................339
:DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe................................................................................................ 339
:DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe:ALL..........................................................................................340
:DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff <HoldoffTimeMin>
Sets the wait time for the screen saver mode of the display.
Parameters:
<HoldoffTimeMin>
integer
Range:
1 to 60
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 10)
Default unit: minute
Example:
see Example "Activating screen saver mode and display update"
on page 335
Manual operation:
See "Wait Time" on page 219
:DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] <State>
Activates the screen saver mode of the display.
We recommend that you use this mode to protect the display, if you operate the instrument in remote control.
To define the wait time, use the command :DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
336
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
DISPlay Subsystem
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
Example:
See Example "Activating screen saver mode and display
update" on page 335
Manual operation:
See "Screen Saver" on page 219
:DISPlay:BRIGhtness <BRIGhtness>
Sets the brightness of the dispaly.
Parameters:
<BRIGhtness>
float
Range:
1.0 to 20.0
Increment: 1.0
*RST:
14.0
Example:
DISPlay:BRIGhtness 14
Manual operation:
See "Display" on page 220
:DISPlay:BUTTon:BRIGhtness <ButtonBrightnes>
Sets the brightness of the RF ON/OFF key.
Parameters:
<ButtonBrightnes>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 20
n.a. (no preset)
Example:
DISPlay:BUTTon:BRIGhtness 15
Manual operation:
See "RF Hardkey" on page 220
:DISPlay:UPDate <Update>
Activates the refresh mode of the display.
Parameters:
<Update>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 1)
Example:
See Example "Activating screen saver mode and display
update" on page 335
Manual operation:
See "Display Update is" on page 221
:DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude <State>
Indicates asterisks instead of the level values in the status bar.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
337
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
DISPlay Subsystem
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 1)
Example:
See Example "Activating screen saver mode and display
update" on page 335
Manual operation:
See "Annotation Amplitude" on page 235
:DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency <State>
Indicates asterisks instead of the frequency values in the status bar.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 1)
Example:
See Example "Activating screen saver mode and display
update" on page 335
Manual operation:
See "Annotation Frequency" on page 235
:DISPlay:ANNotation[:ALL] <State>
Displays asterisks instead of the level and frequency values in the status bar of the
instrument.
We recommend that you use this mode if you operate the instrument in remote control.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
1
See Example "Activating screen saver mode and display
update" on page 335
:DISPlay:DIALog:ID?
Returns the dialog identifiers of the open dialogs in a string separated by blanks.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
338
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
DISPlay Subsystem
Return values:
<DialogIdList>
<DialogID#1>< ><DialogID#2>< > ... < ><DialogID#n>
Dialog identifiers are string without blanks. Blanks are represented as $$.
Dialog identifiers <DialogID> are composed of two main parts:
<DialogName>[<OptionalParts>]
<DialogName>
Meaningful information, mandatory input parameter for the commands:
:DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN on page 339
:DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe on page 339
<Optional parts>
String of $<X> values, where <X> is a character, interpreted as
follows:
$q<DialogQualifier>: optional dialog qualifier, usually the
letter A or B, as displayed in the dialog title.
$i<Instances>: comma-separated list of instance indexes,
given in the order h,c,s,d,g,u,0. Default is zero; the terminating ",0" can be omitted.
$t<TabIds>: comma-separated indexes or tab names;
required, if a dialog is composed of several tabs.
$x<Left>$y<Top>$h<Left>$w<Top>: position and size;
superfluous information.
Example:
See Example "Querying the dialog IDs, opening and closing dialogs" on page 335
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "SCPI" on page 226
:DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN <DialogId>
Opens the specified dialog.
Setting parameters:
<DialogId>
string
To find out the dialog identifier, use the query :DISPlay:
DIALog:ID?.
The <DialogName> part of the query result is mandatory.
Example:
See Example "Querying the dialog IDs, opening and closing dialogs" on page 335
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "SCPI" on page 226
:DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe <DialogId>
Closes the specified dialog.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
339
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
FORMat Subsystem
Setting parameters:
<DialogId>
string
To find out the dialog identifier, use the query :DISPlay:
DIALog:ID?.
The <DialogName> part of the query result is sufficient.
Example:
See Example "Querying the dialog IDs, opening and closing dialogs" on page 335
Usage:
Setting only
:DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe:ALL
Closes all open dialogs.
Example:
See Example "Querying the dialog IDs, opening and closing dialogs" on page 335
Usage:
Event
12.10 FORMat Subsystem
The commands in the FORMat subsystem determine the format of data returned by the
R&S SMA100B to the controller. This affects all query commands that return a list of
numerical data or block data, noted in the descriptions of the commands. The set data
format applies to both paths.
:FORMat:BORDer.......................................................................................................... 340
:FORMat:SREGister.......................................................................................................341
:FORMat[:DATA]............................................................................................................341
:FORMat:BORDer <Border>
Determines the sequence of bytes within a binary block. This only affects blocks which
use the IEEE754 format internally.
Parameters:
<Border>
NORMal | SWAPped
NORMal
Expects/sends the least significant byte of each IEEE754 floating-point number first and the most significant byte last.
SWAPped
Expects/sends the most significant byte of each IEEE754 floating-point number first and the least significant byte last.
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
NORMal
FORM:BORD SWAP
transfers the data with the most significant bit first.
340
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
HCOPy Subsystem
:FORMat:SREGister <Format>
Determines the numeric format for responses of the status register.
Parameters:
<Format>
ASCii | BINary | HEXadecimal | OCTal
ASCii
Returns the register content as a decimal number.
BINary|HEXadecimal|OCTal
Returns the register content either as a binary, hexadecimal or
octal number. According to the selected format, the number
starts with #B (binary), #H (hexadecimal) or #O (octal).
*RST:
Example:
ASCii
FORM:SREG HEX
returns the register content as a hexadecimal number.
:FORMat[:DATA] <Data>
Determines the data format the instrument uses to return data via the IEC/IEEE bus.
The instrument automatically detects the data format used by the controller, and
assigns it accordingly. Data format determined by this SCPI command is in this case
irrelevant.
Parameters:
<Data>
ASCii | PACKed
ASCii
Transfers numerical data as plain text separated by commas.
PACKed
Transfers numerical data as binary block data.
The format within the binary data depends on the command.
The various binary data formats are explained in the description
of the parameter types.
*RST:
Example:
ASCii
FORM ASC
transfers the data as ASCII data.
12.11 HCOPy Subsystem
The HCOPy subsystem contains the commands to generate and save a hard copy of
the display.
To access a stored hard copy file, use the commands of the MEMM subsystem.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
341
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
HCOPy Subsystem
12.11.1 Programming Examples
Example: Store a hard copy of the display
The following example lists commands to configure and execute a hard copy to an
automatic named file.
// ******************************************************************
// Hard copy settings
// ******************************************************************
:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage PNG
:HCOPy:FILE:NAME:AUTO:STATe 1
// defines the output format
// sets the instrument to automatically create output file names
// ******************************************************************
// Configure hard copy options, set automatic naming rules
// An automatically generated file name consists of:
// <Prefix><YYYY><MM><DD><Number>.<Format>
// ******************************************************************
:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage BMP
// defines output format *.bmp
:HCOPy:REGion DIALog
// selects the region to be copied
:HCOPy:FILE:AUTO:DIR "usb/HCopy"
// sets destination directory of automatic named file to "/usb/HCopy"
:HCOPy:FILE:NAME:AUTO:FILE:PREFix:STATe 1
:HCOPy:FILE:NAME:AUTO:FILE:PREFix:"hardcopy"
:HCOPy:FILE:NAME:AUTO:FILE:YEAR:STATe 1
:HCOPy:FILE:NAME:AUTO:FILE:MONTh:STATe 1
// uses automatic naming prefix
// sets automatic naming prefix to "hardcopy"
// uses automatic naming date parameters year and month
// ******************************************************************
// Execute and transfer the hard copy
// ******************************************************************
:HCOPy:EXECute
:HCOPy:DATA
// generates a hard copy
// transfers the hard copy to the remote client
:HCOPy:FILE:AUTO:FILE?
// queries the automatic file name
// response: "hardcopy1607001.bmp"
:HCOPy:FILE:AUTO:NUMBer?
// queries the number in the automatic file name
// response: "001"
:HCOPy:FILE:AUTO?
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
342
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
HCOPy Subsystem
// queries the path and file name of the automatically generated file
// response: "/usb/HCopy/hardcopy1607001.bmp"
12.11.2 Hard Copy Settings
With the following commands, you can configure the settings of a hard copy.
:HCOPy:DATA?............................................................................................................. 343
:HCOPy:IMAGe:FORMat................................................................................................ 343
:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage............................................................................................343
:HCOPy:REGion............................................................................................................ 343
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME].....................................................................................................344
:HCOPy[:EXECute]........................................................................................................ 344
:HCOPy:DATA?
Transfers the hard copy data directly as a NByte stream to the remote client.
Return values:
<Data>
block data
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 342
Usage:
Query only
:HCOPy:IMAGe:FORMat <Format>
:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage <Language>
Selects the graphic format for the hard copy. You can use both commands alternatively.
Parameters:
<Language>
BMP | JPG | XPM | PNG
*RST:
PNG
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 342
Manual operation:
See "Format" on page 213
:HCOPy:REGion <Region>
Selects the area to be copied.
You can create a snapshot of the screen or an active dialog.
Parameters:
<Region>
ALL | DIALog
*RST:
ALL
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 342
Manual operation:
See "Region" on page 214
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
343
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
HCOPy Subsystem
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME] <Name>
Determines the file name and path to save the hard copy, provided automatic naming
is disabled.
Note: If you have enabled automatic naming, the instrument automatically generates
the file name and directory, see Chapter 12.11.3, "Automatic Naming", on page 344.
Parameters:
<Name>
string
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 342
Manual operation:
See "File..." on page 213
:HCOPy[:EXECute]
Generates a hard copy of the current display. The output destination is a file.
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 342
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Save" on page 213
12.11.3 Automatic Naming
Use the following commands to automatically assign a file name.
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO?.........................................................................................344
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory........................................................................... 345
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory:CLEar................................................................. 345
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:FILE?................................................................................. 345
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe................................................................................345
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY:STATe...............................................................346
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe.......................................................... 346
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR:STATe............................................................ 346
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:NUMBer?.................................................................. 346
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix..................................................................... 346
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix:STATe.......................................................... 346
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO?
Queries path and file name of the hardcopy file, if you have enabled Automatic Naming.
Return values:
<Auto>
string
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 342
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
344
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
HCOPy Subsystem
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory <Directory>
Determines the path to save the hard copy, if you have enabled Automatic Naming.
If the directory does not yet exist, the instrument automatically creates a new directory,
using the instrument name and /var/user/ by default.
Parameters:
<Directory>
string
*RST:
/var/user/
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 342
Manual operation:
See "Path..." on page 215
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory:CLEar
Deletes all files with extensions *.bmp, *.jpg, *.png and *.xpm in the directory set
for automatic naming.
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 342
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Clear Path" on page 215
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:FILE?
Queries the name of the automatically named hard copy file.
An automatically generated file name consists of:
<Prefix><YYYY><MM><DD><Number>.<Format>.
You can activate each component separately, to individually design the file name.
Return values:
<File>
string
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 342.
Usage:
Query only
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe <State>
Activates automatic naming of the hard copy files.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 342
Manual operation:
See "Automatic Naming" on page 214
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
345
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
HCOPy Subsystem
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY:STATe <State>
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe <State>
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR:STATe <State>
Uses the date parameters (year, month or day) for the automatic naming. You can activate each of the date parameters separately.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 342
Manual operation:
See "Prefix, Year, Month, Day" on page 215
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:NUMBer?
Queries the number that is used as part of the file name for the next hard copy in automatic mode.
At the beginning, the count starts at 0. The R&S SMA100B searches the specified output directory for the highest number in the stored files. It increases this number by one
to achieve a unique name for the new file.
The resulting auto number is appended to the resulting file name with at least three
digits.
Return values:
<Number>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 999999
0
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 342
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Current Auto Number" on page 216
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix <Prefix>
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix:STATe <State>
Uses the prefix for the automatic generation of the file name, provided PREF:STAT is
activated.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 342
Manual operation:
See "Prefix, Year, Month, Day" on page 215
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
346
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
OUTPut Subsystem
12.12 KBOard Subsystem
The KBOard subsystem contains the commands to set a connected keyboard.
:KBOard:LAYout............................................................................................................ 347
:KBOard:LAYout <Layout>
Selects the language for an external keyboard and assigns the keys acccordingly.
Parameters:
<Layout>
CHINese | DANish | DUTCh | DUTBe | ENGLish | ENGUK |
FINNish | FRENch | FREBe | FRECa | GERMan | ITALian |
JAPanese | KORean | NORWegian | PORTuguese | RUSSian |
SPANish | SWEDish | ENGUS
*RST:
Example:
n.a. (factory preset: ENGLish)
:KBOard:LAYout US
// activates American keyboard
Manual operation:
See "USB Keyboard > Layout" on page 220
12.13 OUTPut Subsystem
In the OUTPut subsystem, you can configure the output signals.
The LF output signal is defined with the commands of the Chapter 12.15.5,
"SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem", on page 403 system.
Common suffixes
The following common suffixes are used in remote commands:
Suffix
Value range
Description
OUTPut<hw>
[1]
Optional suffix
:OUTPut:ALL[:STATe].................................................................................................... 348
:OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]................................................................................................... 348
:OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]:PON........................................................................................... 348
:OUTPut<hw>:AMODe................................................................................................... 348
:OUTPut<hw>:IMPedance?.............................................................................................349
:OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:LOWer?........................................................................... 349
:OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:UPPer?............................................................................349
:OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:CLEar................................................................................... 350
:OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:TRIPped?..............................................................................350
:OUTPut<hw>:FILTer:MODE...........................................................................................350
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
347
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
OUTPut Subsystem
:OUTPut:ALL[:STATe] <State>
Activates all RF output signals of the instrument.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
OUTP:ALL OFF
switches off all RF output signals.
:OUTPut<hw>[:STATe] <State>
Activates the RF output signal.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
OUTP ON
Activates the RF output.
Manual operation:
See "RF State/RF ON" on page 63
:OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]:PON <Pon>
Defines the state of the RF output signal when the instrument is switched on.
Parameters:
<Pon>
OFF | UNCHanged
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: UNCHanged)
Example:
OUTP:PON OFF
The RF output is deactivated when the instrument is switched
on.
Manual operation:
See " Power-On State " on page 222
:OUTPut<hw>:AMODe <AMode>
Sets the attenuator mode at the RF output.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
348
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
OUTPut Subsystem
Parameters:
<AMode>
AUTO | FIXed
AUTO
The attenuator adjusts the level settings automatically, within the
full variation range.
FIXed
The attenuator and amplifier stages are fixed at the current position, providing level settings settings with constant output
VSWR. The resulting variation range is calculated according to
the position.
*RST:
Example:
AUTO
SOURce:POWer:ALC:STATe 1
OUTPut:AMODe FIXed
Manual operation:
See " Mode " on page 144
:OUTPut<hw>:IMPedance?
Queries the impedance of the RF outputs.
Return values:
<Impedance>
G1K | G50 | G10K
*RST:
G50
Example:
OUTP:IMP?
queries the impedance of RF output.
Response: 50
the impedance is 50 ohms
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "RF output impedance" on page 63
:OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:LOWer?
:OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:UPPer?
Queries the settable minimum/maximum value in mode :OUTPut:AMODe FIXed, i.e.
when the attenuator is not being adjusted.
See :OUTPut<hw>:AMODe on page 348
Return values:
<Upper>
float
Increment: 0.01
Default unit: dBm
Example:
OUTPut1:AMODe FIXed
OUTPut1:AFIXed:RANGe:UPPer?
// -27
OUTPut1:AFIXed:RANGe:LOW?
// -50
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
349
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
OUTPut Subsystem
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See " Attenuator Level Range " on page 145
:OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:CLEar
Resets the protective circuit after it has been tripped.
To define the output state, use the command :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe].
Example:
OUTP:PROT:CLE
Resets the protective circuit of the RF output.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Overload" on page 145
:OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:TRIPped?
Queries the state of the protective circuit.
Return values:
<Tripped>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
OUTP:PROT:TRIP
queries the state of the protective circuit of the RF output.
Response: 0
the protective circuit has not tripped.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Overload" on page 145
:OUTPut<hw>:FILTer:MODE <Mode>
Activates low harmonic filter or enables its automatic switching.
Parameters:
<Mode>
ON | AUTO | 1
ON|1
Ensures best low harmonics performance but decreases the
level range
AUTO
Applies an automatically selected harmonic filter that fits to the
current level setting.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
OUTPut:FILTer:MODE AUTO
Manual operation:
See " Harmonic Filter " on page 71
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
350
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
12.14 SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
These subsystems contain the commands for configuring the power measurements
with R&S NRP power sensor connected to the R&S SMA100B.
The local state is set with the INIT command. Switching off the local state enhances
the measurement performance. Measurements results can be retrieved in local state
on or off.
Sensor parameters are set with the SENSe commands.
To start the measurement and retrieve the result, use the :READ<ch>[:POWer]?
command.
Suffix
Value range
Description
SENSe<ch>
[1] to 4
Indicates the sensor
Sensor mapping:
●
SENSe[1] - default mapping for sensors connected to the
SENSOR connector
●
SENSe2 - sensor connected to a USB connector
●
SENSe3|4 - further connected sensors to USB connectors,
in the connection order
Use the :SLISt commands to change the sensor mapping
READ<ch>
[1] to 4
Sensor assignment
INIate<hw>
[1] to 4
Sensor assignment
ELEMent<ch>
[1] to 25
Sensor mapping list
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
351
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Programming examples
Example: Detecting and assigning a power sensor
SLISt:LIST?
// Response: "NRP33SN-V-900007-USB Legacy","NRP-Z211-900001-USB Legacy"
// list of automatically detected sensors
SLISt:SCAN:STATe 1
// searches for sensors connected in the LAN or via the USBTMC protocol
SLISt:LIST?
// Response:
// "NRP33SN-V-900007-USB Legacy","NRP-Z211-900001-USB Legacy",
// "NRP33SN-V-900005-USBTMC","NRP33SN-V-900011-LAN"
// list of automatically detected sensors
// the list can contain more entries
SLISt:ELEMent3:MAPPing SENS1
// maps the third sensor from the list to the first sensor channel
SLISt:SENSor:MAP "NRPS18S-100654-USB Legacy", SENS4
// maps the sensor directly to channel 4
Example: Performing a simple power measurement
Prerequisite: The sensor is connected to the instrument and mapped to the first sensor
channel.
:INITiate1:CONTinuous ON
//Switches the continous power measurement on
:READ1?
// Triggers the measurement and displays the results
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
352
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Example: Performing a power measurement with a fixed filter
Prerequisite: The sensor is connected to the instrument and mapped to the first sensor
channel.
SENSe1:SOURce RF
//Sensor measures the power of the RF signal
SENSe1:FILTer:TYPE NSRatio
//Selects fixed noise filter mode
SENSe1:FILTer:NSRatio 0.02 DB
//Sets the maximum noise component in the result to 0.02 DB
SENSe1:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe 10
//Limits the settling time to 10 seconds.
:SENSe1:APERture:DEFault:STATe 0
// Deactivates the default aperture time of the sensor
:SENSe1:APERture:TIMe 10e-6
// Sets the aperture time to 10 us
SENSe1:UNIT DBM
//Selects unit dBm for the measured value
:INITiate:CONTinuous ON
//Switches the continous power measurement on
:READ?
//Triggers the measurement and displays the results
:SLISt[:LIST]?................................................................................................................ 354
:SLISt:SCAN[:STATe].....................................................................................................354
:SLISt:ELEMent<ch>:MAPPing........................................................................................354
:SLISt:SENSor:MAP.......................................................................................................355
:INITiate<hw>[:POWer]:CONTinuous............................................................................... 355
:READ<ch>[:POWer]?.................................................................................................... 356
:SENSe<ch>:UNIT[:POWer]............................................................................................356
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:DEFault:STATe............................................................. 357
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:TIMe.............................................................................357
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:SELect.......................................................357
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:STATe....................................................... 357
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:LIST?........................................................ 358
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:PRIority.........................................................358
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:STATe.......................................................... 358
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth:AUTO?..................................................................358
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth[:USER]..................................................................359
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio.............................................................................359
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe..................................................................360
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:SONCe..............................................................................360
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
353
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE................................................................................ 360
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FREQuency..................................................................................361
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:LOGGing:STATe...........................................................................361
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet........................................................................................ 362
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe............................................................................. 362
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SNUMber?................................................................................... 362
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SOURce.......................................................................................363
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:STATus[:DEVice]?........................................................................ 363
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SVERsion?...................................................................................363
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE?......................................................................................... 363
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:ZERO.......................................................................................... 364
:SLISt[:LIST]?
Returns a list of all detected sensors in a comma-separated string.
Return values:
<SensorList>
String of comma-separated entries
Each entry contains information on the sensor type, serial number and interface.
The order of the entries does not correspond to the order the
sensors are displayed in the "NRP Sensor Mapping" dialog.
Example:
See Example "Detecting and assigning a power sensor"
on page 352.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See " Sensor Mapping List " on page 160
:SLISt:SCAN[:STATe] <State>
Starts the search for R&S NRP power sensors, connected in the LAN or via the
USBTMC protocol.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Detecting and assigning a power sensor"
on page 352.
Manual operation:
See " Scan " on page 161
:SLISt:ELEMent<ch>:MAPPing <Mapping>
Assigns an entry from the :SLISt[:LIST]? to one of the four sensor channels.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
354
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Parameters:
<Mapping>
SENS1 | SENSor1 | SENS2 | SENSor2 | SENS3 | SENSor3 |
SENS4 | SENSor4 | UNMapped
Sensor channel.
*RST:
UNMapped
Example:
See Example "Detecting and assigning a power sensor"
on page 352.
Manual operation:
See " Sensor Mapping List " on page 160
:SLISt:SENSor:MAP <SensorId>, <Mapping>
Assigns a sensor directly to one of the sensor channels, using the sensor name and
serial number.
To find out the the sensor name and ID, you can get it from the label of the R&S NRP,
or using the command :SLISt:SCAN[:STATe]. This command detects all R&S NRP
power sensors connected in the LAN or via 'USBTMC protocol.
Setting parameters:
<SensorId>
string
<Mapping>
enum
Example:
See Example "Detecting and assigning a power sensor"
on page 352.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See " Sensor Mapping List " on page 160
:INITiate<hw>[:POWer]:CONTinuous <Continuous>
Switches the local state of the continuous power measurement by R&S NRP power
sensors on and off. Switching off local state enhances the measurement performance
during remote control.
The remote measurement is triggered with :READ<ch>[:POWer]?). This command
also returns the measurement results. The local state is not affected, measurement
results can be retrieved with local state on or off.
Parameters:
<Continuous>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
INIT1:CONT ON
Switches local state of continuous power measurement on.
Manual operation:
See " State " on page 165
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
355
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
:READ<ch>[:POWer]?
Triggers power measurement and displays the results. The sensor returns the result in
the unit set with command :SENSe<ch>:UNIT[:POWer]
Certain power sensors, such as the R&S NRP-Z81, return two values, first the value of
the average level and - separated by a comma - the peak value.
Note: This command does not affect the local state, i.e. you can get results with local
state on or off. For long measurement times, we recommend that you use an SRQ for
command synchronization (MAV bit).
Suffix:
<ch>
.
1..3
Return values:
<Power>
float or float,float
Example:
SENS1:UNIT DBM
Selects unit dBm for presentation of measurement result.
READ1?
Queries the measurement result of the sensor.
Response: -45.6246576745440230
-45.6 dBm were measured at the given frequency.
Example:
R&S NRP-Z81
READ1?
Response:
-55.62403263352178,-22.419472478812476
-55.6 dBm is the measured average level, -22. 4 dBm is the
measured peak level at the given frequency.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See " Level (Peak) / Level (Average) " on page 165
:SENSe<ch>:UNIT[:POWer] <Power>
Selects the unit (Watt, dBm or dBμV) of measurement result display, queried with :
READ<ch>[:POWer]?.
Parameters:
<Power>
DBM | DBUV | WATT
*RST:
DBM
Example:
SENS2:UNIT DBM
Selects dBm as unit for the measured value returned by command READ.
READ2?
Response: 7.34
7.34 dBm are measured by sensor 2.
Manual operation:
See " Level (Peak) / Level (Average) " on page 165
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
356
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:DEFault:STATe <UseDefAp>
Deactivates the default aperture time of the respective sensor.
To specify a user-defined value, use the command :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:
APERture:TIMe on page 357.
Parameters:
<UseDefAp>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
See Example "Performing a power measurement with a fixed filter" on page 353.
Manual operation:
See "Default Aperture Time" on page 167
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:TIMe <ApTime>
Defines the aperture time (size of the acquisition interval) for the corresponding sensor.
Parameters:
<ApTime>
float
Range:
depends on connected power sensor
Increment: 1E-9
*RST:
depends on connected power sensor
Example:
See Example "Performing a power measurement with a fixed filter" on page 353.
Manual operation:
See "Aperture Time" on page 168
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:SELect <Select>
Several S-parameter tables can be stored in a sensor. The command selects a loaded
data set for S-parameter correction for the corresponding sensor.
Parameters:
<Select>
float
*RST:
Manual operation:
0
See " S-Parameter " on page 168
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:STATe <State>
Activates the use of the S-parameter correction data.
Note: If you use power sensors with attenuator, the instrument automatically activates
the use of S-parameter data.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
0
357
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Example:
SENSe1:POWer:CORRection:SPDevice:STATe 1
// activates the use of the S-parameters correction data
Manual operation:
See " S-Parameter " on page 168
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:LIST?
Queries the list of the S-parameter data sets that have been loaded to the power sensor.
Return values:
<List>
string list
*RST:
0
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See " S-Parameter " on page 168
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:PRIority <Priority>
Selects average or peak power for permanent display.
Parameters:
<Priority>
AVERage | PEAK
*RST:
AVERage
Example:
SENS1:DISP:PERM:STAT ON
The permanent viewer is switched on.
SENS1:DISP:PERM:PRI AVER
The measured average power is indicated.
Manual operation:
See " Display " on page 166
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:STATe <State>
Activates the permanent display of the measured power level results. The instrument
also indicates the sensor type, the connection, the measurement source and the offset
if set.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SENS1:POW:DISP:PERM:STAT ON
The permanent viewer is switched on.
Manual operation:
See " Permanent " on page 165
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth:AUTO?
Queries the current filter length in filter mode AUTO (:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:
FILTer:TYPE)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
358
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Return values:
<Auto>
float
Range:
1 to 65536
Example:
SENS1:FILT:TYPE AUTO
Selects auto filter.
SENS1:FILT:LENG:AUTO?
Queries the automatically set filter length.
Response: 1024
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Filter Length" on page 167
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth[:USER] <User>
Selects the filter length for SENS:POW:FILT:TYPE USER. As the filter length works as
a multiplier for the time window, a constant filter length results in a constant measurement time (see also "About the measuring principle, averaging filter, filter length, and
achieving stable results" on page 161).
The R&S NRP power sensors provide different resolutions for setting the filter length,
depending on the used sensor type:
●
Resolution = 1 for R&S NRPxx power sensors
●
Resolution = 2n for sensors of the R&S NRP-Zxx family, with n = 1 to 16
Parameters:
<User>
float
Range:
*RST:
Example:
1 to 65536
1
SENS1:FILT:TYPE USER
// Selects user filter mode
SENS1:FILT:LENG 16
// Sets a filter length of 16.
// E.g. using a sensor with 20 ms time window,
// the resulting measurement time is 640 ms (2x16x20 ms)
Manual operation:
See "Filter Length" on page 167
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio <NSRatio>
Sets an upper limit for the relative noise content in fixed noise filter mode (:
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE). This value determines the proportion of intrinsic noise in the measurement results.
Parameters:
<NSRatio>
float
Range:
0.001 to 1
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
0.01
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
359
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Example:
See Example "Performing a power measurement with a fixed filter" on page 353.
Manual operation:
See "Noise/Signal Ratio" on page 167
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe <MTime>
Sets an upper limit for the settling time of the auto-averaging filter in the NSRatio
mode and thus limits the length of the filter. The filter type is set with command :
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE.
Parameters:
<MTime>
float
Range:
1 to 999.99
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
4
Example:
See Example "Performing a power measurement with a fixed filter" on page 353.
Manual operation:
See "Timeout" on page 167
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:SONCe
Starts searching the optimum filter length for the current measurement conditions. You
can check the result with command :SENS1:POW:FILT:LENG:USER? in filter mode
USER (:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE).
Example:
SENS1:FILT:TYPE USER
Selects user filter mode.
SENS1:FILT:SONC
Activates the search for the optimum filter length.
SENS1:FILT:LENG?
Returns the found optimum filter length.
Response: 128
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Auto Once" on page 167
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE <Type>
Selects the filter mode. The filter length is the multiplier for the time window and thus
directly affects the measurement time.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
360
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Parameters:
<Type>
AUTO | USER | NSRatio
AUTO
Automatically selects the filter length, depending on the measured value. The higher the power, the shorter the filter length,
and vice versa.
USER
Allows you to set the filter length manually. As the filter-length
takes effect as a multiplier of the measurement time, you can
achieve constant measurement times.
NSRatio
Selects the filter length (averaging factor) according to the criterion that the intrinsic noise of the sensor (2 standard deviations)
does not exceed the specified noise content. You can define the
noise content with command :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:
NSRatio.
Note: To avoid long settling times when the power is low, you
can limit the averaging factor limited with the "timeout" parameter (:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe).
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
See Example "Performing a power measurement with a fixed filter" on page 353.
Manual operation:
See " Filter" on page 166
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the RF frequency of the signal, if signal source "USER" is selected (:
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SOURce).
Parameters:
<Frequency>
float
*RST:
1 GHz
Example:
SENS1:SOUR USER
Selects user-defined source.
SENS1:FREQ 2.44GHz
Sets the RF frequency of the source which is 2.44 GHz.
Manual operation:
See " Frequency " on page 166
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:LOGGing:STATe <State>
Activates the recording of the power values, measured by a connected R&S NRP
power sensor.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
0
361
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Example:
SENS:LOGG:STAT ON
Activates recording of the power measurement of the first sensor.
Manual operation:
See "Enable Logging" on page 168
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet <Offset>
Sets a level offset which is added to the measured level value after activation with
command :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe. The level offset allows, e.g. to
consider an attenuator in the signal path.
Parameters:
<Offset>
float
Range:
-100.0 to 100.0
*RST:
0
Default unit: dB
Example:
SENS1:POW:OFFS 10.0
Sets a level offset of 10 dB
Manual operation:
See " Level Offset State,Level Offset" on page 166
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe <State>
Activates the addition of the level offset to the measured value. The level offset value is
set with command :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SENS1:POW:OFFS 0.4dB
Sets a level offset of 0.4 dB
SENS1:POW:OFFS:STAT ON
A level offset of 0.4 dB is added to the measured value.
Manual operation:
See " Level Offset State,Level Offset" on page 166
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SNUMber?
Queries the serial number of the sensor.
Return values:
<SNumber>
string
Example:
SENS1:SNUM?
Queries the serial number.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Sensor type and serial number" on page 165
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
362
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SOURce <Source>
Determines the signal to be measured.
Note: When measuring the RF signal, the sensor considers the corresponding correction factor at that frequency, and uses the level setting of the instrument as reference
level.
Parameters:
<Source>
A | USER | RF
*RST:
A
Example:
See Example "Performing a power measurement with a fixed filter" on page 353.
Manual operation:
See " Use Frequency Of" on page 166
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:STATus[:DEVice]?
Queries if a sensor is connected to the instrument.
Return values:
<Status>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SENS1:STAT?
Response: 1
A sensor is connected.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See " State " on page 165
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SVERsion?
Queries the software version of the connected R&S NRP power sensor.
Return values:
<SVersion>
string
Example:
SENS1:POW:SVER?
Queries the software version of the power sensor.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Current Sensors" on page 169
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE?
Queries the sensor type. The type is automatically detected.
Return values:
<Type>
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
string
363
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
SENS1:TYPE?
Queries the type of sensor.
Response: NRP-Z21
The R&S NRP-Z21 sensor is used.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Sensor type and serial number" on page 165
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:ZERO
Performs zeroing of the sensor.
Zeroing is required after warm-up, i.e. after connecting the sensor.
Note: Switch off or disconnect the RF power source from the sensor before zeroing.
We recommend that you zero in regular intervals (at least once a day), if:
●
The temperature has varied more than about 5 °C.
●
The sensor has been replaced.
●
You want to measure very low power.
Example:
SENS1:ZERO
Executes zeroing.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See " Zero " on page 165
12.15 SOURce Subsystem
The SOURce subsystem contains the commands for configuring the digital and analog
signals.
Common suffixes
The following common suffixes are used in remote commands:
Suffix
Value range
Description
SOURce<hw>
[1]
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
SOURce[1] = RF output
(optional keyword)
LF output = SOURce:LFOutput
(SOURce is optional keyword)
Analog Modulation Subsystems............................................................................365
SOURce:CORRection Subsystem........................................................................ 388
SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem.........................................................................395
SOURce:INPut Subsystem................................................................................... 402
SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem............................................................................. 403
SOURce:LIST Subsystem.....................................................................................416
SOURce:NOISe Subsystem................................................................................. 429
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
364
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
●
●
●
●
●
SOURce:PGEN Subsystem.................................................................................. 431
SOURce:PHASe Subsystem................................................................................ 432
SOURce:POWer Subsystem................................................................................ 433
SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem......................................................................... 442
SOURce:SWEep Subsystem................................................................................ 447
12.15.1 Analog Modulation Subsystems
Option: see Chapter 4.1, "Required Options", on page 74.
The subsystems in this section describe all commands for analog modulation of the RF
signal. Divided in separate sections, you can configure amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM) , phase modulation (PhiM) and pulse modulation (PULM).
You can perform each of the modulations either with an internally generated modulation signal or with an externally applied signal.
To configure the internal signal, use the commands listed in Chapter 12.15.5,
"SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem", on page 403.
For more information:
See Chapter 4, "Analog Modulations", on page 74.
12.15.1.1
SOURce:MODulation Subsystem
The command in this subsytem allows you to disable all active modulations at once,
and, vice versa, to restore the last active ones.
[:SOURce<hw>]:MODulation[:ALL][:STATe] <State>
Activates all modulations that were active before the last switching off.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
0
365
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
SOURce1:AM1:DEPTh 30
SOURce1:AM1:SOURce LF1
SOURce1:AM1:STATe 1
SOURce1:FM1:DEViation 1000
SOURce1:FM1:STATe 1
// disable both modulation
SOURce1:MODulation:ALL:STATe 0
SOURce1:AM1:STATe?
// 0
SOURce1:FM1:STATe?
// 0
// enable both modulation
SOURce1:MODulation:ALL:STATe 1
SOURce1:AM1:STATe?
// 1
SOURce1:FM1:STATe?
// 1
Manual operation:
12.15.1.2
See "MOD ON/OFF" on page 76
SOURce:AM Subsystem
Option: R&S SMAB-K720
The AM subsystem contains the commands for setting the amplitude modulation and
also the broadband amplitude modulation.
The following examples show some variants for generating AM signals.
Example: Creating an amplitude modulated RF signal
Using the internal LF generator, the following command sequence configures an amplitude modulated signal.
// Reset the instrument to start from a defined state
*RST
// Set RF frequency and amplitude
SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 6000000000
SOURce1:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude -25
// Configure the modulation signal
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SHAPe SINE
SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency 20000
// Configure the amplitude modulation settings and switch AM on
SOURce1:AM1:SOURce LF1
SOURce1:AM1:DEPTh 30
SOURce1:AM:RATio 40
SOURce1:AM1:STATe 1
// Switch on LF and RF signal output
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
366
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
SOURce1:LFOutput1:STATe 1
OUTPut1:STATe 1
Example: Using an external signal source
Using an external signal source, you can additionally determine whether you want to
use only the AC component of the external modulation signal.
// Reset the instrument to start from a defined state
*RST
// Set frequency and amplitude
SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 6000000000
SOURce1:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude -25
// Configure the amplitude modulation settings and switch AM on
SOURce1:AM1:SOURce EXT1
SOURce1:AM1:DEPTh 40
// Query the input sensitivity at the external modulation input
SOURCe1:AM1:SENSitivity?
// Response:
40
// Since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V,
// the resulting sensitivity is precisely 50%/V.
// This value is assigned to the voltage value for full
// modulation of the input.
// select the coupling mode AC for external amplitude modulation
SOURce1:INPut:MODext:COUPling1 AC
// Switch on AM and RF signal output
SOURce1:AM1:STATe 1
OUTPut1:STATe 1
The following commands are available:
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:RATio............................................................................................. 367
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:SENSitivity?.................................................................................... 368
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:SOURce.................................................................................. 368
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:STATe.....................................................................................368
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>[:DEPTh]...................................................................................369
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:EXTernal:COUPling......................................................................... 369
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:RATio <Ratio>
Sets the deviation ratio (path#2 to path#1) in percent.
Parameters:
<Ratio>
float
Range:
0 to 100
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
100
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
367
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
See Example "Creating an amplitude modulated RF signal"
on page 366.
Manual operation:
See "Ratio Path2/Path1" on page 82
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:SENSitivity?
Queries the sensitivity of the externally applied signal for amplitude modulation. The
sensitivity depends on the set modulation depth.
The returned value reports the sensitivity in %/V. It is assigned to the voltage value for
full modulation of the input.
Return values:
<Sensitivity>
float
Range:
0 to 100
Example:
See Example "Using an external signal source" on page 367.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:SOURce <Source>
Selects the modulation source for amplitude modulation.
Suffix:
<ch>
Parameters:
<Source>
.
1 to 2
Modulation signal channel
LF1 | LF2 | NOISe | EXT1 | EXT2 | EXTernal | INTernal
LF1|LF2
Uses an internally generated LF signal.
EXT1|EXT2
Uses an externally supplied LF signal.
NOISe
Uses the internally generated noise signal.
INTernal
Uses the internally generated signal of LF1.
EXTernal
Uses an external LF signal (EXT1).
*RST:
LF1 <AM1>; LF2 <AM2>
Example:
See Example "Creating an amplitude modulated RF signal"
on page 366.
Manual operation:
See "Source" on page 80
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:STATe <State>
Activates amplitude modulation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
368
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Suffix:
<ch>
Parameters:
<State>
.
1 to 2
Modulation signal channel
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Creating an amplitude modulated RF signal"
on page 366.
Manual operation:
See "State" on page 79
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>[:DEPTh] <Depth>
Sets the depth of the amplitude modulation in percent.
Suffix:
<ch>
Parameters:
<Depth>
.
1 to 2
Modulation signal channel
float
Range:
0 to 100
Increment: 0.1
Example:
See Example "Creating an amplitude modulated RF signal"
on page 366.
Manual operation:
See "AM Depth" on page 82
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:EXTernal:COUPling <Coupling>
Selects the coupling mode for the external modulation input in case of amplitude modulation.
Parameters:
<Coupling>
AC | DC
AC
Passes the AC signal component of the modulation signal.
DC
Passes the modulation signal with both components, AC and
DC.
*RST:
Example:
12.15.1.3
AC
:SOURce:AM:EXTernal:COUPling AC
SOURce:FM Subsystem
Option: R&S SMAB-K720
The FM subsystem contains the commands for setting the frequency modulation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
369
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example: Creating a frequency modulated RF signal
Using the internal LF generator, the following command sequence configures a frequency modulated signal.
// Reset the instrument to start from a defined state
*RST
// Set RF frequency and amplitude
SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 6000000000
SOURce1:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude -25
// Configure the modulation signal
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SHAPe SINE
SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency 20000
// Configure the frequency modulation settings and switch FM on
SOURce1:FM1:SOURce LF1
SOURce1:FM1:DEViation 1000
SOURce1:FM:RATio 40
SOURce1:FM:MODe LNOise
SOURce1:FM1:STATe 1
// Switch on LF and RF signal output
SOURce1:LFOutput1:STATe 1
OUTPut1:STATe 1
Example: Using an external signal source
Alternatively configure the frequency modulation settings with an external modulation
signal.
// Reset the instrument to start from a defined state
*RST
// Set RF frequency and amplitude
SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 6000000000
SOURce1:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude -25
// Configure the frequency modulation settings and switch FM on
SOURce1:FM1:SOURce EXT1
SOURce1:FM1:DEViation 5000
// Query the input sensitivity at the external modulation input
:SOURCe1:FM1:SENSitivity?
// Response:
1000
// since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V,
// the resulting sensitivity is precisely 5000 Hz/V.
// Switch on FM and RF signal output
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
370
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
SOURce1:FM1:STATe 1
OUTPut1:STATe 1
The following commands are available:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>[:DEViation]............................................................................... 371
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:MODE.............................................................................................371
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:RATio............................................................................................. 372
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:SENSitivity?.....................................................................................372
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>:SOURce.................................................................................. 372
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>:STATe..................................................................................... 373
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>[:DEViation] <Deviation>
Sets the modulation deviation of the frequency modulation in Hz.
Suffix:
FM<ch>
Parameters:
<Deviation>
.
1|2
Modulation signal channel
float
The maximum deviation depends on the RF frequency and the
selected modulation mode (see data sheet).
Range:
0 to max
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
1E3
Example:
See Example "Creating a frequency modulated RF signal"
on page 370.
Manual operation:
See "Deviation" on page 80
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:MODE <Mode>
Selects the mode for the frequency modulation.
Parameters:
<Mode>
HBANdwidth | LNOise
HBANdwidth
Selects maximum range for modulation bandwidth.
LNOise
Selects optimized phase noise and spurious characteristics with
reduced modulation bandwidth and FM deviation.
*RST:
HBANdwidth
Example:
See Example "Creating a frequency modulated RF signal"
on page 370.
Manual operation:
See "Mode" on page 81
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
371
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:RATio <Ratio>
Sets the deviation ratio (path2 to path1) in percent.
Parameters:
<Ratio>
float
Range:
0 to 100
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
100
Example:
See Example "Creating a frequency modulated RF signal"
on page 370.
Manual operation:
See "Ratio Path2/Path1" on page 80
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:SENSitivity?
Queries the sensitivity of the externally supplied signal for frequency modulation. The
sensitivity depends on the set modulation deviation.
Return values:
<Sensitivity>
float
Sensitivity in Hz/V.
It is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input.
Range:
0 to max
Increment: 0.01
Example:
See Example "Using an external signal source" on page 370.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>:SOURce <Source>
Selects the modulation source for frequency modulation.
Suffix:
FM<ch>
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
.
1|2
Modulation signal channel.
372
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Source>
LF1 | LF2 | NOISe | EXT1 | INTernal | EXTernal | EXT2
LF1|LF2
Uses an internally generated LF signal.
INTernal = LF2
Works like LF1
EXTernal
Works like EXT1
EXT1|EXT1
Uses an externally supplied LF signal.
NOISe
Uses the internally generated noise signal.
*RST:
LF1 <FM1>; LF2 <FM2>
Example:
See Example "Creating a frequency modulated RF signal"
on page 370.
Manual operation:
See "Source" on page 80
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>:STATe <State>
Activates frequency modulation.
Suffix:
FM<ch>
Parameters:
<State>
.
1..2
determines the modulation signal channel.
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
12.15.1.4
0
Example:
See Example "Creating a frequency modulated RF signal"
on page 370.
Manual operation:
See "State" on page 79
SOURce:PM Subsystem
Option: R&S SMAB-K720
The PM subsystem contains the commands for setting the phase modulation. You can
configure the internal modulation source (LF generator) with the commands listed in
Chapter 12.15.5, "SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem", on page 403 .
Example: Performing phase modulation
The following example shows a command sequence to perform phase modulation.
// Reset the instrument to start from an initial state
*RST; *CLS
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
373
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
// Set the RF signal frequency and level
SOURce:FREQuency:CW 4000000000
SOURce:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude -25
// Configure the phase modulation settings
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SHAPe SINE
SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency 1000
// Select the LF signal generated by the internal modulation generator
// or the internally generated noise signal
SOURce1:PM1:DEViation 1
SOURce1:PM1:SOURce LF1
// SOURce1:PM1:SOURce INTernal
// SOURce1:PM1:SOURce NOISe
SOURce1:PM1:RATio 40
SOURce1:PM1:MODE HBAN
// Alternatively configure the phase modulation settings for an
// external modulation source and query the input sensitivity.
SOURce1:PM1:SOURce EXT1
// SOURce1:PM1:SOURce EXTernal
SOURce1:PM1:DEViation 1
SOURce1:PM1:SENSitivity?
// Response: 1
// since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V,
// the resulting sensitivity is precisely 1RAD/V.
// Activate the signal output
SOURce1:PM1:STATe 1
OUTPut1:STATe 1
The following commands are available:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:MODE............................................................................................ 374
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:RATio............................................................................................. 375
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:SENSitivity?.................................................................................... 375
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM<ch>:SOURce.................................................................................. 375
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM<ch>:STATe.....................................................................................376
[:SOURce]:PM<ch>[:DEViation].......................................................................................376
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:MODE <Mode>
Selects the mode for the phase modulation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
374
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Mode>
HBANdwidth | HDEViation | LNOise
HBANdwidth
Sets the maximum available bandwidth.
HDEViation
Sets the maximum range for ΦM deviation.
LNOise
Selects a phase modulation mode with phase noise and spurious characteristics close to CW mode.
*RST:
HBANdwidth
Example:
See Example "Performing phase modulation" on page 373.
Manual operation:
See "Mode" on page 81
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:RATio <Ratio>
Sets the deviation ratio (path2 to path1) in percent.
Parameters:
<Ratio>
float
Range:
0 to 100
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
100
Example:
See Example "Performing phase modulation" on page 373.
Manual operation:
See "Ratio Path2/Path1" on page 81
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:SENSitivity?
Queries the sensitivity of the externally applied signal for phase modulation.
The returned value reports the sensitivity in RAD/V. It is assigned to the voltage value
for full modulation of the input.
Return values:
<Sensitivity>
float
Example:
See Example "Performing phase modulation" on page 373.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM<ch>:SOURce <Source>
Selects the modulation source for phase modulation signal.
Suffix:
PM<ch>
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
.
1|2
Sets the modulation signal channel.
375
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Source>
LF1 | LF2 | NOISe | EXT1 | EXT2 | INTernal | EXTernal
LF1|LF2
Uses an internally generated LF signal.
EXT1|EXT2
Uses an externally supplied LF signal.
NOISe
Uses the internally generated noise signal.
INTernal
Uses the internally generated signal of LF1.
EXTernal
Uses an external LF signal (EXT1).
*RST:
LF1 <PM1>; LF2 <PM2>
Example:
See Example "Performing phase modulation" on page 373.
Manual operation:
See "Source" on page 80
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM<ch>:STATe <State>
Activates phase modulation.
Activation of phase modulation deactivates frequency modulation.
Suffix:
PM<ch>
Parameters:
<State>
.
1|2
Sets the modulation signal channel.
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Performing phase modulation" on page 373.
Manual operation:
See "State" on page 79
[:SOURce]:PM<ch>[:DEViation] <Deviation>
Sets the modulation deviation of the phase modulation in RAD.
Parameters:
<Deviation>
float
The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency and the
selected modulation mode (see data sheet).
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to max
1
1
RAD
Example:
See Example "Performing phase modulation" on page 373.
Manual operation:
See "Deviation" on page 81
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
376
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
12.15.1.5
SOURce:PULM Subsystem
Option: see Chapter 4.1, "Required Options", on page 74.
The PULM subsystem contains the commands for setting the pulse modulation.
●
●
●
Pulse Modulation Settings.....................................................................................377
Pulse Train Settings.............................................................................................. 382
Pulse Train Data Exchange.................................................................................. 385
Pulse Modulation Settings
With the commands described in this section, you can configure the settings for pulse
modulation, select the trigger mode and determine delay times for the pulse modulation signal.
Example: Perform pulse modulation
The example shows a command sequence to perform pulse modulation.
// Reset the instrument to start from an initial state
*RST; *CLS
// Set the RF signal frequency and level
SOURce:FREQuency:CW 4000000000
SOURce:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude -25
// Configure the pulse modulation settings
// Select the internal modulation generator,
// set trigger mode, select pulse mode, transition type
// and select the polarity of the internally generated pulse video output
SOURce:PULM:SOURce INT
SOURce:PULM:TRIGger:MODE AUTO
SOURce:PULM:MODE DOUB
SOURce:PULM:TTYPe SMO
SOURce:PULM:OUTPut:VIDeo:POLarity INVerted
// Alternatively configure the pulse modulation settings for
// external modulation source
// Select the source, set the polarity of the external signal,
// select the impedance for the external pulse modulation input/
// for the external pulse modulation trigger input
SOURce:PULM:SOURce EXT
SOURce:PULM:POLarity NORMal
SOURce:PULM:IMPedance G1K
// Configure the pulse generator settings
// Set pulse period, width, and delay
SOURce:PULM:PERiod 10 us
SOURce:PULM:WIDth 8 us
SOURce:PULM:DOUBle:WIDTh 0.0000012
SOURce:PULM:DOUBle:DELay 0.0000045
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
377
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
// Activate the signal output
SOURce:PGENerator:OUTPut:STATe 1
SOURce:PULM:STATe 1
OUTPut1:STATe 1
The following commands are available:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:SOURce..................................................................................... 378
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:PERiod....................................................................................... 378
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DELay........................................................................................ 379
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:DELay............................................................................379
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:WIDTh........................................................................... 379
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:POLarity..................................................................................... 379
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:IMPedance..................................................................................380
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:THReshold..................................................................................380
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:MODE........................................................................................ 380
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:OUTPut:VIDeo:POLarity............................................................... 381
[:SOURce]:PULM[:INTernal][:TRAin]:TRIGger:IMMediate...................................................381
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:STATe........................................................................................ 381
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRIGger:MODE........................................................................... 381
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TTYPe........................................................................................ 381
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:WIDTh........................................................................................ 382
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:STATe........................................................................... 382
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:SOURce <Source>
Selects between the internal (pulse generator) or an external pulse signal for the modulation.
Parameters:
<Source>
INTernal | EXTernal
*RST:
INTernal
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 377.
Manual operation:
See "Source" on page 78
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:PERiod <Period>
Sets the period of the generated pulse, that means the repetition frequency of the internally generated modulation signal.
Parameters:
<Period>
float
The minimum value depends on the installed options
R&S SMAB-K22 or R&S SMAB-K23
Range:
20E-9 to 100
Increment: 5E-9
*RST:
10E-6
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 377.
378
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation:
See "Pulse Period" on page 86
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DELay <Delay>
Sets the pulse delay.
Parameters:
<Delay>
float
*RST:
1ms
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 377.
Manual operation:
See "Pulse Delay" on page 87
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:DELay <Delay>
Sets the delay from the start of the first pulse to the start of the second pulse.
Parameters:
<Delay>
float
*RST:
1E-6
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 377.
Manual operation:
See "Double Pulse Delay" on page 87
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:WIDTh <Width>
Sets the width of the second pulse.
Parameters:
<Width>
float
Increment: 5E-9
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 377.
Manual operation:
See "Double Pulse Width" on page 87
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:POLarity <Polarity>
Sets the polarity of the externally applied modulation signal.
Parameters:
<Polarity>
NORMal | INVerted
NORMal
Suppresses the RF signal during the pulse pause.
INVerted
Suppresses the RF signal during the pulse.
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
NORMal
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 377.
379
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation:
See "Polarity" on page 95
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:IMPedance <Impedance>
Sets the impedance for the external pulse trigger and pulse modulation input.
Parameters:
<Impedance>
G50 | G10K
*RST:
G50
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 377.
Manual operation:
See "Impedance" on page 95
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:THReshold <Threshold>
Sets the threshold for the input signal at the PULSE EXT connector.
Parameters:
<Threshold>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 2
0.1
1
V
Example:
SOURce:PULM:THReshold 1
Manual operation:
See "Threshold" on page 95
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:MODE <Mode>
Selects the mode for the pulse modulation.
Parameters:
<Mode>
SINGle | DOUBle | PTRain
SINGle
Generates a single pulse.
DOUBle
Generates two pulses within one pulse period.
PTRain
Generates a user-defined pulse train.
Specify the pulse sequence with the commands:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition
*RST:
SINGle
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 377.
Options:
PTRain requires R&S SMAB-K27
Manual operation:
See "Pulse Mode" on page 83
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
380
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:OUTPut:VIDeo:POLarity <Polarity>
Sets the polarity of the pulse video (modulating) signal, related to the RF (modulated)
signal.
Parameters:
<Polarity>
NORMal | INVerted
NORMal
the video signal follows the RF signal, that means it is high
wihen RF signal is high and vice versa.
INVerted
the video signal follows in inverted mode.
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 377.
Manual operation:
See "Video Polarity" on page 78
[:SOURce]:PULM[:INTernal][:TRAin]:TRIGger:IMMediate
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:STATe <State>
Activates pulse modulation.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 377.
Manual operation:
See "State" on page 77
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRIGger:MODE <Mode>
Selects a trigger mode - auto, external, external single or external gated - for generating the modulation signal.
Parameters:
<Mode>
AUTO | EXTernal | EGATe | ESINgle
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 377.
Manual operation:
See "Trigger Mode" on page 84
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TTYPe <Source>
Sets the transition mode for the pulse signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
381
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Source>
SMOothed | FAST
SMOothed
flattens the slew rate, resulting in longer rise/fall times.
FAST
enables fast transitions with shortest rise and fall times.
*RST:
FAST
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 377.
Manual operation:
See "Transition Type" on page 78
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:WIDTh <Width>
Sets the width of the generated pulse, that means the pulse length. It must be at least
20ns less than the set pulse period.
Parameters:
<Width>
float
Range:
20E-9 to 100
Increment: 10E-9
*RST:
2E-6
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 377.
Manual operation:
See "Pulse Width" on page 86
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:STATe <State>
Provided for backward compatibility with former Rohde & Schwarz signal generators.
Works like the command [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:MODE DOUBle.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Pulse Train Settings
Option: R&S SMAB-K27
This section describes the commands for the pulse train modulation and the associated file handling. For background information, see Chapter 4.4.3.2, "Pulse Generator
> Pulse Train Settings", on page 87.
Example: Generating a pulse train signal
The following settings are required to perform pulse train modulation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
382
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Always create and select pulse train data list first before you activate the pulse train
mode.
Otherwise, an error is displayed
*RST; *CLS
// Set the RF signal frequency and level
SOURce:FREQuency:CW 4000000000
SOURce:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude -25
// Create a pulse train data list
// Select the directory
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/'
SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:CATalog?
// my_pt
// Create and7or select the pulse train data file
SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:SELect "/var/user/pt"
// Enter the pulse train data
SOURCe:PULM:TRAin:ONTime 0.0001,0.00025,0.0001
SOURCe:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime 500us,500us,300us
SOURCe:PULM:TRAin:REPetition 2,0,3
// the second pulse is ignored
// Select pulse train mode
// Select the internal modulation generator and the pulse mode
SOURce1:PULM:SOURce INT
SOURce1:PULM:MODE PTR
SOURce1:PULM:TRIGger:MODE EXT
SOURce1:PGENerator:OUTPut:STATe 1
SOURce1:PGENerator:OUTPut:POLarity NORM
SOURce:PGENerator:OUTPut:STATe 1
SOURce:PULM:STATe 1
OUTPut1:STATe 1
// SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:CATalog?
// my_pt, pt
// SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEL "/var/user/my_pt"
The following commands are available:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:CATalog?..........................................................................384
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DELete............................................................................. 384
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime............................................................................ 384
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime.......................................................................... 384
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition:POINts?............................................................384
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime:POINts?............................................................... 384
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime:POINts?............................................................. 384
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition.........................................................................385
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:SELect..............................................................................385
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
383
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:CATalog?
Queries the available pulse train files in the specified directory.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
List of list filenames, separated by commas
Example:
See Example "Generating a pulse train signal" on page 382.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Pulse Train Data" on page 89
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DELete <Filename>
Deletes the specified pulse train file.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
Filename or complete file path; file extension is optional.
Example:
See Example "Generating a pulse train signal" on page 382.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "Edit Pulse Train Data" on page 89
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime <OnTime>
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime <OffTime>
Enters the pulse on/off times values in the selected list.
Parameters:
<OffTime>
Offtime#1{, Offtime#2, ...} | binary block data
List of comma-separated numeric values or binary block data,
where:
The list of numbers can be of any length.
In binary block format, 8 (4) bytes are always interpreted as a
floating-point number with double accuracy.
See :FORMat[:DATA] on page 341 for details.
The maximum length is 2047 values.
Range:
0 ns to 5 ms
Example:
See Example "Generating a pulse train signal" on page 382.
Manual operation:
See "Edit Pulse Train Data" on page 89
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition:POINts?
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime:POINts?
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime:POINts?
Queries the number of on and off time entries and repetitions in the selected list.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
384
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Return values:
<Points>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to INT_MAX
0
Example:
See Example "Generating a pulse train signal" on page 382.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition <Repetition>
Sets the number of repetitions for each pulse on/off time value pair.
Parameters:
<Repetition>
Repetition#1{, Repetition#2, ...}
0 = ignore value pair
Set "Repetition = 0" to skip a particular pulse without deleting
the pulse on/off time value pair
Range:
0 to 65535
Example:
See Example "Generating a pulse train signal" on page 382.
Manual operation:
See "Edit Pulse Train Data" on page 89
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:SELect <Filename>
Selects or creates a data list in pulse train mode.
If the list with the selected name does not exist, a new list is created.
Parameters:
<Filename>
string
Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See Example "Generating a pulse train signal" on page 382.
Manual operation:
See "Pulse Train Data" on page 89
Pulse Train Data Exchange
Option: R&S SMAB-K27
With the following commands, you can configure pulse trains in ASCII format and
export or import them accordingly.
SOURce1:PULM:SOURce INT
SOURce1:PULM:MODE PTR
SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:SELect "/var/user/pt"
SOURce1:PULM:STATe 1
SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE EXP
SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension TXT
SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal DOT
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
385
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn SEM
SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn COMM
SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:SELect "/var/user/pt.pulstrn"
SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect "/var/user/pt_script.txt"
SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:EXECute
The following commands are available:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE............................................................386
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension............................................386
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal............................... 386
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn............................... 387
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?............................................. 387
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect................................................. 387
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:SELect...........................................................387
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:EXECute........................................................ 388
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE <Mode>
Determines the import or export of a list.
Specify the source or destination file with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:
TRAin:DEXChange:SELect.
Parameters:
<Mode>
IMPort | EXPort
*RST:
IMPort
Example:
See "Pulse Train Data Exchange" on page 385.
Manual operation:
See " Mode " on page 92
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension <Extension>
Determines the extension of the ASCII file for import or export, or to query existing
files.
Parameters:
<Extension>
TXT | CSV
*RST:
TXT
Example:
See "Pulse Train Data Exchange" on page 385.
Manual operation:
See "ASCII File Settings" on page 92
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal <Decimal>
Sets "." (decimal point) or "," (comma) as the decimal separator used in the ASCII data
with floating-point numerals.
Parameters:
<Decimal>
DOT | COMMa
*RST:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
DOT
386
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
See "Pulse Train Data Exchange" on page 385.
Manual operation:
See "ASCII File Settings" on page 92
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn <Column>
Selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table.
Parameters:
<Column>
TABulator | SEMicolon | COMMa | SPACe
*RST:
COMMa
Example:
See "Pulse Train Data Exchange" on page 385.
Manual operation:
See "ASCII File Settings" on page 92
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?
Queries the available ASCII files in the current or specified directory.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
List of ASCII files *.txt or *.csv, separated by commas.
Example:
See "Pulse Train Data Exchange" on page 385.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Select Source/Select Destination" on page 93
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect <Filename>
Selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported.
Parameters:
<Filename>
string
Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See "Pulse Train Data Exchange" on page 385.
Manual operation:
See "Select Source/Select Destination" on page 93
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:SELect <Filename>
Selects the ASCII file for import or export, containing a pulse train list.
Parameters:
<Filename>
string
Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See "Pulse Train Data Exchange" on page 385.
Manual operation:
See "Select Source / Select ASCII Destination" on page 93
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
387
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:EXECute
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Import / Export" on page 94
Executes the import or export of the selected list file, according to the transfer direction
set with command [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE.
12.15.2 SOURce:CORRection Subsystem
The SOURce:CORRection subsystem contains the commands for defining correction
values for external test assemblies.
You can acquire the correction values any time, regardless of the modulation settings
of the generator. The correction is performed by adding the correction values to the
output level of the respective RF frequency.
Determine the correction values in one of the following ways:
●
Measure the RF output level at several frequency points and enter the value pairs
manually in a table
●
Connect an R&S NRP to the generator output signal and send the command [:
SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA[:SENSor<ch>][:POWer]:SONCe to
fill the table automatically.
Correction values can be stored in files with the predefined file extension *.uco.
Refer to Chapter 12.5.2, "Accessing Files in the Default or in a Specified Directory",
on page 314 for general information on file handling in the default and in a specific
directory.
Programming example
The examples in this section assume that:
●
The files are stored in the default directory.
●
*RST does not affect data lists.
Example: Create a table with user-defined correction values for the RF level
The following example shows a command sequence to create and activate a list for
assigning level correction values to arbitrary RF frequencies. Further hardware settings
are not considered.
// Reset the instrument to start from an initial state
// Query the available user correction list files in the default directory
// Select a file or create a new one
// ******************************************************************
*RST; *CLS
SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:CATalog?
// Response: shows the name of available user correction files (if applicable)
// Select a file
SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:SELect "/var/user/ucor1"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
388
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
// Create a new file (if not existing)
SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:SELect "/var/user/ucor2"
// Enter the frequency/level value pairs in the table;
// existing data is overwritten
// Query the number of frequency/power entries in the selected list
SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency 100MHz,110MHz,120MHz,130MHz,140MHz,150MHz
SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer -10,-7.5,-5.0,-2.5,0,2.5
SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency:POINts?
// 6
SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer:POINTs?
// 6
// Enable user correction mode and RF output
SOURce1:CORRection:STATe 1
OUTPut1:STATe ON
// Query the currently used correction value
SOURce1:CORRection:VALue?
// -2.5
// Delete a user correction file
SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DELEte "/var/user/ucor1.uco"
Example: Fill user correction data with sensor
The following example shows a command sequence to fill a user correction list automatically supported by a connected R&S NRP.
// Fill a user correction list with the level values
// measured by an R&S NRP,
// store the data in a file and enable multi level user correction.
*RST; *CLS
SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:SELect "/var/user/Ucor1_AutoFill.uco"
SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency 100MHz,110MHz,120MHz,130MHz,140MHz,150MHz
SOURce1:CORRection:ZERoing:STATe 1
SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DATA:SENSor1:POWer:SONCe
// Query the number of automatically filled correction level values
SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer:POINTs?
// 6
SOURce1:CORRection:STATe 1
// Query the correction value at a certain frequency
FREQ 120000000
SOURce1:CORRection:VALue?
// -52.13
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
389
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example: User correction data exchange
The following example shows a command sequence to export a user correction list
(here the list created with the example before) into an ASCII file. Further hardware settings are not considered.
// Select a user correction file for exporting to file in ASCII format
// Set ASCII data parameters
// Set the ASCII file extension, the decimal separator
// and the column separator for the ASCII data
SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?
// my_ucor
SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:CATalog?
// ucor1,Ucor1_AutoFill
SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:SELect "/var/user/Ucor1_AutoFill.uco"
SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension CSV
SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal DOT
SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn COMMa
// Select source and destination
SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect "/var/user/ucor2ASCII"
// Export the user correction data into the ASCII file
SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE EXPort
SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute
// Query the available ASCII files with extension .csv
SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?
// ucor2ASCII,my_ucor
// Import a user correction ASCII file
SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE IMPort
SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILE:SELect "/var/user/my_ucor"
SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute
●
●
12.15.2.1
Correction Settings................................................................................................390
Correction Data Exchange.................................................................................... 393
Correction Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency <Frequency>
Enters the frequency value in the table selected with [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:
CSET[:SELect].
Parameters:
<Frequency>
Frequency#1[, Frequency#2, ...]
String of values with default unit Hz.
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values
for the RF level" on page 388 .
390
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation:
See "Edit List Mode Data" on page 139
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer <Power>
Enters the level values to the table selected with [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:
CSET[:SELect].
Parameters:
<Power>
Power#1[, Power#2, ...]
String of values with default unit dB.
Example:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values
for the RF level" on page 388 .
Manual operation:
See "Edit List Mode Data" on page 139
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency:POINts?
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer:POINts?
Queries the number of frequency/level values in the selected table.
Return values:
<Points>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 10000
0
Example:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values
for the RF level" on page 388 .
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA[:SENSor<ch>][:POWer]:SONCe
Fills the selected user correction table with the level values measured by the power
sensor for the given frequencies.
To select the used power sensor set the suffix in key word SENSe.
Example:
See Example "Fill user correction data with sensor"
on page 389.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See " Fill User Correction Data with Sensor" on page 154
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET[:SELect] <Filename>
Selects or creates a file for the user correction data.
If the file with the selected name does not exist, a new file is created.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
391
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Filename>
string
Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values
for the RF level" on page 388 .
Manual operation:
See "UCOR Data" on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:VALue?
Queries the current value for user correction.
Return values:
<Value>
float
Range:
-100 to 100
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values
for the RF level" on page 388 .
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "User Correction" on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:ZERoing:STATe <State>
Activates the zeroing procedure before filling the user correction data acquired by a
sensor.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
See Example "Fill user correction data with sensor"
on page 389.
Manual operation:
See " Fill User Correction Data with Sensor" on page 154
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA[:SENSor<ch>][:POWer]:SONCe
Fills the selected user correction list with the level values measured by the power sensor for the given frequencies.
Suffix:
SENSor<ch>
.
Defines the used power sensor, i.e. the sensor whose values
are used.
Example:
See Example "Fill user correction data with sensor"
on page 389.
Usage:
Event
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
392
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection[:STATe] <State>
Activates user correction with the currently selected table.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values
for the RF level" on page 388 .
Manual operation:
See "State" on page 150
[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog?
Queries a list of available user correction tables.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
List of list filenames, separated by commas
Example:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values
for the RF level" on page 388 .
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "UCOR Data" on page 150
[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DELete <Filename>
Deletes the specified user correction list file.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
Filename or complete file path; file extension is optional.
12.15.2.2
Example:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values
for the RF level" on page 388 .
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "UCOR Data" on page 150
Correction Data Exchange
With the following commands, you can configure user correction lists and export or
import them accordingly.
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?
Queries the available ASCII files for export or import of user correction data in the current or specified directory.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
393
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
List of ASCII files *.txt or *.csv, separated by commas.
Example:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values
for the RF level" on page 388 .
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Select Source/Select Destination" on page 93
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension <Extension>
Determines the extension of the ASCII files for file import or export, or to query existing
files.
Parameters:
<Extension>
TXT | CSV
*RST:
TXT
Example:
See Example "User correction data exchange" on page 390 .
Manual operation:
See "ASCII File Settings" on page 92
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect <Filename>
Selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported.
Parameters:
<Filename>
string
Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See Example "User correction data exchange" on page 390 .
Manual operation:
See "Select Source/Select Destination" on page 93
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn <Column>
Selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table.
Parameters:
<Column>
TABulator | SEMicolon | COMMa | SPACe
*RST:
COMMa
Example:
See Example "User correction data exchange" on page 390 .
Manual operation:
See "ASCII File Settings" on page 92
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal <Decimal>
Sets the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between '.' (decimal point) and ','
(comma) with floating-point numerals.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
394
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Decimal>
DOT | COMMa
*RST:
DOT
Example:
See Example "User correction data exchange" on page 390 .
Manual operation:
See "ASCII File Settings" on page 92
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute
Executes the import or export of the selected correction list, according to the previously
set transfer direction with command [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:
MODE.
Example:
See Example "User correction data exchange" on page 390 .
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Import / Export" on page 94
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE <Mode>
Determines import or export of a user correction list.
Specify the source or destination file with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:
CORRection:DEXChange:SELect.
Parameters:
<Mode>
IMPort | EXPort
*RST:
IMPort
Example:
See Example "User correction data exchange" on page 390 .
Manual operation:
See " Mode " on page 92
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:SELect <Filename>
Selects the ASCII file for import or export, containing a user correction list.
Parameters:
<Filename>
string
Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See Example "User correction data exchange" on page 390 .
Manual operation:
See "Select Source / Select ASCII Destination" on page 93
12.15.3 SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem
The SOURce:FREQuency subsystem contains the commands used to define the frequency settings for the RF sources and sweeps.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
395
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example: Frequency configuration
SOURce1:FREQuency:MODE CW
SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 6000000000
SOURce1:FREQuency:OFFSet 2000000000
SOURce1:FREQuency:MULTiplier 1.5
SOURce1:FREQuency:CW?
// 11000000000
// SOURce1:FREQuency:STEP:MODE USER
// SOURce1:FREQuency:STEP:INCRement 1000000
// SOURce1:FREQuency:CW UP
SOURce1:PHASe 2
SOURce1:PHASe:REFerence
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MODE................................................................................396
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed].........................................................................397
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]:RCL................................................................. 398
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual..............................................................................398
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MULTiplier..........................................................................399
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:OFFSet.............................................................................. 399
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:CENTer..............................................................................400
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:SPAN.................................................................................400
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STARt................................................................................400
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STOP.................................................................................401
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP:MODE...................................................................... 401
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement]............................................................. 402
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:PLL:MODE......................................................................... 402
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MODE <Mode>
Sets the frequency mode for generating the RF output signal. The selected mode
determines the parameters to be used for further frequency settings.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
396
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Mode>
CW | FIXed | SWEep | LIST
CW|FIXed
Sets the fixed frequency mode. CW and FIXed are synonyms.
The instrument operates at a defined frequency, set with command [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed].
SWEep
Sets sweep mode.
The instrument processes frequency (and level) settings in
defined sweep steps.
Set the range and current frequency with the commands:
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STARt on page 400 and [:
SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STOP on page 401,
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:CENTer on page 400,
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:SPAN on page 400,
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual on page 398
LIST
Sets list mode.
The instrument processes frequency and level settings by
means of values loaded from a list.
To configure list mode settings, use the commands of the Chapter 12.15.6, "SOURce:LIST Subsystem", on page 416.
*RST:
CW
Example:
See Example "Frequency configuration" on page 396
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448
Manual operation:
See "State (RF frequency sweep)" on page 124
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] <Fixed>
Sets the frequency of the RF output signal in the selected path.
The effect depends on the selected mode:
●
In CW mode (FREQ:MODE CW | FIXed), the instrument operates at a fixed frequency.
●
In sweep mode (FREQ:MODE SWE), the value applies to the sweep frequency.
The instrument processes the frequency settings in defined sweep steps.
●
In user mode (FREQ:STEP:MODE USER), you can vary the current frequency
step by step.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
397
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Fixed>
float
The following settings influence the value range:
An offset set with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:
FREQuency:OFFSet
Numerical value
Sets the frequency in CW and sweep mode
UP|DOWN
Varies the frequency step by step in user mode.
The frequency is increased or decreased by the value set with
the command [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP[:
INCRement].
Range:
*RST:
(RFmin + OFFSet) to (RFmax + OFFSet)
100 MHz
Example:
See Example "Frequency configuration" on page 396
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448
Manual operation:
See "Frequency" on page 66
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]:RCL <Rcl>
Set whether the RF frequency value is retained or taken from a loaded instrument configuration, when you recall instrument settings with command *RCL.
Parameters:
<Rcl>
INCLude | EXCLude
INCLude
Takes the frequency value of the loaded settings.
EXCLude
Retains the current frequency when an instrument configuration
is loaded.
*RST:
INCLude
Example:
SOURce1:FREQuency:CW:RCL INCLude
Manual operation:
See "Exclude Frequency" on page 199
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual <Manual>
Sets the frequency and triggers a sweep step manually if SWEep:MODE MAN.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
398
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Manual>
float
You can select any frequency within the setting range, where:
STARt is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STARt
STOP is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STOP
OFFSet is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:OFFSet
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
(STARt + OFFSet) to (STOP + OFFSet)
0.01Hz
100 MHz
Hz
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448
Manual operation:
See " Current Frequency" on page 125
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MULTiplier <Multiplier>
Sets the multiplication factor NFREQ:MULT of a subsequent downstream instrument.
The parameters offset fFREQ:OFFSer and multiplier NFREQ:MULT affect the frequency value
set with the command FREQ.
The query FREQ? returns the value corresponding to the formula:
fFREQ = fRFout * NFREQ:MULT + fFREQ:OFFSer
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 64.
Parameters:
<Multiplier>
float
Range:
1 to dynamic
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
1
Example:
See Example "Frequency configuration" on page 396
Manual operation:
See "Multiplier" on page 66
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:OFFSet <Offset>
Sets the frequency offset fFREQ:OFFSet of a downstream instrument.
The parameters offset fFREQ:OFFSer and multiplier NFREQ:MULT affect the frequency value
set with the command FREQ.
The query FREQ? returns the value corresponding to the formula:
fFREQ = fRFout * NFREQ:MULT + fFREQ:OFFSer
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 64.
Note: The offset also affects RF frequency sweep.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
399
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Offset>
float
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Frequency configuration" on page 396
Manual operation:
See "Offset" on page 66
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:CENTer <Center>
Sets the center frequency of the sweep.
See Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118.
Parameters:
<Center>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
300 kHz to RFmax
0.01 Hz
300E6
Hz
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448
Manual operation:
See " Center Frequency " on page 129
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:SPAN <Span>
Sets the sapn of the frequency sweep range.
See Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118.
Parameters:
<Span>
float
Full freqeuncy range
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
400E6
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448
Manual operation:
See "Span" on page 129
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STARt <Start>
Sets the start frequency for the RF sweep.
See Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
400
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Start>
float
Range:
300kHz to RFmax
Increment: 0.01Hz
*RST:
100 MHz
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448
Manual operation:
See " Start Frequency/Stop Frequency " on page 129
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STOP <Stop>
Sets the stop frequency range for the RF sweep.
See Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118.
Parameters:
<Stop>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
300kHz to RFmax
0.01Hz
500 MHz
Hz
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448
Manual operation:
See " Start Frequency/Stop Frequency " on page 129
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP:MODE <Mode>
Defines the type of step size to vary the RF frequency at discrete steps with the commands FREQ UP or FREQ DOWN.
Parameters:
<Mode>
DECimal | USER
DECimal
Increases or decreases the level in steps of ten.
USER
Increases or decreases the level in increments, set with the
command FREQ:STEP[:INCR].
*RST:
Example:
DECimal
// increasing the RF frequency with a step size of 50 KHz
SOURce1:FREQuency:STEP 50E3
SOURce1:FREQuency:STEP:MODE USER
SOURce1:FREQuency:CW UP
Manual operation:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
See "Variation Active" on page 67
401
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement] <Increment>
Sets the step width.
You can use this value to vary the RF frequency with command FREQ UP or FREQ
DOWN, if you have activated FREQ:STEP:MODE USER.
Note: This value also applies to the step width of the rotary knob on the instrument
and, in user-defined step mode, increases or decreases the frequency.
Parameters:
<Increment>
float
Range:
0 Hz to RFmax - 100 kHz
Increment: 0.01 Hz
*RST:
1E6
Example:
See Example "Frequency configuration" on page 396
Manual operation:
See "Variation Step" on page 67
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:PLL:MODE <Mode>
Selects the PLL (Phase Locked Loop) bandwidth of the main synthesizer.
Parameters:
<Mode>
NORMal | NARRow
NORMal
Maximum modulation bandwidth and FM/PhiM deviation.
NARRow
Narrow PLL bandwidth
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
SOURce:FREQuency:PLL:MODE NORMal
Manual operation:
See "Main PLL Bandwidth" on page 66
12.15.4 SOURce:INPut Subsystem
The SOURce:INPut subsystem contains the commands for configuring the inputs for
external modulation signals. The instrument trigger setting influences all sweeps and is
effective in the List mode (Instrument Trigger).
[:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:COUPling........................................................................402
[:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:IMPedance<ch>...............................................................403
[:SOURce]:INPut:TRIGger:SLOPe................................................................................... 403
[:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:COUPling <Coupling>
Selects the coupling mode for an externally applied modulation signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
402
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Coupling>
AC | DC
AC
Passes the AC signal component of the modulation signal.
DC
Passes the modulation signal with both components, AC and
DC.
*RST:
Example:
AC
SOURce1:INPut:MODext:COUPling AC
SOURce1:INPut:MODext:IMPedance G50
Manual operation:
See "Coupling (AC/DC)" on page 100
[:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:IMPedance<ch> <Impedance>
Sets the impedance for the externally supplied modulation signal.
Parameters:
<Impedance>
G50 | G600 | HIGH
G50 = 50 Ohm to ground
G600 = 600 Ohm to ground
HIGH = 100 kOhm to ground
*RST:
HIGH
Example:
See [:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:COUPling
on page 402.
Manual operation:
See "Impedance" on page 100
[:SOURce]:INPut:TRIGger:SLOPe <Slope>
Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger.
Parameters:
<Slope>
NEGative | POSitive
*RST:
Manual operation:
POSitive
See "Trigger Slope" on page 127
12.15.5 SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem
The SOURce:LFOutput subsystem contains the commands for setting the LF signal
source in CW and Sweep mode and for analog modulation.
Example: Setup an LF sweep
The following example shows a command sequence to set up an LF sweep.
// Reset the instrument to start from an initial state
*RST; *CLS
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
403
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
// Set the trigger mode, the sweep mode and the sweep range
TRIGger1:LFFSweep:SOURce SINGle
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO
SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency:STARt 1 kHz
SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency:STOP 7 kHz
// Select linear spacing
// Select the waveform shape for the frequency sweep cycle
// Set the step width and the dwell time.
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing LINear
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:SHAPe SAWtooth
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP:LINear 100 Hz
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:DWELl 150 ms
// Alternatively to the step width set the number of steps
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:POINts 61
// Activate change to start frequency while waiting for next trigger
// Prerequisites: sweep mode single and sweep waveform sawtooth
SOURce1:LFOutput:SWEep:FREQuency:RETRace 1
// Activate the LF frequency sweep
SOURce1:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE SWE
// Trigger the sweep(depending on the set mode) and query the status
// Perform a one-off LF sweep
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:EXECute
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:RUNNing?
// 1
// the sweep is running
// ***************************************************
// For manual step LF sweep use the following commands
*RST; *CLS
SOURce1:LFOutput:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE MANual
// Activate the LF frequency sweep
SOURce1:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE SWEep
// Activate LF Output1.
SOURce1:LFOutput1:STATe 1
// Input the frequency manually for each step
SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency:MANual 2 kHz
SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency:MANual 2.1 kHz
// Alternatively use UP or DOWN parameter with set step width.
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP:LINear 500 Hz
SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency:MANual UP
Example: Configuring the LF generator
The following is a simple example on how to configure the LF generator and output the
generated signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
404
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
// configure the signal of the LF1 generator
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SHAPe SQU
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SHAPe:PULSe:PERiod 0.001
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SHAPe:PULSe:WIDTh 0.0005
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SHAPe:PULSe:DCYCle 0.5
// configure the signal of the LF1 generator
SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe SINE
SOURce1:LFOutput2:FREQuency 1000000
SOURce1:LFOutput2:PERiod?
// 0.000001
// changing the LF signal shape
// SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe TRAP
// SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe:PULSe:PERiod 0.2
// SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe:TRAPeze:RISE 0.0001
// SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe:TRAPeze:FALL 0.001
// SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe:TRAPeze:FALL 0.0001
// SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe:TRAPeze:HIGH 0.0005
// SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe TRI
// SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe:PULSe:PERiod 0.1
// SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe:TRIangle:RISE 0.0001
// activate the LF output and select the LF1 as signal source
// configure the LF output signal
SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency:MODE CW
SOURce1:LFOutput1:STATe 1
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SOURce LF1
SOURce1:LFOutput1:INTernal:VOLTage 1
SOURce1:LFOutput1:OFFSet 0.001
●
●
12.15.5.1
LF Generator Settings...........................................................................................405
LF Sweep Settings................................................................................................ 413
LF Generator Settings
With the commands described in this section, you can configure the LF signal source.
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:BANDwidth?............................................................................406
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:FREQuency.............................................................................406
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:PERiod?..........................................................................406
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MANual............................................................... 407
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE................................................................. 407
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STOP.................................................................. 408
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STARt................................................................. 408
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:OFFSet.......................................................................................... 408
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:SOURce.........................................................................................408
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:SOURce:PATH........................................................................ 409
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>[:STATe].................................................................................. 409
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:VOLTage........................................................................................409
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:INTernal:VOLTage................................................................... 410
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
405
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe............................................................................410
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:DCYCle.................................................... 410
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:PERiod.....................................................410
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:WIDTh......................................................411
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:FALL.................................................... 411
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:HIGH.................................................... 411
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:PERiod................................................. 412
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:RISE.................................................... 412
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRIangle:PERiod..................................................412
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRIangle:RISE..................................................... 412
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:BANDwidth?
Queries the bandwidth of the external LF signal.
Return values:
<Bandwidth>
BW0M2 | BW10m
*RST:
Example:
BW10m
LFO:BAND?
// BW10m
// the bandwidth of the externally supplied LF signal is 10 MHz
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Bandwidth" on page 100
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the frequency of the LF signal in [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:
MODE CW|FIXed mode.
Note
●
If signal source "Internal" is set, the instrument performs the analog modulations
(AM/FM/PhiM/PM) with this frequency.
●
In sweep mode ([:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE SWE), the frequency is coupled with the sweep frequency.
Parameters:
<Frequency>
float
Range:
depends on the installed options
*RST:
1000
Default unit: Hz
Example:
SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency 5 kHz
// sets the LF frequency
Manual operation:
See "Frequency" on page 98
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:PERiod?
Queries the repetition frequency of the sine signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
406
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Return values:
<LfSinePeriod>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
1E-6 to 100
10E-9
0.001
s
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 404.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MANual <Manual>
Sets the frequency of the subsequent sweep step if LFO:SWE:MODE MAN.
Use a separate command for each sweep step.
Parameters:
<Manual>
float
You can select any value within the setting range, where:
STARt is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:
STARt
STOP is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:
STOP
Range:
STARt to STOP
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
1000
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 403.
Manual operation:
See " Current Frequency" on page 125
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE <Mode>
Sets the mode for the output of the LF generator frequency, and determines the commands to be used for frequency settings.
Parameters:
<Mode>
CW | FIXed | SWEep
CW|FIXed
Sets the fixed-frequency mode. CW and FIXed are synonyms.
To set the output frequency, use command [:SOURce]:
LFOutput<ch>:FREQuency
SWEep
Sets sweep mode.
To set the frequency, use the commands:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STARt and [:
SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STOP
Or [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MANual
*RST:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
CW
407
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 403.
Manual operation:
See "State (LF frequency sweep)" on page 97
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STOP <Stop>
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STARt <Start>
Sets the start/stop frequency for [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE
SWEep.
Parameters:
<Start>
float
Range:
0.1 Hz to 1 MHz
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
1 KHz
<Stop>
float
Range:
0.1 Hz to 1 MHz
Increment: 0.1 Hz
*RST:
100 KHz
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 403.
Manual operation:
See " Start Frequency/Stop Frequency " on page 129
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:OFFSet <Offset>
Sets a DC offset at the LF Output.
Parameters:
<Offset>
float
Range:
depends on lfo voltage
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 404.
Manual operation:
See "DC-Offset" on page 103
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:SOURce <Source>
Defines which signal is output
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
408
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Source>
LF1 | LF2 | NOISe | EXT1 | EXT2 | AM | FMPM
LF1|LF2
Selects the internally generated LF signal.
NOISe
Selects the internally generated noise signal.
EXT1|EXT2
Selects the externally supplied LF signal
AM|FMPM
Selects the AM or FM/PM signal.
*RST:
LF1
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 404.
Manual operation:
See "Source" on page 103
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:SOURce:PATH <SourPath>
Determines the path of the LF output source.
Parameters:
<SourPath>
A|B
*RST:
Example:
A
LFO:SOUR:PATH?
Queries the currently set path for the LF output signal source.
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>[:STATe] <State>
Activates LF signal output
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 404.
Manual operation:
See "State" on page 103
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:VOLTage <Voltage>
Sets the voltage of the LF output.
Parameters:
<Voltage>
float
Range:
dynamic (see data sheet)
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
1
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
SOURce:LFOutput:VOLTage 1.5
409
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation:
See "Output Voltage" on page 103
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:INTernal:VOLTage <Voltage>
Sets the output voltage for the LF generators.
Suffix:
<ch>
Parameters:
<Voltage>
.
[1]
Optional suffix
The set value applies to the LF generator selected with [:
SOURce]:LFOutput:SOURce
float
Range:
*RST:
Example:
0 to 4
0.5
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 404.
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe <Shape>
Selects the waveform shape of the LF signal.
Parameters:
<Shape>
SINE | SQUare | TRIangle | TRAPeze
*RST:
SINE
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 404.
Options:
TRIangle|TRAPeze require R&S SMAB-K24
Manual operation:
See "Shape" on page 97
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:DCYCle <DCycle>
Sets the duty cycle for the shape pulse.
Parameters:
<DCycle>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
1E-6 to 100
1E-6
50
PCT
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 404.
Manual operation:
See "Pulse Duty Cycle" on page 99
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:PERiod <Period>
Sets the period of the generated pulse. The period determines the repetition frequency
of the internal signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
410
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Period>
float
Range:
1E-6 to 100
Increment: 1E-8
*RST:
1E-3
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 404.
Manual operation:
See "Period" on page 98
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:WIDTh <Width>
Sets the pulse width of the generated pulse.
Parameters:
<Width>
float
Range:
1E-6 to 100
Increment: 1E-8
*RST:
5E-4
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 404.
Manual operation:
See "Pulse Width" on page 99
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:FALL <Fall>
Selects the fall time for the trapezoid shape of the LF generator.
Parameters:
<Fall>
float
Range:
1E-6 to 100
Increment: 10E-9
*RST:
250E-6
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 404.
Manual operation:
See "Trapezoid Rise / Fall" on page 99
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:HIGH <High>
Sets the high time for the trapezoid signal of the LF generator.
Parameters:
<High>
float
Range:
1E-6 to 100
Increment: 10E-9
*RST:
250E-6
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 404.
Manual operation:
See "Trapezoid High" on page 99
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
411
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:PERiod <Period>
Sets the period of the generated trapezoid shape. The period determines the repetition
frequency of the internal signal.
Parameters:
<Period>
float
Range:
1E-6 to 100
Increment: 1E-8
*RST:
1E-3
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 404.
Manual operation:
See "Period" on page 98
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:RISE <Rise>
Selects the rise time for the trapezoid shape of the LF generator.
Parameters:
<Rise>
float
Range:
1E-6 to 100
Increment: 10E-9
*RST:
250E-6
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 404.
Manual operation:
See "Trapezoid Rise / Fall" on page 99
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRIangle:PERiod <Period>
Sets the period of the generated pulse. The period determines the repetition frequency
of the internal signal.
Parameters:
<Period>
float
Range:
1E-6 to 100
Increment: 10E-9
*RST:
0.001
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 404.
Manual operation:
See "Period" on page 98
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRIangle:RISE <Rise>
Selects the rise time for the triangle single of the LF generator.
Parameters:
<Rise>
float
Range:
1E-6 to 100
Increment: 10E-9
*RST:
0.5E-3
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
412
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
12.15.5.2
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 404.
Manual operation:
See "Triangle Rise" on page 99
LF Sweep Settings
With the commands described in this section, you can configure the sweep of the LF
signal.
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl................................................... 413
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute................................................ 413
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE....................................................413
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts...................................................414
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RETRace............................................... 414
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RUNNing?..............................................415
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe...................................................415
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing................................................ 415
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic..................................415
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear]........................................ 416
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl <Dwell>
Sets the dwell time for each frequency step of the sweep.
Parameters:
<Dwell>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
1E-3 to 100
100E-6
15E-3
s
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 403.
Manual operation:
See " Dwell Time " on page 127
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute
Immediately starts an LF sweep.
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE determines which sweep
is executed, e.g. SOURce:LFOutput:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE STEP.
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 403.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See " Execute Single Sweep " on page 128
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE <Mode>
Sets the cycle mode of the LF sweep.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
413
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Mode>
AUTO | MANual | STEP
AUTO
Performs a complete sweep cycle from the start to the end value
when a trigger event occurs.
The dwell time determines the time period until the signal
switches to the next step.
MANual
Performs a single sweep step when a manual trigger event
occurs.
The trigger system is not active. To trigger each frequency step
of the sweep individually, use the command [:SOURce<hw>]:
LFOutput:FREQuency:MANual on page 407.
STEP
Each trigger command triggers one sweep step only.
The frequency increases by the value set with the coammnds:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:
LINear] (linear spacing)
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:
LOGarithmic(logarithmic spacing)
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 403.
Manual operation:
See "Mode" on page 125
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts <Points>
Sets the number of steps in an LF sweep.
For information on how the value is calculated and the interdependency with other
parameters, see Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118
Parameters:
<Points>
integer
Range:
2 to POINts
Increment: 1
*RST:
100
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 403.
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RETRace <State>
Activates that the signal changes to the start frequency value while it is waiting for the
next trigger event.
You can enable this feature, when you are working with sawtooth shapes in sweep
mode "Single" or "External Single".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
414
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
Manual operation:
0
See "Retrace" on page 126
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RUNNing?
Queries the current status of the LF frequency sweep mode.
Return values:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 403.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe <Shape>
Sets the cycle mode for a sweep sequence (shape).
Parameters:
<Shape>
SAWTooth | TRIangle
*RST:
SAWTooth
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 403.
Manual operation:
See " Shape " on page 126
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing <Spacing>
Selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing.
Parameters:
<Spacing>
LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST:
LINear
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 403.
Manual operation:
See " Spacing" on page 127
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic
<Logarithmic>
Sets the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps to calculate the frequencies of the
steps.
For information on how the value is calculated and the interdependency with other
parameters, see Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
415
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Logarithmic>
float
The unit is mandatory
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0.01 to 100
0.01
1
PCT
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 403.
Manual operation:
See " Step Linear/Step Logarithmic " on page 129
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] <Linear>
Sets the step width for the linear sweep.
For information on how the value is calculated and the interdependency with other
parameters, see Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118
Parameters:
<Linear>
float
Range:
0 to STOP-STARt
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
1000
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 403.
Manual operation:
See " Step Linear/Step Logarithmic " on page 129
12.15.6 SOURce:LIST Subsystem
The SOURce:LIST subsystem contains all commands for defining lists and for handling of list files.
List files have the predefined file extension *.lsw.
Refer to Chapter 12.5.2, "Accessing Files in the Default or in a Specified Directory",
on page 314 for general information on file handling in the default and in a specific
directory.
●
*RST does not affect data lists.
●
SCPI refers to the individual lists as segments.
Example: Create an RF list and activate the list mode
The following example shows a command sequence to create an RF list and to activate the list mode. Further hardware settings are not considered.
// Reset the instrument to start from an initial state
// Query the available list files in the default
// directory /var/user
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
416
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
// Select the list file or create it (if not existing)
*RST; *CLS
SOUR1:LIST:CAT?
// Response:- shows the name of available list files (if applicable)
SOUR1:LIST:SEL "/var/user/list1.lsw"
// Write the frequency/level/dwell time values in the selected list file
// existing data is overwritten
// Query the number of frequency/power/dwell time entries in the selected list
// Query the amount of free memory (in bytes) for list mode lists
SOUR1:LIST:FREQ 58 MHz, 61 MHz, 73 MHz, 86 MHz, 91 MHz, 92 MHz, 98 MHz
SOUR1:LIST:POW 13 dBm, 12 dBm, 5 dBm, 3 dBm, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 6 dBm
SOUR1:LIST:DWEL:LIST 10000, 100000, 200000, 19000, 10000, 150000, 220000
SOUR1:LIST:FREQ:POIN?
// 7
SOUR1:LIST:POW:POINT?
// 7
SOUR1:LIST:DWEL:LIST:POIN?
// 7
SOUR1:LIST:FREE?
// 2147483647 (bytes of free memory)
// Use dwell times from list
// Configure the list mode parameters
// Enable RF output
SOUR1:LIST:MODE AUTO
SOUR1:LIST:TRIG:SOUR AUTO
SOUR1:LIST:DWEL:MODE "LIST"
OUTP1:STAT ON
// Use global dwell time
// Set only a part of the list (value pairs 3 to 5) to be processed
// Configure the list mode parameters using global dwell time
// Enable RF output
SOUR1:LIST:IND:START 2
SOUR1:LIST:IND:STOP 4
SOUR1:LIST:MODE AUTO
SOUR1:LIST:TRIG:SOUR AUTO
SOUR1:LIST:DWEL:LIST 500 ms
OUTP1:STAT ON
// Enable the list mode
// Trigger the list (depending on the mode, not needed with trigger
// mode AUTO); query the current index
// Reset the list to the starting point
SOUR1:FREQ:MODE LIST
SOUR1:LIST:TRIG:EXEC
SOUR1:LIST:RUNN?
SOUR1:LIST:IND?
// 3
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
417
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
// value changes when the value is queried again
SOUR1:LIST:RES
// For list mode STEP use the following commands
*RST; *CLS
// Change list mode to STEP
SOUR1:LIST:MODE STEP
// Activate RF Output1
OUTP1:STAT 1
// Activate the list mode
SOUR1:FREQ:MODE LIST
// For each step: select frequency/powerlevel pair as index from the list
SOUR1:LIST:IND 2
SOUR1:LIST:IND 3
SOUR1:LIST:IND 4
// Use the selected list for path B (with List Mode B default settings)
SOUR2:LIST:SEL "/var/user/list1.lsw"
OUTP2:STAT ON
SOUR2:FREQ:MODE LIST
SOUR2:LIST:IND?
// 2
// value canges when the value is queried again
// Deactivate the list mode
SOUR1:FREQ:MODE CW
Example: List mode data exchange
The following example shows a command sequence to export a list (here the RF list
created with the example before) into an ASCII file. Further hardware settings are not
considered.
*RST; *CLS
LIST:DEXC:MODE EXP
// Set ASCII data parameters
// Set the ASCII file extension, the decimal separator
// and the column separator for the ASCII data
SOUR1:LIST:DEXC:AFIL:EXT CSV
SOUR1:LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:DEC DOT
SOUR1:LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:COL COMM
// Select source and destination path/directory
// Query available listfiles in default directory "/var/user"
SOUR1:LIST:CAT?
// list1
SOUR1:LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEL "/var/user/list1ASCII"
SOUR1:LIST:DEXC:SEL "/var/user/list1"
// Export the list file data into the ASCII file
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
418
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
SOUR1:LIST:DEXC:EXEC
// Query the available ASCII files with extension .csv
SOUR1:LIST:DEXC:AFIL:CAT?
// Response: "list1ASCII"
// Deactivate the list mode
SOUR1:FREQ:MODE CW
●
●
●
12.15.6.1
List Mode Settings.................................................................................................419
List Mode File Operation....................................................................................... 425
List Mode Data Exchange..................................................................................... 427
List Mode Settings
With the following commands, you can create list mode data, select the trigger mode
and determine the dwell time.
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl.......................................................................................... 419
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:MODE................................................................................420
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:LIST.................................................................................. 420
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:LIST:POINts?..................................................................... 420
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency...................................................................................421
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency:POINts?..................................................................... 421
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex........................................................................................... 421
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STARt.................................................................................422
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STOP................................................................................. 422
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:MODE.......................................................................................... 422
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer..........................................................................................422
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer:POINts?............................................................................ 423
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RMODe.........................................................................................423
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:EXECute..........................................................................423
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce.......................................................................... 424
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RUNNing?.....................................................................................424
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl <Dwell>
Sets the global dwell time. The instrument generates the signal with the frequency /
power value pairs of each list entry for that particular period.
See also Significant Parameters and Functions.
Parameters:
<Dwell>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
7E-4 to 100
1E-4
15E-3
s
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
419
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation:
See "Global Dwell Time" on page 133
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:MODE <DwelMode>
Selects the dwell time mode.
Parameters:
<DwelMode>
LIST | GLOBal
LIST
uses the dwell time, specified in the data table for each value
pair individually.
GLOBal
uses a constant dwell time, set with command [:
SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl.
*RST:
GLOBal
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Manual operation:
See "Dwell Time Mode" on page 133
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:LIST <Dwell>
Enters the dwell time values in the selected list in µs.
Parameters:
<Dwell>
<Dwell#1>{, <Dwell#2>, ...} | block data
You can either enter the data as a list of numbers, or as binary
block data. The list of numbers can be of any length, with the list
entries separated by commas.
In binary block format, 8 (4) bytes are always interpreted as a
floating-point number with double accuracy. See also :
FORMat[:DATA] on page 341 for more details.
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Manual operation:
See "Edit List Mode Data" on page 139
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:LIST:POINts?
Queries the number (points) of dwell time entries in the selected list.
Return values:
<Points>
integer
Range:
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
0 to INT_MAX
0
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
420
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency <Frequency>
Enters the frequency values in the selected list.
Parameters:
<Frequency>
<Frequency#1>{, <Frequency#2>, ...} | block data
You can either enter the data as a list of numbers, or as binary
block data.
The list of numbers can be of any length, with the list entries
separated by commas.
In binary block format, 8 (4) bytes are always interpreted as a
floating-point number with double accuracy.
See also :FORMat[:DATA].
Range:
300 kHz to RFmax (depends on the installed
options)
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Manual operation:
See "Edit List Mode Data" on page 139
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency:POINts?
Queries the number (points) of frequency entries in the seleced list.
Return values:
<Points>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to INT_MAX
0
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex <Index>
Sets the list index in LIST:MODE STEP.
After the trigger signal, the instrument processes the frequency and level settings of
the selected index.
Parameters:
<Index>
integer
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Manual operation:
See " Current Index " on page 132
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
421
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STARt <Start>
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STOP <Stop>
Sets the start and stop index of the index range which defines a subgroup of frequency/level value pairs in the current list.
Parameters:
<Start>/<Stop>
integer
Index range
Only values inside this range are processed in list mode
Range:
*RST:
0 to list length
0
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Manual operation:
See " List Range from/to " on page 135
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:MODE <Mode>
Sets the list mode.
The instrument processes the list according to the selected mode and trigger source,
see LIST:TRIG:SOUR AUTO, SING or EXT.
Parameters:
<Mode>
AUTO | STEP
AUTO
Each trigger event triggers a complete list cycle.
STEP
Each trigger event triggers only one step in the list processing
cycle. The list is processed in ascending order.
In this mode, you can select between LIST:TRIG:SOUR SING or
EXT.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Manual operation:
See "Mode" on page 133
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer <Power>
Enters the level values in the selected list. The number of level values must correspond to the number of frequency values. Existing data is overwritten.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
422
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Power>
<Power#1>{, <Power#2>, ...} | block data
You can either enter the data as a list of numbers, or as binary
block data.
The list of numbers can be of any length, with the list entries
separated by commas.
In binary block format, 8 (4) bytes are always interpreted as a
floating-point number with double accuracy.
See also :FORMat[:DATA].
Range:
depends on the installed options
Default unit: dBm
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Manual operation:
See "Edit List Mode Data" on page 139
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer:POINts?
Queries the number (points) of level entries in the selected list.
Return values:
<Points>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to INT_MAX
0
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RMODe <RMode>
Selects the run mode for processing the list.
Parameters:
<RMode>
LIVE
LIVE
Generates the signal by processing the list directly.
*RST:
LIVE
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Manual operation:
See "Run Mode" on page 133
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:EXECute
Starts the processing of a list in list mode.
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
423
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See " Execute Single" on page 134
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce <Source>
Selects the trigger source for processing lists.
The names of the parameters correspond to those in sweep mode. SCPI standard
uses other names for the parameters; these names are also accepted by the instrument. The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration.
For an overview, see the following table:
Rohde & Schwarz name
SCPI name
Command in manual control
AUTO
IMMediate
MODE AUTO
SINGle
BUS
MODE SINGLE or STEP
EXTernal
EXTernal
MODE EXT TRIG SINGLE or
EXT TRIG STEP
Parameters:
<Source>
SINGle | BUS | AUTO | EXTernal | IMMediate
AUTO|IMMediate
The trigger is free-running, i.e. the trigger condition is fulfilled
continuously. The selected list is restarted as soon as it is finished.
SINGle|BUS
The list is triggered by the command [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:
TRIGger:EXECute. The list is executed once.
EXTernal
The list is triggered externally and executed once.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Manual operation:
See "Mode" on page 133
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RUNNing?
Queries the current state of the list mode.
Return values:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
1
Signal generation based on the list mode is active.
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
424
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
12.15.6.2
List Mode File Operation
The following section covers basic commands to file handling in list mode.
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:CATalog?......................................................................................425
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete......................................................................................... 425
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete:ALL...................................................................................425
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREE?..........................................................................................426
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RESet...........................................................................................426
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:SELect..........................................................................................426
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:CATalog?
Queries the available list files in the specified directory.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
List of list filenames, separated by commas
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See " List Mode Data " on page 135
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete <Filename>
Deletes the specified list.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
Filename or complete file path; file extension is optional.
Example:
See [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete:ALL on page 425.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See " List Mode Data " on page 135
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete:ALL
Deletes all lists in the set directory.
This command can only be executed, if:
●
No list file is selected.
●
List mode is disabled.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
425
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
SOUR1:LIST:CAT?
// list,my_list
SOUR1:LIST:DEL "/var/user/list1"
SOUR1:LIST:CAT?
// my_list
SOUR1:FREQ:MODE?
// LIST
SOUR1:LIST:SEL?
// /var/user/my_list.lsw
//deactivate list mode
SOUR1:FREQ:MODE CW
SOUR1:LIST:DELete:ALL
SOUR1:LIST:CAT?
// // all list files are deleted
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See " List Mode Data " on page 135
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREE?
Queries the amount of free memory (in bytes) for list mode lists.
Return values:
<Free>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to INT_MAX
0
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RESet
Jumps to the beginning of the list.
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See " Reset " on page 134
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:SELect <Filename>
Selects or creates a data list in list mode.
If the list with the selected name does not exist, a new list is created.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
426
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Filename>
string
Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
12.15.6.3
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode"
on page 416.
Manual operation:
See " List Mode Data " on page 135
List Mode Data Exchange
With the following commands, you can configure lists in ASCII format and export or
import them accordingly.
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?......................................................... 427
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:EXECute.................................................................... 427
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension........................................................ 427
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect............................................................. 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn........................................... 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal........................................... 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE........................................................................428
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:SELect.......................................................................429
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?
Queries the available ASCII files for export or import of list mode data in the current or
specified directory.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
List of ASCII files *.txt or *.csv, separated by commas.
Example:
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 418.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Select Source/Select Destination" on page 93
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:EXECute
Executes the import or export of the selected list file, according to the previously set
transfer direction with command [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE
Example:
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 418.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Import / Export" on page 94
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension <Extension>
Determines the extension of the ASCII file for import or export, or to query existing
files.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
427
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Extension>
TXT | CSV
*RST:
TXT
Example:
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 418.
Manual operation:
See "ASCII File Settings" on page 92
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect <Filename>
Selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported.
Parameters:
<Filename>
string
Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 418.
Manual operation:
See "Select Source/Select Destination" on page 93
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn <Column>
Selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table.
Parameters:
<Column>
TABulator | SEMicolon | COMMa | SPACe
*RST:
COMMa
Example:
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 418.
Manual operation:
See "ASCII File Settings" on page 92
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal <Decimal>
Sets "." (decimal point) or "," (comma) as the decimal separator used in the ASCII data
with floating-point numerals.
Parameters:
<Decimal>
DOT | COMMa
*RST:
DOT
Example:
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 418.
Manual operation:
See "ASCII File Settings" on page 92
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE <Mode>
Determines the import or export of a list.
Specify the source or destination file with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:
DEXChange:SELect.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
428
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Mode>
IMPort | EXPort
*RST:
IMPort
Example:
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 418.
Manual operation:
See " Mode " on page 92
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:SELect <Filename>
Selects the ASCII file for import or export, containing a list.
Parameters:
<Filename>
string
Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 418.
Manual operation:
See "Select Source / Select ASCII Destination" on page 93
12.15.7 SOURce:NOISe Subsystem
The SOURce:NOISe subsystem contains the commands for setting the noise modulation signal. The noise generator is optional.
Example: Configuring the noise generator
SOURce1:NOISe:DISTribution GAUSs
SOURce1:NOISe:BANDwidth 10000000
SOURce1:NOISe:BANDwidth:STATe 1
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SOURce NOIS
SOURce1:LFOutput1:STATe 1
SOURce1:NOISe:LEVel:RELative?
// -83.86
SOURce1:NOISe:LEVel:ABSolute?
// -13.86
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:BANDwidth|BWIDth.....................................................................429
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:BWIDth:STATe........................................................................... 430
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:DISTribution............................................................................... 430
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:LEVel:RELative?.........................................................................430
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:LEVel[:ABSolute]?.......................................................................431
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:BANDwidth|BWIDth <BWidth>
Sets the noise level in the system bandwidth when bandwidth limitation is enabled.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
429
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Bandwidth range
Step size
100 kHz to 1 MHz
100 kHz
1 MHz to 5 MHz
1 MHz
5 MHz to 10 MHz
5 MHz
Parameters:
<BWidth>
float
Range:
100E3 to 10E6
Increment: 100E3
*RST:
100E3
Example:
See Example "Configuring the noise generator" on page 429.
Manual operation:
See "Bandwidth" on page 101
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:BWIDth:STATe <State>
Activates noise bandwidth limitation.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Configuring the noise generator" on page 429.
Manual operation:
See "Bandwidth" on page 101
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:DISTribution <Distribution>
Sets the distribution of the noise power density.
Parameters:
<Distribution>
GAUSs | EQUal
*RST:
GAUSs
Example:
See Example "Configuring the noise generator" on page 429.
Manual operation:
See "Distribution" on page 101
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:LEVel:RELative?
Queries the level of the noise signal per Hz in the total bandwidth.
Return values:
<Relative>
float
Range:
-149.18 to -52.67
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
-69.84
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
See Example "Configuring the noise generator" on page 429.
430
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Noise Density" on page 104
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:LEVel[:ABSolute]?
Queries the level of the noise signal in the system bandwidth within the enabled bandwidth limitation.
Return values:
<Absolute>
float
Noise level within the bandwidth limitation
*RST:
3.84 MHz
Example:
See Example "Configuring the noise generator" on page 429.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Noise Level" on page 104
12.15.8 SOURce:PGEN Subsystem
The PGEN subsystem contains the commands for setting output of the pulse modulation signal.
Example: Using pulse generator as source for pulse modulation
// select pulse generator as source for pulse modulation
// enable pulse modulation
SOURce1:PULM:SOURce INT
SOURce1:PULM:STATe 1
// pulse generator and signal output are also activated
SOURce1:PGENerator:STATe?
// 1
SOURce1:PGENerator:OUTPut:STATe?
// 1
PGENerator:OUTPut:POLarity NORMal
// to disable pulse generator
SOURce1:PGENerator:STATe 0
// activate the pulse modulation of the RF carrier
SOURce1:PULM:STATe 1
[:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:OUTPut:POLarity................................................................ 431
[:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:OUTPut[:STATe]................................................................. 432
[:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:STATe............................................................................... 432
[:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:OUTPut:POLarity <Polarity>
Sets the polarity of the pulse output signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
431
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Polarity>
NORMal | INVerted
NORMal
Outputs the pulse signal during the pulse width, that means during the high state.
INVerted
Inverts the pulse output signal polarity. The pulse output signal
is suppressed during the pulse width, but provided during the
low state.
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
See Example "Using pulse generator as source for pulse modulation" on page 431.
Manual operation:
See "Pulse Output Polarity" on page 87
[:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:OUTPut[:STATe] <State>
Activates the output of the pulse modulation signal.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Using pulse generator as source for pulse modulation" on page 431.
Manual operation:
See "Pulse Output State" on page 87
[:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:STATe <State>
Enables the output of the video/sync signal.
If the pulse generator is the current modulation source, activating the pulse modulation
automatically activates the signal output and the pulse generator.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
0
See Example "Using pulse generator as source for pulse modulation" on page 431.
12.15.9 SOURce:PHASe Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands for adjusting the phase of the RF output signal
relative to a reference signal of the same frequency.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
432
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example: Programming Example
// change the phase relative to the current phase
SOURce1:PHASe 2 DEG
// adopt the setting as the current phase
SOURce1:PHASe:REFerence
The following commands are available:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe................................................................................................. 433
[:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe:REFerence................................................................................ 433
[:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe <Phase>
Specifies the phase variation relative to the current phase.
Parameters:
<Phase>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-720 to 720
0.1
0
DEG
Example:
See Example "Programming Example" on page 433.
Manual operation:
See "Delta Phase" on page 73
[:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe:REFerence
Assigns the value set with command [:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe as the reference
phase.
Example:
See Example "Programming Example" on page 433.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Reset Delta Phase Display" on page 73
12.15.10 SOURce:POWer Subsystem
The SOURce:POWer subsystem contains the commands for setting the output level,
level control and level correction of the RF signal.
The default units are dBm. To change the units, perform on of the following:
●
Enter the unit after the numerical value
Example: :POW 0.5V
●
Set the unit with the command :UNIT:POWer.
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:DSENsitivity....................................................................... 434
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:OMODe............................................................................. 434
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:SEARch............................................................................. 435
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:SONCe.............................................................................. 435
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC[:STATe]............................................................................. 435
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
433
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ATTenuation:RFOFf:MODE.........................................................436
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:EMF:STATe...............................................................................436
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LBEHaviour............................................................................... 436
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LIMit[:AMPLitude].......................................................................437
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LMODe..................................................................................... 437
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual.....................................................................................437
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MODE.......................................................................................438
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:POWer......................................................................................438
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STARt.......................................................................................439
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STOP........................................................................................439
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP:MODE............................................................................. 439
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement].................................................................... 440
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet........................................................ 440
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:RCL.............................................................441
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]..................................................441
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:LOWer?........................................................................ 442
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:UPPer?......................................................................... 442
[:SOURce]:POWer:WIGNore...........................................................................................442
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:DSENsitivity <Sensitivity>
Sets the sensitivity of the ALC detector.
Parameters:
<Sensitivity>
AUTO | FIXed
AUTO
Selects the optimum sensitivity automatically.
FIXed
Fixes the internal level detector.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
POW:ALC:DSEN FIX
Manual operation:
See "Detector Sensitivity" on page 147
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:OMODe <OffMode>
Sets the level control mode. It is activated when automatic level control is switched off
(ALC Off).
Parameters:
<OffMode>
SHOLd
Activates level control temporarily, when the level or frequency
changes ("ALC Off Sample & Hold").
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
SHOLd
POW:ALC OFF
Deactivates automatic level control at the RF output.
POW:ALC:OMOD SHOL
Activates the level control briefly when changing the frequency
or level.
434
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:SEARch <Search>
Recalculates the instrument internal settings optimized for the current level. Not
required for automatic modes.
Parameters:
<Search>
ON
*RST:
Example:
ON
POW:ALC:SEAR ON
Executes readjustment.
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:SONCe
Activates level control for correction purposes temporarily.
Example:
POW:ALC OFF
Deactivates automatic level control at the RF output.
POW:ALC:SONC
Executes level control (once).
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Readjust" on page 72
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC[:STATe] <State>
Parameters:
<State>
0 | OFF | AUTO | 1 | ON | ONTable | PRESet | OFFTable
AUTO
Adjusts the output level to the operating conditions automatically.
1|ON
Activates internal level control permanently.
OFFTable
Controls the level by means of attenuation values of the internal
ALC table.
0|OFF
Provided only for backward compatibility with other
Rohde & Schwarz signal generators.
The R&S SMA100B accepts these values and maps them automatically as follows:
0|OFF = OFFTable
ONTable
Starts with the attenuation setting from the table and continues
with automatic level control.
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
AUTO
POW:ALC ON
Activates internal level control.
435
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation:
See "State" on page 147
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ATTenuation:RFOFf:MODE <Mode>
Selects the state the attenuator is to assume if the RF signal is switched off.
Parameters:
<Mode>
UNCHanged | FATTenuation
FATTenuation
The attenuator switches to maximum attenuation
UNCHanged
Retains the current setting and keeps the output impedance
constant during RF off.
*RST:
Example:
n.a. (factory preset: FATTenuation)
SOURce1:POWer:ATTenuation:RFOFf:MODE FATTenuation
// maximum attenuation is used when the RF output is deactivated
Manual operation:
See " RF OFF Mode " on page 145
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:EMF:STATe <State>
Displays the signal level as voltage of the EMF. The displayed value represents the
voltage over a 50 Ohm load.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
Example:
POW:EMF:STAT 1
Activates voltage level display.
Manual operation:
See " Display Level as Voltage of EMF " on page 222
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LBEHaviour <Behaviour>
Selects the level behavior at the RF output over time.
Parameters:
<Behaviour>
AUTO | UNINterrupted | MONotone | CVSWr
UNINterrupted|MONotone
Uninterrupted level settings and strictly monotone modes
CWSWr
Constant VSWR
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
SOURce1:POWer:LBEHaviour AUTO
Manual operation:
See " Setting Characteristics " on page 70
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
436
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LIMit[:AMPLitude] <Amplitude>
Limits the maximum RF output level in CW and sweep mode.
It does not influence the "Level" display or the response to the query [:
SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude].
Parameters:
<Amplitude>
float
Range:
depends on the installed options
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 30)
Example:
SOURce1:POWer:LIMit:AMPLitude 10
Manual operation:
See " Limit " on page 70
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LMODe <LevMode>
Sets the RF level mode.
Parameters:
<LevMode>
NORMal | LOWNoise | LOWDistortion
NORMal
Supplies the RF signal with the standard power level of the
instrument.
LOWNoise
Supplies a very low noise sinewave signal.
LOWDistortion
Supplies a very pure sinewave signal.
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
SOURce1:POWer:LMODe LOWD
Sets low distortion mode. The instrument reduces distortions of
the RF signal to a minimum.
Manual operation:
See " Mode " on page 71
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual <Manual>
Sets the level for the subsequent sweep step if SWE:POW:MODE MAN.
Use a separate command for each sweep step.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
437
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Manual>
float
You can select any level within the setting range, where:
STARt is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STARt
STOP is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STOP
OFFSet is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:
IMMediate]:OFFSet
Range:
(STARt + OFFSet) to (STOP + OFFSet)
Increment: 0.01
Default unit: dBm
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448
Manual operation:
See " Current Level" on page 125
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MODE <Mode>
Selects the operating mode of the instrument to set the output level.
Parameters:
<Mode>
CW | FIXed | SWEep
CW|FIXed
Operates at a constant level.
CW and FIXed are synonyms.
To set the output level value, use the command [:
SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:
AMPLitude].
SWEep
Sets sweep mode.
Set the range and current level with the commands:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STARt and [:SOURce<hw>]:
POWer:STOP,
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual.
*RST:
CW
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448
Manual operation:
See "State (RF level sweep)" on page 124
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:POWer <Power>
Sets the level at the RF output connector.
This value does not consider a specified offset.
The command [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]
sets the level of the "Level" display, that means the level containing offset.
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 64.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
438
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Power>
float
Level at the RF output, without level offset
Range:
See data sheet
Increment: 0.01
Default unit: dBm
Example:
SOURce1:POWer:POWer 15
Sets the level at RF output
Manual operation:
See "Amplitude" on page 69
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STARt <Start>
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STOP <Stop>
Sets the RF start/stop level in sweep mode.
Parameters:
<Stop>
float
Sets the setting range calculated as follows:
(Level_min + OFFSet) to (Level_max + OFFSet)
Where the values are set with the commands:
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STARt
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STOP
Range:
Minimum level to maximum level
*RST:
-30 (Start)/ -10 (Stop)
Default unit: dBm
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448
Manual operation:
See " Start Level / Stop Level " on page 130
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP:MODE <Mode>
Defines the type of step width to vary the RF output power step-by-step with the commands POW UP or POW DOWN.
Parameters:
<Mode>
DECimal | USER
DECimal
Increases or decreases the level in steps of ten.
USER
Increases or decreases the level in increments, determined with
the command [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement].
*RST:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
DECimal
439
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
// increasing the RF level with a step size of 2 dB
SOURce1:POWer:STEP:INCRement 2
SOURce1:POWer:STEP:MODE USER
SOURce1:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude UP
Manual operation:
See "Variation Active" on page 67
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] <Increment>
Specifies the step width in the appropriate path for POW:STEP:MODE USER.
To adjust the level step-by-step with this increment value, use the command POW UP,
or POW DOWN.
Note: The command also sets "Variation Step" in the manual control, that means the
user-defined step width for setting the level with the rotary knob or the UP/DOWN
arrow keys.
Parameters:
<Increment>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 100
0.01
1
dB
Example:
See [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP:MODE on page 439.
Manual operation:
See "Variation Step" on page 67
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet <Offset>
Sets the level offset of a downstream instrument.
The level at the RF output is not changed.
To query the resulting level, as it is at the output of the downstream instrument, use the
command [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude].
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 64.
Note: The level offset also affects the RF level sweep.
Parameters:
<Offset>
float
Range:
-100 to 100
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Default unit: dB
Level offset is always expreced in dB; linear units (V, W, etc.)
are not supported
Example:
POWer:OFFSet 10
Sets the RF level offset to 10 dB
Manual operation:
See " Offset " on page 70
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
440
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:RCL <Rcl>
Determines whether the current level is retained or if the stored level setting is adopted
when an instrument configuration is loaded.
Parameters:
<Rcl>
INCLude | EXCLude
INCLude
Takes the current level when an instrument configuration is loaded.
EXCLude
Retains the current level when an instrument configuration is
loaded.
*RST:
INCLude
Example:
POW:RCL INCL
Takes the level value from an instrument configuration loaded
with command *RCL.
Manual operation:
See "Exclude Level" on page 199
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] <Amplitude>
Sets the RF level applied to the DUT.
To activate the RF output use command :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe] ("RF On"/"RF Off").
The following applies POWer = RF output level + OFFSet, where:
●
POWer is the values set with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:
IMMediate][:AMPLitude]
●
RF output level is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:POWer
●
OFFSet is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet
Parameters:
<Amplitude>
float
The following settings influence the value range:
OFFSet set with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:
LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet
Numerical value
Sets the level
UP|DOWN
Varies the level step by step.
The level is increased or decreased by the value set with the
command [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement].
Range:
(Level_min + OFFSet) to (Level_max + OFFStet)
*RST:
-30
Default unit: dBm
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
POWer -30
Sets the RF level
441
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
See also [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP:MODE on page 439.
Manual operation:
See "Amplitude" on page 69
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:LOWer?
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:UPPer?
Queries the current interruption-free range of the level.
Return values:
<Upper>
float
Increment: 0.01
Default unit: dBm
Example:
SOURce1:POWer:RANGe:UPPer?
// -15
SOURce1:POWer:RANGe:LOW?
// -50
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See " Level Range " on page 71
[:SOURce]:POWer:WIGNore <State>
Ignores level range warnings.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
SOURce:POWer:WIGNore 1
12.15.11 SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem
The SOURce:ROSCillator subsystem contains the commands for setting the external and internal reference frequency.
The commands of this subsystem are not affected by an instrument reset (*RST
on page 309).
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
442
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example: Configuring the reference oscillator
// Using 100 MHz external reference source
SOURce:ROSCillator:PRESet
SOURce:ROSCillator:SOURce EXT
SOURce:ROSCillator:EXTernal:RFOFf:STATe 1
SOURce:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency 100MHZ
SOURce:ROSCillator:EXTernal:SBANdwidth WIDE
// 100 MHz (loop thought) and 1 GHz output
SOURce:ROSCillator:OUTPut:FREQuency:MODE LOOP
SOURce:ROSCillator:OUTPut:ALTernate:FREQuency:MODE DER1G
SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:ADJust:STATe 0
// Variable external reference frequency
// SOURce:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency VAR
// SOURce:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency:VARiable 100000000
// Using the internal reference frequency
SOURce:ROSCillator:SOURce INT
SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing:STATe 1
SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing:SLOPe LOW
// 10 MHz and 1 GHz output
SOURce:ROSCillator:OUTPut:FREQuency:MODE DER10M
SOURce:ROSCillator:OUTPut:ALTernate:FREQuency:MODE DER1G
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:PRESet...................................................................................... 443
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:SOURce..................................................................................... 443
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing[:STATe].............................................................444
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing:SLOPe.............................................................. 444
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:RFOFf[:STATe]............................................................. 444
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency..................................................................444
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency:VARiable................................................... 445
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:SBANdwidth................................................................. 445
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:OUTPut:FREQuency:MODE......................................................... 445
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:OUTPut:ALTernate:FREQuency:MODE......................................... 446
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust:VALue..............................................................446
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[:STATe]............................................................447
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:PRESet
Resets the reference oscillator settings.
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 443.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Set to Default" on page 180
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:SOURce <Source>
Selects between internal or external reference frequency.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
443
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Source>
INTernal | EXTernal
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: INTernal)
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 443.
Manual operation:
See "Source" on page 180
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing[:STATe] <State>
Activates the EFC (external frequency control).
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 1)
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 443.
Manual operation:
See "External Tuning Active" on page 181
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing:SLOPe <State>
Sets the sensitivity of the external tuning volatge.
Parameters:
<State>
LOW | HIGH
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: LOW)
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 443.
Manual operation:
See "External Tuning Slope" on page 181
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:RFOFf[:STATe] <State>
Determines that the RF output is turned off when the external reference signal is
selected, but missing.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 443.
Manual operation:
See "Deactivate RF Output (if external reference is missing)"
on page 180
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the frequency of the external reference.
Parameters:
<Frequency>
100MHZ | 1GHZ | VARiable | 10MHZ
*RST:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
n.a. (factory preset: 10MHZ)
444
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 443.
Options:
VARiable requires R&S SMAB-K704
100MHZ|1GHZ require R&S SMAB-K703
Manual operation:
See "External Reference Frequency" on page 180
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency:VARiable <Frequency>
Specifies the user-defined external reference frequency.
Parameters:
<Frequency>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
1E6 to 100E6
0.1
n.a. (factory preset: 1E7)
Hz
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 443.
Options:
R&S SMAB-K704
Manual operation:
See "Variable Reference Frequency" on page 181
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:SBANdwidth <SBandwidth>
Selects the PLL synchronization bandwidth depending on the used external reference
signal.
For more information, see data sheet.
Parameters:
<SBandwidth>
WIDE | NARRow
NARRow
The synchronization bandwidth is a few Hz.
Suitable for external reference sources with phase noise worse
than the R&S SMA100B.
WIDE
Uses the widest possible synchronization bandwidth; achieves
best residual phase noise performance and phase stability
between the synchronized devices.
For more information, see data sheet.
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: WIDE)
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 443.
Manual operation:
See "Synchronization Bandwidth" on page 181
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:OUTPut:FREQuency:MODE <OutpFreqMode>
Sets the output reference frequency.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
445
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<OutpFreqMode>
DER10M | DER100M | OFF | LOOPthrough
OFF
Disables the output.
DER10M|DER100M
Sets the output reference frequency to 10 MHz or 100 MHz.
The reference frequency is derived from the internal reference
frequency.
LOOPthrough
Forwards the input reference frequency to the reference frequency output.
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: DER10M)
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 443.
Manual operation:
See "Reference Output/1GHz Reference Output" on page 182
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:OUTPut:ALTernate:FREQuency:MODE <OutpFreqMode>
Sets the output reference frequency.
Parameters:
<OutpFreqMode>
LOOPthrough | DER1G | OFF
OFF
Disables the output.
DER1G
Sets the output reference frequency to 1 GHz.
The reference frequency is derived from the internal reference
frequency.
LOOPthrough
Forwards the 1 GHz input reference frequency to the reference
frequency output.
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: OFF)
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 443.
Manual operation:
See "Reference Output/1GHz Reference Output" on page 182
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust:VALue <Value>
Specifies the frequency correction value (adjustment value).
Parameters:
<Value>
integer
*RST:
0
Example:
See [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[:
STATe] on page 447
Manual operation:
See "Adjustment DAC Value" on page 183
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
446
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[:STATe] <State>
Determines whether the calibrated (off) or a user-defined (on) adjustment value is
used for fine adjustment of the frequency.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
0
Fine adjustment with the calibrated frequency value
1
User-defined adjustment value
The instrument is no longer in the calibrated state.
The calibration value is, however, not changed. The instrument
resumes the calibrated state if you send
SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:ADJust:STATe 0.
*RST:
Example:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
// query calibration value
CALibration:ROSCillator?
// 32767
// Set an internal source
// Activate user-defined adjustment value of 1000
SOURce:ROSCillator:SOURce INT
SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:ADJust:STATe 1
SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:ADJust:VALue 1000
// to resume calibrated state
SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:ADJust:VALue 0
SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:ADJust:STATe 0
// or
// SYSTem:FPRest
Manual operation:
See "Adjustment Active" on page 183
12.15.12 SOURce:SWEep Subsystem
The SOURce:SWEep subsystem contains the commands for configuring RF sweep signals.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
447
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
●
The keyword [:FREQuency] can be omitted, then the commands are SCPI-compliant.
●
To activate an RF sweep mode, use the following commands:
●
–
RF frequency sweep: SOURce:FREQuency:MODE SWEep
(SOURce:FREQuency:MODE CW (off))
–
RF level sweep: SOURce:POWer:MODE SWEep (SOURce:POWer:MODE CW
(off))
All sweeps, including the LF sweep, can be set independently of each other.
For detailed information on the sweep modes and the triggering, see Chapter 5.1, "Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes", on page 110.
Example: Setup an RF frequency or power sweep
The following example shows a command sequence to set up an RF frequency sweep,
triggered by the execute command. For an RF power sweep, replace FREQuency in
the SWEep commands with POWer.
Exceptions are the power spacing (defined with LINear only) and the power step
width (defined with LOGarithmic only).
// Reset the instrument to start from an initial state
// Switch off display update to improve performance
// (especially with short dwell times)
// Set the sweep mode (first two commands) and the sweep range
// Select linear spacing
// Select the waveform shape for the frequency sweep
*RST; *CLS
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate OFF
TRIGger1:FSWeep:SOURce SINGle
SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO
SOURce1:FREQuency:SPAN 300 MHz
SOURce1:FREQuency:CENTer 200 MHz
// Alternatively use
// SOURce1:FREQuency:STARt 50 MHz
// SOURce1:FREQuency:STOP 350 MHz
SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing LINear
SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:SHAPe SAWTooth
// Activate change to start frequency while waiting for next trigger
// Prerequisites: sweep mode single and sweep waveform sawtooth
SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:RETRace 1
// Alternatively reset all sweeps to their initial value
SOURce1:SWEep:RESet:ALL
// Set the step width and dwell time
SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP:LINear 1 MHz
// Alternatively set the number of steps, then the sweep step width is
// set automatically
SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:POINts 301
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
448
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:DWELl 500 ms
// With logarithmic spacing select the step width as follows
// (steps of 10 percent of the previous frequency in each instance)
SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing LOG
SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP:LOGarithmic 10PCT
// Activate the sweep
// Trigger the sweep (depending on the set mode) and query the status
SOURce1:FREQuency:MODE SWEep
// Perform a one-off RF frequency sweep
SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:EXECute
SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:RUNNing?
// 1
// the frequency sweep is running
// For manual step RF sweep use the following commands
*RST; *CLS
// Activate manual step RF sweep
SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE MANual
// Activate the RF frequency sweep.
SOURce1:FREQuency:MODE SWEep
// Activate RF Output1.
Output1:STATe 1
// Input the frequency manually for each step
SOURce1:FREQuency:MANual 200 MHz
SOURce1:FREQuency:MANual 201 MHz
// Alternatively use the UP or DOWN commands with the set step width.
SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP:LINear 1 MHz
SOURce1:FREQuency:MANual UP
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:DWELl.......................................................................... 450
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:MODE...........................................................................450
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:POINts.......................................................................... 450
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SPACing:MODE?........................................................... 451
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:STEP[:LOGarithmic]....................................................... 451
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl..................................................................451
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE.................................................................. 452
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts................................................................. 452
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing...............................................................452
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SHAPe.......................................................................... 453
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe................................................................. 453
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:EXECute....................................................................... 453
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute.............................................................. 453
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:RETRace.......................................................................454
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RETRace..............................................................454
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:RUNNing?..................................................................... 454
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RUNNing?............................................................ 454
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic................................................ 454
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear].......................................................454
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:RESet[:ALL].............................................................................. 455
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
449
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:DWELl <Dwell>
Sets the dwell time for a level sweep step.
Parameters:
<Dwell>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
1E-3 to 100
100E-6
15E-3
s
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448.
Manual operation:
See " Dwell Time " on page 127
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:MODE <Mode>
Sets the cycle mode for the level sweep.
Parameters:
<Mode>
AUTO | MANual | STEP
AUTO
Each trigger triggers exactly one complete sweep.
MANual
The trigger system is not active. You can trigger every step individually with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual.
The level value increases at each step by the value that you
define with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement].
Values directly entered with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:
POWer:MANual are not taken into account.
STEP
Each trigger triggers one sweep step only. The level increases
by the value entered with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:
INCRement].
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448.
Manual operation:
See "Mode" on page 125
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:POINts <Points>
Sets the number of steps within the RF level sweep range.
See Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118.
Parameters:
<Points>
integer
Range:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
2 to Max
450
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448.
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SPACing:MODE?
Queries the level sweep spacing. The sweep spacing for level sweeps is always linear.
Return values:
<Mode>
LINear
*RST:
LINear
Example:
SWE:POW:SPAC:MODE?
queries the sweep spacing for a level sweep at RF output.
Result: "LIN"
linear spacing
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:STEP[:LOGarithmic] <Logarithmic>
Sets a logarithmically determined step width for the RF level sweep. The level is
increased by a logarithmically calculated fraction of the current level.
See Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118.
Parameters:
<Logarithmic>
float
The unit dB is manatory.
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0.01 to 139 dB
0.01
1
dB
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448.
Manual operation:
See " Step " on page 131
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl <Dwell>
Sets the dwell time for a frequency sweep step.
Parameters:
<Dwell>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
2E-3 to 100
100E-6
15E-3
s
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448.
451
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation:
See " Dwell Time " on page 127
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE <Mode>
Sets the cycle mode for the frequency sweep.
Parameters:
<Mode>
AUTO | MANual | STEP
AUTO
Each trigger event triggers exactly one complete sweep.
MANual
The trigger system is not active. You can trigger every step individually by input of the frequencies with the command [:
SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual.
STEP
Each trigger event triggers one sweep step. The frequency
increases by the value entered with [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:
FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] (linear spacing) or [:
SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic
(logarithmic spacing).
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448.
Manual operation:
See "Mode" on page 125
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts <Points>
Sets the number of steps within the RF frequency sweep range.
See Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118.
Two separate POINts values are used for linear or logarithmic sweep spacing ([:
SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing LIN | LOG). The command always
affects the currently set sweep spacing.
Parameters:
<Points>
integer
Range:
Example:
2 to Max
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448.
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing <Spacing>
Selects the mode for the calculation of the frequency intervals, with which the current
frequency at each step is increased or decreased.
The keyword [:FREQuency] can be omitted; then the command is SCPI-compliant.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
452
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Spacing>
LINear | LOGarithmic
LINear
Sets a fixed frequency value as step width and adds it to the current frequency.
The linear step width is entered in Hz, see [:SOURce<hw>]:
SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear].
LOGarithmic
Sets a constant fraction of the current frequency as step width
and adds it to the current frequency.
The logarithmic step width is entered in %, see [:
SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic.
*RST:
LINear
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448.
Manual operation:
See " Spacing" on page 127
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SHAPe <Shape>
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe <Shape>
Determines the waveform shape for a frequency sweep sequence.
Parameters:
<Shape>
SAWTooth | TRIangle
*RST:
SAWTooth
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448.
Manual operation:
See " Shape " on page 126
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:EXECute
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute
Executes an RF frequency sweep.
The command performs a single sweep and is therefore only effective in manual
sweep mode.
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See " Execute Single Sweep " on page 128
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
453
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:RETRace <State>
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RETRace <State>
Activates that the signal changes to the start frequency value while it is waiting for the
next trigger event.
You can enable this feature, when you are working with sawtooth shapes in sweep
mode "Single" or "External Single".
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448.
Manual operation:
See "Retrace" on page 126
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:RUNNing?
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RUNNing?
Queries the current sweep state.
Return values:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic <Logarithmic>
Sets a logarithmically determined step width for the RF frequency sweep. The value is
added at each sweep step to the current frequency.
See Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118.
Parameters:
<Logarithmic>
float
The unit is mandatory.
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0.01 to 100
1E-3
1
PCT
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448.
Manual operation:
See " Step Linear/Step Logarithmic " on page 129
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] <Linear>
Sets the step width for linear sweeps.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
454
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
See Chapter 5.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 118.
Omit the optional keywords so that the command is SCPI-compliant.
Parameters:
<Linear>
float
Range:
0.001 Hz to (STOP - STARt)
Increment: 0.01
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep"
on page 448.
Manual operation:
See " Step Linear/Step Logarithmic " on page 129
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:RESet[:ALL]
Resets all active sweeps to the starting point.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See " Reset Sweep " on page 128
12.16 SYSTem Subsystem
The SYSTem subsystem contains a series of commands for general functions which do
not directly affect signal generation.
Example: Retrieving information on network-related settings
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:STATus?
// 1
SYSTem:PROTection1:STATe 0,123456
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:MODE STAT
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress "10.113.0.104"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:DNS "10.0.2.166"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:COMMon:HOSTname?
// "SMA100B-102030"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:COMMon:WORKgroup "instrument"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:COMMon:DOMain "rsint.net"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:GATeway "10.113.0.1"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:SUBNet:MASK "255.255.252.0"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:MACaddress "08 00 27 a3 a1 70"
SYSTem:PROTection1:STATe 1
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
455
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Example: Finding out the used VISA ressource strings
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESource?
// "TCPIP::10.113.0.104::inst0::INSTR"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:HISLip:RESource?
// "TCPIP::10.113.0.104::hislip0::INSTR"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RESource?
// "GPIB::28::INSTR"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:SELF:ADDRess?
// 28
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:LTERminator?
// STAN
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:RESource?
// "ASRL1::INSTR"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:SBITs?
// 1
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BAUD?
// 115200
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PARity?
// NONE
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:RESource?
// "TCPIP::10.113.0.104::5025::SOCKET"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:RESource?
// "USB::0x0AAD::0x01DD::100001::INSTR"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
456
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Example: Querying the error queue
SYSTem:ERRor:STATic?
// -221,"Settings conflict", 153,"Input voltage out of range", ...
// returns all static errors that are collectred in the error queue
SYSTem:ERRor:HISTory?
// 90,"Info;(*)Instrument startup... (Mar-13-2017/ 10:25:16-601 ms)",
90,"Info;(*)Information generated while processing license keys.,
Repaired Error!
COND: ( hr == false )
FILE: /home/sa_okbuildserver/jenkins/workspace/OK-Legacy-Distribution-30/
ok_services_oklib/Src/CServiceExtension.cpp
LINE: 3554
ADDITIONAL INFO: Init ServiceExtension failed, 2877, -2147218613
HRESULT = 80001007
", 90,"Info;(A)Baseband info, [RF A] No frequency calibration data found.
Please run Adjust All!", 90,"Info;(A)Baseband info, [RF B] No frequency
calibration data found. Please run Adjust All!", 90,"Info;
(A)Baseband info, [BB A],...
// returns all entries of the error queue
SYSTem:ERRor:HISTory:ClEar
// Deletes the history entries
:SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?................................................................................................... 458
:SYSTem:ERRor:CODE:ALL?......................................................................................... 459
:SYSTem:ERRor:CODE[:NEXT]?.................................................................................... 459
:SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt?...............................................................................................460
:SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?...............................................................................................460
:SYSTem:ERRor:HISTory?............................................................................................. 460
:SYSTem:ERRor:HISTory:CLEar.....................................................................................461
:SYSTem:ERRor:STATic?.............................................................................................. 461
:SYSTem:ULOCk...........................................................................................................461
:SYSTem:DLOCk...........................................................................................................462
:SYSTem:KLOCk........................................................................................................... 462
:SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe].................................................................................... 462
:SYSTem:SECurity:VOLMode[:STATe]............................................................................ 463
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:LTERminator.................................................................... 463
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RESource?.......................................................................464
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess.............................................................. 464
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:HISLip:RESource?.....................................................................464
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress................................................................. 465
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:MODE.......................................................465
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:MACaddress.............................................................. 465
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESource?................................................................ 465
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESTart.....................................................................466
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:STATus?................................................................... 466
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:DOMain.....................................................466
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:HOSTname............................................... 466
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:WORKgroup.............................................. 467
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
457
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:DNS........................................................ 467
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:GATeway.................................................467
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:SUBNet:MASK......................................... 467
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BAUD............................................................................ 468
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PARity........................................................................... 468
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:RESource?.....................................................................468
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:SBITs............................................................................ 468
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:RESource?...................................................................469
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:RESource?........................................................................469
:SYSTem:HELP:EXPort..................................................................................................469
:SYSTem:IDENtification..................................................................................................469
:SYSTem:IDENtification:PRESet..................................................................................... 470
:SYSTem:LANGuage..................................................................................................... 470
:SYSTem:INFormation:SCPI........................................................................................... 470
:SYSTem:SECurity:SANitize[:STATe]...............................................................................470
:SYSTem:SPECification?................................................................................................471
:SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion....................................................................................472
:SYSTem:SPECification:IDENtification:CATalog?..............................................................472
:SYSTem:SPECification:PARameter?.............................................................................. 473
:SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:CATalog?.................................................................... 473
:SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:FACTory?.................................................................... 473
:SYSTem:SRData?........................................................................................................ 474
:SYSTem:STARtup:COMPlete?.......................................................................................474
:SYSTem:DATE.............................................................................................................474
:SYSTem:NTP:HOSTname............................................................................................. 475
:SYSTem:NTP:STATe.................................................................................................... 475
:SYSTem:TIME..............................................................................................................475
:SYSTem:TIME:ZONE....................................................................................................476
:SYSTem:TIME:ZONE:CATalog?.....................................................................................476
:SYSTem:UPTime?........................................................................................................ 476
:SYSTem:BIOS:VERSion?..............................................................................................476
:SYSTem:VERSion?.......................................................................................................476
:SYSTem:OSYStem?..................................................................................................... 477
:SYSTem:MMEMory:PATH:USER?................................................................................. 477
:SYSTem:DFPR?...........................................................................................................477
:SYSTem:REBoot.......................................................................................................... 477
:SYSTem:RESTart......................................................................................................... 478
:SYSTem:SHUTdown..................................................................................................... 478
:SYSTem:WAIT............................................................................................................. 478
:SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?
Queries the error/event queue for all unread items and removes them from the queue.
The response is a comma separated list of error number and a short description of the
error in FIFO order.
Positive error numbers are instrument-dependent. Negative error numbers are
reserved by the SCPI standard.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
458
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Return values:
<All>
string
List of: Error/event_number,"Error/event_description>[;Devicedependent info]"
If the queue is empty, the response is 0,"No error"
Example:
SYST:ERR:ALL?
queries all entries in the error queue.
Response: 0, 'no error'
No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Clear History" on page 504
:SYSTem:ERRor:CODE:ALL?
Queries all entries in the error queue and then deletes them. Only the error numbers
are returned and not the entire error text.
Return values:
<All>
string
0
"No error", i.e. the error queue is empty
positive value
Positive error numbers denote device-specific errors
negative value
Negative error numbers denote error messages defined by
SCPI.
Example:
SYST:ERR:CODE:ALL
queries all entries in the error queue.
Response: 0
no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:ERRor:CODE[:NEXT]?
Queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it. Only the error number
is returned and not the entire error text.
Return values:
<Next>
string
0
"No error", i.e. the error queue is empty
positive value
Positive error numbers denote device-specific errors
negative value
Negative error numbers denote error messages defined by
SCPI.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
459
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Example:
SYST:ERR:CODE
queries the oldest entry in the error queue.
Response: 0
No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt?
Queries the number of entries in the error queue. If the error queue is empty, '0' is
returned.
Return values:
<Count>
integer
Example:
SYST:ERR:COUN
queries the number of entries in the error queue.
Response: 1
One error has occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
Queries the error/event queue for the oldest item and removes it from the queue. The
response consists of an error number and a short description of the error.
Positive error numbers are instrument-dependent. Negative error numbers are
reserved by the SCPI standard.
Return values:
<Next>
string
Error/event_number,"Error/event_description>[;Device-dependent info]"
If the queue is empty, the response is 0,"No error"
Example:
SYST:ERR?
queries the oldest entry in the error queue.
Response: 0, 'no error'
No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Show History / Show Static" on page 504
:SYSTem:ERRor:HISTory?
Queries the error history.
Note that the result can amount several kilobytes.
Return values:
<ErrorHistory>
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
string
460
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Example:
See Example "Querying the error queue" on page 457
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:ERRor:HISTory:CLEar
Clears the error history.
Example:
See Example "Querying the error queue" on page 457
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Clear History" on page 504
:SYSTem:ERRor:STATic?
Returns a list of all errors existing at the time when the query is started. This list corresponds to the display on the info page under manual control.
Return values:
<StaticErrors>
string
Example:
See Example "Querying the error queue" on page 457
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:ULOCk <Mode>
Locks or unlocks the user interface of the instrument.
Parameters:
<Mode>
ENABled | DONLy | DISabled | TOFF | VNConly
ENABled
Unlocks the display, the touchscreen and all controls for the
manual operation.
DONLy
Locks the touchscreen and controls for the rmanual operation of
the instrument. The display shows the current settings.
VNConly
Locks the touchscreen and controls for the rmanual operation,
and enables remote operation over VNC. The display shows the
current settings.
TOFF
Locks the touchscreen for the rmanual operation of the instrument. The display shows the current settings.
DISabled
Locks the display, the touchscreen and all controls for the manual operation.
*RST:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
n.a. (factory preset: ENABled)
461
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Example:
SYST:ULOC ON
activates the user interface lock.
Manual operation:
See "User Interface" on page 236
:SYSTem:DLOCk <DispLockStat>
Disables the manual operation via the display, including the front panel keyboard of the
instrument and the LOCAL key.
Parameters:
<DispLockStat>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
Example:
SYST:DLOC ON
Activates the display lock. The instrument cannot be operated
via the display until it has been enabled with SYST:DLOC OFF.
Manual operation:
See "User Interface" on page 236
:SYSTem:KLOCk <State>
Disables the front panel keyboard of the instrument including the LOCAL key.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
Example:
SYST:KLOC ON
Locks the front panel and external controls.
To enable the controls, send SYST:KLOC OFF.
Manual operation:
See "User Interface" on page 236
:SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe] <State>[, <Key>]
Activates and deactivates the specified protection level.
Suffix:
<ch>
Parameters:
<State>
.
Indicates the protection level.
See also "Protection" on page 232
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
n.a. (factory preset: 1)
462
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Setting parameters:
<Key>
integer
The respective functions are disabled when the protection level
is activated. No password is required for activation of a level.
A password must be entered to deactivate the protection level.
The default password for the first level is 123456.
This protection level is required to unlock internal adjustments
for example.
Example:
// to activate protection level
SYSTem:PROTect1:STATe 1
// internal adjustments or hostname cannot be changed
// to unlock protection level 1
SYSTem:PROTect1:STATe 0,123456
// internal adjustments are accessible
Manual operation:
See "Protection Level/Password" on page 234
:SYSTem:SECurity:VOLMode[:STATe] <SecPassWord>, <MmemProtState>
Activates volatile mode, so that no user data can be written to the internal memory permanently.
To enable volatile mode, reboot the instrument. Otherwise the change has no effect.
Parameters:
<MmemProtState>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Setting parameters:
<SecPassWord>
string
Current security password
The default password is 123456.
Example:
SYSTem:SECurity:VOLMode:STATe "123456", 1
SYSTem:REBoot
Manual operation:
See "Volatile Mode" on page 235
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:LTERminator <LTerminator>
Sets the terminator recognition for remote control via GPIB interface.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
463
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Parameters:
<LTerminator>
STANdard | EOI
EOI
Recognizes an LF (Line Feed) as the terminator only when it is
sent with the line message EOI (End of Line). This setting is recommended particularly for binary block transmissions, as binary
blocks may coincidentally contain a characater with value LF
(Line Feed), although it is not determined as a terminator.
STANdard
Recognizes an LF (Line Feed) as the terminator regardless of
whether it is sent with or without EOI.
*RST:
Example:
n.a. (factory preset: STANdard)
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings"
on page 456.
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RESource?
Queries the visa resource string for remote control via the GPIB interface.
To change the GPIB address, use the command :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:
SELF]:ADDRess.
Return values:
<Resource>
string
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings"
on page 456.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <Address>
Sets the GPIB address.
Parameters:
<Address>
integer
Range:
*RST:
Example:
0 to 30
28
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings"
on page 456.
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:HISLip:RESource?
Queries the VISA resource string . This string is used for remote control of the instrument with HiSLIP protocol.
Return values:
<Resource>
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
string
464
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings"
on page 456.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress <IpAddress>
Sets the IP address.
Parameters:
<IpAddress>
string
Range:
0.0.0.0. to ff.ff.ff.ff
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 455.
Manual operation:
See "IP Address" on page 258
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:MODE <Mode>
Selects manual or automatic setting of the IP address.
Parameters:
<Mode>
AUTO | STATic
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: AUTO)
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 455.
Example:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:MODE STATic
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress "10.113.0.105"
Manual operation:
See "Address Mode" on page 257
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:MACaddress <MacAddress>
Queries the MAC address of the network adapter.
This is a password-protected function. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it, see :
SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe].
Parameters:
<MacAddress>
string
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 455.
Manual operation:
See "MAC Address" on page 257
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESource?
Queries the visa resource string for Ethernet instruments.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
465
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Return values:
<Resource>
string
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings"
on page 456.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESTart
Restarts the network.
Example:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESTart
// Terminates the network connection and sets it up again
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Restart Network" on page 259
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:STATus?
Queries the network configuration state.
Return values:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 455.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Network Status" on page 257
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:DOMain <Domain>
Determines the primary suffix of the network domain.
Parameters:
<Domain>
string
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 455.
Manual operation:
See "DNS Suffix" on page 258
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:HOSTname <Hostname>
Sets an individual hostname for the Signal Generator.
Note:We recommend that you do not change the hostname to avoid problems with the
network connection. If you change the hostname, be sure to use a unique name.
This is a password-protected function. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it, see :
SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe].
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
466
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Parameters:
<Hostname>
string
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 455.
Manual operation:
See "Hostname" on page 257
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:WORKgroup <Workgroup>
Sets an individual workgroup name for the instrument.
Parameters:
<Workgroup>
string
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 455.
Manual operation:
See "Workgroup" on page 257
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:DNS <DNS>
Determines or queries the network DNS server to resolve the name.
Parameters:
<DNS>
string
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 455.
Manual operation:
See "DNS Server" on page 259
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:GATeway <Gateway>
Sets the IP address of the default gateway.
Parameters:
<Gateway>
string
Range:
0.0.0.0 to ff.ff.ff.ff
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 455.
Manual operation:
See "Default Gateway" on page 258
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:SUBNet:MASK <Mask>
Sets the subnet mask.
Parameters:
<Mask>
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
string
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 455.
467
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Manual operation:
See "Subnet Mask" on page 258
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BAUD <Baud>
Defines the baudrate for the serial remote control interface.
Parameters:
<Baud>
2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 115200)
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings"
on page 456.
Manual operation:
See "Baud Rate" on page 261
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PARity <Parity>
Enters the parity for the serial remote control interface.
Parameters:
<Parity>
NONE | ODD | EVEN
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: NONE)
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings"
on page 456.
Manual operation:
See "Parity" on page 261
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:RESource?
Queries the visa resource string for the serial remote control interface. This string is
used for remote control of the instrument.
Return values:
<Resource>
string
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings"
on page 456.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:SBITs <SBits>
Defines the number of stop bits for the serial remote control interface.
Parameters:
<SBits>
1|2
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 1)
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings"
on page 456.
Manual operation:
See "Stop Bits" on page 261
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
468
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:RESource?
Queries the visa resource string for remote control via LAN interface, using TCP/IP
socket protocol.
Return values:
<Resource>
string
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings"
on page 456.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:RESource?
Queries the visa resource string for remote control via the USB interface.
Return values:
<Resource>
string
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings"
on page 456.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:HELP:EXPort
Saves the online help as zip archive in the user directory.
Example:
:SYSTem:HELP:EXPort
MMEM:CDIR?
// "/var/user"
MMEM:CAT?
// ..,"Log,DIR,4096","help.tgz,BIN,69836600"
// confirms that help zip archive is saved.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:: "Setup > Help > Export Help to User Path"
:SYSTem:IDENtification <Identification>
Selects the mode to determine the "IDN String" and the "OPT String" for the instrument, selected with command :SYSTem:LANGuage.
Note: While working in a emulation mode, the R&S SMA100B specific command set is
disabled, that is, the SCPI command SYST:IDEN will be discarded.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
469
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Parameters:
<Identification>
AUTO | USER
AUTO
Automatically determines the "IDN String" and the "OPT String".
USER
Enables the selection of user definable "IDN String" and "OPT
String".
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: AUTO)
Example:
SYST:IDEN AUTO
automatically asigns the OPT and IDN strings accoording to the
selected instrument language.
Manual operation:
See "Mode" on page 262
:SYSTem:IDENtification:PRESet
Sets the *IDN and *OPT strings in user defined mode to default values.
Example:
SYST:IDEN USER
SYST:IDEN:PRES
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Set to Default" on page 262
:SYSTem:LANGuage <Language>
Sets the remote control command set.
Parameters:
<Language>
string
Example:
SYSTem:LANGuage "SCPI"
// selects SCPI command set
Manual operation:
See "Language" on page 262
:SYSTem:INFormation:SCPI <InfoString>
Inserts system information in recorded SCPI command lists, for example information
on a missing command.
Parameters:
<InfoString>
Example:
string
SYST:INF:SCPI "missing command"
enters the information into a recorded SCPI command list.
:SYSTem:SECurity:SANitize[:STATe] <SecPassWord>, <MmemProtState>
Sanitizes the internal memory.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
470
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Parameters:
<MmemProtState>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Setting parameters:
<SecPassWord>
string
Example:
SYSTem:SECurity:SANitize[:STATe] 1
//
Manual operation:
See "Sanitize" on page 235
:SYSTem:SPECification? <Id>
Retrieves data sheet information for a specific parameter.
Setting parameters:
<Id>
string
Identifies the name of the entry in the data sheet, as quieried
with the command :SYSTem:SPECification:
IDENtification:CATalog? on page 472
Return values:
<ValList>
float
Comma-separated list with the specified and, if available, the
typical value of the parameter, as specified in the data sheet.
See also "Data Sheet" on page 271.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
471
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Example:
Retrieving instruments specification
Note: The following values are merely an example.
// query the data sheet versions stored in the instrument
:SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:CATalog?
// "04.03,04.02,04.01,04.00,03.04,03.03,03.02,03.01,03.00,
// 02.96,02.95,02.94,02.02,02.01,02.00,01.03,01.02,01.01,01.00"
// query the data sheet version with that the instrument was delivered
:SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:FACTory?
// "04.00"
// select a data sheet version
:SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion?
// 04.00
:SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion "04.01"
// selects one particular data sheet version
// queries regarding data sheet parameters (IDs) and their values
// refer to this particular data sheet
// query the IDs of all parameters
// listed in the selected data sheet version
:SYSTem:SPECification:IDENtification:CATalog?
// "ID_RF_FREQ_SETTING_TIME_ALC_ON_MS,ID_RF_FREQ_SETTING_TIME_MS,..."
// query the data sheet information on a specific parameter,
// defined by its ID
:SYSTem:SPECification? "ID_RF_FREQ_SETTING_TIME_ALC_ON_MS"
// returned is the specified and, if available,
// the typical value of the parameter
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion <Version>
Selects a data sheet version from the data sheets saved on the instrument.
Further queries regarding the data sheet parameters (<Id>) and their values refer to
the selected data sheet.
To query the list of data sheet versions, use the command :SYSTem:
SPECification:VERSion:CATalog? on page 473.
Parameters:
<Version>
string
Example:
See :SYSTem:SPECification? on page 471.
:SYSTem:SPECification:IDENtification:CATalog?
Queries the parameter identifiers (<Id>) available in the data sheet.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
472
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Return values:
<IdList>
string
Comma-separated string of the parameter identifiers (<Id>)
Example:
See :SYSTem:SPECification? on page 471.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:SPECification:PARameter? <Id>[, <Parameter>]
Retrieves data sheet information for a specific parameter.
Setting parameters:
<Id>
string
Identifies the name of the entry in the data sheet.
Query the data sheet parameters with the command :SYSTem:
SPECification:IDENtification:CATalog?.
<Parameter>
float
An additional value the result (ValList) depends on.
Return values:
<ValList>
float
Comma-separated list with the specified and, if available, the
typical value of the parameter, as specified in the data sheet.
Example:
Note: The following values are merely an example. Your instrument may not support the same parameters.
SYST:SPEC:PAR? "ID_RF_FREQ_SETTING_TIME_MS",0.1
SYST:SPEC:PAR? "ID_RF_LEVEL_MAX_GENERAL_DBM",
0.1
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:CATalog?
Queries all data sheet versions stored in the instrument.
Return values:
<VersCatalog>
string
Example:
See :SYSTem:SPECification? on page 471.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:FACTory?
Queries the data sheet version of the factory setting.
Return values:
<Version>
string
Example:
See :SYSTem:SPECification? on page 471.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
473
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Versions" on page 500
:SYSTem:SRData?
Queris the SCPI recording data from the internal file.
This feature enables you to transfer an instrument configuration to other test environments, as e.g. laboratory virtual instruments.
Return values:
<FileData>
block data
Example:
SYSTem:SRData?
// #3118:SOURce1:ROSCillator:SOURce EXT
:SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 4000000000
:SOURce1:FREQuency:OFFSet 1000000
:SOURce1:AM1:STATe 1
:OUTPut1:STATe 1
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:STARtup:COMPlete?
Queries if the startup of the instrument is completed.
Return values:
<Complete>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SYST:STAR:COMP?
Response: 1
the startup of the instrument is completed.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:DATE <Year>, <Month>, <Day>
Queries or sets the date for the instrument-internal calendar.
This is a password-protected function. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it, see :
SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe].
Parameters:
<Year>
integer
<Month>
integer
Range:
<Day>
integer
Range:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
1 to 12
1 to 31
474
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Example:
:SYSTem:DATE?
// 2016,05,01
Manual operation:
See "Date" on page 490
:SYSTem:NTP:HOSTname <NTPName>
Sets the address of the NTP server. You can enter the IP address, or the hostname.
Parameters:
<NTPName>
string
Example:
SYSTem:NTP:HOSTname "pool.ntp.org"
Manual operation:
See "NTP Address" on page 491
:SYSTem:NTP:STATe <UseNtpState>
Activates clock synchronization via NTP.
Parameters:
<UseNtpState>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SYSTem:NTP:STATe 1
Manual operation:
See "Use Time from NTP Server" on page 491
:SYSTem:TIME <Hour>, <Minute>, <Second>
Queries or sets the time for the instrument-internal clock.
This is a password-protected function. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it, see :
SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe].
Parameters:
<Hour>
integer
Range:
<Minute>
integer
Range:
<Second>
0 to 59
integer
Range:
Example:
0 to 23
0 to 59
SYSTem:TIME?
// 10,27,14
Manual operation:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
See "Time" on page 490
475
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
:SYSTem:TIME:ZONE <TimeZone>
Sets the timezone. You can query the list of the available timezones with :SYSTem:
TIME:ZONE:CATalog?.
Parameters:
<TimeZone>
string
Manual operation:
See "Timezone" on page 491
:SYSTem:TIME:ZONE:CATalog?
Querys the list of available timezones.
Return values:
<Catalog>
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Timezone" on page 491
:SYSTem:UPTime?
Queries the up time of the operating system.
Return values:
<UpTime>
"<ddd.hh:mm:ss>"
Example:
SYSTem:UPTime?
Response: "0.08:11:00"
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:BIOS:VERSion?
Queries the BIOS version of the instrument.
Return values:
<Version>
string
Example:
SYST:BIOS:VERS?
queries the BIOS version.
Response: 123456
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:VERSion?
Queries the SCPI version the instrument's command set complies with.
Return values:
<Version>
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
string
476
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Example:
SYST:VERS
queries the SCPI version.
Response: "1996"
The instrument complies with the SCPI version from 1996.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:OSYStem?
Queries the operating system of the instrument.
Return values:
<OperSystem>
string
Example:
SYSTem:OSYStem?
Response: "Linux"
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:MMEMory:PATH:USER?
Queries the user directory, that means the directory the R&S SMA100B stores user
files on.
Return values:
<PathUser>
string
Example:
SYSTem:MMEMory:PATH:USER?
Response: "'/var/user/"
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:DFPR?
Queries the device footprint of the instrument. The retrieved information is in machinereadable form suitable for automatic further processing.
Return values:
<DeviceFootprint>
string
Information on the instrument type and details on the installed
FW version, hardware and software options.
Example:
:SYSTem:DFPR?
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:REBoot
Reboots the instrument including the operating system.
Usage:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
Event
477
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
STATus Subsystem
:SYSTem:RESTart
Restarts the instrument without restarting the operating system.
Usage:
Event
:SYSTem:SHUTdown
Shuts down the instrument.
Usage:
Event
:SYSTem:WAIT <TimeMs>
Delays the execution of the subsequent remote command by the specified time.
This function is useful, for example to execute an SCPI sequence automatically but
with a defined time delay between some commands.
See Chapter 10.2.3, "Assigning Actions to the User Key", on page 226.
Setting parameters:
<TimeMs>
integer
Wait time in ms
Range:
*RST:
Example:
0 to 10000
0
:SYSTem:WAIT 10000
// waits 10s before resetting the instrument
*RST
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "Wizard" on page 225
12.17 STATus Subsystem
This system contains the commands for the status reporting system. See also Chapter A.1.5, "Status Reporting System", on page 520 for detailed information.
*RST on page 309 has no effect on the status registers.
Value ranges
●
Queries return the current value of the respective register, which permits a check of
the device status.
Return values: A decimal value in the range 0 to 32767 (=215-1)
●
The configuration commands set the respective register thus determining which
status changes of the R&S SMA100B cause the status registers to be changed.
Setting values: A decimal value in the range 0 to 32767 (=215-1)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
478
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
STATus Subsystem
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition...................................................................................... 479
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle.......................................................................................... 479
:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt].......................................................................................... 479
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition....................................................................................480
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition.................................................................................... 480
:STATus:PRESet........................................................................................................... 480
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition..................................................................................480
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle...................................................................................... 481
:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]......................................................................................481
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition................................................................................481
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition................................................................................481
:STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?............................................................................................... 482
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition <Condition>
Sets the content of the CONDition part of the STATus:OPERation register. This part
contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument. The
content is not deleted after being read out because it indicates the current hardware
status.
Parameters:
<Condition>
Example:
string
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
queries the Status:Operation:Condition register.
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle <Enable>
Sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus:OPERation register. This setting determines which events of the Status-Event part are forwarded to the sum bit in the status
byte. These events can be used for a service request.
Parameters:
<Enable>
Example:
string
:STAT:OPER:ENAB 32767
all events are forwarded to the sum bit of the status byte.
:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt] <Event>
Queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus:OPERation register. This part
contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since the last readout.
The content of the EVENt part is deleted after being read out.
Parameters:
<Event>
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
string
:STAT:OPER:EVEN?
queries the STATus:OPERation:EVENt register.
479
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
STATus Subsystem
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <Ntransition>
Sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus:OPERation register. If a bit is set,
a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt
part of the register. The disappearance of an event in the hardware is thus registered,
for example the end of an adjustment.
Parameters:
<Ntransition>
Example:
string
:STAT:OPER:NTR 0
a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the Status:Operation register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVENt
part.
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <Ptransition>
Sets the bits of the PTRansition part of the STATus:OPERation register. If a bit is set,
a transition from 0 to 1 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt
part of the register. A new event in the hardware is thus registered, for example the
start of an adjustment.
Parameters:
<Ptransition>
Example:
string
:STAT:OPER:PTR 32767
all transitions from 0 to 1 in the condition part of the Status:Operation register cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part.
:STATus:PRESet <Preset>
Resets the status registers. All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh (32767), i.e. all
transitions from 0 to 1 are detected. All NTRansition parts are set to 0, i.e. a transition
from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected. The ENABle parts of STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable are set to 0, i.e. all events in these registers are not
passed on.
Parameters:
<Preset>
Example:
string
STAT:PRES
resets the status registers.
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition <Condition>
Queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus:QUEStionable register. This
part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument.
The content is not deleted after being read out since it indicates the current hardware
status.
Parameters:
<Condition>
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
string
480
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
STATus Subsystem
Example:
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
queries the Status:Questionable:Condition register.
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <Enable>
Sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus:QUEStionable register. The enable part
determines which events of the STATus:EVENt part are enabled for the summary bit in
the status byte. These events can be used for a service request.
If a bit in the ENABle part is 1, and the correesponding EVENt bit is true, a positive
transition occurs in the summary bit. This transition is reportet to the next higher level.
Parameters:
<Enable>
Example:
string
STAT:QUES:ENAB 1
Problems when performing an adjustment cause an entry to be
made in the sum bit.
:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt] <Event>
Queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus:QUEStionable register. This
part contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since the last
readout. The content of the EVENt part is deleted after being read out.
Parameters:
<Event>
Example:
string
STAT:QUES:EVEN?
queries the Status:Questionable:Event register.
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <Ntransition>
Sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus:QUEStionable register. If a bit is
set, a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the
EVENt part of the register.
Parameters:
<Ntransition>
Example:
string
STAT:QUES:NTR 0
a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the STATus:QUEStionable register does not cause an entry to be made
in the EVENt part
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <PTransition>
Sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus:QUEStionable register. If a bit is
set, a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the
EVENt part of the register.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
481
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
TEST Subsystem
Parameters:
<PTransition>
Example:
string
STAT:QUES:PTR 32767
all transitions from 0 to 1 in the condition part of the STATus:QUEStionable register cause an entry to be made in the
EVENt part
:STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?
Queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it. Positive error numbers
denote device-specific errors, and negative error numbers denote error messages
defined by SCPI. If the error queue is empty, 0 ("No error") is returned.
The command is identical to :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? on page 460.
Return values:
<Next>
string
Example:
:STATus:QUEue?
queries the oldest entry in the error queue.
Response: 0, 'no error'
no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out
Usage:
Query only
12.18 TEST Subsystem
The TEST subsystem contains the commands for performing test routines directly at
the hardware assemblies.
The selftetst responses with a 0 if the test is performed successfully, otherwise a value
other than 0 is returned. None of the commands of this system has a *RST value.
:TEST<hw>:ALL:STARt.................................................................................................. 482
:TEST<hw>:ALL:RESult?................................................................................................482
:TEST<hw>:ALL:STARt
Usage:
Event
Starts the selftest. Use the command :TEST<hw>:ALL:RESult? to query the result.
:TEST<hw>:ALL:RESult?
Queries the result of the performed selftest. Start the selftest with :TEST<hw>:ALL:
STARt.
Return values:
<Result>
0 | 1 | RUNning | STOPped
*RST:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
STOPped
482
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
TRIGger Subsystem
Usage:
Query only
12.19 TRIGger Subsystem
The TRIGger system contains the commands for selecting the trigger source for the
RF and LF sweep.
You can work with an internal or with an externally applied trigger signal. In this case,
use the commands in the SOURce:INPut subsystem to configure the signal.
The trigger system of the R&S SMA100B is a simplified implementation of the SCPI
trigger system. The TRIGger system differs from the SCPI system as follows:
●
No INITiate command; the instrument behaves as if INITiate:CONTinuous
ON were set.
●
Under TRIGger several sweep subsystems exist.
●
The trigger source names correspond directly to the various settings of manual
control. SCPI uses different names which are also accepted by the instrument. The
SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration.
In addition to these commands, see more trigger-related commands in the modulation
and RF signal subsystems.
Table 12-1: Cross-reference between the manual and remote control
R&S proprietary value name
SCPI conform value name
Parameter in manual control
AUTO
IMMediate
"Auto" mode
SINGle
BUS
"Single" mode.
EXTernal
EXTernal
"Ext Single" and "Ext Step" mode.
Use command LFO:SWEep:MODE
to select between the two sweep
modes.
EAUTo
-
"Ext Start/Stop" mode.
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce....................................................................................483
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce.................................................................................483
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce....................................................................................484
:TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep]:SOURce....................................................................................484
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep[:IMMediate]................................................................................485
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep[:IMMediate]................................................................................485
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:IMMediate.............................................................................. 485
:TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep][:IMMediate]................................................................................485
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep.............................................................................................. 485
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce <Source>
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce <Source>
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
483
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
TRIGger Subsystem
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce <Source>
:TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep]:SOURce <Source>
Selects the trigger source for the corresponding sweeps:
●
FSWeep - RF frequency
●
LFFSweep - LF frequency
●
PSWeep - RF level
●
SWEep - all sweeps
The source names of the parameters correspond to the values provided in manual
control of the instrument. They differ from the SCPI-compliant names, but the instrument accepts both variants.
Use the SCPI name, if compatibility is an important issue. Find the corresponding
SCPI-compliant commands in Cross-reference between the manual and remote control .
Setting parameters:
<Source>
AUTO | IMMediate | SINGle | BUS | EXTernal | EAUTo
AUTO [IMMediate]
Executes a sweep automatically.
In this free-running mode, the trigger condition is met continuously. I.e. when a sweep is completed, the next one starts
immediately.
SINGle [BUS]
Executes one complete sweep cycle.
The following commands initiate a trigger event:
*TRG on page 310
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:EXECute
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute
:TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep][:IMMediate], :TRIGger<hw>:
PSWeep[:IMMediate] and :TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep[:
IMMediate].
Set the sweep mode with the commands:
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:MODE AUTO|STEP
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE AUTO|STEP
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE
AUTO|STEP
In step mode (STEP), the instrument executes only one step.
EXTernal
An external signal triggers the sweep.
EAUTo
An external signal triggers the sweep. When one sweep is finished, the next sweep starts.
A second trigger event stops the sweep at the current frequency,
a third trigger event starts the trigger at the start frequency, and
so on.
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
AUTO
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 403
484
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
UNIT Subsystem
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "Mode" on page 125
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep[:IMMediate]
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep[:IMMediate]
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:IMMediate
:TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep][:IMMediate]
Performs a single sweep and immediately starts the activated, corresponding sweep:
●
FSWeep - RF frequency
●
PSWeep - RF level
●
LFFSweep - LF frequency
●
SWEep - all sweeps
Effective in the following configuration:
●
TRIG:FSW|LFFS|PSW|[:SWE]:SOUR SING
●
SOUR:SWE:FREQ|POW:MODE AUTO or SOUR:LFO:SWE:[FREQ:]MODE AUTO
Alternativelly, you can use the IMMediate command instead of the respective
SWEep:[FREQ:]|POW:EXECute command.
Example:
TRIG
Starts all active sweeps.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See " Execute Single Sweep " on page 128
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep
Executes an LF frequency sweep in the following configuration:
●
TRIG:LFFS:SOUR SING
●
LFO:SWE:MODE AUTO
Example:
LFO:SWE:MODE AUTO
TRIG:LFFS:SOUR SING
TRIG:LFFSweep
Usage:
Event
12.20 UNIT Subsystem
The UNIT subsystem is used to set default units for parameters if no unit is indicated in
a command. These settings are valid for the entire instrument.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
485
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands
UNIT Subsystem
Example: Setting default units for remote control
UNIT:POW V
UNIT:ANGL DEG
Sets V (volts) as unit of all power parameters, DEG (degrees) for the phase modulation
angle and KMH for the speed.
:UNIT:ANGLe................................................................................................................ 486
:UNIT:POWer................................................................................................................ 486
:UNIT:ANGLe <Angle>
Sets the default unit for phase modulation angle. The command affects no other
parameters, such as RF phase, or the manual control or display.
Parameters:
<Angle>
DEGree | DEGRee | RADian
*RST:
RADian
:UNIT:POWer <Power>
Sets the default unit for all power parameters. This setting affects the GUI, as well as
all remote control commands that determine power values.
Parameters:
<Power>
V | DBUV | DBM
*RST:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
DBM
486
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance
Cleaning
13 Maintenance
The instrument does not need periodic maintenance. Only the cleaning of the instrument is essential.
Follow the instructions in the service manual and the safety instructions when
exchanging modules or ordering spares. The order no. for spare parts is included in
the service manual. The service manual includes further information particularly on
troubleshooting, repair, exchange of modules and alignment.
The address of our support center and a list of all Rohde & Schwarz service centers
can be found at the beginning of this manual.
Risk of damage during shipment
Insufficient protection against mechanical and electrostatic effects during shipment can
damage the instrument.
●
When shipping an instrument, use the original packaging. If you do not have the
original packaging, use sufficient padding to prevent the instrument from moving
around inside the box.
●
Pack the instrument in antistatic wrap to protect it from electrostatic charging.
●
Secure the instrument to prevent any movement and other mechanical effects during transportation.
13.1 Cleaning
Risk of electric shock
If moisture enters the casing, for example if you clean the instrument using a moist
cloth, contact with the instrument can lead to electric shock. Before cleaning the instrument other than with a dry cloth, make sure that the instrument is switched off and disconnected from all power supplies.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
487
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance
Storing and Packing
Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents
Cleaning agents contain substances such as solvents (thinners, acetone, etc.), acids,
bases, or other substances. Solvents can damage the front panel labeling, plastic
parts, or screens, for example.
Never use cleaning agents to clean the outside of the instrument. Use a soft, dry, lintfree dust cloth instead.
Risk of instrument damage due to obstructed fans
If the instrument is operated in dusty areas, the fans become obstructed by dust or
other particles over time. Check and clean the fans regularly to ensure that they always
operate properly. If the instrument is run with obstructed fans for a longer period, the
instrument overheats, which can disturb the operation and even cause damage.
1. Clean the outside of the instrument using a soft, dry, lint-free dust cloth.
2. Check and clean the fans regularly to ensure that they always operate properly.
3. Clean the touchscreen as follows:
a) Apply a small amount of standard screen cleaner to a soft cloth.
b) Wipe the screen gently with the moist, but not wet, cloth.
c) If necessary, remove any excess moisture with a dry, soft cloth.
13.2 Storing and Packing
The storage temperature range of the instrument is given in the data sheet. If the
instrument is to be stored for a longer period of time, it must be protected against dust.
Repack the instrument as it was originally packed when transporting or shipping. The
two protective foam plastic parts prevent the control elements and connectors from
being damaged. The antistatic packing foil avoids any undesired electrostatic charging
to occur.
If you do not use the original packaging, use a sturdy cardboard box of suitable size
and provide for sufficient padding to prevent the instrument from slipping inside the
package. Wrap antistatic packing foil around the instrument to protect it from electrostatic charging.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
488
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance
Performing Maintenance Tasks
13.3 Performing Maintenance Tasks
The R&S SMA100B is accurate due to integrated adjustment procedures, which you
can execute directly on the instrument.
Internal Adjustments
Risk of DUT damage
During internal adjustments, the instrument temporarily applies high power at the RF
output. This high power can destroy a connected DUT (device under test).
Do not start internal adjustments if DUT is connected.
Disconnect the DUT and replace it by a terminating resistor with adequate power rating. We recommend that you use a 50 Ohm, 10 W or larger terminating resistor.
Risk of invalid adjustment
Wait until the instrument has reached its operating temperature before you start the
adjustment procedure. The warm-up time is 30 minutes.
Self-calibration routines that require additional (external) equipment are performed at
an authorized Rohde & Schwarz service center.
See also "Protection levels" on page 232.
When to perform adjustments?
We recommend that you perform internal adjustments in the following cases:
●
Before starting any application, that requires a maximum of level and frequency
accuracy
●
When a long period of time has passed since the last adjustments
●
If the ambient temperature of the instrument significantly differs from the one of the
last adjustments.
Additional Information to the Adjustments
During adjustments, a progress indicator shows the status of the process. If any error
occurs, the process aborts and an error message appears in the info line.
The extent of the adjustments depends on the installed options.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
489
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance
Performing Maintenance Tasks
13.3.1 Date and Time Settings
The R&S SMA100B uses an internal real-time clock to determine the date and time. It
adjusts the time and date to the timezone of your location automatically, by providing a
selection list of continents and cities.
The instrument records the time whenever you create or modify files on your instrument or you use timed licenses.
In addition, the instrument supports NTP (Network Time Protocol) for synchronizing all
connected instruments and computer systems to minimize time delays in the network.
You can see the current date and time as follows:
► Select "System Config > Setup > Maintenance > Date / Time".
The "Date / Time" dialog contains the time and data settings of the operating system.
This function is password-protected. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it, see
"Protection Level/Password" on page 234.
To set the date and time, proceed as described in "To set the date and time"
on page 30.
The required remote commands are described in Chapter 12.16, "SYSTem Subsystem", on page 455.
Date
Displays the date set in the operating system in the format [dd.mm.yyyy].
Remote command:
:SYSTem:DATE on page 474
Time
Displays the time set in the operating system in the format [hh.mm.ss].
The time setting corresponds to the selected Use Time from NTP Server.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:TIME on page 475
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
490
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance
Performing Maintenance Tasks
Timezone
Selects the timezone.
You can select the timezone according to the major cities on the respective continents.
Note: By typing the first letter, you can quickly navigate through the lists to find the
desired destination.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:TIME:ZONE on page 476
:SYSTem:TIME:ZONE:CATalog? on page 476
NTP Address
Sets the IP address or host name of the NTP server.
NTP is a network time protocol used for synchronizing all participating devices in a
data network.
You can select a high-precision time server to reduce the impact of varying network
delays.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:NTP:HOSTname on page 475
Use Time from NTP Server
Activates clock synchronization of the network via the NTP protocol.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:NTP:STATe on page 475
13.3.2 Check Front Panel
With the functions provided in this dialog, you can verify the functionality of the control
keys and the touchscreen.
For Instructions on how to perform the tests and the expected results, see Chapter 13.3.2.2, "How to Perform the Front Panel Tests", on page 492
In case of malfunctions:
Contact the Rohde & Schwarz customer support, see Chapter 14.6, "Collecting Information for Technical Support", on page 506.
Accessing the online help in the check front panel dialog or exiting via ESC
During the test, the actual functions of all keys are disabled, including the HELP and
the ESC keys.
13.3.2.1
Check Front Panel Settings
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > Maintenance > Check Front Panel".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
491
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance
Performing Maintenance Tasks
Reflecting the front panel, the "Check Front Panel" dialog contains all functions to
test the operating elements of the instrument. In addition, you can check the touchsensitive functionality by dragging one or more lines across the screen with your
finger.
13.3.2.2
How to Perform the Front Panel Tests
How to perform the touchscreen calibration
The screen responds to the touch of your finger, that means you can select or activate
an item by tapping it. Due to the design of the touchscreen, the capture area is firmly
set to a certain size and you do not need to define a range. But if the instrument does
not respond correctly to the touch, we recommend that you calibrate the touchscreen.
How to perform the key panel test
To perform the key panel test, you operate the keys at the front panel, and check the
response of the instrument in the "Check Front Panel" dialog. To perform this test
properly, check each key of the front panel. The test is only completed, when you have
verified all keys.
During the test, the actual functions of the keys are disabled.
1. Press the SETUP key.
2. Select "Maintenance > Check Front Panel"
The "Check Front Panel" dialog opens.
3. Press a key on the front panel.
Check if the corresponding key in the "Check Front Panel" dialog turns green.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
492
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance
Performing Maintenance Tasks
4. Press the same key a second time.
Check that the key in the dialog turns red.
Note: Pressing the same key again has no further effect, except for the ESC key,
see Press the ESC key a third time.
5. Continue with the next key on the front panel and repeat step 3 to step 5 until all
keys are tested.
The test is completed, when each key is verified successfully, confirmed by a "Test
passed" message.
► Press the ESC key a third time.
Exits the "Check Front Panel" dialog.
Expected responses:
●
Pressing a key once (green), pressing twice (red)
●
Pressing the ESC key a third time exits the dialog.
If you detect a malfunction, for example, you press the front panel key the first time,
and the color of the button in the dialog turns red (instead of green), the front panel key
may be stuck.
Contact the Rohde & Schwarz customer support, see Chapter 14.6, "Collecting Information for Technical Support", on page 506.
How to perform the touchscreen test
1. Press the SETUP key.
2. Select "Maintenance > Check Touch Panel"
3. Select "Touchscreen Test" to access the "Finger Paint" test window.
4. Drag with your finger one or more lines, for example diagonally across the screen.
The test traces the movements of your finger on the screen.
The following results are expected:
● If the lines are uninterrupted, the touchscreen works properly.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
493
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance
Performing Maintenance Tasks
●
If there are any gaps, the touch-sensitive functionality is damaged.
●
To return to the "Check Front Panel" dialog, press ESC.
In case of malfunctions:
Contact the Rohde & Schwarz customer support, see Chapter 14.6, "Collecting
Information for Technical Support", on page 506.
13.3.3 Internal Adjustment Settings
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > System > Internal Adjustments".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
494
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance
Performing Maintenance Tasks
In this dialog, you can perform internal calibration routines, and get information on
the last performed calibration.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 12.6,
"CALibration Subsystem", on page 322.
The information fields show by their background color whether the calibration state of
the instrument is still sufficient. We recommend that you perform internal adjustments
when either the temperature offset or the time since the last full adjustment exceeds
the specified criteria, see Time Since Last Full Adjustment and Temperature Offset To
Last Full Adjustment.
Further functions and individually targeted calibration routines are also available but
password-protected.
●
"Continue Adjustment On Error"
These functions are password-protected. Unlock the protection level 1 to access
them, see"Protection Level/Password" on page 234
●
Calibration routines
Self-calibration routines that require additional (external) equipment are performed
in the Rohde & Schwarz service center.
These functions are password-protected and require higher-level protection password, see "Protection levels" on page 232
For more information, see R&S SMA100B Service Manual.
Adjust All
Performs all available internal calibration routines of the instrument.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
495
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance
Performing Maintenance Tasks
NOTICE! Risk of DUT damage. During internal adjustments, the instrument temporarily
applies high power at the RF output. This high power can destroy a connected DUT
(device under test).
Do not start internal adjustments if DUT is connected.
Disconnect the DUT and replace it by a terminating resistor with adequate power rating. We recommend that you use a 50 Ohm, 10 W or larger terminating resistor.
Remote command:
:CALibration:ALL[:MEASure]? on page 323
Last Full Adjustment
Displays the date and time of the last fully performed adjustments.
Remote command:
:CALibration<hw>:ALL:DATE? on page 325
Time Since Last Full Adjustment
Displays the elapsed days since the last full adjustment.
If the last adjustment has been performed more than 100 days ago, the background
color of the parameter turns red.
Temperature Offset To Last Full Adjustment
Displays the temperature difference compared to the calibration temperature.
If the temperature deviates more than ± 5 K, the background of the parameter turns
red.
Remote command:
:CALibration<hw>:ALL:TEMP? on page 325
Information
Displays information to the current adjustment state.
Continue Adjustment on Error
Continues the calibration even though an error was detected. By default adjustments
are aborted on error.
This function is password-protected. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it, see
"Protection Level/Password" on page 234.
Remote command:
:CALibration<hw>:CONTinueonerror on page 324
13.3.4 FPGA/uC Update Settings
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > Maintenance > FPGA/µC Update".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
496
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance
Performing Maintenance Tasks
This dialog enables you to update the PCI-FPGA.
FPGA/µC
Updates the FPGA/µC.
Remote command:
n.a.
13.3.5 Requesting Instrument Configuration and Specifications
The R&S SMA100B is equipped with various hardware and software components. To
get an overview of what your instrument is equipped with, you can request the assemblies, hardware and software options, and the firmware version. The components are
structured according to the hardware configuration, software options, including the
license management, and externally used Rohde & Schwarz equipment, like R&S NRP
power sensors.
Software options purchased at a later stage can be activated with a keycode. The activation code is supplied with the software option. How to install options is described in
chapter 4 of the R&S SMA100B service manual.
The installation of hardware options purchased at a later stage is also described in
chapter 4 of the service manual. Most of the hardware options have to be installed at
an authorized Rohde & Schwarz service center.
13.3.5.1
Hardware Configuration Settings
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Hardware Config".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
497
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance
Performing Maintenance Tasks
The "Hardware Config" dialog lists all installed assemblies and externally connected instruments with information on their part and serial numbers, and revision
states. The dialog is divided in tabs, according to the hardware components of the
signal domains. The "Counter" tab provides information on the operation time and
number of times the instrument was powered on.
The remote commands required to query the hardware configuration are described in
Chapter 12.8, "DIAGnostic Subsystem", on page 333.
Assembly
The tables in the tabs show characteristics of the installed assemblies.
"Assembly"
Assembly designation.
"Part Number"
Part number of the assembly.
"Serial Number"
Serial number of the assembly.
"Revision"
Revision state of the assembly.
"Slot"
Indicates whether the assembly is connected to the serial bus or PCI
bus.
Remote command:
:DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo? on page 334
Counter
Displays information on the operation times of the R&S SMA100B.
Operation Time / h ← Counter
Displays the operation time in hours.
Remote command:
n.a.
Power On Count ← Counter
Displays the number of power-on.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
498
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance
Performing Maintenance Tasks
Remote command:
n.a.
Last Factory Calibration ← Counter
Displays the date of the last factory calibration.
Remote command:
:CALibration:DATA:FACTory:DATE? on page 323
13.3.5.2
Versions/Options Settings
Access:
► Select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Versions / Options".
The "Versions/Options" dialog shows the version of the installed instrument firmware, the hardware and software options, the data sheet and the software components of the firmware.
The remote commands required to query the hardware configuration are described in
Chapter 12.8, "DIAGnostic Subsystem", on page 333.
Firmware
Shows the firmware version and the version of the software platform.
Note: Your instrument is delivered with the latest firmware version available.
You can download firmware updates and the "Release Notes" that describe the modifications and the firmware update procedure.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/firmware/sma100b
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
499
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance
Performing Maintenance Tasks
Remote command:
n.a.
Downgrade Info
Shows downgrade information, like factory firmware version and minimum firmware
version to that the instrument can be downgraded.
Remote command:
n.a.
Show Open Source Acknowledgments
Accesses the list of the used open source software packages and the corresponding
verbatim license texts.
Hardware Options/Software Options
The tables in the "Hardware" and "Software" tabs list the installed hardware and software options.
"Option"
Short name of option
"Designation"
Name of option
"Expiration Date"
For regular options, "Permanent" is indicated in this column. Some
options are available as trial versions. This column shows their expiration date. After this date, the option is no longer available on the
instrument.
Remote command:
*OPT? on page 308
*IDN? on page 307
Versions
The "Versions" tab shows the versions of the technical specification of the
R&S SMA100B and of the software components that comprise the firmware.
"Package"
Name of the component.
"Version"
Current issue of the component.
E.g. the data sheet covers the technical data of the hardware components of the factory settings.
See also "Data Sheet" on page 271.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:FACTory? on page 473
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
500
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages
Error Messages
14 Troubleshooting and Error Messages
The R&S SMA100B distinguishes between various different messages such as status
messages, error messages, warnings, or information that are displayed in the "Info"
line on the screen, and also entered in the error/event queue of the status reporting
system.
This section describes the types of error messages and warnings. The status reporting
system is described in detail in Chapter A.1.5, "Status Reporting System",
on page 520.
You can also access an Info window with detailed information about all messages in a
history list. For details, see Chapter 14.4, "Querying Error Messages & Info Key",
on page 503
14.1 Error Messages
Error messages indicate errors in the instrument. They are displayed in different colors
depending on their importance and display duration. Errors (e.g. no calibration data)
are displayed in red, information (e.g. file not found) and warnings in black. Warnings
indicate less significant errors (e.g. the instrument operates outside specified data).
Some error messages require that the error must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured. To access the "Info" dialog with a list of current messages and a detailed description of each message, select "Info".
In the remote control mode, error messages are entered in the error/event queue of the
status reporting system and can be queried with the command SYSTem:ERRor?. If the
error queue is empty, 0 ("No error") is returned.
14.1.1 Volatile Messages
Volatile messages report automatic settings in the instrument (e.g. switching off of
incompatible types of modulation) or on illegal entries that are not accepted by the
instrument (e.g. range violations). They are displayed in the info line on a yellow background. They are displayed on top of status information or permanent messages.
Volatile messages do not normally demand user actions and disappear automatically
after a brief period of time. They are stored in the history, however.
SCPI command: :SYSTem:ERRor:ALL? or :SYSTem:ERRor:CODE[:NEXT]?
14.1.2 Permanent Messages
Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs further instrument
operation, e.g. a hardware fault. The error signaled by a permanent message must be
eliminated before correct instrument operation can be continued.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
501
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages
Device-Specific Error Messages
The message is displayed until the error is eliminated. It covers the status display in
the info line. After error elimination, the message automatically disappears and is also
recorded in the history.
SCPI command: :SYSTem:ERRor:STATic?
14.2 SCPI-Error Messages
The SCPI error messages are the same in all SCPI instruments. Detailed information
and an overview of all error messages as defined in SCPI standard can be found in the
corresponding documentation.
The errors are assigned negative numbers. The error text being entered into the error/
event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face on the left together with the error
code. Below the error text, there is an explanation as to the respective error.
14.3 Device-Specific Error Messages
The following table contains all error messages specific for the instrument in alphabetical order, as well as an explanation of the error situation. The positive error codes
mark the errors specific to the instrument.
The device-specific error messages set bit 3 in the ESR register.
The index provides a list of the error messages sorted according to their error codes.
Error
Code
Error
Description
Remedy
50
Extern reference out of
range or disconnected
External reference is selected but no external signal is applied or the signal is out of range.
●
●
Check the selected reference signal
source (internal or external) in the
"Setup > Reference Oscillator" dialog.
Change setting to 'internal' if no
appropriate external source is available.
140
This modulation forces
other modulations off
A modulation has been switched on which cannot
be used at the same time as an already active
modulation. The previous modulation has been
switched off.
180
Adjustment failed
Adjustment could not be executed
The adjustment data have to be generated first by an internal or external
adjustment or to be loaded into the
device
182
Adjustment data missing
Adjustment data is missing.
The adjustment data has to be generated
first by an internal or external adjustment
or to be loaded into the instrument.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
502
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages
Querying Error Messages & Info Key
Error
Code
Error
Description
Remedy
183
Adjustment data invalid
Adjustment data is invalid and must be restored.
The adjustment data has to be generated
again by an internal or external adjustment or to be loaded into the instrument.
200
Cannot access hardware
The data transmission to a module was unsuccessful.
The module is not installed, not properly
installed or missing.
201
Hardware revision out of
date
A later version of certain parts of the instrument is
necessary to execute the function selected.
The driver does not support the installed
version of a module.
202
Cannot access the
EEPROM
An error occurs when writing or reading a
EEPROM.
The EEPROM might be defect and has
to be replaced.
203
Invalid EEPROM data
Reading a EEPROM is possible, however the data
are inconsistent.
204
Driver initialization failed
Initialization of a driver fails when booting the
instrument firmware.
241
No current list
There is no list selected. To execute the required
operation, a list has to be selected in the related
dialog. If no list is available, a new list must be created.
242
Unknown list type specified
The list type selected is not valid for the required
operation.
Check the selected list type.
460
Cannot open file
The selected file cannot be opened.
Check the path and file name.
461
Cannot write file
The file cannot be written.
Check if the file is read-only.
462
Cannot read file
The file cannot be read.
Check if the file contents are compatible
with the file type.
463
Filename missing
The required operation cannot be executed
because the file name is not specified.
Enter file name when creating list.
464
Invalid filename extension
The file extension is not valid for the required
operation.
Check the file extension.
465
File contains invalid data
The selected file contains data that is not valid for
the file type.
Check the file extension.
The driver is not compatible with the
hardware or software configuration of the
instrument.
The file extension determines the data that is valid
for this file type. If the file extension is changed,
the lists are no longer recognized and the data is
therefore invalid.
14.4 Querying Error Messages & Info Key
The R&S SMA100B monitors the functions performed and automatically detects errors
and irregularities. The instrument displays the messages in the info-line and records
them in the background with a detailed description.
Find details to the system messages in Chapter 14, "Troubleshooting and Error Messages", on page 501.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
503
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages
Querying Error Messages & Info Key
To display information on static errors and error history
1. In the taskbar, select the "Info" icon.
2. For some messages, the information line appears briefly on the home screen.
To open the dialog, select the "Info" button.
The "Static Errors" dialog list the last monitored messages chronologically and displays additional information on the highlighted message.
In "Error History" dialog lists all accumulated messages with a short description.
If any critical error occurs, the R&S SMA100B automatically shows the icon in the
taskbar. Select the icon to obtain information on the error and the number of occurrences.
The icon is assigned to permanent messages. The message and icon are displayed
until the error is eliminated.
Clear History
Clears all messages in the "History" view.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:ERRor:ALL? on page 458
Each time a SYST:ERR:ALL? query is sent, the error queue is returned and at the
same time cleared.
:SYSTem:ERRor:HISTory:CLEar on page 461
Clears the messages in the "History" view.
Show History / Show Static
Toggles between "History" and "Static" view of the info dialog.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
504
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages
Resolving Network Connection Failures
Remote command:
:SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? on page 460
Each time a SYST:ERR? query is sent, the oldest entry in the error queue is returned
and at the same time cleared in the list.
14.5 Resolving Network Connection Failures
Several issues may cause failures in the network connection to the instrument. This
section lists the most likely reasons and the recommended solutions.
Common reasons for network connection failures
●
Network connecting cables and cable connectors of poor quality
●
Incompatibility between the network interface of the R&S SMA100B and certain
switches or routers available on the market
●
An invalid IP address assigned to the instrument
Possible solutions
Risk of network failure
Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks:
●
Connecting the instrument to the network
●
Configuring the network
●
Changing IP addresses
●
Exchanging hardware
Errors can affect the entire network.
●
Check the network infrastructure. Exchange connecting cables if obvious damage
is visible.
●
Observe the link status LED on the R&S SMA100B or the connected network
device. The link status LED is located next to the LAN connector.
If a link failure is detected, connect the instrument to a different device port or to a
different network device.
●
Check whether the LAN interface and the required LAN services are enabled.
See Chapter 10.4.3, "Configuring LAN Services", on page 238.
●
Check whether the IP address of the instrument is within the network's address
range.
(See also "IP Address" on page 258).
Check whether IP addresses that were set manually or obtained via the Zeroconf
(APIPA) protocol are valid.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
505
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages
Collecting Information for Technical Support
14.6 Collecting Information for Technical Support
If you encounter problems that you cannot solve yourself, contact your
Rohde & Schwarz support center as listed at http://www.customersupport.rohdeschwarz.com. Our support center staff is optimally trained to assist you in solving problems.
The support center finds solutions more quickly and efficiently if you provide them with
information on the instrument and an error description.
●
The following dialog boxes in the "Setup > Instrument Assembly" menu provide
useful information:
–
Hardware Configuration: hardware assemblies
–
Software and Options: the status of all software and hardware options installed on your instrument
●
System Messages: displayed in the "Info" line and provide information on any
errors that have occurred
●
Support file: a special file (*.tar.gz file) with important support information that
can be created automatically.
The support *.tar.gz file has a user definable name and contains the following
files and information:
–
SgErrors.txt: chronological record of errors
–
SystemRestaurationSMAB.savrcltxt: instrument settings at the last correct shutdown of the instrument
–
UndoHistSuppInfo.xml: list of the last user interactions
–
DeviceFootprint_<SerialNumber>_<Date>_<Time>.xml: service-related information on the instrument's configuration.
–
crashlog.txt, coredump: Postmortem debug info
–
Several files with information on the last performed adjustment and self-test.
See also the description of error messages Chapter 14.1, "Error Messages",
on page 501.
To collect error information in a support file
1. Connect a USB device to the R&S SMA100B.
2. Select "System Config > Setup > Maintenance > Create R&S Support Information".
3. In the "Create R&S Support Information" dialog, navigate to the /usb directory.
Enter the support filename, for example RSSupport_DeviceInfo.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
506
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages
Collecting Information for Technical Support
The error information and further required data is collected automatically.
The support file RSSupport_DeviceInfo.tar.gz is created and stored in the /
usb directory.
Collect the error information and attach it to an email in which you describe the
problem. Send the email to the customer support address for your region as listed
on the Internet (http://www.customersupport.rohde-schwarz.com).
To remove sensitive data
► For information on how to handle or remove the sensitive data from your instrument, refer to the description "Resolving Security Issues when working with
R&S SMA100B".
Packing and transporting the instrument
► If the instrument has to be transported or shipped, observe the notes described in
Chapter 2.1.1.2, "Unpacking and Checking the Instrument", on page 20.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
507
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
Annex
A Reference Information for Remote Control
A.1 Additional Basics on Remote Control
This section provides basic information using the remote control.
A.1.1 Messages
The messages transferred on the data lines are divided into the following categories:
●
Interface messages
Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines, with the
attention line being active (LOW). They are used to communicate between the controller and the instrument. Interface messages can only be sent by instruments that
have GPIB bus functionality. For details see the sections for the required interface.
●
Instrument messages
Instrument messages are employed in the same way for all interfaces, if not indicated otherwise in the description. Structure and syntax of the instrument messages
are described in Chapter A.1.3, "SCPI Command Structure", on page 509. A
detailed description of all messages available for the instrument is provided in the
chapter "Remote Control Commands".
There are different types of instrument messages, depending on the direction they
are sent:
–
Commands
–
Instrument responses
Commands
Commands (program messages) are messages the controller sends to the instrument.
They operate the instrument functions and request information. The commands are
subdivided according to two criteria:
●
●
According to the effect they have on the instrument:
–
Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instrument or setting the frequency.
–
Queries cause data to be provided for remote control, e.g. for identification of
the instrument or polling a parameter value. Queries are formed by directly
appending a question mark to the command header.
According to their definition in standards:
–
Common commands: their function and syntax are precisely defined in standard IEEE 488.2. They are employed identically on all instruments (if implemented). They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers, reset and self-test.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
508
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
–
Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of
the instrument such as frequency settings. Many of these commands have also
been standardized by the SCPI committee. These commands are marked as
"SCPI confirmed" in the command reference chapters. Commands without this
SCPI label are device-specific; however, their syntax follows SCPI rules as permitted by the standard.
Instrument responses
Instrument responses (response messages and service requests) are messages the
instrument sends to the controller after a query. They can contain measurement
results, instrument settings and information on the instrument status.
A.1.2 LAN Interface Messages
In the LAN connection, the interface messages are called low–level control messages.
These messages can be used to emulate interface messages of the GPIB bus.
Command
Long term
Effect on the instrument
&ABO
Abort
Aborts processing of the commands just received.
&DCL
Device Clear
Aborts processing of the commands just received and
sets the command processing software to a defined initial
state. Does not change the instrument setting.
&GTL
Go to Local
Transition to the "local" state (manual control). (The
instrument automatically returns to remote state when a
remote command is sent UNLESS &NREN was sent
before.)
&GTR
Go to Remote
Enables automatic transition from local state to remote
state by a subsequent remote command (after &NREN
was sent).
&GET
Group Execute Trigger
Triggers a previously active instrument function (e.g. a
sweep). The effect of the command is the same as with
that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input.
&LLO
Local Lockout
Disables transition from remote control to manual control
by means of the front panel keys.
&NREN
Not Remote Enable
Disables automatic transition from local state to remote
state by a subsequent remote command. (To re-activate
automatic transition use &GTR.)
&POL
Serial Poll
Starts a serial poll.
A.1.3 SCPI Command Structure
SCPI commands consist of a header and, in most cases, one or more parameters. The
header and the parameters are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to
32 decimal, e.g. blank). The headers may consist of several mnemonics (keywords).
Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
509
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
The commands can be either device-specific or device-independent (common commands). Common and device-specific commands differ in their syntax.
A.1.3.1
Syntax for Common Commands
Common (= device-independent) commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk (*), and possibly one or more parameters.
Table A-1: Examples of common commands
A.1.3.2
*RST
RESET
Resets the instrument.
*ESE
EVENT STATUS ENABLE
Sets the bits of the event status enable registers.
*ESR?
EVENT STATUS QUERY
Queries the contents of the event status register.
*IDN?
IDENTIFICATION QUERY
Queries the instrument identification string.
Syntax for Device-Specific Commands
Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the
instrument. For demonstration purposes only, assume the existence of the following
commands for this section:
●
DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
●
FORMat:READings:DATA <type>[,<length>]
●
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor <Boolean>
●
HCOPy:DEVice:CMAP:COLor:RGB <red>,<green>,<blue>
●
HCOPy[:IMMediate]
●
HCOPy:ITEM:ALL
●
HCOPy:ITEM:LABel <string>
●
HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>]
●
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait
●
HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe <numeric value>
●
MMEMory:COPY <file_source>,<file_destination>
●
SENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value>
●
SENSe:FREQuency:STOP <numeric value>
●
SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
●
●
●
Long and short form..............................................................................................511
Numeric Suffixes................................................................................................... 511
Optional Mnemonics............................................................................................. 511
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
510
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
Long and short form
The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form. The short form is marked by
upper case letters, the long form corresponds to the complete word. Either the short
form or the long form can be entered; other abbreviations are not permitted.
Example:
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP:DEV:COL ON.
Case-insensitivity
Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the
manual, the instrument itself is case-insensitive.
Numeric Suffixes
If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object, e.g. specific channels
or sources, the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command.
Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets (<1...4>, <n>, <i>) and are replaced
by a single value in the command. Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the
suffix 1.
Example:
Definition: HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>]
Command: HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD2
This command refers to the quadrant 2.
Different numbering in remote control
For remote control, the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selection used in manual operation. SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1. Suffix
1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified.
Some standards define a fixed numbering, starting with 0. If the numbering differs in
manual operation and remote control, it is indicated for the corresponding command.
Optional Mnemonics
Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the header or
omitted. These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the description. The
instrument must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard. Some
commands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics.
Example:
Definition: HCOPy[:IMMediate]
Command: HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
511
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes
Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the
effect of the command.
Example:
Definition:DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
Command: DISP:MAX ON refers to window 1.
In order to refer to a window other than 1, you must include the optional WINDow
parameter with the suffix for the required window.
DISP:WIND2:MAX ON refers to window 2.
A.1.3.3
SCPI Parameters
Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The
parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9,
11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank).
The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are
specified in the command description.
Allowed parameters are:
●
●
●
●
●
●
Numeric Values.....................................................................................................512
Special Numeric Values........................................................................................ 513
Boolean Parameters............................................................................................. 513
Text Parameters....................................................................................................514
Character Strings.................................................................................................. 514
Block Data.............................................................................................................514
Numeric Values
Numeric values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent.
Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down. The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters, the exponent must lie inside the value range
-32000 to 32000. The exponent is introduced by an "E" or "e". Entry of the exponent
alone is not allowed.
Example:
SENS:FREQ:STOP 1500000 = SENS:FREQ:STOP 1.5E6
Units
For physical quantities, the unit can be entered. If the unit is missing, the basic unit is
used. Allowed unit prefixes are:
●
G (giga)
●
MA (mega), MOHM, MHZ
●
K (kilo)
●
M (milli)
●
U (micro)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
512
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
●
N (nano)
Example:
SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5GHz = SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5E9
Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent. According to SCPI, this unit
is represented by the PCT string.
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:SCAL 90PCT
Special Numeric Values
The following mnemonics are special numeric values. In the response to a query, the
numeric value is provided.
●
MIN and MAX: denote the minimum and maximum value.
●
DEF: denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM. This value
conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command.
●
UP and DOWN: increases or reduces the numeric value by one step. The step
width can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which
can be set via UP and DOWN.
●
INF and NINF: INFinity and negative INFinity (NINF) represent the numeric values
9.9E37 or -9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as instrument responses.
●
NAN: Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as a
instrument response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division of
zero by zero, the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing values.
Example:
Setting command: SENSe:LIST:FREQ MAXimum
Query: SENS:LIST:FREQ?
Response: 3.5E9
Queries for special numeric values
The numeric values associated to MAXimum/MINimum/DEFault can be queried by
adding the corresponding mnemonic after the quotation mark.
Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQ? MAXimum
Returns the maximum numeric value as a result.
Boolean Parameters
Boolean parameters represent two states. The "ON" state (logically true) is represented by "ON" or a numeric value 1. The "OFF" state (logically untrue) is represented by
"OFF" or the numeric value 0. The numeric values are provided as the response for a
query.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
513
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON
Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL?
Response: 1
Text Parameters
Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for mnemonics, i.e. they can be entered
using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be separated from the
header by a white space. In the response to a query, the short form of the text is provided.
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?
Response: LAND
Character Strings
Strings must always be entered in quotation marks (' or ").
Example:
HCOP:ITEM:LABel "Test1"
HCOP:ITEM:LABel 'Test1'
Block Data
Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data.
For example, a command using a block data parameter has the following structure:
FORMat:READings:DATA #45168xxxxxxxx
The ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how many
of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow. During the transmission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are
transmitted.
#0 specifies a data block of indefinite length. The use of the indefinite format requires a
NL^END message to terminate the data block. This format is useful when the length of
the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation
of the data into blocks of definite length.
A.1.3.4
Overview of Syntax Elements
The following tables provide an overview of the syntax elements and special characters.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
514
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
Table A-2: Syntax elements
:
The colon separates the mnemonics of a command.
;
The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path.
,
The comma separates several parameters of a command.
?
The question mark forms a query.
*
The asterisk marks a common command.
''
Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it (both single and double quotation marks are
possible).
"
#
The hash symbol introduces binary, octal, hexadecimal and block data.
●
Binary: #B10110
●
Octal: #O7612
●
Hexa: #HF3A7
●
Block: #21312
A "white space" (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank) separates the header from the
parameters.
Table A-3: Special characters
|
Parameters
A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of "or". The
effect of the command differs, depending on which parameter is used.
Example:
Definition:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait
Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation
Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation
Mnemonics
A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands. These mnemonics are
indicated in the same line; they are separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these mnemonics
needs to be included in the header of the command. The effect of the command is independent of
which of the mnemonics is used.
Example:
DefinitionSENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value>
The two following commands with identical meaning can be created:
SENS:BAND:RES 1
SENS:BWID:RES 1
[]
Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted.
Example: HCOPy[:IMMediate]
HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
{}
Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times, or omitted.
Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
The following are valid commands:
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20,30,40
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
515
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
A.1.3.5
Structure of a Command Line
A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by one of
the following:
●
<New Line>
●
<New Line> with EOI
●
EOI together with the last data byte
Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ";".
Example:
MMEM:COPY "Test1","MeasurementXY";:HCOP:ITEM ALL
This command line contains two commands. The first command belongs to the MMEM
system, the second command belongs to the HCOP system. If the next command
belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon.
Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;:HCOP:IMM
This command line contains two commands. Both commands are part of the HCOP
command system, i.e. they have one level in common.
If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels
in common, the command line can be abbreviated. When abbreviating the command
line, the second command begins with the level below HCOP. The colon after the semicolon is omitted. The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;IMM
Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL
HCOP:IMM
A new command line always begins with the complete path.
A.1.3.6
Responses to Queries
A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is
formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command. According to
SCPI, the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard
IEEE 488.2.
●
The requested parameter is transmitted without a header.
Example: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?, Response: LAND
●
Maximum values, minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a
special text parameter are returned as numeric values.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAX, Response: 3.5E9
●
Numeric values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the
basic units or to the units set using the Unit command. The response 3.5E9 in
the previous example stands for 3.5 GHz.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
516
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
●
Truth values (Boolean values) are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON).
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON
Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL?
Response: 1
●
Text (character data) is returned in a short form.
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?
Response: LAND
●
Invalid numerical results
In some cases, particularly when a result consists of multiple numeric values, invalid values are returned as 9.91E37 (not a number).
A.1.4 Command Sequence and Synchronization
IEEE 488.2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands:
●
A sequential command always completes executing before the next command
starts. Commands that are processed quickly are defined as sequential commands. They are not implemented in the instrument. However, the execution time
of most of the commands is so short that they act as sequential commands, if they
are sent in separate command lines.
●
An overlapping command is still running when the next command starts. Usually,
an overlapping command takes a certain time to process its task, and thus allows
the program to execute other tasks, while it is still running. If overlapping commands have to follow a specific order, for example to avoid incorrect measurement
readings, they must be executed in sequence. This is called synchronization
between the controller and the instrument.
Several setting commands within a command line are not necessarily processed in the
order they are received. Even if they are implemented as sequential commands. To follow a particular sequence, send each command in a separate line.
As a rule, send commands and queries in different program messages.
A.1.4.1
Preventing Overlapping Execution
To prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of the commands *OPC,
*OPC? or *WAI can be used. All three commands cause a certain action only to be
carried out after the hardware has been set. The controller can be forced to wait for the
corresponding action to occur.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
517
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
Table A-4: Synchronization using *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI
Command
Action
Programming the controller
*OPC
Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR
after all previous commands have been executed.
●
●
●
*OPC?
Stops command processing until 1 is
returned. This occurs when all pending operations are completed.
Send *OPC? directly after the command
whose processing must be terminated before
other commands can be executed.
*WAI
Stops further command processing until all
commands sent before *WAI have been executed.
Send *WAI directly after the command whose
processing must be terminated before other
commands are executed.
Setting bit 0 in the ESE
Setting bit 5 in the SRE
Waiting for service request (SRQ)
Command synchronization using *WAI or *OPC? is a good choice if the overlapped
command takes only little time to process. The two synchronization commands simply
block overlapped execution of the command. Append the synchronization command to
the overlapping command, for example:
SINGle; *OPC?
For time consuming overlapped commands, you can allow the controller or the instrument to do other useful work while waiting for command execution. Use one of the following methods:
*OPC with a service request
1. Set the OPC mask bit (bit no. 0) in the ESE: *ESE 1
2. Set bit no. 5 in the SRE: *SRE 32 to enable ESB service request.
3. Send the overlapped command with *OPC .
4. Wait for a service request.
The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
*OPC? with a service request
1. Set bit no. 4 in the SRE: *SRE 16 to enable MAV service request.
2. Send the overlapped command with *OPC?.
3. Wait for a service request.
The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
Event status register (ESE)
1. Set the OPC mask bit (bit no. 0) in the ESE: *ESE 1
2. Send the overlapped command without *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
518
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
3. Poll the operation complete state periodically (with a timer) using the sequence:
*OPC; *ESR?
A return value (LSB) of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
A.1.4.2
Examples to Command Sequence and Synchronization
See the following examples to command sequences and synchronization. Some examples given illustrate possible constellations for overlapping tasks.
Example: Commands and queries in one message
The response to a query combined in a program message with commands that affect
the queried value is not predictable.
The following commands always return the specified result:
:FREQ:STAR 1GHZ;SPAN 100 :FREQ:STAR?
Result:
1000000000 (1 GHz)
Whereas the result for the following commands is not specified by SCPI:
:FREQ:STAR 1GHz;STAR?;SPAN 1000000
The result could be the value of STARt before the command was sent since the instrument might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator is received. The result could also be 1 GHz if the instrument executes commands
as they are received.
Example: Overlapping command with *OPC
The instrument implements *RST as an overlapped command. Assuming that *RST
takes longer to execute than *OPC, sending the following command sequence results
in initiating a reset and, after some time, setting the OPC bit in the ESR:
*RST; *OPC
Sending the following commands still initiates a reset:
*RST; *OPC; *CLS
However, since the operation is still pending when the instrument executes *CLS, forcing it into the "Operation Complete Command Idle" State (OCIS), *OPC is effectively
skipped. The OPC bit is not set until the instrument executes another *OPC command.
Example: Overlapped command followed by non-conflicting commands
Suppose that the instrument is switched on to provide a real time test signal that
requires some calculation time. At the same time, some settings for the configuration of
a different signal are made which do not interact with the generated signal (for example
the signal may be used later on). The signal generation and the signal configuration
are independent from each other, so there is no need to synchronize the following
overlapped commands:
SOUR:BB:3GPP:STAT ON
SOUR:BB:GSM:FORM FSK2
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
519
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
Example: Overlapped command followed by conflicting commands
Suppose that the generator is switched on to provide a real time test signal that
requires some calculation time. This signal is to be added to a waveform from the second baseband generator. In this case, the application program has to make sure that
the real signal is available in the added signal before further action is started. This
involves an appropriate synchronization technique for the first command (the following
sequence assumes an appropriate routing):
SOUR:BB:3GPP:STAT ON
The instrument waits until command has finished.
SOUR2:BB:GSM:STAT ON
Depending on the selected synchronization techniques, non-conflicting commands can
be executed while waiting until the synchronized overlapped command has finished.
Example: Polling the progress of the zeroing process
Suppose that you start the zeroing for a connected power sensor via the remote control command SENS1:ZERO. This process blocks the processing of further tasks during
execution. The query for completeness is performed with the *OPC? command. It
returns a 1 in the output buffer when the process is completed.
SENS:ZERO;*OPC?
Instead of waiting via *OPC?, you can perform alternative tasks while the zeroing is
running, as for example updating the GUI or adjusting other instruments. Synchronize
the commands by querying the progress of the zeroing process periodically via the
event status register *ESR?:
*SRE 32
Sets the service request enable. The bit is set when an event in the event status register occurs.
*ESE 1
Configures the mask of the event status register to "Operation Complete".
SENS:ZERO;*OPC
Sets the evaluation via the status byte query. It uses *OPC? as the reference.
*CLS
Clears all status registers.
Even if the instrument is busy, you can perform this procedure, since the query is executed in a subchannel.
A.1.5 Status Reporting System
The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the
instrument, and on errors which have occurred. This information is stored in the status
registers and in the error queue.
You can query both with the commands of the STATus Subsystem.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
520
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
A.1.5.1
Hierarchy of the Status Registers
The Figure A-1 shows the hierarchical structure of information in the status registers
(ascending from left to right).
Figure A-1: Graphical overview of the status registers hierarchy
OPER
RQS/MSS
ESB
MAV
QUES
2
1, 0
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Operation Status Summary Bit
Service Request Generation
Standard Event Status Summary Bit
Message Available in Output Queue
Questionable Status Summary Bit
Error- /Event-Queue
not used
Note: This legend explains the abbreviations to the Status Byte Register.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
521
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
The R&S SMA100B uses the following status registers:
●
Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable (SRE), see Chapter A.1.5.3,
"Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)", on page 524.
●
Standard Event Status, i.e. the Event status Register (ESR) and the Event Status
Enable (ESE), see Chapter A.1.5.4, "Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE)", on page 525.
●
Questionable Status and Operation Status, the (SCPI status registers, see
Chapter A.1.5.2, "Structure of a SCPI Status Register", on page 522, Chapter A.
1.5.5, "Questionable Status Register (STATus:QUEStionable)", on page 526 and
Chapter A.1.5.6, "Operation Status Register (STATus:OPERation)", on page 526.
●
Output-Queue
The output queue contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller. It
is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in
the STB and thus is represented in the overview.
●
Error- /Event-Queue
The error-/event-queue contains all errors and events that have occurred in the
past. When reading the queue, the instrument starts with the first occurred error/
event.
All status registers have the same internal structure.
SRE, ESE
The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABle part of the STB if the
STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be used as the ENABle
part of the ESR.
A.1.5.2
Structure of a SCPI Status Register
Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts. Each part has a width of 16 bits and
has different functions. The individual bits are independent of each other, i.e. each
hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts. Bit 15 (the
most significant bit) is set to zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts
can be processed by the controller as positive integers.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
522
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
Figure A-2: The status-register model
Description of the five status register parts
The five parts of a SCPI register have different properties and functions:
●
CONDition
The CONDition part is written into directly by the hardware or the sum bit of the
next lower register. Its contents reflect the current instrument status. This register
part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents are not affected
by reading.
●
PTRansition / NTRansition
The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition
part (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part.
The Positive-TRansition part acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides whether
the EVENt bit is set to 1.
–
PTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
–
PTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read as required. Its contents are not affected by
reading.
The Negative-TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether
the EVENt bit is set to 1.
–
NTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
–
NTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read as required. Its contents are not affected by
reading.
●
EVENt
The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading, it
is the "memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events passed on by the
transition filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument. This part can only be
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
523
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
read by the user. Reading the register clears it. This part is often equated with the
entire register.
●
ENABle
The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the
sum bit (see below). Each bit of the EVENt part is "ANDed" with the associated
ENABle bit (symbol '&'). The results of all logical operations of this part are passed
on to the sum bit via an "OR" function (symbol '+').
ENABle bit = 0: the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit
ENABle bit = 1: if the associated EVENt bit is "1", the sum bit is set to "1" as well.
This part can be written into and read by the user as required. Its contents are not
affected by reading.
Sum bit
The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result
is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register.
The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an event
can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy.
A.1.5.3
Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)
The STatus Byte (STB) is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers. A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status
byte.
The STB is read using the command *STB? or a serial poll.
The STatus Byte (STB) is linked to the Service Request Enable (SRE) register.
Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored. If a bit is
set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a service
request (SRQ) is generated. The SRE can be set using the command *SRE and read
using the command *SRE?.
Table A-5: Meaning of the bits used in the status byte
Bit No.
Meaning
0...1
Not used
2
Error Queue not empty
The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue. If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each
entry of the error queue generates a service request. Thus an error can be recognized and
specified in greater detail by polling the error queue. The poll provides an informative error message. This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems
involved with remote control.
3
QUEStionable status register summary bit
The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated
ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status, which can be specified in greater detail by querying the STATus:QUEStionable status register.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
524
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
Bit No.
Meaning
4
MAV bit (message available)
The bit is set if a message is available in the output queue which can be read. This bit can be
used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller.
5
ESB bit
Sum bit of the event status register. It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set
and enabled in the event status enable register. Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which
can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register.
6
MSS bit (master status summary bit)
The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits
of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE.
7
STATus:OPERation status register summary bit
The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated
ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action. The
type of action can be determined by querying the STATus:OPERation status register.
A.1.5.4
Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE)
The ESR is defined in IEEE 488.2. It can be compared with the EVENt part of a SCPI
register. The event status register can be read out using command *ESR?.
The ESE corresponds to the ENABle part of a SCPI register. If a bit is set in the ESE
and the associated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1, the ESB bit in the STB is set.
The ESE register can be set using the command *ESE and read using the command
*ESE?.
Table A-6: Meaning of the bits used in the event status register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
Operation Complete
This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been
executed.
1
Not used
2
Query Error
This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a
query, or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument
instead. The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed.
3
Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs. An error message with a number between
-300 and -399 or a positive error number, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered
into the error queue.
4
Execution Error
This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other
reasons. An error message with a number between -200 and -300, which denotes the error in
greater detail, is entered into the error queue.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
525
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
Bit No.
Meaning
5
Command Error
This bit is set if a command is received, which is undefined or syntactically incorrect. An error
message with a number between -100 and -200, which denotes the error in greater detail, is
entered into the error queue.
6
User Request
This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control.
7
Power On (supply voltage on)
This bit is set on switching on the instrument.
A.1.5.5
Questionable Status Register (STATus:QUEStionable)
This register contains information on questionable instrument states. Such states may
occur when the instrument is not operated in compliance with its specifications.
To read the register, use the query commands STAT:QUEST:COND? or
STAT:QUEST[:EVEN]?.
Table A-7: Meaning of the bits used in the questionable status register
A.1.5.6
Bit No.
Meaning
0–15
Not used
Operation Status Register (STATus:OPERation)
This condition part contains information on the actions currently being performed by
the instrument, while the event part contains information on the actions performed by
the instrument since the last readout of the register.
To read the register, use the query commands STAT:OPER:COND? or
STAT:OPER[:EVEN]?.
Table A-8: Meaning of the bits used in the operation status register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
Calibrating
The bit is set during the calibration phase.
1–2
Not used
3
Sweeping
This bit is set during a sweep in automatic or single mode.
4–15
A.1.5.7
Not used
Application of the Status Reporting System
The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status of one or several
devices in a measuring system. To do this and react appropriately, the controller must
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
526
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
receive and evaluate the information of all devices. The following standard methods
are used:
●
Service request (SRQ) initiated by the instrument
●
Serial poll of all devices in the bus system, initiated by the controller to find out
who sent an SRQ and why
●
Query of a specific instrument status by commands
●
Query of the error queue
Service Request
Under certain circumstances, the instrument can send a service request (SRQ) to the
controller. Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller, to which
the control program can react appropriately. An SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2, 4 or 5 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE. Each of these
bits combines the information of the error queue or the output buffer. To use the possibilities of the service request effectively, all bits should be set to "1" in the enable registers SRE and ESE.
Example:
Use command *OPC to generate an SRQ .
*ESE 1 - set bit 0 of ESE (Operation Complete)
*SRE 32 - set bit 5 of SRE (ESB).
After its settings have been completed, the instrument generates an SRQ.
The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each
controller program should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in
the case of malfunction. The program should react appropriately to the service request.
Serial Poll
In a serial poll, just as with command *STB, the status byte of an instrument is queried.
However, the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster.
The serial poll method is defined in IEEE 488.1 and used to be the only standard possibility for different instruments to poll the status byte. The method also works for
instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488.2.
The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the controller.
Query of an instrument status
Each part of any status register can be read using queries. There are two types of
commands:
●
The common commands *ESR?, *IDN?, *IST?, *STB? query the higher-level
registers.
●
The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers
(STATus:QUEStionable...)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
527
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Additional Basics on Remote Control
The returned value is always a decimal number that represents the bit pattern of the
queried register. This number is evaluated by the controller program.
Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on
the cause of the SRQ.
Error Queue
Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue. The entries of
the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked up in the
Error Log or queried via remote control using SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?. Each call of
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? provides one entry from the error queue. If no error messages are stored there any more, the instrument responds with 0, "No error".
The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the
entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers. Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as
well.
A.1.5.8
Reset Values of the Status Reporting System
The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status
reporting system to be reset. None of the commands, except of *RST and
SYSTem:PRESet affect the functional instrument settings. In particular, DCL does not
change the instrument settings.
Table A-9: Resetting the status reporting system
Event
Switching on supply
voltage
DCL,
SDC
Power-On-StatusClear
(Device
Clear,
Selected
Device
Clear)
*RST or
SYSTem:
PRESet
STATus:
PRESet
*CLS
Effect
0
1
Clear STB, ESR
-
Yes
-
-
-
Yes
Clear SRE, ESE
-
Yes
-
-
-
-
Clear PPE
-
Yes
-
-
-
-
Clear error queue
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
Yes
Clear output buffer
Yes
Yes
Yes
1)
1)
1)
Clear command processing
and input buffer
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
1) The first command in a command line that immediately follows a <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR> clears the output buffer.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
528
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Telnet program examples
A.1.6 General Programming Recommendations
Initial instrument status before changing settings
Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience. In contrast, the priority of remote control is the "predictability" of the instrument status. Thus,
when a command attempts to define incompatible settings, the command is ignored
and the instrument status remains unchanged, i.e. other settings are not automatically
adapted. Therefore, control programs should always define an initial instrument status
(e.g. using the *RST command) and then implement the required settings.
Command sequence
As a general rule, send commands and queries in different program messages. Otherwise, the result of the query may vary depending on which operation is performed first
(see also Preventing Overlapping Execution).
Reacting to malfunctions
The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its
own. Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service
request in case of malfunction. The program should react appropriately to the service
request.
Error queues
The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers. Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be
queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are
recorded there as well.
A.2 Telnet program examples
The following program example shows a simple TcpClient class that is intended to
explain on how to get started with programming of sockets.
The example sets up a socket communication to R&S SMA100B and opens a simple
user interface, very similar to the telnet, which allows input of commands. To enable
real automation, further development of the program is required.
TcpClient.h
#include <string>
//defines structs for socket handling
#include <netinet/in.h>
using namespace std;
typedef struct sockaddr_in SockAddrStruct;
typedef struct hostent
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
HostInfoStruct;
529
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Telnet program examples
class TcpClient
{
public:
TcpClient();
~TcpClient();
void connectToServer( string &hostname, int port );
void disconnect( );
void transmit( string &txString );
void receive( string &rxString );
string getCurrentHostName( ) const;
int
getCurrentPort( ) const;
private:
string
currentHostName;
int
currentPort;
int
currentSocketDescr;
SockAddrStruct
serverAddress;
HostInfoStruct * currentHostInfo;
bool
clientIsConnected;
int
receiveBufferSize;
};
TcpClient.cpp
#include <string>
//defines structs for socket handling
#include <netinet/in.h>
using namespace std;
typedef struct sockaddr_in SockAddrStruct;
typedef struct hostent
HostInfoStruct;
class TcpClient
{
public:
TcpClient();
~TcpClient();
void connectToServer( string &hostname, int port );
void disconnect( );
void transmit( string &txString );
void receive( string &rxString );
string getCurrentHostName( ) const;
int
getCurrentPort( ) const;
private:
string
currentHostName;
int
currentPort;
int
currentSocketDescr;
SockAddrStruct
serverAddress;
HostInfoStruct * currentHostInfo;
bool
clientIsConnected;
int
receiveBufferSize;
};
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
530
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Telnet program examples
#include <netdb.h>
#include <netinet/in.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include "TcpClient.h"
TcpClient::TcpClient()
: currentHostName( "" )
, currentPort( 0 )
, currentSocketDescr( 0 )
, serverAddress ( )
, currentHostInfo( NULL )
, clientIsConnected( false )
, receiveBufferSize( 1024 )
{
}
TcpClient::~TcpClient()
{
currentHostInfo = NULL;
}
void TcpClient::connectToServer( string &hostname, int port )
{
currentHostInfo = gethostbyname( hostname.c_str( ) );
if( currentHostInfo == NULL )
{
currentHostName
= "";
currentPort
= 0;
currentHostInfo
= NULL;
clientIsConnected = false;
printf("error connecting host\n" );
}
currentHostName = hostname;
currentPort
= port;
currentSocketDescr = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0);
if( currentSocketDescr == 0 )
{
currentHostName
= "";
currentPort
= 0;
currentHostInfo
= NULL;
clientIsConnected = false;
printf("can't create socket\n" );
}
serverAddress.sin_family = currentHostInfo->h_addrtype;
serverAddress.sin_port
= htons( currentPort );
memcpy( (char *) &serverAddress.sin_addr.s_addr,
currentHostInfo->h_addr_list[0], currentHostInfo->h_length );
if( connect( currentSocketDescr, ( struct sockaddr *) &serverAddress,
sizeof( serverAddress ) ) < 0 )
{
throw string("can't connect server\n" );
}
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
531
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Telnet program examples
clientIsConnected = true;
}
void TcpClient::disconnect( )
{
if( clientIsConnected )
{
close( currentSocketDescr );
}
currentSocketDescr = 0;
currentHostName
= "";
currentPort
= 0;
currentHostInfo
= NULL;
clientIsConnected
= false;
}
void TcpClient::transmit( string &txString )
{
if( !clientIsConnected )
{
throw string("connection must be established before any data can be sent\n");
}
char * transmitBuffer = new char[txString.length() +1];
memcpy( transmitBuffer, txString.c_str(), txString.length() );
transmitBuffer[txString.length()] = '\n'; //newline is needed!
if( send( currentSocketDescr, transmitBuffer, txString.length() + 1, 0 ) < 0 )
{
throw string("can't transmit data\n");
}
delete [] transmitBuffer;
}
void TcpClient::receive( string &rxString )
{
if( !clientIsConnected )
{
throw string("connection must be established before any data can be received\n");
}
char * receiveBuffer = new char[receiveBufferSize];
memset( receiveBuffer, 0, receiveBufferSize );
bool receiving = true;
while( receiving )
{
int receivedByteCount = recv( currentSocketDescr,
receiveBuffer, receiveBufferSize, 0 );
if( receivedByteCount < 0 )
{
throw string("error while receiving data\n");
}
rxString += string( receiveBuffer );
receiving = ( receivedByteCount == receiveBufferSize );
}
delete [] receiveBuffer;
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
532
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Telnet program examples
}
string TcpClient::getCurrentHostName( ) const
{
return currentHostName;
}
int TcpClient::getCurrentPort( ) const
{
return currentPort;
}
TelnetClient.cpp
#include <iostream>
#include "TcpClient.h"
void printUsage()
{
cout<<"usage: EthernetRawCommand <server-ip> [scpi-command]"<<endl;
}
int main( int argc, char *argv[] )
{
int errorCode
= 0; //no error
bool useSingleCommand = false;
string singleCommand
= "";
string hostname
= "";
int
= 5025;
port
string input
= "";
TcpClient client;
switch( argc )
{
case 3:
useSingleCommand = true;
singleCommand
= argv[2];
case 2:
hostname
= argv[1];
break;
default:
printUsage();
return(-1);
}
try
{
client.connectToServer( hostname, port );
bool terminate = false;
while( !terminate )
{
char buffer[1024];
if( useSingleCommand )
{
input =
singleCommand; //send string
}
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
533
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control
Telnet program examples
else
{
cin.getline( buffer, 1024 );
input = buffer;
if( input == "end" )
{
terminate = true;
}
}
if( !terminate)
{
client.transmit( input ); //send string
int qPos = input.find( "?", 0 );
//receive string only when needed
if( qPos > 0 )
{
string rcStr = "";
client.receive( rcStr );
cout << rcStr << endl;
}
}
if( useSingleCommand )
{
terminate = true;
}
}
}catch( const string errorString )
{
cout<<errorString<<endl;
}
client.disconnect( );
return errorCode;
}
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
534
R&S®SMA100B
Hardware Interfaces
GPIB-Bus Interface
B Hardware Interfaces
This section covers hardware-related topics, like pin assignment of the IEC 625/IEEE
488 interface.
The remote control interfaces are described in details in Chapter 11, "Network Operation and Remote Control", on page 244.
All other interfaces are described in Chapter 2.2, "Instrument Tour", on page 32.
For specifications, refer to the data sheet.
B.1 GPIB-Bus Interface
Option: R&S SMAB-B86.
Pin assignment
Figure B-1: Pin assignment of GPIB-bus (IEEE 488) interface
Bus lines
●
Data bus with 8 lines D0 to D7:
The transmission is bit-parallel and byte-serial in the ASCII/ISO code. D0 is the
least significant bit, D7 the most significant bit.
●
Control bus with five lines:
IFC (Interface Clear): active LOW resets the interfaces of the instruments connected to the default setting.
ATN (Attention): active LOW signals the transmission of interface messages, inactive HIGH signals the transmission of device messages.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
535
R&S®SMA100B
Hardware Interfaces
GPIB-Bus Interface
SRQ (Service Request): active LOW enables the connected device to send a service request to the controller.
REN (Remote Enable): active LOW permits switchover to remote control.
EOI (End or Identify): has two functions in connection with ATN:
●
–
ATN=HIGH active LOW marks the end of data transmission.
–
ATN=LOW active LOW triggers a parallel poll.
Handshake bus with three lines:
DAV (Data Valid): active LOW signals a valid data byte on the data bus.
NRFD (Not Ready For Data): active LOW signals that one of the connected devices is not ready for data transfer.
NDAC (Not Data Accepted): active LOW signals that the instrument connected is
accepting the data on the data bus.
Interface functions
Instruments which can be controlled via GPIB-bus interface can be equipped with different interface functions. Table B-1 lists the interface functions for the R&S SMA100B.
Table B-1: GPIB-bus interface functions
Control character
Interface function
SH1
Handshake source function (source handshake), full capability
AH1
Handshake sink function (acceptor handshake), full capability
L4
Listener function, full capability, de-addressed by MTA.
T6
Talker function, full capability, ability to respond to serial poll, deaddressed by MLA
SR1
Service request function (Service Request), full capability
PP1
Parallel poll function, full capability
RL1
Remote/Local switch over function, full capability
DC1
Reset function (Device Clear), full capability
DT1
Trigger function (Device Trigger), full capability
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
536
R&S®SMA100B
Extensions for User Files
C Extensions for User Files
The Table C-1 lists all available file extensions for user files. The currently available
files on the instrument depend on the installed options.
Table C-1: List of the automatically assigned file extensions in the instrument
Function
List type
Contents
File suffix
Instrument State
Settings
Instrument settings
*.savrcltxt
License Key
*.xml
License Key
"User Correction"
List
User-defined level correction values
*.uco
"List Mode"
List
User-defined frequency/level value pairs
*.lsw
Settings
Response file
*.txt
"Pulse Train"
Settings
Pulse train data
*.pulstrn
"NRP Settings"
Settings
R&S NRP Settings
*.nrp
SCPI command list
List
Export file containing list of SCPIs
*.iec
R&S Support Info
Archive
Support File
Automatically collected support information
*.tar.gz
Tutorials
Tutorial files
Lists containing SCPIs and explanations
*.tut
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
537
R&S®SMA100B
Glossary: List of the Often Used Terms and Abbreviations
Glossary: List of the Often Used Terms and
Abbreviations
A
Absolute file path: Complete file path
B
Base unit: This term describes a R&S SMA100B equipped with the option
R&S SMAB-B103.
C
Clock: A mandatory internal or an external reference clock signal for generating the
timing pulse in the instrument.
Complete file path: The complete file path specifies the root directory and all subdirectories that contain a file or folder.
See also Chapter 12.5.2, "Accessing Files in the Default or in a Specified Directory",
on page 314.
Computer name: An unambiguous indication of the instrument a LAN that uses a
DNS server.
The default computer name follows the syntax SMAB100A-<serial number>, e.g.
SMA100B-102030.
Synonym: Hostname
See Serial number.
D
daisy chain: A connection scheme in which instruments are connected together in
sequence, i.e. an output of the first one is the connected to an input of the second one,
etc.
DHCP: Dynamic host configuration protocol
DNS: Domain name system server
E
e.g.: For example
External mass memory: External memory, connected to the instrument via USB connector (Type A female). It can hold stored files with user data.
See also System drive and SD card
F
File transfer: The transmission of files from or to the instrument by a remote client.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
538
R&S®SMA100B
Glossary: List of the Often Used Terms and Abbreviations
The instrument supports the standard methods FTP and file sharing according to
SAMBA/SMB.
FTP: File transfer protocol
Full file path: Complete file path
G
Glossary: List of the often used terms and abbreviations
GUI: Graphical user interface
H
HDD: Hard disk drive, see System drive
Hostname: Computer name
I
i.e.: That is
L
LF: Low frequency
LSB: Least significant bit
M
MIMO: Multiple input multiple output
MSB: Most significant bit
P
PC: Personal computer
Power: A term describing the signal level of the RF signal
product page: A designation of the R&S SMA100B product page http://www.rohdeschwarz.com/product/SMA100B.html
R
Remote access: Remote operation
Remote control: The operation of the R&S SMA100B by remote control commands or
programs to perform automated tests.
The instrument is connected to a system controller via LAN/VXI-11, GPIB or USB
using VISA. The instrument is controlled directly or supported by instrument drivers.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
539
R&S®SMA100B
Glossary: List of the Often Used Terms and Abbreviations
Remote device: External device controls the R&S SMA100B in remote operation
mode, see Remote operation.
Synonyms: External controller, client device
Remote operation: Allows you to operate the R&S SMA100B from a remote device
via VNC.
Both the R&S SMA100B and the remote device are connected in a LAN.
Synonym: Remote access
Removable memory: General term describing mass memory that can be unmounted
from the instrument.
See also SD card
RF: Radio frequency
S
SAMBA/SMB: Server message protocol
SD card: Secure digital card is a type of removable memory storage, that can hold
files with user data.
Support of this memory type is optional and requires option R&S SMAB-B85.
Throughout this description, the SD card is referred as a removable memory.
See also System drive.
Serial number: Unique instrument identification, provided on the rear panel of the
instrument and required to build the Computer name.
The serial number are the last 6 digits in the string <stock no.>-<serial
number>, e.g. SMA100B-102030
Smart device: A mobile, cordless device, such as a smartphone or tablet, capable of
Internet browsing.
Synonyms: Smartphone, tablet
System drive: The system drive is a built-in internal memory that holds the operating
system, the firmware, and the stored user data.
Throughout this description, the system drive is referred as an internal memory.
See also SD card and Removable memory
T
Trigger: Internally generated or externally supplied signal which starts signal generation at a particular point in time
Trigger event: A trigger event is caused by the received trigger signal or executed
manual trigger.
U
UE: User equipment
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
540
R&S®SMA100B
Glossary: List of the Often Used Terms and Abbreviations
USBTMC: (USB test & measurement class)
A protocol built on top of USB for communication with USB devices. Using VISA
library, it supports service request, triggers, and other specific operations, similar to
GPIB.
User directory: Describes the default file storage location for user data.
Depending on the installed options, the user directory is physically located on the System drive or on the Removable memory
In the file system, user directory is always indicated as /var/user
V
VISA: Virtual instrument software architecture
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
541
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
List of Commands
:CALibration:ALL[:MEASure]?....................................................................................................................... 323
:CALibration:CSYNthesis[:MEASure]?.......................................................................................................... 324
:CALibration:DATA:FACTory:DATE?.............................................................................................................323
:CALibration:LEVel:BWIDth........................................................................................................................... 324
:CALibration:LFOutput[:MEASure]?...............................................................................................................325
:CALibration:ROSCillator[:DATA]...................................................................................................................324
:CALibration<hw>:ALL:DATE?...................................................................................................................... 325
:CALibration<hw>:ALL:TEMP?......................................................................................................................325
:CALibration<hw>:CONTinueonerror.............................................................................................................324
:CALibration<hw>:DEBug..............................................................................................................................325
:CALibration<hw>:FMOFfset[:MEASure]?..................................................................................................... 326
:CALibration<hw>:FREQuency[:MEASure]?................................................................................................. 326
:CALibration<hw>:LEVel:EXTern:DATA........................................................................................................ 326
:CALibration<hw>:LEVel:EXTern:EXEC........................................................................................................327
:CALibration<hw>:LEVel:STATe....................................................................................................................327
:CALibration<hw>:LEVel[:MEASure]?........................................................................................................... 327
:CSYNthesis:FREQuency..............................................................................................................................329
:CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP....................................................................................................................332
:CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP:MODE........................................................................................................332
:CSYNthesis:OFFSet.....................................................................................................................................330
:CSYNthesis:OFFSet:STATe.........................................................................................................................330
:CSYNthesis:OTYPe......................................................................................................................................329
:CSYNthesis:PHASe......................................................................................................................................331
:CSYNthesis:PHASe:REFerence...................................................................................................................331
:CSYNthesis:POWer......................................................................................................................................330
:CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP:MODE................................................................................................................332
:CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP[:INCRement]......................................................................................................332
:CSYNthesis:STATe...................................................................................................................................... 329
:CSYNthesis:VOLTage.................................................................................................................................. 331
:DEVice:PRESet............................................................................................................................................ 311
:DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo:CATalog?............................................................................................................. 333
:DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo?............................................................................................................................ 334
:DIAGnostic<hw>:POINt:CATalog?............................................................................................................... 334
:DIAGnostic<hw>[:MEASure]:POINt?............................................................................................................335
:DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude...................................................................................................................337
:DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency................................................................................................................. 338
:DISPlay:ANNotation[:ALL]............................................................................................................................ 338
:DISPlay:BRIGhtness.....................................................................................................................................337
:DISPlay:BUTTon:BRIGhtness...................................................................................................................... 337
:DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe............................................................................................................................... 339
:DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe:ALL........................................................................................................................340
:DISPlay:DIALog:ID?..................................................................................................................................... 338
:DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN.................................................................................................................................339
:DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff............................................................................................................................. 336
:DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe].............................................................................................................................. 336
:DISPlay:UPDate........................................................................................................................................... 337
:FORMat:BORDer..........................................................................................................................................340
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
542
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
:FORMat:SREGister...................................................................................................................................... 341
:FORMat[:DATA]............................................................................................................................................341
:HCOPy:DATA?............................................................................................................................................. 343
:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage..........................................................................................................................343
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]....................................................................................................................................344
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory........................................................................................................345
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory:CLEar.............................................................................................345
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:FILE?.............................................................................................................. 345
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe.............................................................................................................345
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO?.......................................................................................................................344
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY:STATe..........................................................................................346
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe.................................................................................... 346
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:NUMBer?............................................................................................. 346
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix................................................................................................. 346
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix:STATe.....................................................................................346
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR:STATe....................................................................................... 346
:HCOPy:IMAGe:FORMat............................................................................................................................... 343
:HCOPy:REGion............................................................................................................................................ 343
:HCOPy[:EXECute]........................................................................................................................................344
:INITiate<hw>[:POWer]:CONTinuous............................................................................................................ 355
:KBOard:LAYout............................................................................................................................................ 347
:MEMory:HFRee?.......................................................................................................................................... 322
:MMEMory:CATalog:LENGth?.......................................................................................................................317
:MMEMory:CATalog?.....................................................................................................................................317
:MMEMory:CDIRectory.................................................................................................................................. 318
:MMEMory:COPY.......................................................................................................................................... 318
:MMEMory:DATA...........................................................................................................................................319
:MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth?.................................................................................................................... 320
:MMEMory:DCATalog?..................................................................................................................................319
:MMEMory:DELete.........................................................................................................................................320
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe...............................................................................................................................320
:MMEMory:MDIRectory..................................................................................................................................320
:MMEMory:MOVE.......................................................................................................................................... 321
:MMEMory:MSIS............................................................................................................................................321
:MMEMory:RDIRectory.................................................................................................................................. 321
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe............................................................................................................................ 321
:OUTPut:ALL[:STATe]................................................................................................................................... 348
:OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:LOWer?....................................................................................................... 349
:OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:UPPer?........................................................................................................ 349
:OUTPut<hw>:AMODe.................................................................................................................................. 348
:OUTPut<hw>:FILTer:MODE.........................................................................................................................350
:OUTPut<hw>:IMPedance?...........................................................................................................................349
:OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:CLEar................................................................................................................ 350
:OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:TRIPped?.......................................................................................................... 350
:OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]..................................................................................................................................348
:OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]:PON......................................................................................................................... 348
:READ<ch>[:POWer]?................................................................................................................................... 356
:SENSe<ch>:UNIT[:POWer].......................................................................................................................... 356
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:DEFault:STATe........................................................................................ 357
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:TIMe......................................................................................................... 357
User Manual 1178.3834.02 ─ 03
543
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:LIST?...................................................................................358
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:SELect.................................................................................357
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:STATe................................................................................. 357
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:PRIority................................................................................... 358
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:STATe.....................................................................................358
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth:AUTO?............................................................................................. 358
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth[:USER]............................................................................................. 359
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio......................................................................................................... 359
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe............................................................................................. 360
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:SONCe.......................................................................................................... 360
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE............................................................................................................. 360
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FREQuency...............................................................................................................361
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:LOGGing:STATe....................................................................................................... 361
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet......................................................................................................................362
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe..........................................................................................................362
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SNUMber?.................................................................................................................362
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SOURce.................................................................................................................... 363
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:STATus[:DEVice]?.................................................................................................... 363
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SVERsion?................................................................................................................363
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE?.......................................................................................................................363
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:ZERO........................................................................................................................ 364
:SLISt:ELEMent<ch>:MAPPing..................................................................................................................... 354
:SLISt:SCAN[:STATe]....................................................................................................................................354
:SLISt:SENSor:MAP...................................................................................................................................... 355
:SLISt[:LIST]?.................................................................................................................................................354
:SOURce<hw>:PRESet................................................................................................................................. 311
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition....................................................................................................................479
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle.................................................................................................................